Home

2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual - Han-soft

1. Error correction code level Maximum correctable damage increase in used bits from ECC 000 ECC 000 none none ECC 050 2 8 33 ECC 080 5 5 50 ECC 100 12 6 100 ECC 140 25 300 In an application it is important to understand that these error correction levels result in the generation of a proportional increase in the number of bits in the message and hence increase in the size of the symbol and offer different levels of error recovery You can use the ECCLevel property to specify the error correction code level for a Data Matrix ECC 000 140 symbol It can be one of these values dmECC000 dmECC050 dmECC080 dmECC100 and dmECC140 they are defined in the pfmxDataMatrix unit corresponding to the ECC levels ECC 000 ECC 050 ECC 080 ECC 100 and ECC 140 If the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to true the highest error correction code level that can be accommodated by current symbol size will be used for creating more robust symbols Note the new level is always no lower than the level specified by the ECCLevel property and the symbol size will not be increased it may be determined depending on the length of barcode text and the error correction code level specified by the ECCLevel property see also the Symbol sizes section below In other words only the remaining capacity in current symbol size will be used to upgrade the error correction code level The property CurrentECCLevel can be used to get the factual
2. 205 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual If you use the Data property to specify the barcode data it indicates that an invalid byte value is in the barcode data also the OnInvalidDataChar event will occur The return value is the position index of the invalid byte value The index 0 denotes that the first byte value is invalid byte value B 1 7 2 DrawToSize Syntax 2 Returns the horizontal width and vertical height of a rotated barcode symbol in dots or pixels The barcode symbol is specified by the parameters of this method Syntax function DrawToSize var Width Height SymbolWidth SymbolHeight Single Barcode string ShowQuietZone Boolean Module Single Angle Single 0 Canvas TCanvas nil HDPI Integer 0 VDPI Integer 0 Integer overload virtual Description The method returns the horizontal width and vertical height of a rotated barcode symbol that is specified by parameters of this method in dots or pixels Parameters e Width Single Returns the horizontal width of the rotated barcode symbol in dots or pixels in the horizontal direction using the horizontal resolution If the quiet zones are displayed please read the ShowQuietZone parameter section below about whether or not the quiet zones will be displayed they are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the quiet zones are drawn in claSilver color in order to accentuate them ES Kee Iech Se WO ENEE SS SV S Se
3. SS HES 3 Left Za ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode component the leading quiet zone and the trailing quiet zone are included always even if the ShowQuietZone property is set to false See diagram the SpaceColor property is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 See also the LeftMargin property 192 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual e Top Single Specifies the margin between the rotated barcode symbol and the top side of the canvas in dots or pixels in the vertical direction using the vertical resolution If the quiet zones are displayed please read the ShowQuietZone property about whether or not the quiet zones will be displayed they are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the SpaceColor property is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones eme ewe HS g9 V X e S ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 es Il For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode component the leading quiet zone and the trailing quiet zone are included always even if the ShowQuietZone property is set to false See diagram the SpaceColor property is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Angle
4. Links a TBarcodeFmx2D component to a TSaveFmx2D component in order to save the barcode symbol to a picture file 179 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Syn tax property Barcode2D TBarcodeFmx2D Des Use TBa cription the Barcode2D property to specify aTBarcodeFmx2D component such as the TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode the rcodeFmx2D_PDF417 and the TBarcodeFmx2D_RSS14 Then execute the Save method will save the barcode symbol specified by the 2D barcode component to a picture file The TBarcodeFmx2D_MaxiCode component is not supported now A 2 2 ColorDepth TSaveFmx2D_Bmp Spe Syn cifies the color depth of a Bitmap image BMP file for TSaveFmx2D_Bmp component tax type Defined in the pfmxSave2D Bmp unit TBmpColorDepth bcdColors 01b bcdColors 04b bcdColors 08b bcdColors 12b bcdColors_15b bedColors 16b bcdColors 24b bcdColors 32b property Format TBmpColorDepth Des cription Color depth also known as bit depth pixel format is either the number of bits used to indicate the color of a single pixel In a Bitmap image BMP file the pixels can be defined by a varying number of bits The property specifies which pixel format will be used to save a barcode symbol to a Bitmap image BMP file It can be one of these value defined in the pfmxSave2D_Bmp unit bcdColors_01b Uses the 1 bit per pixel 1bpp format It supports 2 distinct colors for example black and white and
5. O 2 99 6 1 ASDFGHIKLO98765 30 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Properties Methods Events e Image e Create e OnChange e Barcode e Destroy e OnEncode e Data e Assign e ParseBarcodelndex e Module e Clear e OnlnvalidChar e BarColor e Draw e OnlnvalidLength e SpaceColor e Size e OnlnvalidDataChar e Opacity e DrawTo e OnlnvalidDataLength e Orientation e DrawToSize e OnDrawBarcode e Stretch e Print e LeftMargin e PrintSize e TopMargin e BarcodeWidth e BarcodeHeight ShowQuietZone LeadingQuietZone TopQuietZone TrailingQuietZone BottomQuietZone EnableUpdateDB Locked AllowEscape MinVersion MaxVersion MinSegments MaxSegments StretchOrder ECCLevel ECCLevelUpgrade StartWidth StopWidth Placement CurrentVersion Read only CurrentSegments Read only CurrentECCLevel Read only 4 1 5 TBarcodeFmx2D_DataMatrix The component is used to create the Data Matrix ECC 000 140 2D barcode symbols It s defined in the pfmxDataMatrix unit Data Matrix code is a two dimensional matrix barcode symbology consisting of black and white cells or modules arranged in either a square or rectangular pattern The information to be encoded can be text or raw data Usual data size is from a few bytes up to 2 kilobytes The length of the encoded data depends on the symbol dimension used Error correction codes are added to increase 31 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual symbol strength
6. SCH al o For the TBarcodeFmx2D_MaxiCode barcode symbology the module is single cell a regular hexagonal shape used to encode one bit data The parameter specifies the horizonal width of a module Also it s the center to center horizontal distance between adjacent modules See diagram o For the Stacked 2D barcode symbology and Linear 1D barcode symbology the module is the thinest bar or space in the barcode symbol The parameter specifies the module width See diagram eel LL If any one of the BarcodeWidth and BarcodeHeight parameters is provided and it isn t zero the value of Module parameter will be ignored the module size will be calculated based on the BarcodeWidth parameter value or the BarcodeHeight parmeter value If both BarcodeWidth and BarcodeHeight parameters are provided and aren t zero only the BarcodeWidth parameter value will be used to calculate the module size the BarcodeHeight parameter value will be ignored See also the Module property e Angle Single Specifies an angle in degrees to rotate the barcode symbol and its quiet zones if they are printed please read the ShowQuietZone parameter section above about whether or not the quiet zones will be printed anticlockwise It defaults to 0 if the parameter is not provided meaning left to right horizontal direction See diagram the SpaceColor parameter value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones
7. The escape sequence shall only be placed once at beginning of barcode text otherwise an OnlnvalidChar or OnInvalidDataChar event will occur 908 The 908 followed by an application indicator single Latin alphabetic character from the set a to z and A to Z or a two digit number represents a leading FNC1 character in Second position mode and indicates that the MicroPDF417 symbol s data output shall conform with the Code128 specification used by AIM Global the symbology identifier prefix is set to C2 or L4 Also it implies a mode latch to Mixed sub mode of Text compaction mode The escape sequence shall only be placed once at beginning of barcode text otherwise an OnlnvalidChar or OnInvalidDataChar event will occur 909 The 909 followed by an application indicator single Latin alphabetic character from the set a to z and A to Z or a two digit number represents a leading FNC1 character in Second position mode and indicates that the MicroPDF417 symbol s data output shall conform with the Code128 specification used by AIM Global the symbology identifier prefix is set to C2 or L4 Also it implies a mode latch to Numeric compaction mode The escape sequence shall only be placed once at beginning of barcode text otherwise an OninvalidChar or OnInvalidDataChar event will occur 910 It indicates that the MicroPDF417 symbol s data output shall conform with the Code128 specification standard data package the
8. You can use the property to specify a block of binary bytes data and encode it into a barcode symbol It s is of type TBytes array of bytes The OnChange event will occur when the property value is changed The OnInvalidDataChar event will occur if there is any invalid byte value in the Data property value and the OnlInvalidDataLength event will occur if the length of the Data property value is invalid The Barcode property of TBarcodeFmx2D component is of type string it is in fact a UnicodeString By default the unicode string will be converted to an UTF 8 bytes sequence the BOM isn t included then be encoded into the barcode symbol If you want to use other encoding scheme for example the ANSI UTF 16 please specify the converted bytes sequence in theData property or convert it in the OnEncode event handle For the TBarcodeFmx2D_RSS14 and the TBarcodeFmx2D_RSSLimited components if the property AutoCheckDigit is set to true the check digit doesn t need to be included in the property value otherwise the check digit can be specified by you in it 117 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual A 1 37 DefaultEncodeMode TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroPDF417 Specifies the initial compaction mode for a MicroPDF417 barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxMicroPDF417 unit TMicroPDF417 EncodeMode emText emByte emNumeric emNull property DefaultEncodeMode TMicroPDF417 EncodeMode Description The property sp
9. property LogicUnitsPerInch Word Description Specifies the number of logical units per inch for a placeable Windows Metafile Format WMF file in order to represent the image This value can be used to scale a placeable image By convention an image is considered to be recorded at 1440 logical units twips per inch Thus a value of 720 specifies that the image SHOULD be rendered at twice its normal size and a value of 2880 specifies that the image SHOULD be rendered at half its normal size Note this property must be set if this Placeable property is set to true If this Placeable property is set to false the value of this property will be ignored A 2 16 Placeable TSaveFmx2D_Wmf Specifies whether to generate a placeable Windows Metafile Format WMF file when use theTSaveFmx2D_Wmf component to save a barcode symbol Syntax property Placeable Boolean Description Original Windows Metafile Format WMF were device specific that is the graphical images they contained would only be rendered correctly if played back on the output device for which they were recorded To overcome this limitation placeable Windows Metafile Format WMF were developed The property specifies whether to generate a placeable Windows Metafile Format WMF file Note the property LogicUnitsPerlnch must be set if this property is set to true If this property is set to false the value of LogicUnitsPerlnch property will be ignored A 4 17 Q
10. For example Postal code ABC12 Country code 840 Service class 001 Secondary message DA USA Chr 29 UPS 123 ABC12 Chr 29 840 Chr 29 001 Chr 29 PA USA Chr 29 UPS 123 Chr 4 ABC12 g840 g001 gPA USA gUPS 123 t Mode 4 Indicates that the symbol encodes an unformatted message The barcode message is divided into a primary message and a secondary message internally the symbol employs enhanced error correction for the primary message and standard error correction for the secondary message All 256 of the ASCII characters can be used A maximum of about 93 alphanumeric characters or about 138 digits can be encoded in the symbol Mode 5 Indicates that the symbol encodes an unformatted message The barcode message is divided into a primary message and a secondary message internally the symbol employs enhanced error correction for both the primary and secondary messages All 256 of the ASCII characters can be used A maximum of about 77 alphanumeric characters or about 113 digits can be encoded in the symbol The mode 5 is similar to mode 4 but it employs enhanced error correction for secondary messages Mode 6 Indicates that the symbol encodes a message used to program the reader system The barcode message is divided into a primary message and a secondary message internally the symbol employs enhanced error correction for the primary message and standard error correction for the se
11. If you use the DrawTo Syntax 2 DrawToSize Syntax 2 Print Syntax 2 or PrintSize Syntax 2 method it is the UTF 8 bytes sequence converted from their Barcode parameter value the BOM isn t included if you used the OnEncode event function it s equal to its Data parameter value If you use the Data property it s equal to the value of Data property If you use DrawTo Syntax 3 DrawToSize Syntax 3 Print Syntax 3 or PrintSize Syntax 3 method it is equal to their Data parameter value WBarcodeLength Integer It s the length of WBarcodeData feild s value by byte count WdQuietZoneWidthInModules_Left Integer It s the width of leading quiet zone if it is represented in modules See also the LeadingQuietZone property WdQuietZoneWidthInModules_Top Integer It s the height of top quiet zone if it is represented in modules See also the TopQuietZone property WQuietZoneWidthInModules_Right Integer It s the width of trailing quiet zone if it is represented in modules See also the TrailingQuietZone property WdQuietZoneWidthInModules_Bottom Integer It s the height of bottom quiet zone if it is represented in modules See also the BottomQuietZone property WSymbolZoneWidthInModules Integer It s the height of entire barcode symbol before the barcode symbol is rotated in modules The quiet zones aren t included even if they are represented WSymbolZoneHeightInModules Integer It s the width of entire barcode
12. Return e f the method succeeds the return value is true e If you use the Barcode property to specify the barcode text when the length of Barcode property value is invalid or there is any invalid character in the Barcode property value the return value is false Corresponding to the OninvalidLength event or the OnInvalidChar event will occur If you use the Data property to specify the barcode text when the length of Data property value is invalid or there is any invalid byte value in the Data property value the return value is false Corresponding to the OnInvalidDataLength event or the OnInvalidDataChar event will occur B 1 6 DrawTo Draws a barcode symbol on the specified canvas There are several different overloading methods Syntax 1 Syntax 2 and Syntax 3 e Syntax 1 Draws the barcode symbol that is specified by the properties of this barcode component e Syntax 2 Draws the barcode symbol that is specified by the parameters of this method The barcode text is specified in the Barcode parameter It is of type string The Barcode parameter is in fact an UnicodeString By default the unicode string will be converted to an UTF 8 bytes sequence the BOM isn t included then be encoded into the barcode symbol If you want to use other encoding scheme for example the 191 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual ANSI UTF 16 please convert it in theOnEncode event handle or use the DrawTo Syntax 3 overloading method
13. e epMixingQuick All 256 8 bits values are encoded by switching automatically between all 4 the AllowKanjiMode property is set to true or 3 the Kanji mode will not be used if the AllowKanjiMode property is set to false encoding modes The combination of encoding modes may not be the optimal one in order to optimize encoding speed 130 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual e epSingleMode The encoding mode will be selected automatically and applied to entire symbol based on the barcode text in other words the barcode text to be encoded will be analysed and an appropriates lowest level highest encoding density encoding mode will be selected in order to minimize the symbol size and the encoding mode will not be switched in the sybmol Note the Kanji mode will not be used if the AllowKanjiMode property is set to false See also the Encoding modes section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode article A 1 59 FixedLength TBarcodeFmx2D_AztecRunnes Specifies whether the leading zeros are required in the barcode text of an Aztec Runes barcode symbol Syntax property FixedLength Boolean Description For the Aztec Runes barcode symbology if the barcode text is specified by the Barcode property it must be set to a number string If it s secified by the Data property it must be set to a number in ASCII bytes sequence The number is an integer between 0 and 255 including the boundaries The property specifies whether the lea
14. property ECCCount Word Description The property specifies the additional error correction size number of codewords for an Aztec Code symbol If the ECCLevel property is set to 0 the property specify the minimum error correction size number of codewords for an Aztec Code symbol Depending on message length the symbology will typically have to add extra error correction codewords above this minimum to fill out the symbol If the ECCLevel property isn t set to 0 the property determines the error correction level together with the ECCLevel property For example if the ECCLevel property is set to 23 and the ECCCount property is set to 3 a symbol azSize_37 which holds 120 codewords should include at least 31 120 23 3 error correction codewords leaving up 89 codewords for encoding the data message Depending on message length the symbology will typically have to add extra error correction codewords above this minimum to fill out the symbol See also the Error checking and correcting ECC section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_AztecCode article A 1 40 ECCLevel TBarcodeFmx2D_AztecCode Specifies the alternate minimum error correction percentage for an Aztec Code symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxAztecCode unit TAztecCode_ EccLevel 0 99 property ECCLevel TAztecCode_EccLevel Description The property specifies the alternate minimum error correction percentage for an Aztec Code symbol defined in the pfmxAzt
15. 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 See also the TopMargin property e Module Single Specifies the module size in dots or pixels using the horizontal resolution It defaults to 0 if the Module parameter is not provided and the value of Module property will be used o For the Matrix 2D barcode symbology excluding the TBarcodeFmx2D_MaxiCode barcode symbology the module is single cell a suqare shape used to encode one bit data The parameter specifies the module width and height See diagram SCH Bi o For the TBarcodeFmx2D_MaxiCode barcode symbology the module is single cell a regular hexagonal shape used to encode one bit data The parameter specifies the horizonal width of a module Also it s the center to center horizontal distance between adjacent modules See diagram Module oco St o For the Stacked 2D barcode symbology and Linear 1D barcode symbology the module is the thinest bar or space in the barcode symbol The parameter specifies the module width See diagram Deman UU e Angle Single Specifies an angle in degrees to rotate the barcode symbol and its quiet zones if they are displayed please read the ShowQuietZone property about whether or not the quiet zones will be displayed anticlockwise See diagram the SpaceColor property is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones Angle See also the Module property ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True 193 2D B
16. L 883 535 367 226 S M 691 419 287 177 12 SS Q 489 296 203 125 H 374 227 155 96 L 1022 619 425 262 l M 796 483 331 204 13 fee Q 580 352 241 149 H 427 259 177 109 L 1101 667 458 282 g M 871 528 362 223 k 1373 Q 621 376 258 159 H 468 283 194 120 L 1250 758 520 320 g M 991 600 412 254 d CS Q 703 426 292 180 H 530 321 220 136 L 1408 854 586 361 de Geen M 1082 656 450 277 Q 775 470 322 198 H 602 365 250 154 E 1548 938 644 397 e deeg M 1212 734 504 310 Q 876 531 364 224 H 674 408 280 173 L 1725 1046 718 442 S iit M 1346 816 560 345 Q 948 574 394 243 H 746 452 310 191 L 1903 1153 792 488 M 1500 909 624 384 19 93 98 Q 1063 644 442 272 72 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual H 813 493 338 208 L 2061 1249 858 528 S Se M 1600 970 666 410 Q 1159 702 482 297 H 919 557 382 235 2232 1352 929 572 Se Sege M 1708 1035 711 438 Q 1224 742 509 314 H 969 587 403 248 L 2409 1460 1003 618 e E M 1872 1134 779 480 Q 1368 823 565 348 H 1056 640 439 270 L 2620 1588 1091 672 i M 2059 1248 857 528 ra pales Q 1468 890 e 376 H 1108 672 461 284 L 2812 1704 1171 721 M 2188 1326 SE 561 a RE Q 1588 963 661 407 H 1228 744 511 315 L 3057 1853 1273 784 M 2395 1451 997 614 2
17. Syntax type 149 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Defined in the pfmxMicroPDF417 unit TMicroPDF417 Size mpSize 1 11 mpSize 1 14 mpSize 1 17 mpSize 1 20 mpSize 1 24 mpSize 1 28 mpSize 2 8 mpSize 2 11 mpSize 2 14 mpSize 2 17 mpSize 2 20 mpSize 2 23 mpSize 2 26 mpSize 3 6 mpSize 3 8 mpSize 3 10 mpSize 3 12 mpSize 3 15 mpSize 3 20 mpSize 3 26 mpSize 3 32 mpSize 3 38 mpSize 3 44 mpSize 4 4 mpSize 4 6 mpSize 4 8 mpSize 4 10 mpSize 4 12 mpSize 4 15 mpSize 4 20 mpSize 4 26 mpSize 4 32 mpSize 4 38 mpSize 4 44 property MinSize TMicroPDF417 Size Description The property specifies the minimum symbol size for a MicroPDF417 barcode symbol It can be one of values from mpSize_1_11 to mpSize_4 44 These values denotation the number of columns and rows in every symbol size For example the symbol size value mpSize_3_12 denotations the MicroPDF417 symbol size is 12 stacked rows by 3 columns These symbol size values are defined in the pfmxMicroPDF417 unit The smallest symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between the minimum symbol size specified by this property and the maximum symbol size that s specified by the MaxSize property The CurrentSize property can be used to get the factual symbol size Note if the property is set to a value greater than the MaxSize property s value the MaxSize property will be automatically changed to equal to this property s
18. macro block ze s 1 001287023 5 2008 12 03 05 30 00 USA check sum TI See also the Macro PDF417 section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 article B 1 9 2 GetCheckSum Syntax 2 TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 Returns the check sum of a barcode text that will be encoded into each symbol in a Macro PDF417 set Syntax type Defined in the pfmxPDF417Com unit TPDF417 Option poIgnoreShiftBeforeECI poFirst903TextAlphaLatch poFirst904TextMixedLatch po906TextAlphaLatch po907TextAlphaLatch po908TextAlphaLatch po910TextAlphaLatch po912TextAlphaLatch po914TextAlphaLatch po915TextAlphaLatch poFirstFNC1MatchAI01 poMicroPDF417Explicit901 Defined in the pfmxPDF417Com unit TPDF417 Options set of TPDF417 Option function GetCheckSum Data TBytes AllowEscape Boolean var InvalidIndex Integer Options TPDF417 Options TBytes virtual Description The method returns the check sum of a barcode text that will be encoded into a MacroPDF417 set The value will be used in the macro PDF417 control information block and the macro PDF417 control information block will be used by each symbol in the Macro 219 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual PDF417 set See also the Macro PDF417 section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 article Parameters e Data TBytes It s the original input text before division into the each symbol in the Macro PDF417 set It is of typeTBytes it is in fact a byte array You can use th
19. o boRightLeft 180 degrees o boTopBottom 270 degrees o boBottomTop 90 degrees If you want to use the 1 degrees the 359 degrees can be used instead Canvas TCanvas Specifies target canvas to drawn the barcode symbol on it The parameter is useful for obtaining the physical resolution if one of HDPI and VDPI parameters is set to 0 If both HDPI and VDPI parameters are set to 0 or both HDPI and VDPI parameters are not set to 0 the parameter will be ignored in this case you can set it to nil HDPI Integer Specifies the horizontal resolution of canvas in DPI It s the number of dots or pixels per inch It defaults to 0 if the HDPI is not provided and the physical horizontal resolution obtained from the Canvas parameter will be used If both HDPI and VDPI are set to 0 it indicates the horizontal resolution is equal to the vertical resolution VDPI Integer Specifies the vertical resolution of canvas in DPI It s the number of dots or pixels per inch It defaults to 0 if the VDPI is not provided and the physical vertical resolution obtained from the Canvas parameter will be used If both VDPI and HDPI are set to 0 it indicates the vertical resolution is equal to the horizontal resolution Return This method can return one of these values these consts are defined in the pfmxCore2D unit Verify_Invalidindex_AfterBarcode 4 If you use the Barcode property to specify the barcode text and use the OnEncode event handle to encode
20. smAll All symbol sizes including compact and full range formats See also the Formats and Symbol sizes sections in the TBarcodeFmx2D_AztecCode article A 1 125 TopMargin Specifies the top margin of the barcode symbol in pixels Syntax property TopMargin Integer Description 175 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Specifies the margin between the topmost of the barcode symbol and the top side of the Timage control that is specified by the Image property in pixels If the quiet zones are displayed please read the ShowQuietZone property about whether or not the quiet zones will be displayed they are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones Timage TQRImage i TopMargin ae h Dk E ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True It is set using the following formula e The Orientation property is set to boLeftRight It is the margin between the top of the barcode symbol and the top side of the Timage control See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones Timage TQRImage Timage TQRImage H TopMargin 22 H TopMargin 22 a y i ES e ISS ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True e The Orientation property is set to boRightLeft It is the margin between the bottom of the barcode symbol and the top side of the Tlmag
21. then be encoded into the barcode symbol If you want to use other encoding scheme for example the ANSI UTF 16 please convert it in theOnEncode event handle or use the PrintSize Syntax 3 overloading method and specify the converted bytes sequence in its Data parameter If you want to encode a block of binary bytes data please use the PrintSize Syntax 3 overloading method For the TBarcodeFmx2D_RSS14 and TBarcodeFmx2D_RSSLimited components if the property AutoCheckDigit is set to true the check digit doesn t need to be included in the parameter otherwise the check digit can be specified by you in the parameter See also the Barcode and Data properties ShowQuietZone Boolean Specifies whether to include the leading quiet zone trailing quiet zone top quiet zone and bottom quiet zone in the barcode symbol If the parameter value is set to true these quiet zones are included Otherwise they don t be included You can use the LeadingQuietZone TrailingQuietZone TopQuietZone and BottomQuietZone properties to specify the size of these quiet zones in modules See diagram the quiet zones are printed in claSilver color in order to accentuate them E ToPQuietZone amp t E e e 3 y Ou lt ISS Ee 8 H S BottomQuietZone ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode component leading quiet zone and trailing quiet zone will be included always even if the ShowQ
22. 3 denotes that the prefix codes for example the BOM is invalid the value Verify_InvalidIndex_AfterBarcode 4 denotes that the suffix codes is invalid These consts are defined in the pfmxCore2D unit e BarcodeChar Char The first invalid character in the barcode text that is specified by the Barcode property The character is a WideChar 262 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual e LinearFlag Bolean The parameter is reserved for future use Note e If the Locked property is set to false the event occurs when any component property is changed to cause the barcode is redrew or when the Draw Clear Size DrawTo Syntax 1 DrawToSize Syntax 1 Print Syntax 1 or PrintSize Syntax 1 method is called Even if the Image property isn t specified e If the Locked property is set to true the event occurs when the Locked property is set to false to cause the barcode is redrew or the Draw Clear Size DrawTo Syntax 1 DrawToSize Syntax 1 Print Syntax 1 or PrintSize Syntax 1 method is called Even if the Image property isn t specified C 1 5 OnlnvalidDataChar The event occurs if there is any invalid byte value in the Data property value Syntax type Defined in the pfmxBarcode2D unit TOnInvalidChar procedure Sender TObject Index Integer DataChar Byte LinearFlag Boolean of object property OnInvalidChar TOnInvalidChar Parameters e Sender TObject It is the object whose event handler is c
23. 905 will be automatically selected instead of the f to insert to the symbol depending on the barcode text If it s placed at beginning of barcode text it represents a FNC1 character in First position mode otherwise it represents a data field separator See also the Character set section above Note When the poFirstFNC1MatchAl01 is included in the value of Options property if the f followed by a SSC 14 number including Application Identifier 01 and 13 digit data the checkdigit isn t required is placed at beginnig of barcode the 905 will be selected to encode the FNC1 character in order to reduce the symbol size the leading Application Identifier 01 is not encoded in the SSC 14 number s lt Index gt lt File_ID gt lt File_Name gt lt Amount gt lt Time_Stamp gt lt Sender gt lt Address gt lt File_Size gt lt Checksum gt Insert additional control information to barcode text in order to create the Marco PDF417 symbol See also the Macro PDF417 section below Insert a comma to File name Sender or Address field of the Marco PDF417 control information It shall only be placed in these fields of Marco PDF 417 control information See also the Macro PDF417 section below t Marco PDF417 terminator If the segment count is unused in the control information of a Marco PDF417 symbols set this terminator is required in last symbol within the set of the Marco PDF417 symbols Otherwise it s optional See
24. BarcodeHeight property Return e f the method succeeds the return value is true e If you use the Barcode property to specify the barcode text when the length of Barcode property value is invalid or there is any invalid character in the Barcode property value the return value is false Corresponding to the OninvalidLength event or the OnInvalidChar event will occur If you use the Data property to specify the barcode text when the length of Data property value is invalid or there is any invalid byte value in the Data property value the return value is false Corresponding to the OnInvalidDataLength event or the OnInvalidDataChar event will occur B 2 TSaveFmx2D B 2 1 Assign Copies a TSaveFmx2D image saving component from another TSaveFmx2D image saving component Syntax procedure Assign Source TPresistent override 255 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Description If the Source parameter is an object created from a subclass of TSaveFmx2D component class and the class is same to current image saving component class Assign copies all property values and event handles from the source image saving component to current one If Source is any other type of object an ESaveFmx2DError exception occurs Parameters e Source TPersistent Specifies the source object B 2 2 Create Creates and initializes a image saving component Syntax constructor Create Owner TComponent override Description
25. Description Set the property to true before making multiple changes to the barcode component When all changes are complete change the property to false so that the changes can be reflected on screen It prevents excessive redraws and speed processing time when change the barcode component Set the property to true is similar to BeginUpdate method of an other Delphi C Builder control such as a ListBox Memo TreeList ListView and set the property to false is similar to its EndUpdate method A 1 67 MaxColumns TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 Specifies the maximum number of columns for a PDF417 barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxPDF417Custom unit TPDF417 Columns 1 30 property MaxColumns TPDF417 Columns Description The property specifies the maximum number of columns for a PDF417 barcode symbol It can be one of values from 1 to 30 they are defined in the pfmxPDF417Custom unit 136 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual The maximum number of columns together with the maximum number of stacked rows specified by the MaxRows property indicates the maximum symbol size for aPDF417 barcode symbol And the minimum number of columns specified by the MinColumns property together with the minimum number of stacked rows specified by the MinRows property indicates the minimum symbol size for the PDF417 barcode symbol Based on the stretch order specified by the StretchOrder property the smallest symbol size t
26. Events OnChange OnEncode ParseBarcodelndex OnInvalidChar OnInvalidLength OnInvalidDataChar OnInvalidDataLength OnDrawBarcode 70 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual The component is used to create the QR Code barcode symbols It s defined in the pfmxQRCode unit A QR Code is a two dimensional matrix symbology readable by QR scanners mobile phones with a camera and ach smartphones The code consists of black modules arranged in a square pattern on white background It has position detection me patterns on three of its four corners The information encoded can be text URL or other data QR Code Common in Japan where it was created by Toyota subsidiary Denso Wave in 1994 the QR Code is one of the most popular types of two dimensional barcodes Although initially used for tracking parts in vehicle manufacturing QR Codes are now used in a much broader context including both commercial tracking applications and convenience oriented applications aimed at mobile phone users QR is the abbreviation for Quick Response as the creator intended the code to allow its contents to be decoded at high speed Error checking and correcting ECC There are four user selectable levels of error correction as shown in following table offering the capability of recovery from the amounts of damage in the table Values of ECCLevel property ECC levels Recevory capacities approx elLowest L 7 elMedium M 15 elQual
27. It s a text string with an implied reset to ECI 000002 The ECI escape sequences may be used in order to set a different ECI within the field Note the field is optional Address The address It s a text string with an implied reset to ECI 000002 The ECI escape sequences may be used in order to set a different ECI within the field Note the field is optional e File_Size The file size It s an integer in decimal string format and indicates the size in bytes of the entire source file Note the field is optional e Checksum The checksum It s an integer value of the 16 bit 2 bytes CRC checksum using the CCITT 16 polynomial computed over the entire source file in decimal string format You can use the GetCheckSum method to calculate the checksum for a source file Note the field is optional The ECI escape sequences 900 901 902 and 924 can be used in the File Name Sender and Address fields If you want place the comma in these fields please use the instead An empty string indicates an unused optional field the subsequent comma can be omitted if all fields of succeeding are unused otherwise the comma is required All unused fields at the end can be omitted The control information may only be placed once in the barcode text Also it shall be placed at end of the barcode text The OntInvalidChar or OnInvalidDataChar event will occur if the control information be placed more than once or it isn t placed at end of t
28. The alpha channel of the BarColor parameter is supported See also the BarColor property SpaceColor TAlphaColor In general the Inversed property is set to false In this case the parameters specifies the color for all spaces Stacked 2D barcode symbology and Linear 1D barcode symbology or light modules Matrix 2D barcode symbology in the barcode symbol Also if the ShowQuietZone parameter value is set to true the leading quiet zone trailing quiet zone top quiet zone and bottom quiet zone are printed using the color If the Inversed property is set to true it specifies the color for all bars Stacked 2D barcode symbology and Linear 1D barcode symbology or dark modules Matrix 2D barcode symbology in the barcode symbol The alpha channel of the SpaceColor parameter is supported 228 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual See also the SpaceColor property e ShowQuietZone Boolean Specifies whether to print the leading quiet zone trailing quiet zone top quiet zone and bottom quiet zone If the parameter value is set to true these quiet zones are printed Otherwise they don t be printed You can use the LeadingQuietZone TrailingQuietZone TopQuietZone and BottomQuietZone properties to specify the size of these quiet zones in modules See diagram the SpaceColor parameter is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones sl ShowQuietZone False TopQuietZone J P i IEAI SO MEREN
29. The result string can be directly used as the check sum in the structured append block For example var full barcode check sum structuredappend block string invalid_index Integer begin full Barcode i Tapia d Check eum GetCheckSum full barcode False invalid index if invalid index lt gt 1 then exit structuredappend_block ze s 1 001287023 5 2008 12 03 05 30 00 USA check emm I See also the Sturctured append section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroPDF417 article B 1 8 2 GetCheckSum Syntax 2 TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroPDF417 Returns the check sum of a barcode text that will be encoded into a series of structured append symbols 215 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Syntax type Defined in the pfmxPDF417Com unit TPDF417 Option poIgnoreShiftBeforeECI poFirst903TextAlphaLatch poFirst904TextMixedLatch po906TextAlphaLatch po907TextAlphaLatch po908TextAlphaLatch po910TextAlphaLatch po912TextAlphaLatch po914TextAlphaLatch po915TextAlphaLatch poFirstFNC1MatchAI01 poMicroPDF417Explicit901 Defined in the pfmxPDF417Com unit TPDF417 Options set of TPDF417 Option Defined in the pfmxMicroPDF417 unit TMicroPDF417 Options TPDF417 Options function GetCheckSum Data TBytes AllowEscape Boolean var InvalidIndex Integer Options TMicroPDF417 Options TBytes virtual Description The method returns the check sum of a barcode text that will be encoded i
30. and the physical vertical resolution obtained from the Canvas parameter will be used If both VDPI and HDPI are set to 0 it indicates the vertical resolution is equal to the horizontal resolution Return This method can return one of these values these consts are defined in the pfmxCore2D unit Verify_Invalidindex_AfterBarcode 4 If you use use the OnEncode event handle to encode the barcode text to a bytes sequence in your own encoding scheme the Verify_Invalidindex_AfterBarcode 4 indicats that an invalid byte value is in the suffix codes of the bytes sequence Verify_Invalidindex_BeforeBarcode 3 If you use the OnEncode event handle to encode the barcode text to a bytes sequence in your own encoding scheme the Verify_InvalidiIndex_BeforeBarcode 3 indicats that an invalid byte value is in the prefix codes of the bytes sequence for example the BOM Verify_InvalidLength 2 It indicates that the length of Barcode parameter value is invalid Verify_OK 1 It indicates the method succeeds Verify_Invalidindex_Base 0 and greater than 0 It indicates that an invalid character is in the barcode text the return value is the position index of the invalid charactere For 32 bit Windows 64 bit Windows and Mac OSX platform the index 1 denotes that the first character is invalid character For iOS and Android platform the index 0 denotes that the first character is invalid character 209 2D Barcode FMX Compon
31. even if they are partially damaged they can still be read Data Matrix was invented by International Data Matrix Inc ID Matrix which was merged into RVSI Acuity CiMatrix who was acquired by Siemens AG in October 2005 and Microscan Systems in September 2008 There are 2 types of Data Matrix symbology namely ECC 000 140 and ECC 200 The component can be used to generate the ECC 000 140 symbols It is the conventional coding for error correction that was used in the initial installations of Data Matrix systems It offers five levels of error correction using convolutional code error correction ECC 000 140 symbols have P ECC 000 240 an odd number of rows and an odd number of columns Symbols are square with sizes from 9 9 to 49 49 modules not including quiet zones These symbols can be recognized by the upper right corner module being dark ECC 000 140 should only be used in closed applications where a single party controls both the production and reading of the symbols and is responsible for overall system performance If you want to generate the Data Matrix ECC 200 symbols please use another componentTBarcodeFmx2D_DataMatrixECC200 in this components package Error correction code ECC Data Matrix ECC 000 140 symbols offer five levels of error correction referred to as ECC 000 ECC 050 ECC 080 ECC 100 and ECC 140 respectively in increasing order of recovery capacity They are listed in following table
32. o o o o o o If it s placed in the barcode text but not at beginning of the barcode text it represents an FNC1 character as field separator and implies a mode latch to Mixed sub mode of Text compaction mode 905 If the 905 followed by 13 required digits is placed at beginning of barcode text it represents a leading FNC1 character in First position mode and encodes a SCC 14 number together with subsequent 13 digits the Application Identifier 01 is implied and the last checkdigit isn t required It indicates that the PDF417 symbol s data output shall conform with the Code128 specification UCC EAN 128 emulation the symbology identifier prefix is set to C1 or L3 Also it implies a mode latch to Numeric compaction mode If the it is placed in the barcode text but not at beginning of the barcode text it represents an FNC1 character as field separator and implies a mode latch to Numeric compaction mode 906 It represents a leading FNC1 character in First position mode and implies a mode latch to Mixed sub mode of Text compaction mode It not only indicates that the PDF417 symbol s data output shall conform with the Code128 specification UCC EAN 128 emulation the symbology identifier prefix is set to C1 or L3 but also indicates that a linear symbol printed below the symbol is linked to the data of the symbol The escape sequence shall only be placed once at beginning of barcode text otherwise an OnlnvalidChar or
33. property article Return If the method succeeds it returns the check sum value it s a 16 bit word value in decimal format encoded as ASCII bytes sequence in the TBytes array And the Invalidindex parameter returns the Verify_OK 1 If the method fails the InvalidIndex parameter returns a position index of first invalid byte in the Data parameter it s an integer value greater than or equal to zero See also the Invalidindex parameter section above For example the check sum is 1059 the return value is the byte array TBytes S317 1 S30f 0 354 5 39 79 The result array can be directly used as the check sum in the Macro PDF417 control information block var full _barcode_data check_sum macro_block TBytes invalid_index Integer macro block len check _sum_len Integer begin full barcode data i pusses Check sum GetCheckSum full barcode data False invalid index if invalid index lt gt 1 then exit SetLength macro block 15 macro block 0 zs 5c macro _block 1 ze 73 s macro block 2 5b macro _block 3 ze 35 5S macro block 4 2c Index 5 macro_block 5 ze 30 0 220 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual macro block 6 32 2 macro_block 7 39 9 macro _block 8 2c Eile ID 029 macro block 9 zs 2c File Name macro block 10 2c Amount macro block 11 2c Time S
34. rows by 29 columns These symbol size values are defined in the pfmxDataMatrix unit The property is read only See also the Symbol sizes section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_DataMatrix article 113 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual A 1 29 CurrentSize TBarcodeFmx2D_DataMatrixECC200 Contains the factual symbol size of a Data Matrix ECC 200 barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxDataMatrixEcc200 unit TDataMatrixEcc200 Size dmSize 10 10 dmSize 12 12 dmSize 14 14 dmSize 16 16 dmSize 18 18 dmSize 20 20 dmSize 22 22 dmSize 24 24 dmSize 26 26 dmSize 32 32 dmSize 36 36 dmSize 40 40 dmSize 44 44 dmSize 48 48 dmSize 52 52 dmSize 64 64 dmSize 72 72 dmSize 80 80 dmSize 88 88 dmSize 96 96 dmSize 104 104 dmSize 120 120 dmSize 132 132 dmSize 144 144 dmSize 8 18 dmSize 8 32 dmSize 12 26 dmSize 12 36 dmSize 16 36 dmSize 16 48 property CurrentSize TDataMatrixEcc200 Size Description The smallest symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between the minimum symbol size specified by the MinSize property and the maximum symbol size specified by the MaxSize property Read the property to retrieve the factual symbol size of a Data Matrix ECC 200 barcode symbol The property can be one of values from dmSize_10_10 to dmSize_16_48 denotations the factual number of rows and columns in current symbol For example the symbol size value dmSize_8_18 denotations
35. used to calculate the module size the BarcodeHeight parameter value will be ignored See also the BarcodeWidth property BarcodeHeight Single Specifies the barcode symbol height the distance between the top and bottom of the barcode symbol in millimeters If the quiet zones are printed please read the ShowQuietZone property about whether or not the quiet zones will be printed the top quiet zone and the bottom quiet zone are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the SpaceColor property is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones ShowQuietZone False Ange 0 30 90 BarcodeHeight TERI EN ISS amp ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Note if the parameter is provided and it isn t zero and the BarcodeWidth parameter isn t provided or it s zero the value of Module parameter will be ignored the module size will be calculated based on the BarcodeHeight parameter value If both BarcodeHeight and BarcodeWidth parameters aren t provided or they are all zero the barcode symbol height will be determined by the Module parameter value If both BarcodeWidth and BarcodeHeight parameters are provided and aren t zero only the BarcodeWidth parameter value will be used to calculate the module size the BarcodeHeight parameter value will be ignored See also the BarcodeHeight property HDPI Integer Specifies the horizontal resolution of printer in DPI dots per inch It defaults to 0 if the HDPI i
36. value of the negative BarcodeWidth property value i e the right margin will be subtracted from the width of Timage control that s specified by the Image property then the result will be returned When the Orientation property is set to boTopBottom or boBottomTop the TopMargin property value and the absolute value of the negative BarcodeWidth property value i e the bottom margin will be subtracted from the height of Timage control that s specified by the Image property then the result will be returned See also the BarcodeWidth property e SymbolHeight Single Returns the distance between the top and bottom of the rotated barcode symbol that s displyed in the Tlmage control specified in the Image property in pixels See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones SymbolHeight SymbolHeight ISS Orientation boLeftRight Orientation boTopBottom If the quiet zones are displyed please read the ShowQuietZone property about whether or not the quiet zones will be displyed 254 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual the top quiet zone and the bottom quiet zone are included See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones SymbolHeight symbolHeight DEE Orientation boLeftRight Orientation boTopBottom Sat The value of SymbolHeight is calculated using fo
37. 12 ABCDEFG1234567 The InitialMode property should be set to emAuto or emMode_ Extended if an extended data length mode block is placed in the barcode text otherwise the OnInvalidChar or OnInvalidDataChar event will occur Conversely the extended data length mode block is required if the InitialMode property is set to emMode_ Extended otherwise the OnlnvalidChar or OnInvalidDataChar event will occur too The extended data length mode block shouldn t be placed together with message append block in the barcode text otherwise the OnInvalidChar or OnInvalidDataChar event will occur See also the Message append structured append section below If a symbol is encoded in extended data length mode the number of stacked rows will be changed to 16 automatically Note if only two symbols are to be logically linked in extended data length mode they may be arranged horizontally or vertically adjacent to each other If more symbols are to be logically linked they shall be arranged in a single vertical stack The maximum number of symbols should be specified for the application Message append structured append The message append is a method similar to the extended data length mode to encode data beyond the capacity of a single Code 16K symbol Up to 9 Code 16K symbols may be appended in a structured format to convey more data It should only be used in closed systems If a symbol is part of a message append this shall be indicated by a message appen
38. 13 modules high You can use the SeparatorRowHeight property to specify the height of separator pattern between the two rows in modules And use the TotalHeight property to specify the total height for an RSS 14 Stacked symbol in modules the height of separator pattern is included in the total height RSS 14 Stacked Omnidirectional Normally Each row is 33 modules high minimum with a 3 modules high separator pattern between the two rows So the overall size of this format is 50 modules wide by 69 modules high minimum You can use the SeparatorRowHeight property to specify the height of separator pattern between the two rows in modules And use the TotalHeight property to specify the total height for an RSS 14 Stacked Omnidirectional symbol in modules the height of separator pattern is included in the total height If both the Link2D and Show2DSeparator properties are set to Ture a contiguous separator pattern is represented and its minimum height is 1 module the pattern height can be specified by the SeparatorRowHeight property In this case the height of the RSS 14 symbol will be reached to increase the contiguous separator pattern height Quiet zones No quiet zones is required outside the bounds of the RSS 14 symbol The first and last elements may appear wider than one module without affecting the symbol if the adjacent background area is the same color So the minimum values of LeadingQuietZone TrailingQuietZone TopQuietZone and Bottom
39. 80 80 912 682 453 dmSize_88_88 88 88 1152 862 573 dmSize_96_96 96 96 1392 1042 693 dmSize_104_104 104 104 1632 1222 813 dmSize_120_120 120 120 2100 1573 1047 dmSize_132_132 132 132 2608 1954 1301 dmSize_144_ 144 144 144 3116 2335 1555 e The sizes of rectangle symbols excluding quiet zones and their maximum data capacities are listed in following table Symbol size values Symbol sizes Maximum data capacities modules Numeric Alphanumeric Byte dmSize_8_18 8 18 10 6 3 dmSize_8_32 8 32 20 13 8 dmSize_12_26 12 26 32 22 14 dmSize_12_36 12 36 44 31 20 dmSize_16_36 16 36 64 46 30 dmSize_16_48 16 48 98 72 47 You can use the MinSize and the MaxSize properties to specifiy the minimum and maximum sizes for a Data Matrix ECC 200 symbol They can be one of values from dmSize_10_10 to dmSize_16_48 they are defined in the pfmxDataMatrixEcc200 unit corresponding to every symbol size shown above The smallest symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between minimum and maximum symbol sizes If the barcode text does not fill the maximum data capacity of the Data Matrix ECC 200 symbol remaining data capacity of the symbol will be filled by using PAD characters If the barcode text is so long that it cannot be encoded using the maximum symbol size specified by the MaxSize property an OnlnvalidLength or OnInvalidDataLength event will occur The CurrentSize property can be used to get the factual
40. Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 wapimioqui s For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode component the leading quiet zone and the trailing quiet zone are included always even if the ShowQuietZone parameter is set to false See diagram the quiet zones are printed in claSilver color in order to accentuate them wes v e gt 3 SymbolWidth g i ul ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 See also the BarcodeWidth property SymbolHeight Single Returns the distance between the top and bottom of the rotated barcode symbol in millimeter The value is calculated based on the module size You can use one of the Module BarcodeWidth and BarcodeHeight parameters to specify the module size 248 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual If the quiet zones are printed please read the ShowQuietZone parameter section below about whether or not the quiet zones will be printed they are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the quiet zones are printed in claSilver color in order to accentuate them SymbolHeight SymbolHeight ShowQuietZone False Angle 0 30 90 SymbolHeight SymbolHeight Gah ISS amp ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 See also the BarcodeHeight property e Data TBytes Specifies the barcode text It is of type TBytes it is in fact a byte array You can specify a block of binary bytes data to the par
41. Application Identifier 01 is not encoded in the SSC 14 number Otherwise the function codeword 905 will be selected to encode the FNC1 character poMicroPDF417Explicit901 In the specification of MicroPDF417 the initial compaction mode in effect at the start of each symbol shall always be Byte compaction mode but some readers use the other compaction mode e g Alpha sub mode of Text compaction as the initial compaction mode The value indicates to explicitly insert a mode latch to Byte compaction mode into beginning of symbol data in order to work with these reader See also the Character set Escape sequences and Extended Channel Interpretation ECI sections in the TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroPDF417 article A 1 100 Options TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 The Options property is an advanced feature which allows low level control over data encoding for a PDF417 symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxPDF417Com unit TPDF417 Option polIgnoreShiftBeforeECI poFirst903TextAlphaLatch poFirst904TextMixedLatch po906TextAlphaLatch po907TextAlphaLatch po908TextAlphaLatch po910TextAlphaLatch po912TextAlphaLatch po914TextAlphaLatch po915TextAlphaLatch poFirstFNC1MatchAI01 poMicroPDF417Explicit901 Defined in the pfmxPDF417Com unit TPDF417 Options set of TPDF417 Option property Options TPDF417 Options Description For some reader the encoding algorithm and meanings of some function codewords don t conform with t
42. Call Create to instantiate a image saving object at runtime Image saving components added at design time are created automatically Parameters e Owner TComponent It is the component that is responsible for freeing the image saving component instance Typically this is the form It becomes the value of the Owner property B 2 3 Destroy Disposes of the instance of the image saving object Syntax destructor Destroy override Description Destroy is the destructor for an image saving object Do not call the destructor directly in an application instead call Free The Free verifies that the image saving object is not nil before it calls Destroy B 2 4 Save Save current barcode symbol in the barcode component to an image file The barcode component is specified by the Barcode2D property Syntax function Save FilePath string Integer virtual Description 256 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual The method saves the barcode symbol to an image file The barcode symbol is defined in the barcode component that s specified by the Barcode2D property Also the Timage component isn t required in the Image property of the barcode component An OnSave event will occur before save the barcode symbol to picture file And an OnSaved event will occur after the barcode symbol is saved Parameters e FilePath String Specifies the file path and name for the image file Return This method can return one of these v
43. E i BottomQuietZone ShowQuietZone True For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode component leading quiet zone and trailing quiet zone will be printed always even if the ShowQuietZone parameter value is set to false See diagram the SpaceColor parameter is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones auonand upea auoz nd uges ShowQuietZone False TopQuietZone E t z5 2 H F i i 8 4 z BottomQuietZone ShowQuietZone True In general the Inversed property is set to false In this case these quiet zones are printed using the color specified by SpaceColor parameter If the Inversed property is set to true these quiet zones are printed using the color specified by BarColor parameter See also the ShowQuietZone property e Left Single Specifies the margin between the rotated barcode symbol and the left side of the paper in millimeters in the horizontal direction If the quiet zones are printed please read the ShowQuietZone parameter about whether or not the quiet zones will be printed they are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the SpaceColor parameter is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones fe ee ShowQuietZone False Angle 0 30 90 Tes Kei e IS ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode component the leading quiet zone and the trailing quiet zone are included always even if the ShowQuietZon
44. InitialMode property isn t set to emAuto the value of this property is equal to the value of InitialMode property The property is read only See also the Initial modes section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16k article A 1 23 CurrentMode TBarcodeFmx2D_MaxiCode 110 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Contains the factual mode of a MaxiCode barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxMaxiCode unit TMaxiCode Mode 2 6 property CurrentMode TMaxiCode Mode Description Read the property to retrieve the factual mode of a MaxiCode barcode symbol It can be one of values from 2 to 6 denotations the factual mode of a MaxiCode 2D barcode symbol They are defined in the pfmxMaxiCode unit If the AutoMode property is set to Ture the mode of MaxiCode symbol will be selected automatically depending on the barcode text and the value of Mode property You can read this property to get the factual mode If the AutoMode property is set to false the value of this property is equal to the value of Mode property The property is read only See also the Modes section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_MaxiCode article A 1 24 CurrentRows TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K Contains the factual number of stacked rows of a Code 16K barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxCodel6K unit TCodel6K Rows 2 16 property CurrentRows TCodel6K Rows Description The smallest number of stacked rows that accommodates the
45. LinearFlag Bolean The parameter is reserved for future use Note In general it occurs when the length of barcode text exceeds the maximum length limit For the TBarcodeFmx2D_RSSLimited TBarcodeFmx2D_RSS14 and TBarcodeFmx2D_AztecRunes components if the Data property value is an empty array the event occurs too If the Locked property is set to false the event occurs when any component property is changed to cause the barcode is redrew or when the Draw Clear Size DrawTo Syntax 1 DrawToSize Syntax 1 Print Syntax 1 or PrintSize Syntax 1 method is called Even if the Image property isn t specified If the Locked property is set to true the event occurs when the Locked property is set to false to cause the barcode is redrew or the Draw Clear Size DrawTo Syntax 1 DrawToSize Syntax 1 Print Syntax 1 or PrintSize Syntax 1 method is called Even if the Image property isn t specified C 1 7 OnInvalidLength Occurs when the length of the Barcode property value is invalid Syntax type Defined in the pfmxBarcode2D unit TOnInvalidLength procedure Sender TObject Barcode string LinearFlag Boolean of object property OnInvalidLength TOnInvalidLength Parameters Sender TObject It is the object whose event handler is called Barcode String The invalid value of the Barcode property LinearFlag Bolean The parameter is reserved for future use Note In general it occurs when the length
46. MinVersion property s value See also the Symbol sizes section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_CompactMatrix article A 1 78 MaxVersion TBarcodeFmx2D_GridMatrix Specifies the maximum symbol version symbol size for a Grid Matrix barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxGridMatrix unit TGridMatrix Version 1 13 property MaxVersion TGridMatrix Version Description There are thirteen sizes of Grid Matrix symbol referred to as version 1 to 13 in increasing order of size and data capacity The property specifies the maximum symbol version symbol size for a Grid Matrix barcode symbol It can be one of values from 1 to 13 They are defined in the pfmxGridMatrix unit The smallest symbol version symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between the minimum symbol version symbol size specified by the MinVersion property and the maximum symbol version symbol size specified by this property If the barcode text is so long that it cannot be encoded using the maximum symbol version symbol size specified by this property an OnlInvalidLength the barcode text is specified in the Barcode property or an OnInvalidDataLength the barcode text is specified in the Data property event will occur The CurrentVersion property can be used to get the factual symbol version symbol size Note if the property is set to a value less than the MinVersion property s value the MinVersion property
47. Module property value You can get the width value by using the Size method e When the property Stretch is set to true o If the property value is equal to zero When the Orientation property is set to boLeftRight or boRightLeft the LeftMargin property value will be subtracted from the width of the Timage control that s specified by the Image property then the result will be used as the final barcode width the barcode symbol will be reduced stretched to fit this final width value See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones Timage TQRImage Timage TQRImage LeftMargin BarcodeWidth 0 LeftMargin BarcodeWidth 0 le ec ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True When the Orientation property is set to boTopBottom or boBottomTop the TopMargin property value will be subtracted from the height of the Tlmage control that s specified by the Image property then the result will be used as the final barcode width the barcode symbol will be reduced stretched to fit this final width value See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones Timage TQRImage _Timage TQRImage TopMargin TopMargin APIMPpomeg uppimapozseg De De ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True o If the property value is greater than zero The barcode symbol will be reduced stretched to fit this width v
48. OnInvalidDataChar event will occur 907 It represents a leading FNC1 character in First position mode and implies a mode latch to Numeric compaction mode It not only indicates that the PDF417 symbol s data output shall conform with the Code128 specification UCC EAN 128 emulation the symbology identifier prefix is set to C1 or L3 but also indicates that a linear symbol printed below the symbol is linked to the data of the symbol The escape sequence shall only be placed once at beginning of barcode text otherwise an OnlnvalidChar or OnInvalidDataChar event will occur 908 The 908 followed by an application indicator single Latin alphabetic character from the set a to z and A to Z or a two digit number represents a leading FNC1 character in Second position mode and indicates that the PDF417 symbol s data output shall conform with the Code128 specification used by AIM Global the symbology identifier prefix is set to C2 or L4 Also it implies a mode latch to Mixed sub mode of Text compaction mode The escape sequence shall only be placed once at beginning of barcode text otherwise an OnlinvalidChar or OnInvalidDataChar event will occur 909 The 909 followed by an application indicator single Latin alphabetic character from the set a to z and A to Z or a two digit number represents a leading FNC1 character in Second position mode and indicates that the PDF417 symbol s data output shall conform with th
49. Returns the distance between the leading and trailing of the rotated barcode symbol in dots or pixels using the horizontal resolution If the quiet zones are displayed please read the ShowQuietZone parameter section below about whether or not the quiet zones will be displayed they are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the quiet zones are drawn in claSilver color in order to accentuate them Po T wapimjoquiks SymbolWidth GEM eat W False ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode component the leading quiet zone and the trailing quiet zone are included always even if the ShowQuietZone parameter is set to false See diagram the quiet zones are drawn inclaSilver color in order to accentuate them ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 See also the BarcodeWidth property SymbolHeight Single Returns the distance between the top and bottom of the rotated barcode symbol in dots or pixels using the vertical resolution If the quiet zones are displayed please read the ShowQuietZone parameter section below about whether or not the quiet zones will be displayed they are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the quiet zones are drawn in claSilver color in order to accentuate them 207 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual SymbolHeight SymbolHeight ShowQ
50. S soColumnRow If the PDF417 symbol that use minimum symbol size specified by the MinColumns and MinRows properties cannot accommodate the barcode text the number of columns will be increased firstly until it reachs the maximum number of columns specified by the MaxColumns property or the barcode text is accommodated by the symbol If the number of columns has reached the maximum number of columns specified by the MaxColumns property but the barcode text cannot yet be accommodated the number of stacked rows will be increased and the number of columns will be reset to minimum number of columns specified by the MinColumns property Repeat these until the barcode text is accommodated by the symbol or not only 172 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual does the number of columns reach maximum number of columns specified by the MaxColumns property but also the number of stacked rows reachs maximum number of stacked rows specified by the MaxRows property in this case the barcode text cannot always be accommodated an OninvalidLength the barcode text is specified in the Barcode property or OnInvalidDataLength the barcode text is specified in the Data property event will occur See diagram MinColumns Ta Cee ae pm MaxRows nue wn e DEI HIIORBIEIEIGIEIOIGIED DECoeoepopeg KK EE ate WH SR ERE soFixAspect An overall aspect ratio is specified by the minimum number of stacked rows specified by the Min
51. See diagram the quiet zones are drawn in claSilver color in order to accentuate them cn OU var OU ESERI ESANS H ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode component the leading quiet zone and the trailing quiet zone are included always 203 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual even if the ShowQuietZone property is set to false See diagram the quiet zones are drawn inclaSilver color in order to accentuate them TTT PUTT TTT IR ORT TNN ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 See also the BarcodeWidth property e SymbolHeight Single Returns the distance between the top and bottom of the rotated barcode symbol in dots or pixels using the vertical resolution If the quiet zones are displayed please read the ShowQuietZone property about whether or not the quiet zones will be displayed they are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the quiet zones are drawn in claSilver color in order to accentuate them SymbolHeight SymbolHeight SymbolHeight Eent ShowQuietZone False Angle 0 30 90 SymbolHeight SymbolHeight e N ISS e ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Dal See also the BarcodeHeight property e Module Single Specifies the module size in dots or pixels using the horizontal resolution It defaults to 0 if the Modu
52. ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True 233 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode component leading quiet zone and trailing quiet zone will be printed always even if the ShowQuietZone parameter value is set to false See diagram the SpaceColor parameter is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones TopQuietZone t auon andupea auop nd uye auonand upea auozn mnd uges 4 BottomQuietZone ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True In general the Inversed property is set to false In this case these quiet zones are printed using the color specified by SpaceColor parameter If the Inversed property is set to true these quiet zones are printed using the color specified by BarColor parameter See also the ShowQuietZone property e Left Single Specifies the margin between the rotated barcode symbol and the left side of the paper in millimeters in the horizontal direction If the quiet zones are printed please read the ShowQuietZone parameter about whether or not the quiet zones will be printed they are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the SpaceColor parameter is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones Kal ES D L S For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode component the leading quiet zone and the trailing quiet zone are included always even if the ShowQuietZone parameter is set to false See diagram the SpaceColor
53. The barcode component is specified by the Barcode2D property 257 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Syntax function Copy Integer virtual Description The method copies the barcode symbol to clipboard The barcode symbol is defined in the barcode component that s specified by the Barcode2D property Also the Timage component isn t required in the Image property of the barcode component Return This method can return one of these values these consts are defined in the pfmxCopy2D unit ERROR_OK 0 The method invocation succeeded ERROR_NO_BARCODE_COMPONENT 1 The method invocation failed because the Barcode2D property is not link to a barcode component ERROR_INVALID_BARCODE 2 The method invocation failed because the length of Barcode or Data property value is invalid in the barcode component corresponding to the OnInvalidLength or OnInvalidDatalength event of barcode component will occur Or because there is any invalid character in the Barcode or Data property value corresponding to the OnlnvalidChar or OnInvalidDataChar event of barcode component will occur ERROR_COPY_BARCODE 3 The method invocation failed because of a clipboard write error ERROR_UNKNOWN 4 The method invocation failed because of othe error ERROR_NOT_SUPPORTED 5 The method isn t supported by the barcode component that s specified in the Barcode2D property B 3 3 Create Creates and initializes a TCopyFmx2D component Syn
54. TotalHeight property For the RSS 14 Stacked and RSS 14 Stacked Omnidirectional symbols the height of separator pattern between symbol rows specified by the SeparatorRowHeight property is included The property is set using the following formula e For the RSS 14 symbols 177 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual o o o o e For RSS 14 Standard Appropriate TotalHeight value should be set in order to ensure that the height of symbol row is greater than or equal to 33 modules In other words if the contiguous separator pattern isn t displayed minimum value of the property is 33 modules Otherwise it s 33 modules plus height of the contiguous separator pattern specified by the SeparatorRowHeight property See diagram III SN ITE RSS 14 Truncated Appropriate TotalHeight value should be set in order to ensure that the height of symbol row is greater than or equal to 13 modules In other words if the contiguous separator pattern isn t displayed minimum value of the property is 13 modules Otherwise it s 13 modules plus height of the contiguous separator pattern specified by the SeparatorRowHeight property See diagram II E wi Im sr RSS 14 Stacked Appropriate TotalHeight value should be set in order to ensure that the sum of each symbol row s height is greater than or equal to 12 modules In other words if the contiguous separator pattern isn t displayed minimum value of the property is 12 modules plus
55. WOrigin TPointF WDensityRate Single end Fields WCanvas TCanvas The target canvas that the barcode symbol will be represented on it WBarcode string The barcode text which will be encoded to the barcode symbol If you use the Barcode property or use Draw Size DrawTo Syntax 1 DrawToSize Syntax 1 Print Syntax 1 or PrintSize Syntax 1 method It s equal to the value of Barcode property If you use the DrawTo Syntax 2 DrawToSize Syntax 2 Print Syntax 2 or PrintSize Syntax 2 method it is equal to their Barcode parameter value If you use the Data property or use DrawTo Syntax 3 DrawToSize Syntax 3 Print Syntax 3 and PrintSize Syntax 3 methods it s an empty string WBarColor TAlphaColor It s the color used by all bars Stacked 2D barcode symbology and Linear 1D barcode symbology or dark modules Matrix 2D barcode symbology in the barcode symbol WSpaceColor TAlphaColor It s the color used by all spaces Stacked 2D barcode symbology and Linear 1D barcode symbology or light modules Matrix 2D barcode symbology in the barcode symbol Also the leading trailing top and bottom quiet zones are represented using the color too WOpacity Single It s the transparency level of entire barcode symbol where 1 is not transparant at all 0 5 is 50 see through and 0 is completely transparent WModule Single It s the module size in pixels Draw DrawTo or dots Print The horizontal resolution is
56. Windows and Mac OSX platform the index 1 denotes that the first character is invalid character For iOS and Android platform the index 0 denotes that the first character is invalid character If you use the Data property to specify the barcode data it indicates that an invalid byte value is in the barcode data also the OnInvalidDataChar event will occur The return value is the position index of the invalid byte value The index 0 denotes that the first byte value is invalid byte value Note 227 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Pelase use the method between Printer BeginDoc and Printer EndDoc methods For example Printer ActivePrinter SelectDPI 600 600 Printer BeginDoc Print other content Barcode QRCodel Print Print the barcode symbol Print other content Printer EndDoc B 1 11 2 Print Syntax 2 Prints a barcode symbol to printer The barcode symbol is specified by the parameters of this method Please use the method between the Printer BeginDoc and Printer EndDoc methods Syntax function Print Barcode string BarColor SpaceColor TAlphaColor ShowQuietZone Boolean Left Top Module Single Angle Single 0 Opacity Single 1 BarcodeWidth Single 0 BarcodeHeight Single 0 Integer overload virtual Description Prints a barcode symbol that is specified by the parameters of this method to the printer Parameters e Barcode String Specifies the barcode text It
57. are drawn in claSilver color in order to accentuate them Po T wapimjoquiks SymbolWidth GEM eat W False ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode component the leading quiet zone and the trailing quiet zone are included always even if the ShowQuietZone parameter is set to false See diagram the quiet zones are drawn inclaSilver color in order to accentuate them ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 See also the BarcodeWidth property SymbolHeight Single Returns the distance between the top and bottom of the rotated barcode symbol in dots or pixels using the vertical resolution If the quiet zones are displayed please read the ShowQuietZone parameter section below about whether or not the quiet zones will be displayed they are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the quiet zones are drawn in claSilver color in order to accentuate them 211 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual SymbolHeight SymbolHeight ShowQuietZone False Angle 0 30 90 SymbolHeight SymbolHeight Wi d ISS amp ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 See also the BarcodeHeight property Data TBytes Specifies the barcode text It is of type TBytes it is in fact a byte array You can specify a block of binary bytes data to the parameter in order to enco
58. automatically selected between the minimum symbol size specified by the MinSize property and the maximum symbol size specified by the MaxSize property The order is listed below mpSize_1_11 mpSize_3_6 mpSize_1_14 mpSize_4 4 mpSize_3_8 mpSize_4 6 mpSize_2_11 mpSize_3_10 mpSize_1_24 mpSize_4 8 mpSize_2 14 mpSize_1_28 mpSize_4 10 mpSize_2 20 mpSize_4 12 mpSize_2 23 mpSize_3 20 mpSize_2 26 mpSize_4 15 mpSize 3 26 mpSize_ 4 20 mpSize_3 32 mpSize_3 38 mpSize 4 26 mpSize_3_ 44 mpSize_4 32 mpSize_4_38 mpSize_4_ 44 If tha barcode text cannot be accommodated in the maximum symbol size specified by the MaxSize property an OnInvalidLength the barcode text is specified in the Barcode property or OnInvalidDataLength the barcode text is specified in the Data property event will occur soGlobal_3 All available symbol sizes will be sorted in ascending order of data capacity If the data capacitoies of any two symbol sizes are equivalent only smaller one in number of rows will be sorted If the data capacitoies of any three symbol sizes are equivalent only middle one in number of rows and columns will be sorted According to the order the smallest symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between the minimum symbol size specified by the MinSize property and the maximum symbol size specified by the MaxSize property The order is listed below mpSize_1_11 mpSize_3_6 mpSize_1_14 mpSize_2 8
59. be increased firstly until it reachs the maximum number of columns specified by the MaxSize property or the barcode text is accommodated by the symbol If the number of columns has reached the maximum number of columns specified by the MaxSize property but the barcode text cannot yet be accommodated the number of rows will be increased and the number of columns will be reset to minimum number of columns specified by the MinSize property Repeat these until the barcode text is accommodated by the symbol or the symbol size reachs maximum symbol size specified by the MaxSize property in this case tha barcode text cannot always be accommodated an OnInvalidLength the barcode text is specified in the Barcode property or OnInvalidDataLength the barcode text is specified in the Data property event will occur See diagram MinSize MaxSize o d H soRowPrior If the MicroPDF417 symbol that use minimum symbol size cannot accommodate the barcode text the number of rows will be increased firstly until it reachs the maximum number of rows defined by the specification or the barcode text is accommodated by the symbol If the number of rows has reached the maximum number of rows defined by the specification but the barcode text cannot yet be accommodated the number of columns will be increased and the number of rows will be reset to minimum number of rows defined by the specification Repeat these until the barcode text is accommodated by the symbo
60. can be encoded If the AutoCheckDigit property is set to false the check digit shall be included in the barcode text so the length of barcode text shall is 14 numeric characters and the last numeric character in the barcode text is the check digit If the AutoCheckDigit property is set to true the check digit will be appended automatically by the component so the length of barcode text shall is 13 numeric characters and the check digit isn t required in the barcode text Composite symbols The RSS Limited barcode symbol can be used together with a 3 column CC A or a 3 column CC B barcode symbol to create the EAN UCC composite symbol If you use it together with a CC A or a CC B component that s from another components package theLink2D property should be set to true in order to denote the RSS Limited symbol is used as the linear component in an EAN UCC composite symbol In this case the Show2DSeparator property specifies whether to represent the contiguous separator pattern between the RSS Limited linear and the 2D components in the EAN UCC composite symbol 85 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Properties Methods Events e Image e Create e OnChange e Barcode e Destroy e OnEncode e Data e Assign e ParseBarcodelndex e Module e Clear e OnlnvalidChar e BarColor e Draw e OnlnvalidLength e SpaceColor e Size e OnlnvalidDataChar e Opacity e DrawTo e OnlnvalidDataLength e Orientation e DrawToSize e OnDrawBarcode e Stretch e Pr
61. can encode one 8 bit value it s expressed in a decimal integer between 0 and 255 including the boundaries in string format so only numeric characters can be used in the barcode text Data capacity An integer between 0 and 255 including the boundaries in string format The maximum length of barcode text is limited to 3 digits The FixedLength property specifies whether adding leading zeros are required if the length is less than 3 digits Properties Methods Events e Image e Create e OnChange e Barcode e Destroy e OnEncode e Data e Assign e ParseBarcodelndex e Module e Clear e OnlinvalidChar e BarColor e Draw e OnlnvalidLength e SpaceColor e Size e OnlnvalidDataChar e Opacity e DrawTo e OnlnvalidDataLength e Orientation e DrawToSize e OnDrawBarcode e Stretch e Print e LeftMargin e PrintSize e TopMargin e BarcodeWidth e BarcodeHeight ShowQuietZone LeadingQuietZone TopQuietZone TrailingQuietZone BottomQuietZone EnableUpdateDB Locked Inversed Mirrored FixedLength 4 1 3 TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K The component is used to create the Code 16K 2D Barcode symbols It s defined in the pfmxCode16K unit Code 16K was developed by Ted Williams in 1989 to provide a simple to print and decode multiple row symbology It s a Hu continuous variable length stacked 2D barcode symbology that can encode the complete ASCII 128 character set Code 16K Extended ASCII characters ASCII value 128 to 255 may also be encoded by usi
62. click on the Next button Specify a target folder it will be created if does not exist the components package will be installed into it And then click on the Next button All supported RAD Studio Delphi and C Builder IDEs will be listed automatically Please select the IDEs you want to install to them And then click on the Next button Specify a shortcuts folder in Start Menu for the components package And then click on the Next button Later you can open the manual or remove the components package in the shortcuts folder Click on the Install button to complete the components package installation 8 9 Click on the Finish button to close the installation dialog box You can start your IDE to use the components package now Note e If multi user accounts want to use the components package please install it into the same folder in each user session 2 2 Registered user Installation step by step 1 Before installing the components package please close all RAD Studio Delphi and C Builder IDEs Note for each IDE if it s a clean installation please run it at least once before installing the components package then closes it and continues installation Please uninstall the trial release using the Uninstall shortcuts in the Start Menu if it is installed in your computer Please download the installation package using the download link that s sent from us after you purchas
63. code 3 digits SSS Serivce class 3 digits MESSAGE Optional secondary message All 256 of the ASCII characters can be used A maximum of about 82 alphanumeric characters or about 121 digits can be encoded in the message GS ASCII character GS ASCII value 29 It s used to delimit each field in barcode text The GS character after the 46 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual service class can be omitted if secondary message doesn t exist If the AllowEscape property is set to true you can use the g instead of the GS character EOT Optional ASCII character EOT ASCII value 4 If the llowEscape property is set to true you can use the t instead of the EOT character For example Postal code 123456789 Country code 840 Service class 001 Secondary message DA USA Chr 29 UPS 123 1123456789 Chr 29 840 Chr 29 001 Chr 29 PA USA Chr 29 UPS 123 Chr 4 123456789 g840 g001 gPA USA gUPS 123 t e Mode 3 It encodes a structured carrier message with an alphanumeric postal code and an optional secondary message An alphanumeric postal code a country code and a class of service code assigned by the carrier are included in the structured carrier message The symbol employs enhanced error correction for the structured carrier message and standard error correction for the secondary message see also the Error checking and correcting ECC section below It is desi
64. col Han Xin Code also includes an option for octet byte encoding for applications such as graphics and audio Extended Channel Interpretation ECls support is also included It incorporates strong Reed Solomon error correction to enable four levels of error correction abilities to recover information from damaged symbols Symbol sizes There are eighty four sizes of Han Xin Code symbols referred to as version 1 to 84 in increasing order of size and data capacity You can use the MinVersion and the MaxVersion properties to specifiy the minimum and maximum sizes for a Han Xin Code symbol They can be one of values from 1 to 84 defined in the pfmxHanxXin unit corresponding to the versions 1 to 84 The smallest symbol size 43 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between minimum and maximum symbol sizes The CurrentVersion property can be used to get the factual symbol size If the barcode text does not fill the maximum data capacity of the Han Xin Code symbol remaining data capacity of the symbol will be filled by using pad bits the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to false or will be used to upgrade the error correction code level the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to true If the barcode text is so long that it cannot be encoded using the maximum symbol size specified by the MaxVersion property an OnInvalidLength or OnInvalidDataLength event will occur Error corr
65. dots or pixels using the horizontal resolution o For the Matrix 2D barcode symbology excluding the TBarcodeFmx2D_MaxiCode barcode symbology the module is single cell a suqare shape used to encode one bit data The parameter specifies the module width and height See diagram SEH m i o For the TBarcodeFmx2D_MaxiCode barcode symbology the module is single cell a regular hexagonal shape used to encode one bit data The parameter specifies the horizonal width of a module Also it s the center to center horizontal distance between adjacent modules See diagram 212 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual o For the Stacked 2D barcode symbology and Linear 1D barcode symbology the module is the thinest bar or space in the barcode symbol The parameter specifies the module width See diagram Deman IT Angle Single Specifies an angle in degrees to rotate the barcode symbol and its quiet zones if they are drawn please read the See also the Module property ShowQuietZone parameter section above about whether or not the quiet zones will be drawn anticlockwise It defaults to 0 if the parameter is not provided meaning left to right horizontal direction See diagram the quiet zones are drawn in claSilver color in order to accentuate them ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Canvas TCanvas Specifies target canvas to drawn the barcode symbol on it The parameter is useful for obtaining the physical
66. e 002 ABCg e 123 DEF r t e In mode 4 5 and 6 the ECI blocks may be invoked anywhere in the barcode text For example ABC e 23 DEFG e 001 HIJKLMN The AllowEscape property should be set to true in order to place the ECI indicator blocks Any ECI invoked shall apply until the end of the barcode text or until another ECI indicator block is encountered Thus the interpretation of the ECI may straddle two or more symbols Structured append Up to eight MaxiCode symbols may be appended in a structured format to convey more data If a symbol is part of a structured append this shall be indicated by a structured append block in barcode text The escape sequence s lt Index gt lt Amount gt is used to place the structured append block to the barcode text e Index The position index of the symbol within the set of MaxiCode symbols in the structured append format It s an integer between 1 and 8 including the boundaries in string format e Amount The total amount of the symbol within the set of MaxiCode symbols in the structured append format It s an integer between 2 and 8 including the boundaries in string format The structured append block may only be placed once in the barcode text The On nvalidChar or OnInvalidDataChar event will occur if the structured append block be placed more than once The AllowEscape property should be set to true in order to place the structured append block The valid locations for structured append blo
67. encoded The default interpretation shall be o For values 0 to 127 in accordance with the U S national version of ISO IEC 646 ASCII Note this version consists of the GO set of ISO IEC 646 and the CO set of ISO IEC 6429 with values 28 to 31 modified to FS GS RS and US respectively o For values 128 255 in accordance with ISO IEC 8859 1 Extended ASCII This interpretation corresponds to ECI 000003 2 Two non data characters can be encoded FNC1 for compatibility with some existing applications and ECI indicator blocks for the standardized encoding of message interpretation information o FNC1 The FNC1 character following an application standard agreed with AIM International identifies a symbol which conforms to a specific industry standard FNC1 shall be used as defined in the EAN UCC General Specifications either in the first position or implied by the mode character The FNC1 character may also be used as a field separator in which case it will be represented in the transmitted message as GS character ASCII value 29 The escape sequence f can be used to place the FNC1 character to barcode text o ECI The escape sequence e m can be used to place the ECI indicator block to barcode text See also the Extended Channel Interpretation ECI section below The AllowEscape property should be set to true in order to place the FNC1 characters or the ECI indicator blocks Escape sequences If the AllowEscape property is set to t
68. encoded using the maximum symbol size specified by the MaxVersion and the MaxSegments properties an OnInvalidLength or OnInvalidDataLength event will occur Error correction code ECC There are eight user selectable levels of error correction from 1 to 8 respectively in increasing order of recovery capacity You can use the ECCLevel property to specify the error correction code level for a Compact Matrix symbol It can be one of values from 1 to 8 corresponding to the ECC levels from 1 to 8 These ECC levels are listed in following table Error correction code level Percentage of total capacity for ECC data 1 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 CO N oO om AJ V N If the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to true the highest error correction code level that can be accommodated by current symbol size will be used for creating more robust symbols Note the new level is always no lower than the level specified by the ECCLevel property and the symbol size will not be increased it may be determined depending on the length of barcode text and the error correction code level specified by the ECCLevel property see also the Symbol sizes section above In other words only the remaining capacity in current symbol size will be used to upgrade the error correction code level The property CurrentECCLevel can be used to get the factual error correction code level Quiet zones The minimum quiet zon
69. error correction code level Character set All 8 bit values can be encoded The default interpretation shall be e For values 0 to 127 in accordance with the U S national version of ISO IEC 646 ASCII Note this version consists of the GO set of ISO IEC 646 and the CO set of ISO IEC 6429 with values 28 to 31 modified to FS GS RS and US respectively e For values 128 255 in accordance with ISO IEC 8859 1 These are referred to as extended ASCII Note the character set isn t different based on the encoding mode See also the Encoding modes section below Encoding modes There are six encoding modes of Data Matrix ECC 000 140 symbols they are shown in following list in decreasing order of encoding density e Numeric Base 11 The encoding mode encodes 10 numeric characters 0 to 9 and the space character The encoding density is 3 5 bits per data character The encoding mode has highest encoding density e Alpha Base 27 The encoding mode encodes 26 upper case letters A to Z and the space character The encoding density is 4 8 bits per data character 32 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual e Alphanumeric Base 37 The encoding mode encodes 26 upper case letters A to Z 10 numeric characters 0 to 9 and the space character The encoding density is 5 25 bits per data character e Punctuation Base 41 The encoding mode encodes 26 upper case letters A to Z 10 numeric characters 0 to 9 and the space point
70. factual version value They are defined in the pfmxCompactMatrix unit The property is read only See also the Symbol sizes section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_CompactMatrix article A 1 32 CurrentVersion TBarcodeFmx2D_GridMatrix Contains the factual symbol version symbol size of a Grid Matrix barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxGridMatrix unit TGridMatrix Version 1 13 property CurrentVersion TGridMatrix Version Description There are thirteen sizes of Grid Matrix symbol referred to as version 1 to 13 in increasing order of size and data capacity The smallest symbol version symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between the minimum symbol version symbol size specified by the MinVersion property and the maximum symbol version symbol size specified by the 115 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual MaxVersion property Read the property to retrieve the factual symbol version symbol size of a Grid Matrix barcode symbol The property can be one of values from 1 to 13 denotations the factual version of a Grid Matrix 2D barcode symbol They are defined in the pfmxGridMatrix unit The property is read only See also the Symbol sizes section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_GridMatrix article A 1 33 CurrentVersion TBarcodeFmx2D_HanXinCode Contains the factual symbol version symbol size of a Han Xin Code barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in
71. first 9 digits will be encoded if its length is greater than 9 digits CCC Country code 3 digits SSS Serivce class 3 digits MESSAGE Optional secondary message All 256 of the ASCII characters can be used A maximum of about 71 alphanumeric characters or about 107 digits can be encoded in the message RS ASCII character RS ASCII value 30 The RS character after the secondary message is optional If the llowEscape property is set to true you can use the r instead of the RS character GS ASCII character GS ASCII value 29 It s used to delimit each field in barcode text The GS character after the service class can be omitted if secondary message doesn t exist If the AllowEscape property is set to true you can use the g instead of the GS character EOT Optional ASCII character EOT ASCII value 4 If the llowEscape property is set to true you can use the t instead of the EOT character For example Date 96 Postal code 123456789 Country code 840 Service class 001 Secondary message DA USA Chr 29 UPS 123 gt Chr 30 01 Chr 29 96123456789 Chr 29 840 Chr 29 001 Chr 29 PA USA Chr 29 UPS 123 Chr 30 Chr 4 m gt r01 g96123456789 g840 g001 gPA USA gUPS 123 r t o PPPPPPPPP GS CCC GS SSS GS MESSAGE EOT PPPPPPPPP Numeric postal code up to 9 digits Only first 9 digits will be encoded if its length is greater than 9 digits CCC Country
72. fixed size having 884 hexagonal modules arranged in 33 rows around a central finder pattern Each row consists of a maximum of 30 modules Also each symbol including the quiet zones is of a fixed physical size nominally 28 14mm wide 26 91mm high Each hexagonal dot module measures 0 889 1 041 millimeters Quiet zones The MaxiCode symbology require the minimum 1 module quiet zones as measured from the outside edges So the minimum values of LeadingQuietZone TrailingQuietZone TopQuietZone and BottomQuietZone properties are equal to 1 Error checking and correcting ECC MaxiCode symbology offer two levels of error checking and correction Enhanced Error Correction EEC and Standard Error Correction SEC which are specified by the Mode see also the Modes section above In mode 2 and 3 the symbol employs EEC for the structured carrier message and SEC for the secondary message In mode 4 5 and 6 MaxiCode symbols are internally divided into a primary message and a secondary message the mode 4 and 6 symbol employ EEC for the primary message and SEC for the secondary message the mode 5 symbol employs EEC for both the primary and secondary messages Character set In mode 2 all numeric characters can be encoded in the country code service class and postal code fields All 256 of the ASCII characters can be encoded in the secondary message In mode 3 all numeric characters can be encoded in the country code and service cla
73. for a QR Code barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxORCode unit TQRCode Version 1 40 property MinVersion TQRCode Version Description The property specifies the minimum symbol version symbol size for a QR Code barcode symbol It can be one of values from 1 to 40 They are defined in the pfmxQRCode unit The smallest symbol version symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between the minimum 152 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual symbol version symbol size specified by this property and the maximum symbol version symbol size that s specified by the MaxVersion property The CurrentVersion property can be used to get the factual symbol version symbol size Note if the property is set to a value greater than the MaxVersion property s value the MaxVersion property will be automatically changed to equal to this property s value In other words the MinVersion property s value is always less than or equal to the MaxVersion property s value See also the Symbol sizes section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode article A 1 95 Mirrored TBarcodeFmx2D_AztecCode TBarcodeFmx2D_DataMatrix etc Specifies whether the barcode symbol is reversed right to left horizontal mirror reversal Syntax property Mirrored Boolean Description The property specifies whether the barcode symbol is reversed right to left horizontal mirror reversal If barcode symbol
74. for creating more robust symbols Read the property to retrieve the factual error correction code level of the QR Code barcode symbol If the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to false the error correction code level specified by the ECCLevel property will be used always The value of this property is always equal to the value of the ECCLevel property The property is read only See also the Error checking and correcting ECC section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode article A 1 21 CurrentEncodeMode TBarcodeFmx2D_DataMatrix Contains the factual data encoding mode of a Data Matrix ECC 000 140 barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxDataMatrix unit 109 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual TDataMatrix EncodeMode emAuto emNumeric emAlpha emPunctuation emAlphanumeric emASCII emBinary property CurrentEncodeMode TDataMatrix EncodeMode Description Read the property to retrieve the factual data encoding mode of a Data Matrix ECC 000 140 barcode symbol It can be one of these values emNumeric emAlpha emPunctuation emAlphanumeric emASCII and emBinary corresponding to the Numeric Base 11 Alpha Base 27 Punctuation Base 37 Alphanumeric Base 41 ASCII and Binary encoding modes They are defined in the pfmxDataMatrix unit If the EncodeMode property is set to emAuto the data encoding mode will be selected automatically depending on the barcode text in order to minimize the s
75. format e Amount The total amount of the symbol within the set of Data Matrix ECC 200 symbols in the structured append format It s an integer between 2 and 16 including the boundaries in string format e File_Id The file identification It s an integer between 1 and 64516 including the boundaries in string format The purpose of the file identification is to increase the probability that only logically linked symbols are processed as part of the same message Also the field can be expressed as two integers between 1 and 254 including the boundaries separated with a comma The AllowEscape property should be set to true in order to place the structured append block The structured append block may only be placed once in the barcode text Also it shall be placed at beginning of the barcode text The OnInvalidChar or OnInvalidDataChar event will occur if the structured append block be placed more than once or it isn t placed at beginning of the barcode text The following is the examples of structured append s 2 5 25431 ABCDEFGabcdefg1234567890 s 2 5 101 31 ABCDEFGabcdefg1234567890 38 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Properties Methods Events e Image e Create e OnChange e Barcode e Destroy e OnEncode e Data e Assign e ParseBarcodelndex e Module e Clear e OnlnvalidChar e BarColor e Draw e OnlnvalidLength e SpaceColor e Size e OnlnvalidDataChar e Opacity e DrawTo e OnlnvalidDataLength e Orientation e DrawTo
76. hyphen comma and solidus characters The encoding density is 5 5 bits per data character e ASCII The encoding mode encodes all 128 ASCII characters from ISO IEC 646 The encoding density is 7 bits per data character e Binary The encoding mode encodes all 256 8 bit bytes It shall be used for closed applications where the data interpretation shall be determined by the user The encoding density is 8 bits per byte The encoding mode has lowest encoding density You can use the EncodeMode property to specify the encoding mode for a Data Matrix ECC 000 140 symbol It can be one of these value emNumeric emAlpha emPunctuation emAlphanumeric emASCIl and emBinary corresponding to the encoding modes Numberic Base 11 Alpha Base 27 Alphanumeric Base 37 Punctuation Base 41 ASCII and Binary Also it can be set to emAuto in this case the encoding mode will be selected automatically from the list shown above depending on the barcode text in other words the barcode text to be encoded will be analysed and an appropriates lowest level highest encoding density encoding mode will be selected in order to minimize the symbol size The property CurrentEncodeMode can be used to get the factual encoding mode These property values are defined in the pfmxDataMatrix unit Symbol sizes ECC 000 140 symbols have an odd number of rows and an odd number of columns Symbols are square with sizes from 9 9 to 49 49 modules square
77. in Alpha Base 27 encoding mode so the maximum number of characters is 23 114 4 8 23 75 in the Alpha Base 27 encoding mode You can find the encoding density in Encoding modes section above You can use the MinSize and the MaxSize properties to specify the minimum and maximum sizes for a Data Matrix ECC 000 140 symbol They can be one of values from dmSize_09_09 to dmSize_49 49 defined in the pfmxDataMatrix unit corresponding to every symbol size shown above The smallest symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between minimum and maximum symbol sizes If the barcode text does not fill the maximum data capacity of the Data Matrix ECC 000 140 symbol remaining data capacity of the symbol will be filled by using pad bits the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to false or will be used to upgrade the error correction code level the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to true If the barcode text is so long that it cannot be encoded using the maximum 33 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual symbol size specified by the MaxSize property an OnlnvalidLength or OnInvalidDataLength event will occur The CurrentSize property can be used to get the factual symbol size Quiet zones The minimum quiet zone is equal to 1 module on all four sides So the minimum values of LeadingQuietZone TrailingQuietZone TopQuietZone and BottomQuietZone properties are equal to 1 For applications with moderate
78. in a single vertical stack 26 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Properties Methods Events e Image e Create e OnChange e Barcode e Destroy e OnEncode e Data e Assign e ParseBarcodelndex e Module e Clear e OnlnvalidChar e BarColor e Draw e OnlnvalidLength e SpaceColor e Size e OnlnvalidDataChar e Opacity e DrawTo e OnlnvalidDataLength e Orientation e DrawToSize e OnDrawBarcode e Stretch e Print e LeftMargin e PrintSize e TopMargin e BarcodeWidth e BarcodeHeight ShowQuietZone LeadingQuietZone TopQuietZone TrailingQuietZone BottomQuietZone EnableUpdateDB Locked MinRows MaxRows RowHeight SeparatorBarHeight InitialMode AllowEscape CurrentRows Read only CurrentMode Read only 4 1 4 TBarcodeFmx2D_CompactMatrix The component is used to create the Compact Matrix 2D barcode symbols It s defined in the pfmxCompactMatrix unit Compact Matrix is a variable sized two dimensional matrix symbology The code graph adopts sprocket hole positioning and graphic sectioning techniques to perform fast and accurate identification and handling of 2D barcode graph by analyzing the information of sprocket position and graphic section ote ompact Matrix Compact Matrix can encode 7 bit ASCII numeric and binary data in addition to any combination of data types in the same symbol particularly effective with Chinese characters Compact Matrix was invented by Syscan Technology Co Ltd Symbol size
79. in decimal string format For each related Macro PDF417 symbol the file ID should be specified using the same numeric sequence This ensures that all reassembled symbol data belongs to the same distributed file representation Note the field is required 68 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual e File_Name The file name It s a text string with an implied reset to ECI 000002 The ECI escape sequences may be used in order to set a different ECI within the field Note the field is optional e Amount The segment count identifying the total number of Macro PDF417 symbols in the distributed file It s an integer between 2 and 99999 including the boundaries in decimal string format Note the field is optional if it s used that field shall appear in every segment e Time_Stamp The time stamp It indicates the time stamp on the source file It s a GMT time in yyyy mm dd hh nn ss format o yyyy 4 digit year o mm 2 digit month the leading zero is optional o dd 2 digit day the leading zero is optional o hh 2 digit hour in 24 hours format the leading zero is optional o nn 2 digit minute the leading zero is optional o ss 2 digit second the leading zero is optional Note entire time portion or the minute and second portion are optional i e the yyyy mm dd yyyy mm dd hh and yyyy mm dd hh nn formats are valid If the hour minute or second portion is not included they defaults to 00 e Sender The sender
80. increasing order of symbol height and data capacity The property specifies the maximum version for a Compact Matrix barcode symbol It can be one of values from 1 to 32 They are defined in the pfmxCompactMatrix unit The maximum version together with the maximum number of segments specified by the MaxSegments property indicates the maximum symbol size for a Compact Matrix barcode symbol And the minimum version specified by the MinVersion property together with the minimum number of segments specified by the MinSegments property indicates the minimum symbol size for the Compact 142 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Matrix barcode symbol Based on the stretch order specified by the StretchOrder property the smallest symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between the minimum symbol size and the maximum symbol size If the barcode text is so long that it cannot be encoded using the maximum symbol size an OnInvalidLength the barcode text is specified in the Barcode property or an OnInvalidDataLength the barcode text is specified in the Data property event will occur The CurrentVersion property can be used to get the factual version Note if the property is set to a value less than the MinVersion property s value the MinVersion property will be automatically changed to equal to this property s value In other words the MaxVersion property s value is always greater than or equal to the
81. is 11 13 15 or 17 and this date field may be followed by an implied Application Identifier 10 or 21 as well 66 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual AA Application Identifier of the 6 digit data field It can be one of 11 13 15 or 17 YY Year of the 6 digit data field MM Month of the 6 digit data field DD Day of the 6 digit data field BB An optional Application Identifier that follows the 6 digit data field It can be one of 10 or 21 For example 912 1199010721 Also You can encode the 6 digit date field and the subsequent Application Identifier by yourself 912994071 You can explicitly insert a mode latch to Numeric compaction mode after the 912 by using the KOTA T 1090010721 912 994071 The escape sequence shall only be placed once at beginning of barcode text otherwise the OnlnvalidChar or OnInvalidDataChar event will occur o 914 It represents a leading FNC1 character in First position mode and implies a mode latch to Numeric compaction mode It not only indicates that the PDF417 symbol s data output shall conform with the Code128 specification UCC EAN 128 emulation the symbology identifier prefix is set to C1 or L3 but also indicates that the data begins with an implied Application Identifier is 10 The escape sequence shall only be placed once at beginning of barcode text otherwise an OninvalidChar or OnInvalidDataChar event will occur o 915 It re
82. mpSize_117 mpSize_1_20 mpSize_2_11 mpSize_3_10 mpSize_1_24 mpSize_3_12 mpSize_2 14 mpSize_1_28 mpSize_ 3 15 mpSize_2_20 mpSize_4 12 mpSize_2 23 mpSize_3 20 mpSize_2 26 mpSize 4 15 mpSize_3 26 mpSize_4 20 mpSize_3 32 mpSize_3 38 mpSize 4 26 mpSize_3_44 mpSize_4_32 mpSize_4_ 38 mpSize_4_44 If tha barcode text cannot be accommodated in the maximum symbol size specified by the MaxSize property an OnInvalidLength the barcode text is specified in the Barcode property or OnInvalidDataLength the barcode text is specified in the Data property event will occur e soGlobal_4 All available symbol sizes will be sorted in ascending order of data capacity If the data capacitoies of any two symbol sizes are equivalent only smaller one in number of columns will be sorted If the data capacitoies of any three symbol sizes are equivalent only middle one in number of rows and columns will be sorted According to the order the smallest symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between the minimum symbol size specified by the MinSize property and the maximum symbol size specified by the MaxSize property The order is listed below mpSize_1_11 mpSize_3_6 mpSize_1_14 mpSize_4 4 mpSize_3_8 mpSize_4 6 mpSize_2_11 mpSize_3_10 mpSize_1_24 mpSize_4 8 mpSize_2 14 mpSize_1_28 mpSize_3 Ip mpSize_2 20 mpSize_4 12 mpSize_2 23 mpSize_3 20 171 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual mpS
83. of 10 or 21 For example 912 1199010721 Also You can encode the 6 digit date field and the subsequent Application Identifier by yourself 912994071 You can explicitly insert a mode latch to Numeric compaction mode after the 912 by using the 912 1199010721 912 994071 The escape sequence shall only be placed once at beginning of barcode text otherwise an OnlinvalidChar or 55 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual OnInvalidDataChar event will occur o 914 It represents a leading FNC1 character in First position mode and implies a mode latch to Numeric compaction mode It not only indicates that the MicroPDF417 symbol s data output shall conform with the Code128 specification UCC EAN 128 emulation the symbology identifier prefix is set to C1 or L3 but also indicates that the data begins with an implied Application Identifier is 10 The escape sequence shall only be placed once at beginning of barcode text otherwise an OnlnvalidChar or OnInvalidDataChar event will occur o 915 It represents a leading FNC1 character in First position mode and implies a mode latch to Numeric compaction mode it not only indicates that the MicroPDF417 symbol s data output shall conform with the Code128 specification UCC EAN 128 emulation the symbology identifier prefix is set to C1 or L3 but also indicates that the data begins with an implied Application Identifier is 21 The escape sequence shall o
84. of barcode text exceeds the maximum length limit For the TBarcodeFmx2D_RSSLimited TBarcodeFmx2D_RSS14 and TBarcodeFmx2D_AztecRunes components if the Barcode property value is an empty string the event occurs too If the Locked property is set to false the event occurs when any component property is changed to cause the barcode is redrew or when the Draw Clear Size DrawTo Syntax 1 DrawToSize Syntax 1 Print Syntax 1 or PrintSize Syntax 1 method is called Even if the Image property isn t specified If the Locked property is set to true the event occurs when the Locked property is set to false to cause the barcode is redrew or the Draw Clear Size DrawTo Syntax 1 DrawToSize Syntax 1 Print Syntax 1 or PrintSize Syntax 1 method is called Even if the Image property isn t specified 264 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual C 1 8 ParseBarcodelndex If you use the OnEncode event handle to encode the barcode text in your own encoding scheme the event occurs if there is any invalid character in the value of Barcode property or Barcode parameter e When the Clear Draw Size DrawTo syntax 1 DrawToSize syntax 1 Print syntax 1 or PrintSize syntax 1 method is called or a component is updating its barcode symbol the event occurs if there is any invalid character in the value of Barcode property e When the DrawTo syntax 2 DrawToSize syntax 2 Print syntax 2 PrintSize syntax 2 GetParity synta
85. of these values defined in the pfmxQRCode unit e epMixingOptimal All 256 8 bits values are encoded by switching automatically between all 4 the AllowKanjiMode property is set to true or 3 the Kanji mode will not be used if the AllowKanjiMode property is set to false encoding modes The optimal combination of encoding modes will be used in order to minimize the symbol size epMixingQuick All 256 8 bits values are encoded by switching automatically between all 4 the AllowKanjiMode property is set to true or 3 the Kanji mode will not be used if the AllowKanjiMode property is set to false encoding modes The combination of encoding modes may not be the optimal one in order to optimize encoding speed epSingleMode The encoding mode will be selected automatically and applied to entire symbol based on the barcode text in other words the barcode text to be encoded will be analysed and an appropriates lowest level highest encoding density encoding mode will be selected in order to minimize the symbol size and the encoding mode will not be switched in the sybmol Note the Kanji mode will not be used if the AllowKanjiMode property is set to false Extended Channel Interpretation ECH The Extended Channel Interpretation ECI protocol allows the output data stream to have interpretations different from that of the default character set Four broad types of interpretations are supported in QR Code e International character sets or code
86. property together with the minimum number of columns specified by the MinColumns property indicates the minimum symbol size for the PDF417 barcode symbol Based on the stretch order specified by the StretchOrder property the smallest symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between the minimum symbol size and the maximum symbol size If the barcode text is so long that it cannot be encoded using the maximum symbol size an OnInvalidLength the barcode text is specified in the Barcode property or an OnInvalidDataLength the barcode text is specified in the Data property event will occur The CurrentRows property can be used to get the factual number of stacked rows Note if the property is set to a value less than the MinRows property s value the MinRows property will be automatically changed to equal to this property s value In other words the MaxRows property s value is always greater than or equal to the MinRows property s value See also the Symbol size section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 article A 1 70 MaxSegments TBarcodeFmx2D_CompactMatrix Specifies the maximum number of segments for a Compact Matrix barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxCompactMatrix unit TCompactMatrix_ Segments 1 32 property MaxSegments TCompactMatrix Segments Description In horizontal orientation each Compact Matrix symbol consists of an array of segments with a minimum of 1 segme
87. provided and the vertical resolution will be obtained from your printer Return This method can return one of these values these consts are defined in the pfmxCore2D unit e Verify_InvalidLength 2 It indicates that the length of Data parameter value is invalid e Verify_OK 1 It indicates the method succeeds e Verify_Invalidindex_Base 0 and greater than 0 It indicates that an invalid byte value is in the Data parameter the return value is the position index of the invalid byte value The index 0 denotes that the first byte value is invalid 251 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual B 1 13 Size Returns the height and width of specified barcode symbol in pixels that s displayed in the Tlmage control specified by the Image property Syntax function Size var Width Height SymbolWidth SymbolHeight Single Boolean virtual Description The method returns the width and height of the barcode symbol that s displayed in the Tlmage control specified by the Image property in pixels If the quiet zones are displayed please read the ShowQuietZone property about whether or not the quiet zones will be displayed they are included in the barcode symbol Parameters e Width Single Returns the horizontal width of the rotated barcode symbol that s displyed in the Tlmage control specified in the Image property in pixels See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zon
88. quiet zone are drawn the ShowQuietZone property is set to true the color specified by this SpaceColor property will be used to draw them if the Inversed property is set to false Otherwise the color specified by the BarColor property will be used A 1 116 StartWidth TBarcodeFmx2D_CompactMatrix Specifies the width of start pattern for a Compact Matrix barcode symbol in modules Syntax property StartWidth Integer Description The property specifies the width of start pattern for a Compact Matrix barcode symbol in modules It should be set to an integer greater than or equal to 2 If the property is set to a value less than 2 an exception will be raised See diagram A 1 117 StopWidth TBarcodeFmx2D_CompactMatrix 166 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Specifies the width of stop pattern for a Compact Matrix barcode symbol in modules Syntax property StopWidth Integer Description The property specifies the width of stop pattern for a Compact Matrix barcode symbol in modules It should be set to an integer greater than or equal to 2 If the property is set to a value less than 2 an exception will be raised See diagram StopWidth A 1 118 Stretch Specifies whether to reduce stretch the barcode symbol to specified size Syntax property Stretch Boolean Description The property specifies whether to reduce stretch the barcode symbol to fit the size specified by BarcodeWidth
89. quiet zone are included always even if the ShowQuietZone property is set to false See diagram the SpaceColor property is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 See also the LeftMargin property e Top Single Specifies the margin between the rotated barcode symbol and the top side of the paper in millimeters in the vertical direction If the quiet zones are printed please read the ShowQuietZone property about whether or not the quiet zones will be printed they are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the SpaceColor property is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones 224 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual a SH isl pes ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode component the leading quiet zone and the trailing quiet zone are included always even if the ShowQuietZone property is set to false See diagram the SpaceColor property is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones cm P sS re s ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 See also the TopMargin property e Module Single Specifies the module size in millimeters o For the Matrix 2D barcode symbology excluding the TBarcodeFmx2D_MaxiCode barcode symbology the modu
90. reader initialisation It only shall be placed once at beginning of the barcode text In the case of a Macro PDF417 initialisation sequence it shall appear in every symbol It s completely equivalent to escape sequence r o 924 Manually places a mode latch to Byte compaction mode It shall be used when the total number of subsequent bytes to be encoded is an integer multiple of 6 otherwise it will be changed to 901 automatically by the component For some reader the meanings of some function codewords don t conform with the PDF417 specification You can use the Options property to change the meanings of these fucntion codewords in order to match the reader 67 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Note the RS is ASCII character RS ASCII value 30 the GS is ASCII character GS ASCII value 29 and the EOT is ASCII character EOT ASCII value 4 Extended Channel Interpretation ECH The Extended Channel Interpretation ECI protocol allows the output data stream to have interpretations different from that of the default character set Five broad types of interpretations are supported in PDF417 e International character sets or code pages e General purpose interpretations such as encryption and compaction e User defined interpretations for closed systems e Transmission of control information for Macro PDF417 e Transmission of uninterpreted PDF417 codewords The ECI is identified by an integer up to 6
91. sequences section below Second position mode FNC in this mode indicator identifies symbols formatted in accordance with specific industry or application specifications previously agreed with AIM International It is immediately followed by an application indicator assigned to identify the specification concerned by AIM International For this purpose it shall only be used once in a symbol and shall be placed at beginning of the barcode An application indicator may take the form of any single Latin alphabetic character from the set a to z and A to Z or a two digit number If any one of escape sequences in 908 and 909 followed by an application indicator single Latin alphabetic character from the set a to z and A to Z or a two digit number is placed at beginning of barcode text it represents a leading FNC1 character in Second position mode and implies a mode latch to Text compaction mode or Numeric compaction mode See also the Escape sequences section below Data field separator The FNC1 character may also be used as a data field separator i e at the end of a variable length data field in which case it will be represented in the transmitted message as GS character ASCII value 29 The data field separator shall not be placed at beginning of barcode text If any one of escape sequences in 903 904 and 905 is placed in the barcode text but not at beginning of the barcode text it represents a data fie
92. symbol size Quiet zones The minimum quiet zone is equal to 1 module on all four sides So the minimum values of LeadingQuietZone TrailingQuietZone TopQuietZone and BottomQuietZone properties are equal to 1 For applications with moderate to excessive reflected noise in close proximity to the symbol a quiet zone of 2 modules to 4 modules is recommended 36 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Error checking and correcting ECC Data Matrix ECC 200 symbols are fixed at a repair level of about 25 damage and overhead ranges from 60 for a small number of characters downward to 26 for a large number of characters encoded Character set e All 8 bit values can be encoded The default interpretation shall be o For values 0 to 127 in accordance with the U S national version of ISO IEC 646 ASCII Note this version consists of the GO set of ISO IEC 646 and the CO set of ISO IEC 6429 with values 28 to 31 modified to FS GS RS and US respectively o For values 128 255 in accordance with ISO IEC 8859 1 Extended ASCII This interpretation corresponds to ECI 000003 e Two non data characters can be encoded FNC1 for compatibility with some existing applications and ECI indicator blocks for the standardized encoding of message interpretation information o FNC1 The FNC1 character following an application standard agreed with AIM International identifies a symbol which conforms to a specific industry standard FNC1 shall b
93. symbol width the distance between the beginning and end of the barcode symbol in millimeters If the quiet zones are printed please read the ShowQuietZone property about whether or not the quiet zones will be printed the leading quiet zone and the trailing quiet zone are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the SpaceColor property is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones BarcodeWidth 9 mie E ma ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode component the leading quiet zone and the trailing quiet zone are included always even if the ShowQuietZone property is set to false See diagram the SpaceColor property is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones 240 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual ot BarcodeWidth 90 WI UNI PUT TTT CT TP UT ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 Note if the parameter is provided and it isn t zero the values of Module and BarcodeHeight parameters will be ignored the module size will be calculated based on the BarcodeWidth parameter value If both BarcodeHeight and BarcodeWidth parameters aren t provided or they are all zero the barcode symbol width will be determined by the Module parameter value If both BarcodeWidth and BarcodeHeight parameters are provided and aren t zero only the BarcodeWidth parameter value will be
94. the ECCLevel property will be used always The value of this property is always equal to the value of the ECCLevel property 105 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual The property is read only See also the Error checking and correcting ECC section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_CompactMatrix article A 1 15 CurrentECCLevel TBarcodeFmx2D_DataMatrix Contains the factual error correction code level of a Data Matrix ECC 000 140 barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxDataMatrix unit TDataMatrix ECCLevel dmECC000 dmECC050 dmECCO080 dmECC100 dmECC140 property CurrentECCLevel TDataMatrix ECCLevel Description The property always contains the factual error correction code level of a Data Matrix ECC 000 140 barcode symbol It can be one of five values dmECCO000 dmECC050 dmECC080 dmECC100 and dmECC140 corresponding to error correction code level ECC 000 ECC 050 ECC 080 ECC 100 and ECC 140 They are defined in the pfmxDataMatrix unit If the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to true the remaining data capacity of a Data Matrix ECC 000 140 barcode symbol will be used to automatically upgrade the error correction code level the highest error correction code level that can be accommodated by current symbol size will by used for creating more robust symbols Read the property to retrieve the factual error correction code level of the Data Matrix ECC 000 140 barcode symbol If the ECCLevelUpgrad
95. the MaxRows property s value the MaxRows property will be automatically changed to equal to this property s value In other words the MinRows property s value is always less than or equal to the MaxRows property s value See also the Symbol size section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 article A 1 85 MinSegments TBarcodeFmx2D_CompactMatrix Specifies the minimum number of segments for a Compact Matrix barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxCompactMatrix unit TCompactMatrix_ Segments 1 32 property MinSegments TCompactMatrix Segments Description In horizontal orientation each Compact Matrix symbol consists of an array of segments with a minimum of 1 segment maximum 32 segments The property specifies the minimum number of segments for a Compact Matrix barcode symbol It can be one of values from 1 to 32 they are defined in the pfmxCompactMatrix unit The minimum number of segments together with the minimum version specified by the MinVersion property indicates the minimum symbol size for a Compact Matrix barcode symbol And the maximum number of segments specified by the MaxSegments property together with the maximum version specified by the MaxVersion property indicates the maximum symbol size for the Compact Matrix barcode symbol Based on the stretch order specified by the StretchOrder property the smallest symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between the minim
96. the barcode text to a bytes sequence in your own encoding scheme the Verify_Invalidindex_AfterBarcode 4 indicats that an invalid byte value is in the suffix codes of the bytes sequence Verify_Invalidindex_BeforeBarcode 3 If you use the Barcode property to specify the barcode text and use the OnEncode event handle to encode the barcode text to a bytes sequence in your own encoding scheme the Verify_InvalidIndex_BeforeBarcode 3 indicats that an invalid byte value is in the prefix codes of the bytes sequence for example the BOM Verify_InvalidLength 2 If you use the Barcode property to specify the barcode text it indicates that the length of Barcode property value is invalid also the OnInvalidLength event will occur If you use the Data property to specify the barcode text it indicates that the length of Data property value is invalid also the OnInvalidDataLength event will occur Verify_OK 1 It indicates the method succeeds Verify_Invalidindex_Base 0 and greater than 0 If you use the Barcode property to specify the barcode text it indicates that an invalid character is in the barcode text also the OnlInvalidChar event will occur The return value is the position index of the invalid charactere For 32 bit Windows 64 bit Windows and Mac OSX platform the index 1 denotes that the first character is invalid character For iOS and Android platform the index 0 denotes that the first character is invalid character
97. the factual encoding mode e emNumeric Indicates to use the Numeric Base 11 encoding mode It encodes 10 numeric characters 0 to 9 and the space character The encoding density is 3 5 bits per data character The encoding mode has highest encoding density emAlpha Indicates to use the Alpha Base 27 encoding mode It encodes 26 upper case letters A to Z and the space character The encoding density is 4 8 bits per data character emAlphanumeric Indicates to use the Alphanumeric Base 37 encoding mode It encodes 26 upper case letters A to Z 10 numeric characters 0 to 9 and the space character The encoding density is 5 25 bits per data character emPunctuation Indicates to use the Punctuation Base 41 encoding mode It encodes 26 upper case letters A to Z 10 numeric characters 0 to 9 and the space point hyphen comma and solidus characters The encoding density is 5 5 bits per data character emASCII Indicates to use the ASCII encoding mode It encodes all 128 ASCII characters from ISO IEC 646 The encoding density is 7 bits per data character emBinary Indicates to use the Binary encoding mode It encodes all 256 8 bit bytes It shall be used for closed applications where the data interpretation shall be determined by the user The encoding density is 8 bits per byte The encoding mode has lowest encoding density The CurrentEncodeMode property can always be used to get the factual encoding mode See also the
98. the height of separator pattern between two rows specified by the SeparatorRowHeight property Otherwise it s 12 modules plus the height of separator pattern between two rows specified by the SeparatorRowHeight property and plus height of the contiguous separator pattern specified by the SeparatorRowHeight property too See diagram neg mmm RSS 14 Stacked Omnidirectional Appropriate TotalHeight value should be set in order to ensure that the sum of each symbol row s is greater than or equal to 66 modules In other words if the contiguous separator pattern isn t displayed minimum value of the property is 66 modules plus 3 times height of separator pattern between two rows specified by the SeparatorRowHeight property Otherwise it s 66 modules plus the 3 times height of separator pattern between two rows specified by the SeparatorRowHeight property and plus height of the contiguous separator pattern specified by the SeparatorRowHeight property too See diagram 8 the RSS Limited symbols appropriate TotalHeight value should be set in order to ensure that the height of symbol row is a greater than or equal to 10 modules In other words if the contiguous separator pattern isn t displayed minimum value of the property is 10 modules Otherwise it s 10 modules plus height of the contiguous separator pattern specified by the Sep aratorRowHeight property See diagram TotalHeight TotalHeight COULEE LILI era See al
99. the maximum symbol size You can use the CurrentSize property to get the factual symbol size If the barcode text is so long that it cannot be encoded using the maximum symbol size specified by the MaxSize property an OnInvalidLength or OnInvalidDataLength event will occur Quiet zones The symbol shall include a quiet zone on all four sides The minimum quiet zone is equal to 1 module on all four sides So the minimum values of LeadingQuietZone TrailingQuietZone TopQuietZone and BottomQuietZone properties are equal to 1 Error checking and correcting ECC Each MicroPDF417 symbol contains at least seven error correction codewords The error correction codewords provide capability for both error detection and correction The number of error correction codewords for a MicroPDF417 symbol is fixed for each symbol size Character set e All 8 bit values can be encoded The default interpretation shall be o For values 0 to 127 in accordance with the U S national version of ISO IEC 646 ASCII o For values 128 255 in accordance with ISO IEC 8859 1 Extended ASCII This interpretation corresponds to ECI 000003 MicroPDF417 has three unique data compaction modes as Text compaction mode Numeric compaction mode and Byte compaction mode All 8 bit values are encoded by switching internally between all 3 compaction modes o Text compaction mode Permits all printable ASCII characters i e ASCII values from 32 to 126 inclusive accordance
100. the property is set to a value greater than the MaxVersion property s value the MaxVersion property will be automatically changed to equal to this property s value In other words the MinVersion property s value is always less than or equal to the MaxVersion property s value See also the Symbol sizes section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_CompactMatrix article 150 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual A 1 91 MinVersion TBarcodeFmx2D_GridMatrix Specifies the minimum symbol version symbol size for a Grid Matrix barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxGridMatrix unit TGridMatrix Version 1 13 property MinVersion TGridMatrix Version Description There are thirteen sizes of Grid Matrix symbol referred to as version 1 to 13 in increasing order of size and data capacity The property specifies the minimum symbol version symbol size for a Grid Matrix barcode symbol It can be one of values from 1 to 13 They are defined in the pfmxGridMatrix unit The smallest symbol version symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between the minimum symbol version symbol size specified by this property and the maximum symbol version symbol size that s specified by the MaxVersion property The CurrentVersion property can be used to get the factual symbol version symbol size Note if the property is set to a value greater than the MaxVersion property s value the MaxVersion pr
101. the property to retrieve the factual symbol version symbol size of a Micro QR Code barcode symbol The property can be one of values from 1 to 4 denotations the factual version of a Micro QR Code 2D barcode symbol They are 116 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual defined in the pfmxMicroQRCode unit The property is read only See also the Symbol sizes section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroQRCode article A 1 35 CurrentVersion TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode Contains the factual symbol version symbol size of a QR Code barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxORCode unit TQRCode Version 1 40 property CurrentVersion TQRCode Version Description The smallest symbol version symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between the minimum symbol version symbol size specified by the MinVersion property and the maximum symbol version symbol size specified by the MaxVersion property Read the property to retrieve the factual symbol version symbol size of a QR Code barcode symbol The property can be one of values from 1 to 40 denotations the factual version of a QR Code 2D barcode symbol They are defined in the pfmxQRCode unit The property is read only See also the Symbol sizes section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode article A 1 36 Data Specifies a block of binary bytes data to encode it into the barcode symbol Syntax property Data TBytes Description
102. then caculate its check sum If you want to use other encoding scheme for example the ANSI UTF 16 please convert it in the OnEncode event handle or use the GetCheckSum Syntax 2 overloading method and specify the converted bytes sequence in its Data parameter If you want to caculate the check sum of a block of binary bytes data please use the GetCheckSum Syntax 2 overloading method See also the Barcode property article e AllowEscape Boolean Specifies whether to allow users to insert the escape sequences to the Barcode parameter value in order to place the function characters and additional control information 214 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual See also the Escape sequences section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroPDF 417 article and the AllowEscape property article e Invalidindex Integer If there is any invalid character in the barcode text that is specified by the Barcode parameter the parameter returns the position index of first invalid character Otherwise it returns the Verify_OK 1 This method can return one of these values these consts are defined in the pfmxCore2D unit o Verify_Invalidindex_AfterBarcode 4 If you use the OnEncode event handle to encode the barcode text to a bytes sequence in your own encoding scheme the Verify_Invalidindex_AfterBarcode 4 indicats that an invalid byte value is in the suffix codes of the bytes sequence o Verify_Invalidindex_BeforeBarcode 3 If yo
103. to Mixed sub mode of Text Compaction mode po906TextAlphaLatch The function codeword 906 represents a leading FNC1 character in First position mode Also it normally 157 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual implies a mode latch to Mixed sub mode of Text Compaction mode the value indicates that it implies a mode latch to Alpha sub mode of Text Compaction mode po907TextAlphaLatch The function codeword 907 represents a leading FNC1 character in First position mode Also it normally implies a mode latch to Numeric Compaction mode the value indicates that it implies a mode latch to Alpha sub mode of Text Compaction mode po908TextAlphaLatch The function codeword 908 followed by an application indicator single Latin alphabetic character from the set a to z and A to Z or a two digit number represents a leading FNC1 character in Second position mode Also it normally implies a mode latch to Mixed sub mode of Text Compaction mode the value indicates that it implies a mode latch to Alpha sub mode of Text compaction mode po910TextAlphaLatch The function codeword 910 indicates that the PDF417 symbol s data output shall conform with the Code128 specification Also it normally implies a mode latch to Mixed sub mode of Text compaction mode the value indicates that it implies a mode latch to Alpha sub mode of Text compaction mode po912TextAlphaLatch Normally the function codeword 912 represents a leading FNC1 character
104. to a value less than the MinSize property s value the MinSize property will be automatically changed to equal to this property s value In other words the MaxSize property s value is always greater than or equal to the MinSize property s value See also the Symbol sizes section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_DataMatrixECC200 article A 1 74 MaxSize TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroPDF417 Specifies the maximum symbol size for a MicroPDF417 barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxMicroPDF417 unit TMicroPDF417 Size mpSize 1 11 mpSize 1 14 mpSize 1 17 mpSize 1 20 mpSize 1 24 mpSize 1 28 mpSize 2 8 mpSize 2 11 mpSize 2 14 mpSize 2 17 mpSize 2 20 mpSize 2 23 mpSize 2 26 mpSize 3 6 mpSize 3 8 mpSize 3 10 mpSize 3 12 mpSize 3 15 mpSize 3 20 mpSize 3 26 mpSize 3 32 mpSize 3 38 mpSize 3 44 mpSize 4 4 mpSize 4 6 mpSize 4 8 mpSize 4 10 mpSize 4 12 mpSize 4 15 mpSize 4 20 mpSize 4 26 mpSize 4 32 mpSize 4 38 mpSize 4 44 property MaxSize TMicroPDF417 Size Description The property specifies the maximum symbol size for a MicroPDF417 barcode symbol It can be one of values from mpSize_1_11 to mpSize_4 44 These values denotation the number of columns and rows in every symbol size For example the symbol size value mpSize_4 10 denotations the MicroPDF417 symbol size is 10 stacked rows by 4 columns These symbol size values are defined in the pfmxMicroPDF417 unit The smallest symbol size that accommodates the barcod
105. to copy the barcode symbol to the system clipboard Syntax property Barcode2D TBarcodeFmx2D Description Use theBarcode2D property to specify aTBarcodeFmx2D component such as the TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode the TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 and the TBarcodeFmx2D_RSS14 Then execute the Copy method will copy the barcode symbol specified by the 2D barcode component to the system clipboard The TBarcodeFmx2D_MaxiCode component is not supported now Annex B Methods B 1 TBarcodeFmx2D B 1 1 Assign Copies a barcode component from another barcode component Syntax procedure Assign Source TPresistent override Description If the Source parameter is an object created from a subclass of TBarcodeFmx2D component class and the class is same to current barcode component class Assign copies all property values and event handles except the Locked and the Image properties from the source barcode component to current one If Source is any other type of object an EBarcodeFmx2DError exception occurs Parameters e Source TPersistent Specifies the source object B 1 2 Clear 189 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Erases current barcode symbol in the Timage control that s specified by the Image property Syntax function Clear UseSpaceColor Boolean false Boolean virtual Description The method erases the barcode symbol without erasing the background around it from the Tlmage control that s specified by the Image p
106. to excessive reflected noise in close proximity to the symbol a quiet zone of 2 modules to 4 modules is recommended Properties Methods Events e Image e Create e OnChange e Barcode e Destroy e OnEncode e Data e Assign e ParseBarcodelndex e Module e Clear e OnlinvalidChar e BarColor e Draw e OnlnvalidLength e SpaceColor e Size e OnlnvalidDataChar e Opacity e DrawTo e OnlnvalidDataLength e Orientation e DrawToSize e OnDrawBarcode e Stretch e Print e LeftMargin e PrintSize e TopMargin e BarcodeWidth e BarcodeHeight ShowQuietZone LeadingQuietZone TopQuietZone TrailingQuietZone BottomQuietZone EnableUpdateDB Locked Inversed MinSize MaxSize EncodeMode ECCLevel ECCLevelUpgrade CurrentSize Read only CurrentECCLevel Read only CurrentEncodeMode Read only 4 1 6 TBarcodeFmx2D_DataMatrixECC200 The component is used to create the Data Matrix ECC 200 2D barcode symbols It s defined in the pfmxDataMatrixEcc200 unit Data Matrix code is a two dimensional matrix barcode symbology consisting of black and white cells or modules arranged in either a 34 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual square or rectangular pattern The information to be encoded can be text or raw data Usual data size is from a few bytes up to 2 kilobytes The length of the encoded data depends on the symbol dimension used Error correction codes are added to increase symbol strength even if they are partially damaged they
107. used See also the Module property WLeftInPixels Single It s the margin between the barcode symbol and the left side of the canvas in pixels Draw DrawTo or dots Print The horizontal resolution is used If the quiet zones are represented they are included in the barcode symbol See also the LeftMargin property WTopinPixels Single It s the margin between the barcode symbol and the top side of the canvas in pixels Draw DrawTo or dots Print The vertical resolution is used If the quiet zones are represented they are included in the barcode symbol See also the TopMargin property WaAngle Single It s the angle to rotate the barcode symbol anticlockwise in degrees WShowdQuietZone Boolean Denotes whether the leading trailing top and bottom quiet zones are represented See also the 90 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual ShowQuietZone property WMirror Boolean Denotes whether the barcode symbol is reversed right to left horizontal mirror reversal See also the Mirrored property WBarcodeData TBytes The barcode text which will be encoded to the barcode symbol it s a byte array If you use the Barcode property or use Draw Size DrawTo Syntax 1 DrawToSize Syntax 1 Print Syntax 1 or PrintSize Syntax 1 method it is the UTF 8 byte sequences converted from the Barcode property value the BOM isn t included if you used the OnEncode event function it s equal to its Data parameter value
108. value In other words the MinSize property s value is always less than or equal to the MaxSize property s value See also the Symbol sizes section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroPDF417 article A 1 90 MinVersion TBarcodeFmx2D_CompactMatrix Specifies the minimum version for a Compact Matrix barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxCompactMatrix unit TCompactMatrix Version 1 32 property MinVersion TCompactMatrix Version Description There are 32 vertical sizes of Compact Matrix symbol referred to as version 1 to 32 in increasing order of symbol height and data capacity The property specifies the minimum version for a Compact Matrix barcode symbol It can be one of values from 1 to 32 They are defined in the pfmxCompactMatrix unit The minimum version together with the minimum number of segments specified by the MinSegments property indicates the minimum symbol size for a Compact Matrix barcode symbol And the maximum version specified by the MaxVersion property together with the maximum number of segments specified by the MaxSegments property indicates the maximum symbol size for the Compact Matrix barcode symbol Based on the stretch order specified by the StretchOrder property the smallest symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between the minimum symbol size and the maximum symbol size The CurrentVersion property can be used to get the factual version Note if
109. want to encode a block of binary bytes data into a barcode symbol B 1 7 1 DrawToSize Syntax 1 Returns the horizontal width and vertical height of a rotated barcode symbol in dots or pixels The barcode symbol is specified by the properties of this barcode component Syntax function DrawToSize var Width Height SymbolWidth SymbolHeight Single Module Single 0 Angle Single 1 Canvas TCanvas nil HDPI Integer 0 VDPI Integer 0 Integer overload virtual Description The method returns the horizontal width and vertical height of a rotated barcode symbol that is specified by properties of this barcode component in dots or pixels Parameters e Width Single Returns the horizontal width of the rotated barcode symbol in dots or pixels in the horizontal direction using the horizontal resolution If the quiet zones are displayed please read the ShowQuietZone property about whether or not the quiet zones will be displayed they are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the quiet zones are drawn in claSilver color in order to accentuate them 202 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual sry RI GEMENG Width Width Width Width Width Width ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode component the leading quiet zone and the trailing quiet zone are included always even if the ShowQuietZone property is set to
110. will be selected automatically and applied to entire symbol based on the barcode text in other words the barcode text to be encoded will be analysed and an appropriates lowest level highest encoding density encoding mode will be selected in order to minimize the symbol size and the encoding mode will not be switched in the sybmol Note the Kanji mode will not be used if the AllowKanjiMode property is set to false See also the Encoding modes section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroQRCode article A 1 58 EncodePolicy TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode Indicates how to use the encoding mode in a QR Code barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxQORCodeCom unit TQRCode EncodePolicy epMixingOptimal epMixingQuick epSingleMode property EncodePolicy TOQRCode EncodePolicy Description The QR Code symbology offers four kinds of encoding mode referred to as Numeric mode Alphanumeric mode Kanji mode and Byte mode respectively in decreasing order of encoding density This property indicates how to use these encoding mode by the component It can be one of these values defined in the pfmxQRCodeCom unit e epMixingOptimal All 256 8 bits values are encoded by switching automatically between all 4 the AllowKanjiMode property is set to true or 3 the Kanji mode will not be used if the AllowKanjiMode property is set to false encoding modes The optimal combination of encoding modes will be used in order to minimize the symbol size
111. 0 dmSize 22 22 dmSize 24 24 dmSize 26 26 dmSize 32 32 dmSize 36 36 dmSize 40 40 dmSize 44 44 dmSize 48 48 dmSize 52 52 dmSize 64 64 dmSize 72 72 dmSize 80 80 dmSize 88 88 dmSize 96 96 dmSize 104 104 dmSize 120 120 dmSize 132 132 dmSize 144 144 dmSize 8 18 dmSize 8 32 dmSize 12 26 dmSize 12 36 dmSize 16 36 dmSize 16 48 property MaxSize TDataMatrixEcc200 Size Description The property specifies the maximum symbol size for aData Matrix ECC 200 barcode symbol It can be one of values from dmSize_10_10 to dmSize_16_48 These values denotation the number of rows and columns in every symbol size For example the symbol size value dmSize_16_36 denotations the Data Matrix ECC 200 symbol size is 16 rows by 36 columns These symbol size values are defined in the pfmxDataMatrixEcc200 unit The smallest symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between the minimum symbol size specified by the MinSize property and the maximum symbol size specified by this property If the barcode text is so long that it cannot be encoded using the maximum symbol size specified by this property an OnInvalidLength the barcode text is specified in the Barcode property or an OnInvalidDataLength the barcode text is specified in the Data property event will occur 140 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual The CurrentSize property can be used to get the factual symbol size Note if the property is set
112. 00 140 barcode symbol It can be one of values from dmSize_09_09 to dmSize_49 49 These values denotation the number of rows and columns in every symbol size For example the symbol size value dmSize_29 29 denotations the Data Matrix ECC 000 140 symbol size is 29 rows by 29 columns These symbol size values are defined in the pfmxDataMatrix unit 148 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual The smallest symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between the minimum symbol size specified by this property and the maximum symbol size that s specified by the MaxSize property The CurrentSize property can be used to get the factual symbol size Note if the property is set to a value greater than the MaxSize property s value the MaxSize property will be automatically changed to equal to this property s value In other words the MinSize property s value is always less than or equal to the MaxSize property s value See also the Symbol sizes section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_DataMatrix article A 1 88 MinSize TBarcodeFmx2D_DataMatrixECC200 Specifies the minimum symbol size for a Data Matrix ECC 200 barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxDataMatrixEcc200 unit TDataMatrixEcc200 Size dmSize 10 10 dmSize 12 12 dmSize 14 14 dmSize 16 16 dmSize 18 18 dmSize 20 20 dmSize 22 22 dmSize 24 24 dmSize 26 26 dmSize 32 32 dmSize 36 36 dmSize 40 40 dmSize 44 44 dmSize 48 48 dmS
113. 12 stacked rows by 3 columns 114 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual These symbol size values are defined in the pfmxMicroPDF417 unit The property is read only See also the Symbol sizes section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroPDF417 article A 1 31 CurrentVersion TBarcodeFmx2D_CompactMatrix Contains the factual version value of a Compact Matrix barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxCompactMatrix unit TCompactMatrix Version 1 32 property CurrentVersion TCompactMatrix Version Description There are 32 vertical sizes of Compact Matrix symbol referred to as version 1 to 32 in increasing order of symbol height and data capacity The minimum version specified by the MinVersion property and the minimum number of segments specified by the MinSegments property indicate the minimum symbol size for a Compact Matrix barcode symbol The maximum version specified by the MaxVersion property and the maximum number of segments specified by the MaxSegments property indicate the maximum symbol size for the Compact Matrix barcode symbol Based on the stretch order specified by the StretchOrder property the smallest symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between the minimum symbol size and the maximum symbol size Read the property to retrieve the factual version value of the Compact Matrix barcode symbol The property can be one of values from 1 to 32 denotations the
114. 2107 1314 azSize_131 27 131 131 2818 2256 1407 azSize_135 28 135 135 3007 2407 1501 azSize_139 29 139 139 3205 2565 1600 azSize_143 30 143 143 3409 2728 1702 azSize_147 31 147 147 3616 2894 1806 azSize_151 32 151 151 3832 3067 1914 Note e Full range symbols with 1 2 or 3 layers azSize_19 azSize_23 and azSize_27 are useful only for reader initialization e The data capacities shown are based on the recommended error correction levels 23 of symbol capacity plus 3 codewords You can use the MinSize and the MaxSize properties to specify the minimum and maximum sizes for an Aztec Code symbol The smallest symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between the minimum and maximum symbol sizes If the barcode text does not fill the maximum data capacity of the Aztec Code symbol remaining data capacity of the symbol will be used as excess error correction If the barcode text is so long that it cannot be encoded using the maximum symbol size specified by the MaxSize property an OnInvalidLength or OnInvalidDataLength event will occur The CurrentSize property can be used to get the factual symbol size Quiet zones No quiet zone is required outside the bounds of the Aztec Code symbol So the minimum values of LeadingQuietZone TrailingQuietZone TopQuietZone and BottomQuietZone properties are equal to 0 Error checking and correcting ECC 2D Barcode FMX Components User Ma
115. 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Version 3 1 2 713 Copyright 2001 2015 Han soft Corporation All rights reserved 2015 12 11 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Table of Contents Teor COME E eea 1 Chapter 1 Introduction 8 E e 8 1 2 Main features Chapter 2 Installation Eugen 10 2 1 Trial D 10 2 2 Registered user 10 Chapter 3 Quick start Baren 12 3 1 How to use the barcode components 3 2 How to use the barcode components with a database Ee 12 3 3 How to print a barcode symbol to paper 13 3 4 How to save a barcode symbol to picture file EE 1 3 3 5 How to copy a barcode symbol to the clipboard GE 14 3 6 How to encode the UNICODE text in a 2D barcode symbol Chapter 4 Reference ccc 16 4 1 TBarcodeFmx2D 16 E TE a a E a E E E 16 EE 21 4 1 3 TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K 4 1 4 TBarcodeFmx2D_CompactMatrix 27 4 1 5 Barcode mA D DAEN aiee 31 4 1 6 TBarcodeFmx2D_DataMatrixE CC200 e 34 4 1 T TBarcodeFmx2D_GridMatrix ssc ceNaee 39 4 1 8 TBarcodeFmx2D_HanXinCode 4 1 9 TBarcodeFmx2D_MaxiCode 46 4 1 10 TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroPDF41 Zoi 51 4 1 11 TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroQRCoder smu 59 4 1 12 TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF41 Zone 62 4 1 13 TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode 70 4 1 14 TBarcodeFmx2D_RSS14 79 4 1 15 TBarcodeFmx2D_RSSExpanded ssn 82 4 1 16 TBarcodeFmx2D_RSS Limited EE 84 E Bee E 86 4 2 1 TSaveFmx2D_Bmp 86 4 2 2 TSaVEFMX2D_ Emer 87 42 3 TSaveFmx2D_Eps KE 87 4304 TSaveFmx2D_ Gif e 87 42 5 TSaveFmx2D_Jpg ee 88 2
116. 3 numeric characters and the check digit isn t required in the barcode text Note the leading Application Identifier 01 is implied and is not encoded in the symbol so it isn t required in the barcode text See also the Check digit section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_RSS14 and TBarcodeFmx2D_RSSLimited articles 98 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual A 1 5 AutoMode TBarcodeFmx2D_MaxiCode Specifies whether to automatically select the mode for a MaxiCode barcode symbol Syntax property AutoMode Boolean Description The property specifies whether to automatically select the mode for a MaxiCode barcode symbol depending on the barcode text and the Mode property value If the property is set to true the TBarcodeFmx2D_MaxiCode component will automatically select the suitable mode depending on the barcode text and the value of Mode property If the Mode property is set to mode 2 or 3 the factual mode will be selected between mode 2 and 3 depending on the postal code field in the barcode text If the Mode property is set to mode 4 the factual mode will be selected between mode 4 and 5 depending on the length of barcode text If the length of barcode text is so short that can be encoded by using mode 5 the mode 5 will be used in order to employ enhanced error correction otherwise the mode 4 will be used in order to accommodate more barcode text If the Mode property is set to mode 5 the mode 5 will be selected alwa
117. 417 Returns the check sum of a barcode text that will be encoded into a series of structured append symbols The value will be used in the structured append block and the structured append block will be used by each symbol in the series of MicroPDF417 structured 213 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual append symbols There are two different overloading methods Syntax 1 and Syntax 2 e Syntax 1 Returns the check sum value of a barcode text The barcode text is specified in the Barcode parameter It is of type string The Barcode parameter is in fact an UnicodeString By default the unicode string will be converted to an UTF 8 bytes sequence the BOM isn t included then caculate its check sum If you want to use other encoding scheme for example the ANSI UTF 16 please convert it in the OnEncode event handle or use the GetCheckSum Syntax 2 overloading method and specify the converted bytes sequence in its Data parameter If you want to caculate the check sum of a block of binary bytes data please use the GetCheckSum Syntax 2 overloading method e Syntax 2 Returns the check sum value of a barcode text The barcode text is specified in the Data parameter It is of type TBytes it is in fact a byte array You can use the method to caculate the check sum of a block of binary bytes data See also the Sturctured append section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroPDF417 article B 1 8 1 GetCheckSum Syntax 1 TBarcodeFmx2D
118. 5 in accordance with ISO 8859 1 1998 may also be encoded This is done by internally using the FNC4 character together with code sets A B and C e 4 function characters and PAD character o o o o o FNC1 The FNC1 character following an application standard agreed with AIM International identifies a symbol which conforms to a specific industry standard FNC1 shall be used as defined in the EAN UCC General Specifications either in the first position or implied by the mode character The FNC1 character may also be used as a field separator in which case it will be represented in the transmitted message as GS character ASCII value 29 The escape sequence 1 can be used to place the FNC1 character to barcode text FNC2 It s used internally to create a message append defined below The escape sequence 2 can be used to place the FNC2 character to barcode text In general you shouldn t place the FNC2 to the barcode text it s used internally by the component when the symbol is in a message append See also the Message append section below FNC3 Initialize This instructs the reader to interpret the data contained in the symbol for reader initialization or programming The FNC3 may be placed anywhere within the symbol The escape sequence 3 can be used to place the FNC3 character to barcode text FNC4 It s used internally together with code sets A B and C to encode the extended ASCII characters ASCII values from 128 to 2
119. 55 The FNC4 character cannot be placed to barcode text directly it s used internally by the component PAD If the barcode text does not fill the maximum data capacity of a Code 16K symbol PAD characters will be added automatically to fill the remaining data capacity of the symbol Also you can place a PAD character anywhere in the barcode symbol by using the escape sequence p in order to create the special Code 16K symbol for closed system The AllowEscape property should be set to true in order to place the functions characters or the PAD character Initial modes Code 16K has initial modes which are used to specify the initial code set and may also represent an implied leading FNC1 character or implied leading SHIFT B character as shown in following table The code set will be automatically switched if a character is encountered that cannot be encoded by current code set And implied characters function as if they were actual symbol characters but don not occupy any space There are seven kinds of initial mode from 0 to 6 and a kind of extended data length mode The initial mode values from emCodeA to emExtended corresponding to these modes are defined in the pfmxCode16K unit These modes and their values are listed in following table 24 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Initial Value E Implied Description Mode set character P 0 emCodeA A None The code set will be automatically switched if anothe
120. 7 barcode symbol in order to efficiently encode a single Transformation ECI sequence at the start of barcode text Syntax property UseECIDescriptor Boolean Description Because MicroPDF417 is intended for applications where symbol size is critical it is expected that MicroPDF417 will frequently be used in conjunction with a Transformation ECI appropriate for the data requirements of the application MicroPDF417 supports efficient encoding of a single Transformation ECI sequence at the start of each data stream by using an optional ECI Descriptor that can be encoded at the start of the first symbol of each MicroPDF417 encoded data stream The property specifies whether to use the ECI Descriptor in a MicroPDF417 symbol This Transformation ECI co exists with the Interpretative ECI whether default or explicitly encoded currently in effect since Interpretative ECls and Transformation ECls have independent scopes Please use the escape sequence e lt ECI_Number gt to place a Transformation ECI at the beginning of the barcode text at the start of the symbol or at the start of the first symbol of a structured append series If the property is set to true the Transformation ECI sequence will be ecncoded as an ECI Descriptor Otherwist it will be encoded using the standard ECI encoding method See also the Extended Channel Interpretation ECI section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroPDF417 article A 2 TSaveFmx2D A 2 1 Barcode2D TSaveFmx2D
121. 9 1729 39 173 173 M 5313 3220 2213 1362 Q 3791 2298 1579 972 H 2927 1774 1219 750 L 7089 4296 2953 1817 40 177 177 M 5596 3391 2331 1435 Q 3993 2420 1663 1024 H 3057 1852 1273 784 If the barcode text does not fill the maximum data capacity of the QR Code symbol remaining data capacity of the symbol will be filled by using PAD characters If the barcode text is so long that it cannot be encoded using the maximum symbol size specified by the MaxVersion property an OnInvalidLength or OnInvalidDataLength event will occur Quiet zones The minimum quiet zone is equal to 4 modules on all four sides So the minimum values of LeadingQuietZone TrailingQuietZone TopQuietZone and BottomQuietZone properties are equal to 4 Character set e All 8 bit values can be encoded The default interpretation shall be o For values 0 to 127 in accordance with the U S national version of ISO IEC 646 ASCII o For values 128 255 in accordance with ISO IEC 8859 1 Extended ASCII This interpretation corresponds to ECI 000003 e The FNC1 characters can be encoded for compatibility with some existing applications In QR Code symbology there are two mode FNC1 characters to identify symbols encoding messages formatted according to specific predefined industry or application specifications o First position FNC1 in this mode indicator identifies symbols encoding data formatted according to the GS1 Application Identifiers standard For t
122. BarcodeWidth and BarcodeHeight parameters to specify the module size If the quiet zones are printed please read the ShowQuietZone parameter section below about whether or not the quiet zones will be printed they are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the quiet zones are printed in claSilver color in order to accentuate them ef e Height ell ShowQuietZone False Angle 0 30 90 et L E x A ShowQuietZone Tue Angle 0 30 90 For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode component the leading quiet zone and the trailing quiet zone are included always even if the ShowQuietZone parameter is set to false See diagram the quiet zones are printed in claSilver color in order to accentuate them ShowQuietZone False Angle 0 30 90 ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 e SymbolWidth Single Returns the distance between the leading and trailing of the rotated barcode symbol in millimeter The value is calculated based on the module size You can use one of the Module BarcodeWidth and BarcodeHeight parameters to specify the module size If the quiet zones are printed please read the ShowQuietZone parameter section below about whether or not the quiet zones will be printed they are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the quiet zones are printed in claSilver color in order to accentuate them SymbolWidth gt SymbolWidth Uess SS A ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True
123. CCLevel property and the symbol size will not be increased The CurrentECCLevel property can be used to get the factual error correction code level If the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to false the error correction code level specified by the ECCLevel property will be used always The value of CurrentECCLevel property is always equal to the value of ECCLevel property See also the Error checking and correcting ECC section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_GridMatrix article A 1 51 ECCLevelUpgrade TBarcodeFmx2D_HanXinCode For the Han Xin Code barcode symbols the property specifies whether to use the remaining capacity to automatically upgrade the error correction code level in order to increase symbols strength Syntax property ECCLevelUpgrade Boolean Description For aHan Xin Code barcode symbol the symbol size may be determined depending on the barcode text length and the error correction code level specified by the ECCLevel property And the barcode text and the error correction code don t usually fill the maximum data capacity of the symbol the property specifies whether to use the remaining capacity to automatically upgrade the error correction code level in order to increase symbols strength If the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to true the highest error correction code level that can be accommodated by current symbol size will by used for creating more robust symbols Note the new level is always no lower than the level spec
124. CITT 16 polynomial computed over the entire source file in decimal string format You can use the GetCheckSum method to calculate the checksum for a source file Note the field is optional The ECI escape sequences 900 901 902 and 924 can be used in the File Name Sender and Address fields If you want place the comma in these fields please use the escape sequence instead An empty string indicates an unused optional field the subsequent comma can be omitted if all fields of succeeding are unused otherwise the comma is required All unused fields at the end can be omitted The control block may only be placed once in the barcode text Also it shall be placed at end of the barcode text The OnInvalidChar or OnInvalidDataChar event will occur if the control block be placed more than once or it isn t placed at end of the barcode text The following is an example of structured append symbol Position index 2 File ID 001 287 023 File name Unused Segment count 5 Time stame 05 30 00 GMT on 3 December 2008 Sender Unused Address USA File size Unused Checksum Unused ABCDEFGHIJKLMN s 2 001287023 5 2008 12 03 05 30 00 USA Note if the segment count is unused a structured append terminator t escape sequence is required in last symbol within the set of structured append symbols Otherwise it s optional The t escape sequence shall be placed at the end of the barcode text after the str
125. Code 2D Barcode symbols It s defined in the pfmxMaxiCode unit MaxiCode is a public domain machine readable symbol system originally created and used by United Parcel Service sx E a in 1992 It was designed for tracking and managing the shipment of packages and can be quickly automatically Z scanned on high speed conveyor lines MaxiCode is a fixed size symbology A MaxiCode symbol appears as a 1 11 1 054 inchs square with a bullseye in the middle surrounded by a pattern of hexagonal dots modules Each hexagonal dot module measures 0 035 0 041 inches Modes MaxiCode has modes which are used to define the format of the message and the level of error correction within a symbol e Mode 2 It encodes a structured carrier message with a numeric postal code and an optional secondary message A numeric postal code a country code and a class of service code assigned by the carrier are included in the structured carrier message The symbol employs enhanced error correction for the structured carrier message and standard error correction for the secondary message see also the Error checking and correcting ECC section below It is designed for use in the transport industry Primary use is US domestic destinations The formats of mode 2 barcode text are specified in the following list o gt RS 01 GS YYPPPPPPPPP GS CCC GS SSS GS MESSAGE RS EOT a YY Date year 2 digits PPPPPPPPP Numeric postal code up to 9 digits Only
126. Color SpaceColor TAlphaColor ShowQuietZone Boolean Left Top Module Single Angle Single 0 Opacity Single 1 BarcodeWidth Single 0 BarcodeHeight Single 0 Integer overload virtual Description Prints a barcode symbol that is specified by the parameters of this method to the printer Parameters e Data TBytes Specifies the barcode text It is of type TBytes it is in fact a byte array You can specify a block of binary bytes data to the parameter in order to encode it into a barcode symbol For the TBarcodeFmx2D_RSS14 and TBarcodeFmx2D_RSSLimited components if the property AutoCheckDigit is set to true the check digit doesn t need to be included in the parameter otherwise the check digit can be specified by you in the parameter See also the Barcode and Data properties BarColor TAlphaColor In general the Inversed property is set to false In this case the parameters specifies the color for all bars Stacked 2D barcode symbology and Linear 1D barcode symbology or dark modules Matrix 2D barcode symbology in the barcode symbol If the Inversed property is set to true it specifies the color for all spaces Stacked 2D barcode symbology and Linear 1D barcode symbology or light modules Matrix 2D barcode symbology in the barcode symbol Also if the ShowQuietZone parameter value is set to true the leading quiet zone trailing quiet zone top quiet zone and bottom quiet zone are printed using the color Th
127. D Barcode FMX Components User Manual 4 2 6 TSAVEFMx2D_Priges nnn 88 4 2 7 TSAVEFMXx2D_Syge nnn 88 4 2 8 TSaveFmx2D_W mf 89 4 3 TCopyFmx2D GE 89 4 4 TUserWorkArea ae 89 Chapter 5 FAQS 92 5 1 How to download the full version 92 5 2 forgot my license Ke 92 Chapter 6 Information E 93 6 1 SUP Porte 93 EA AE EE E 93 6 3 Contact us 94 6 4 End User License Agreement I 94 ANNEX A Bropertes EE 97 Aea d F Ee 97 A 1 1 AllowEscape 97 A 1 2 AllowKanjiMode TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroQRCode 97 A 1 3 AllowKanjiMode TBarcodeEmx2D_QRCode mn 98 A1 4 AutoCheckDigit TBarcodeFmx2D_RSS14 TBarcodeFmx2D_RSSLimited ee 98 A 1 5 AutoMode TBarcodeFmx2D_MaxiCode WEE 99 A 1 6 Barcode 99 A 1 7 BarcodeHeight 100 A 1 8 BarcodeW idth be 101 A 1 9 BarColor Kee 103 AA410 Bottom QuietZone EE 103 A 1 11 BytesAlwaysBackToUpper TBarcodeFmx2D_AztecCode 104 A 1 12 Compact TBarcodeEmx2D_PDF41 7 104 A 1 13 CurrentColumns TBarcodeFMx2D_PDF4 17 n 105 A 1 14 CurrentECCLevel TBarcodeFmx2D_CompactMaitrix muni 105 A 1 15 CurrentECCLevel TBarcodeFmx2D_DataMatrix 106 A 1 16 CurrentECCLevel TBarcodeFmx2D_GridMatrix en 106 A 1 17 CurrentECCLevel TBarcodeEmx2D_HanXinCode 107 A 1 18 CurrentECCLevel TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroQRCode nnn 108 A 1 19 CurrentECCLevel TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF41 7 nnn 108 A 1 20 CurrentECCLevel TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode 109 A 1 21 CurrentEncodeMode TBarcodeFmx2D_ DataMatrix em 109 A 1 22 CurrentMode TBarcodeFmx2D_Code1 6K nnn 110 A 1 23 CurrentMode
128. D_Code16K barcode component the leading quiet zone and the trailing quiet zone are included always even if the ShowQuietZone property is set to false See diagram the quiet zones are printed in claSilver color in order to accentuate them 238 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual ShowQuietZone False Angle 0 30 90 ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 e SymbolWidth Single Returns the distance between the leading and trailing of the rotated barcode symbol in millimeter The value is calculated based on the module size You can use one of the Module BarcodeWidth and BarcodeHeight parameters to specify the module size If the quiet zones are printed please read the ShowQuietZone property about whether or not the quiet zones will be printed they are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the quiet zones are printed in claSilver color in order to accentuate them Be o wapimloquiks it ee ShowQuietZone False Angle 0 30 90 po ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode component the leading quiet zone and the trailing quiet zone are included always even if the ShowQuietZone property is set to false See diagram the quiet zones are printed in claSilver color in order to accentuate them gege HI LUNA OUT TTT TE i TH ShowQuietZone False Angle 0 30 90 ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 See also the BarcodeWidt
129. Encoding modes section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_DataMatrix article A 1 57 EncodePolicy TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroQRCode 129 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Indicates how to use the encoding mode in a Micro QR Code barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxQORCodeCom unit TQRCode EncodePolicy epMixingOptimal epMixingQuick epSingleMode property EncodePolicy TQRCode_ EncodePolicy Description The Micro QR Code symbology offers four kinds of encoding mode referred to as Numeric mode Alphanumeric mode Kanji mode and Byte mode respectively in decreasing order of encoding density This property indicates how to use these encoding mode by the component It can be one of these values defined in the pfmxQRCodeCom unit e epMixingOptimal All 256 8 bits values are encoded by switching automatically between all 4 the AllowKanjiMode property is set to true or 3 the Kanji mode will not be used if the AllowKanjiMode property is set to false encoding modes The optimal combination of encoding modes will be used in order to minimize the symbol size epMixingQuick All 256 8 bits values are encoded by switching automatically between all 4 the AllowKanjiMode property is set to true or 3 the Kanji mode will not be used if the AllowKanjiMode property is set to false encoding modes The combination of encoding modes may not be the optimal one in order to optimize encoding speed epSingleMode The encoding mode
130. Extended data length mode The extended data length mode is used to encode data beyond the capacity of a single Code 16K symbol In the extended data length mode up to 107 Code 16K 16 rows symbols may be arranged to convey more data up to 8025 ASCII characters or 16050 numeric digits If a symbol is part of these extended data length mode symbols this shall be indicated by extended data length mode block in barcode text The escape sequence m lt Index gt lt Amount gt is used to place the extended data length mode block to the barcode text e Index The position index of the symbol within the set of Code 16K symbols in the extended data length mode It s an integer between 1 and 107 including the boundaries in string format e Amount The total amount of the symbol within the set of Code 16K symbols in the extended data length mode It s an integer between 2 and 107 including the boundaries in string format 25 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual The AllowEscape property should be set to true in order to place the extended data length mode block The extended data length mode block may be placed only once in the barcode text Also it shall be placed at beginning of the barcode text The OnInvalidChar or OnInvalidDataChar event will occur if the extended data length mode block be placed more than once or it isn t placed at beginning of the barcode text The following is an example of extended data length mode symbol m 2
131. F417 Option poIgnoreShiftBeforeECI poFirst903TextAlphaLatch poFirst904TextMixedLatch po906TextAlphaLatch po907TextAlphaLatch po908TextAlphaLatch po910TextAlphaLatch po912TextAlphaLatch po914TextAlphaLatch po915TextAlphaLatch poFirstFNC1MatchAI01 poMicroPDF417Explicit901 Defined in the pfmxPDF417Com unit TPDF417 Options set of TPDF417 Option function GetCheckSum Barcode string AllowEscape Boolean var InvalidIndex Integer Options TPDF417 Options string virtual Description The method returns the check sum of a barcode text that will be encoded into a Macro PDF417 set The value will be used in the macro PDF417 control information block and the macro PDF417 control information block will be used by each symbol in the Macro PDF417 set See also the Macro PDF417 section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 article Parameters Barcode string It s the original input text before division into the each symbol in the Macro PDF417 set It is of type string and it is in fact an UnicodeString By default the unicode string will be converted to an UTF 8 bytes sequence the BOM isn t included then caculate its check sum If you want to use other encoding scheme for example the ANSI UTF 16 please convert it in the OnEncode event handle or use the GetCheckSum Syntax 2 overloading method and specify the converted bytes sequence in its Data parameter If you want to caculate the check sum of a block of binary byte
132. FNC2 is used to implement structured append function in order to handle larger messages than are practical in a single symbol The escape sequence 2 lt File_Id gt lt Amount gt lt Index gt is used to place the FNC2 character and other structured append information collectively referred to as structured append block to barcode text See also the Escape sequences and Structured append sections below o FNC3 The FNC3 is used to indicates that the symbol encodes a message used to program the reader system The escape sequence 3 can be used to placed the FNC3 character to barcode text See also the Escape sequences section below o ECI ECI indicator blocks is for the standardized encoding of message interpretation information The escape sequence e lt ECI_Number gt can be used to place the ECI indicator block to barcode text See also the Extended Channel Interpretation ECI section below The AllowEscape property should be set to true in order to place these non data characters Escape sequences If the AllowEscape property is set to true following escape sequences are supported by the component you can insert them to the barcode text e Insert a backslash to barcode text e 0 Insert an AIM FNC1 character to barcode text in order to encode AIM structural data similar to GS1 It shall be placed at beginning of the barcode text and it shall not be used with GS1 FNC1 1 or FNC3 3 If it is used togethe
133. InMM TSaveFmx2D_Emf Specifies the horizontal width of the reference device for an Enhanced Metafile Format EMF file was generated by the TSaveFmx2D_Emf component in millimetres 183 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Syntax property DeviceWidthInMM DWord Description The property specifies the horizontal width of the reference device in millimetres when use the TSaveFmx2D_Emf component to save a barcode symbol to an Enhanced Metafile Format EMF file Note the property cannot be set to zero if you set it to zero an ESave2DError exception occurs A 2 10 DeviceWidthinPixel TSaveFmx2D_Emf Specifies the horizontal width of the reference device for an Enhanced Metafile Format EMF file was generated by the TSaveFmx2D_Emf component in pixels Syntax property DeviceWidthInPixel DWord Description The property specifies the horizontal width of the reference device in pixels when use the TSaveFmx2D_Emf component to save a barcode symbol to an Enhanced Metafile Format EMF file Note the property cannot be set to zero if you set it to zero an ESave2DError exception occurs A 2 11 DeviceWidthInUM TSaveFmx2D_Emf Specifies the horizontal width of the reference device for an Enhanced Metafile Format EMF file was generated by the TSaveFmx2D_Emf component in micrometres Syntax property DeviceWidthInUM DWord Description The property specifies the horizontal width of the reference dev
134. MX Components User Manual Chapter 6 Information 6 1 Support This help is designed to be used on screen Many troubleshooting questions can be answered by this help If your question is not covered in the help document please read the next section Technical Support If you have a specific technical issue if you would like to send general comments about the product please reads the following e Please read the Frequently Asked Question in our web site to see whether your question is already answered e Please visit the Support page in our web site and submit your problem to us e You may email the technical support issues to support han soft com The registered users will get priority so include your order number in the email to ensure a prompt response In order to provide more accurate service please provides the following information e Whether the problem can be reproduced How is it reproduced e What development system do you use e Which version of 2D Barcode FMX components do you use Feedback If you have any comments or concerns about this product please send them to feedback han soft com Your feedback is very important for us because it helps to us to make our software better and more efficient Many of its features have been heavily influenced by comments from users So if you have a grand idea for a new feature or a better way of doing something please drop us a note 6 2 Purchase The 2D Barc
135. MicroQRCode Specifies whether to allow the Kanji mode to be used when encoding the barcode data into a Micro QR Code symbol Syntax property AllowKanjiMode Boolean Description Micro QR Code symbology has four encoding modes as Numeric mode Alphanumeric mode Kanji mode and Byte mode respectively in decreasing order of encoding density The Kanji mode can encode the Kanji characters more effectively The property specifies whether to allow the Kanji mode to be used when encoding the barcode data into a Micro QR Code symbol If the property is set to true the component will automatically select the encoding mode between Kanji mode and Byte mode when the Kanji characters are encountered in order to minimize the symbol size Otherwise all Kanji characters are always encoded in Byte 97 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual mode See also the Encoding modes section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroQRCode article A 1 3 AllowKanjiMode TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode Specifies whether to allow the Kanji mode to be used when encoding the barcode data into a QR Code symbol Syntax property AllowKanjiMode Boolean Description QR Code symbology has four encoding modes as Numeric mode Alphanumeric mode Kanji mode and Byte mode respectively in decreasing order of encoding density The Kanji mode can encode the Kanji characters more effectively The property specifies whether to allow the Kanji mode to be used when encoding the barcod
136. MinVersion property s value is always less than or equal to the MaxVersion property s value See also the Symbol sizes section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_HanXinCode article A 1 93 MinVersion TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroQRCode Specifies the minimum symbol version symbol size for a Micro QR Code barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxMicroORCode unit TMicroQRCode Version 1 4 property MinVersion TMicroQRCode Version Description The property specifies the minimum symbol version symbol size for a Micro QR Code barcode symbol It can be one of values from 1 to 4 they are defined in the pfmxMicroQRCode unit The smallest symbol version symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between the minimum symbol version symbol size specified by this property and the maximum symbol version symbol size that s specified by the MaxVersion property The CurrentVersion property can be used to get the factual symbol version symbol size Note if the property is set to a value greater than the MaxVersion property s value the MaxVersion property will be automatically changed to equal to this property s value In other words the MinVersion property s value is always less than or equal to the MaxVersion property s value See also the Symbol sizes section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroQRCode article A 1 94 MinVersion TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode Specifies the minimum symbol version symbol size
137. Png unit TPngEmbedBarcodeText pebNone pebText pebCompressedText property EmbedBarcodeText TPngEmbedBarcodeText Description The property specifies whether to embed the barcode text to a Portable Network Graphics PNG picture file This property can be one of these values defined in the pfmxSave2D_Png unit e pebNone Don t embed the barcode text to the picture file e pebText Embed the barcode text to the picture file directly e pebCompressedText Compress the barcode text then embed it to the picture file Note only the encoded barcode text will be embed to the picture file A 2 14 Interlaced TSaveFmx2D_Png TSaveFmx2D_Gif Specifies whether to generate the interlaced picture file when use the TSaveFmx2D_Gif or TSaveFmx2D_Png component to save a barcode symbol Syntax property Interlaced Boolean Description The Graphics Interchange Format GIF and Portable Network Graphics PNG allow the images is interlaced i e that the order of the raster lines in its data block is not sequential This allows a partial display of the image that can be recognized before the full image is painted The property specifies whether to generate the interlaced images file 185 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual A 2 15 LogicUnitsPerInch TSaveFmx2D_Wmf Specifies the number of logical units per inch when use the TSaveFmx2D_Wmf component to save a barcode symbol in placeable Windows Metafile Format WMF Syntax
138. QuietZone properties are equal to 0 Character set 80 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual e All 10 numeric characters i e 0 through 9 Check digit All styles of RSS 14 symbols have a check digit it is a form of redundancy check used for error detection It consists of a single numeric character computed from the other character in the EAN UCC item identification number If the AutoCheckDigit property is set to false the check digit shall be included in the barcode text Otherwise It wii be appended automatically by the component so the check digit isn t required in the barcode text Data capactiy All styles of RSS 14 symbologies encode the full GS1 14 digit EAN UCC item identification number Global Trade Item Numbers GTINs in a symbol including a leading indicator digit 12 data characters GS1 Company Prefix and the Item Reference and a check digit Note A leading Application Identifier 01 is implied and is not encoded in the symbol so it isn t required in the barcode text If the AutoCheckDigit property is set to false the check digit shall be included in the barcode text so the length of barcode text shall is 14 numeric characters and the last numeric character in the barcode text is the check digit If the AutoCheckDigit property is set to true the check digit will be appended automatically by the component so the length of barcode text shall is 13 numeric characters and the check digit isn t required in t
139. Rows property and minumum number of columns specified by the MinColumns property the ratio is height to width of the symbol excluding quiet zones Between the minimum symbol size specified by the MinColumns and MinRows properties and the maximum symbol size specified by the MaxColumns and MaxRows properties only symbol sizes that they approximately match the aspect ratio will be used According to the data capacity in increasing order of recovery capacity the smallest symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected If the barcode text cannot be accommodated by the maximum symbol size specified by the MaxColumns and MaxRows properties an OnInvalidLength the barcode text is specified in the Barcode property or OnInvalidDataLength the barcode text is specified in the Data property event will occur soFixAspectWithQuietZones An overall aspect ratio is specified by the minimum number of stacked rows specified by the MinRows property and minumum number of columns specified by the MinColumns property the ratio is height to width of the symbol including quiet zones Between the minimum symbol size specified by the MinColumns and MinRows properties and the maximum symbol size specified by the MaxColumns and MaxRows properties only symbol sizes that they approximately match the aspect ratio will be used According to the data capacity in increasing order of recovery capacity the smallest symbol size that accom
140. SaveFmx2D_Emf component to save a barcode symbol to an Enhanced Metafile Format EMF file Note the property cannot be set to zero if you set it to zero an ESave2DError exception occurs A 2 7 DeviceHeightInPixel TSaveFmx2D_Emf Specifies the vertical height of the reference device for an Enhanced Metafile Format EMF file was generated by the TSaveFmx2D_Emf component in pixels Syntax property DeviceHeightInPixel DWord Description The property specifies the vertical height of the reference device in pixels when use the TSaveFmx2D_Emf component to save a barcode symbol to an Enhanced Metafile Format EMF file Note the property cannot be set to zero if you set it to zero an ESave2DError exception occurs A 2 8 DeviceHeightInUM TSaveFmx2D_Emf Specifies the vertical height of the reference device for an Enhanced Metafile Format EMF file was generated by the TSaveFmx2D_Emf component in micrometres Syntax property DeviceHeightInUM DWord Description The property specifies the vertical height of the reference device in micrometres when use the TSaveFmx2D_Emf component to save a barcode symbol to an Enhanced Metafile Format EMF file The DeviceHeightInUM and the DeviceWidthInUm properties add the ability to measure device surfaces in micrometers which enhances the resolution and scalability of Enhanced Metafile Format EMF files If one of them is set to zero they will be ignored A 2 9 DeviceWidth
141. Segments property s value See also the Symbol sizes section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_CompactMatrix article A 1 71 MaxSize TBarcodeFmx2D_AztecCode Specifies the maximum symbol size for an Aztec Code barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxAztecCode unit TAztecCode Size azSize 15Compact azSize 19 azSize 19Compact azSize 23 azSize_ 23Compact azSize 27 azSize 27Compact azSize 31 azSize 37 azSize 41 azSize 45 azSize 49 azSize 53 azSize 57 azSize 61 azSize_ ei azSize 71 azSize_75 azSize_79 azSize_ 83 azSize 87 azSize 91 azSize 95 azSize 101 azSize 105 azSize 109 azSize 113 azSize 117 azSize 121 azSize 125 azSize_ 131 azSize_ 135 azSize_ 139 azSize 143 azSize_ 147 azSize_ 151 property MaxSize TAztecCode Size Description The property specifies the maximum symbol size for an Aztec Code barcode symbol It can be one of values from azSize_15Compact to azSize_151 These values denotation the symbol format number of rows and columns in every symbol size For example the symbol size value azSize_91 denotations the Aztec Code symbol size is 91 rows by 91 columns not in compact format These symbol size values are defined in the pfmxAztecCode unit The smallest symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between the minimum symbol size specified by the MinSize property and the maximum symbol size specified by this property If the barcode text is so long
142. ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Opacity Single Specifies the transparency level of entire barcode symbol where 1 is not transparant at all 0 5 is 50 see through and 0 is completely transparent The parameter defaults to 1 if it is not provided meaning not transparant at all Note if the Inversed property is set to false you can use the alpha channel of the SpaceColor parameter value to specify the transparency level of bakcground color spaces or light modules and quiet zones and use the alpha channel of the BarColor 235 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual parameter value to specify the transparency level of foreground color bars or dark modules If the Inversed property is set to true you can use the alpha channel of the BarColor parameter value to specify the transparency level of bakcground color spaces or light modules and quiet zones and use the alpha channel of the SpaceColor parameter value to specify the transparency level of fore ground color bars or dark modules BarcodeWidth Single Specifies the barcode symbol width the distance between the beginning and end of the barcode symbol in millimeters If the quiet zones are printed please read the ShowQuietZone parameter section above about whether or not the quiet zones will be printed the leading quiet zone and the trailing quiet zone are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the SpaceColor parameter is set to claSilver in order to acc
143. Size Hl H w H n a 2 e soGlobal_1 All available symbol sizes will be sorted in ascending order of data capacity If the data capacitoies of any two or three symbol sizes are equivalent only smaller one in number of rows will be sorted According to the order the smallest symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between the minimum symbol size specified by the MinSize property and the maximum symbol size specified by the MaxSize property The order is listed below mpSize_1_11 mpSize_3 6 mpSize_1_14 mpSize_2_8 mpSize_117 mpSize_1_20 mpSize_2_11 mpSize_3_10 mpSize_1_24 mpSize_3_12 mpSize_2 14 mpSize_1_28 mpSize_ 2 17 mpSize_2_20 mpSize_4 12 mpSize_2 23 mpSize_3_20 mpSize_2 26 mpSize_4 15 mpSize_3_26 mpSize_4 20 mpSize_3_32 mpSize_3_38 mpSize_4 26 mpSize_3_ 44 mpSize_4 32 mpSize_4 38 mpSize_ 4 44 If tha barcode text cannot be accommodated in the maximum symbol size specified by the MaxSize property an OnInvalidLength the barcode text is specified in the Barcode property or OnInvalidDataLength the barcode text is specified in the Data property event will occur soGlobal_2 All available symbol sizes will be sorted in ascending order of data capacity If the data capacitoies of any two or three symbol sizes are equivalent only smaller one in number of columns will be sorted According to the order the smallest symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be
144. Size e OnDrawBarcode e Stretch e Print e LeftMargin e PrintSize e TopMargin e BarcodeWidth e BarcodeHeight ShowQuietZone LeadingQuietZone TopQuietZone TrailingQuietZone BottomQuietZone EnableUpdateDB Locked Inversed MinSize MaxSize Shape CurrentSize Read only 4 1 7 TBarcodeFmx2D_GridMatrix The component is used to create the Grid Matrix 2D barcode symbols It s defined in the pfmxGridMatrix unit Grid Matrix is a square variable sized two dimensional matrix symbology with unique dark and light framed macromodules that create a grid design that provides a robust finder pattern The unique finder pattern ensures that readers can locate and Mial orient the symbol even with significant symbol damage ra Grid Matrix can encode 7 bit ASCII numeric and binary data in addition to any combination of data types in the same symbol particularly effective with Chinese characters Grid Matrix was invented by Syscan Technology Co Ltd Symbol sizes There are thirteen sizes of Grid Matrix symbol referred to as version 1 to 13 in increasing order of size and data capacity You can use the MinVersion and the MaxVersion properties to specifiy the minimum and maximum sizes for a Grid Matrix symbol They can be one of values from 1 to 13 defined in the pfmxGridMatrix unit corresponding to the versions 1 to 13 The smallest symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between minimum an
145. TBarcodeFmx2D_CompactMatrix enn 159 A 1 103 ReviseVersion5 TBarcodeFmx2D_HanXinCode nnn 160 A 1 104 RowHeight TBarcodeFmx2D_Code1 6K 160 A 1 105 RowHeight TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroPDF41 7 Eege 160 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual A 1 106 RowHeight TBarcodeFmx2D_PDFA417 jinn 161 A 1 107 RowHeight TBarcodeFmx2D_RSSEXpaNded 161 A 1 108 RowSymbols TBarcodeFmx2D_RSSExpanded nnn 162 A 1 109 SeparatorBarHeight TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K sssmmmunmnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnunnunnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnni 162 Ai A 10 SeparatorRowHeight TBarcodeFmx2D_RSS14 TBarcodeFmx2D_RSSExpanded i i 163 A 1 111 SeparatorRowHeight TBarcodeFmx2D_RSSLim ited iii 163 A 1 112 Shape TBarcodeFmx2D_DataMatrixE co200 nnn 164 Pia sto EE 164 Man EE 165 1 115 ED 166 A 1 116 StartWidth TBarcodeFMmx2D_CompactMattix nnn 166 A 1 117 StopWidth TBarcodeFmx2D_CompactMatrix nnn 166 EE 167 A 1 119 StretchOrder TBarcodeFmx2D_CompactMatrix ni 168 A 1 120 StretchOrder TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroPDF41 7 ni 169 A 1 121 StretchOrder TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF4 17 jnn 172 A 1 122 Style TBarcodeFmx2D_RSS14 jr 173 A 1 123 Style TBarcodeFMX2D_RSS Expanded 174 A 1 124 SymbolMode TBarcodeFMmx2D_AztecCode nnn 175 A 128 Top Maar gine 175 ALE TopOQlietZ orig annie nnn 177 A 1 127 TotalHeight TBarcodeFmx2D_RSS14 TBarcodeFMx2D_RSSLimited uuu 177 A 128 Trailing QuietZom eit 178 A 1 129 UseECIDescriptor TBarcodeFmx2D_MicorPDF4 17 179 EE ieee 179 A 2 1 Barcode2D TSaveF mx2D ii
146. TBarcodeFmx2D_MaxiCode nnn 110 A 1 24 CurrentRows TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16k 111 A 1 25 CurrentRows TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 111 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual A 1 26 CurrentSegments TBarcodeFmx2D_CompactMatrix nnn 112 A 1 27 CurrentSize TBarcodeFmx2D_AztecCode EE 112 A 1 28 CurrentSize TBartcodeFmx2D_DataMatrix 113 A 1 29 CurrentSize TBarcodeFmx2D_DataMatrixE CC200 nnn 114 A 1 30 CurrentSize TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroPDF4 17 nnn 114 A 1 31 CurrentVersion TBarcodeFmx2D_CompactMatrix n 115 A 1 32 CurrentVersion TBarcodeFmx2D_GridMatrix 115 A 1 33 CurrentVersion TBarcodeFmx2D_HanXinCode nnn 116 A 1 34 CurrentVersion TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroQRCode nnn 116 A 1 35 CurrentVersion TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode nnn 117 7 NEC S o gt E E EE E E OT O E 117 A 1 37 DefaultEncodeMode TBarcodeFMmx2D_MicroPDF41 7 118 A 1 38 DefaultTextEncodeMode TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroPDF4 17 118 A 1 39 ECCCount TBarcodeFmx2D_AztecCode nnn 119 A 1 40 ECCLevel TBarcodeFmx2D_AztecCode nn 119 A 1 41 ECCLevel TBarcodeFmx2D_CompactMatrix 120 A 1 42 ECCLevel TBarcodeFmx2D_DataMatrix 120 A 1 43 ECCLevel TBarcodeFmx2D_GridMatrix BEEN 121 A 1 44 ECCLevel TBarcodeFmx2D_HanXinCode nnn 122 A 1 45 ECCLevel TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroQRCode nnn 123 A 1 46 ECCLevel TRarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 123 A 1 47 ECCLevel TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode nnn 124 A 1 48 ECCLevelUpgrade TBarcodeFmx2D_CompactMatrix nnn 125 A 1 49 ECCLevelUpgrade TBarco
147. The value will be used in the structured append block and the structured append block will be used by each symbol in the series of QRCode structured append symbols See also the Structured append section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode article Parameters e Data TBytes It s the original input text before division into the each symbol in the series of structured append symbols It is of type TBytes it is in fact a byte array You can use the method to caculate the check sum of a block of binary bytes data See also the Data property article e AllowEscape Boolean Specifies whether to allow users to insert the escape sequences to the Data parameter value in order to place the function characters and additional control information See also the Escape sequences section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode article and the AllowEscape property article e Invalidindex Integer If there is any invalid byte value in the barcode text that is specified by the Data parameter the parameter returns the position index of first invalid byte value the index O denotes that the first byte is invalid Otherwise it returns the Verify_OK 1 This method can return one of these values these consts are defined in the pfmxCore2D unit o Verify_OK 1 It indicates the method succeeds o Verify_Invalidindex_Base 0 and greater than 0 It indicates that an invalid byte value is in the Data parameter the return value is the position index of the in
148. Width Width Width Width Width ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode component the leading quiet zone and the trailing quiet zone are included always even if the ShowQuietZone parameter is set to false See diagram the quiet zones are drawn inclaSilver color in order to accentuate them Width Width Width Width Width Width ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 e Height Single Returns the vertical height of the rotated barcode symbol in dots or pixels in the vertical direction using the vertical resolution If the quiet zones are displayed please read the ShowQuietZone parameter section below about whether or not the quiet zones will be displayed they are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the quiet zones are drawn in claSilver color in order to accentuate them 206 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual p TE NI Ela Height Bas a wr ShowQuietZone False Angle 0 30 90 ae ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode component the leading quiet zone and the trailing quiet zone are included always even if the ShowQuietZone parameter is set to false See diagram the quiet zones are drawn inclaSilver color in order to accentuate them ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 e SymbolWidth Single
149. Zone True Angle 0 30 90 For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode component leading quiet zone and trailing quiet zone are included always even if the ShowQuietZone parameter is set to false See diagram the SpaceColor parameter value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones ShowQuietZone False Angle 0 30 90 See also the LeftMargin property ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 e Top Single Specifies the margin between the rotated barcode symbol and the top side of the canvas in dots ot pixels in the vertical direction using the vertical resolution If the quiet zones are drawn please read the ShowQuietZone parameter section above about whether or not the quiet zones will be drawn they are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the SpaceColor parameter value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones 196 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual a TESST Desst Se KSE WEEN For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode component leading quiet zone and trailing quiet zone are included always even if the ShowQuietZone parameter is set to false See diagram the SpaceColor parameter value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones r OTT CT ETT RO D ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 See also the TopMargin property e Module Single Specifies the module s
150. _MicroPDF417 Returns the check sum of a barcode text that will be encoded into a series of structured append symbols Syntax type Defined in the pfmxPDF417Com unit TPDF417 Option poIgnoreShiftBeforeECI poFirst903TextAlphaLatch poFirst904TextMixedLatch po906TextAlphaLatch po907TextAlphaLatch po908TextAlphaLatch po910TextAlphaLatch po912TextAlphaLatch po914TextAlphaLatch po915TextAlphaLatch poFirstFNC1MatchAI01 poMicroPDF417Explicit901 Defined in the pfmxPDF417Com unit TPDF417 Options set of TPDF417 Option Defined in the pfmxMicroPDF417 unit TMicroPDF417 Options TPDF417 Options function GetCheckSum Barcode string AllowEscape Boolean var InvalidIndex Integer Options TMicroPDF417 Options string virtual Description The method returns the check sum of a barcode text that will be encoded into a series of MicroPDF417 structured append symbols The value will be used in the structured append block and the structured append block will be used by each symbol in the series of MicroPDF417 structured append symbols See also the Structured append section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroPDF417 article Parameters e Barcode string It s the original input text before division into the each symbol in the series of structured append symbols It is of type string and it is in fact an UnicodeString By default the unicode string will be converted to an UTF 8 bytes sequence the BOM isn t included
151. a Ne Q 1718 1041 715 440 H 1286 779 535 330 L 3283 1990 1367 842 M 2544 1542 1059 652 SS SS Q 1804 1094 751 462 H 1425 864 593 365 L 3517 2132 1465 902 M 2701 1637 1125 692 S SE Q 1933 1172 805 496 H 1501 910 625 385 L 3669 2223 1528 940 P ete M 2857 1732 1190 732 Q 2085 1263 868 534 H 1581 958 658 405 L 3909 2369 1628 1002 e Wee M 3035 1839 1264 778 Q 2181 1322 908 559 H 1677 1016 698 430 L 4158 2520 1732 1066 a paren M 3289 1994 1370 843 Q 2358 1429 982 604 H 1782 1080 742 457 L 4147 2677 1840 1132 p eye M 3486 2113 1452 894 Q 2473 1499 1030 634 H 1897 1150 790 486 L 4686 2840 1952 1201 o ue M 3693 2238 1538 947 Q 2670 1618 1112 684 H 2022 1226 842 518 L 4965 3009 2068 1273 ge BE M 3909 2369 1628 1002 Q 2805 1700 1168 719 H 2157 1307 898 553 L 5253 3183 2188 1347 S See M 4134 2506 1722 1060 73 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Q 2949 1787 1228 156 H 2301 1394 958 590 L 5529 3351 2303 1417 a M 4343 2632 1809 1113 3 Bee Q 3081 1867 1283 790 H 2361 1431 983 605 L 5836 3537 2431 1496 8 M 4588 2780 1911 1176 Ss SKS Q 3244 1966 1351 832 H 2524 1530 1051 647 L 6153 3729 2563 1577 37 165 165 M 4775 2894 1989 1224 Q 3417 2071 1423 876 H 2625 1591 1093 673 L 6479 3927 2699 1661 38 169 169 M 5039 3054 2099 1292 Q 3599 2181 1499 923 H 2735 1658 1139 701 L 6743 4087 280
152. a symbol is part of a structured append this shall be indicated by a structured append block in barcode text The escape sequence s lt Index gt lt Amount gt lt Parity gt 77 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual is used to place the structured append block to the barcode text e Index The position index of the symbol within the set of QR Code symbols in the structured append format It s an integer between 1 and 16 including the boundaries in string format e Amount The total amount of the symbol within the set of QR Code symbols in the structured append format It s an integer between 2 and 16 including the boundaries in string format e Parity The parity data It shall be an 8 bit byte value obtained by using the GetParity method with the original input data as its parameter It is identical in all symbols in the structured append enabling it to be verified that all symbols read form part of the same structured append message The AllowEscape property should be set to true in order to place the structured append block The structured append block may only be placed once in the barcode text Also it shall be placed at beginning of the barcode text The OnInvalidChar or OnInvalidDataChar event will occur if the structured append block be placed more than once or it isn t placed at beginning of the barcode text The following is the examples of structured append s 2 5 125 ABCDEFGabcdefg1234567890 78 2D Ba
153. actual error correction code level If the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to false the error correction code level specified by the ECCLevel property will be used always The value of CurrentECCLevel property is always equal to the value of ECCLevel property See also the Error checking and correcting ECC section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_CompactMatrix article A 1 49 ECCLevelUpgrade TBarcodeFmx2D_DataMatrix For the Data Matrix ECC 000 140 barcode symbols the property specifies whether to use the remaining capacity to automatically upgrade the error correction code level in order to increase symbols strength Syntax property ECCLevelUpgrade Boolean Description For a Data Matrix ECC 000 140 barcode symbol the symbol size may be determined depending on the barcode text length and the error correction code level specified by the ECCLevel property And the barcode text and the error correction code don t usually fill the maximum data capacity of the symbol the property specifies whether to use the remaining capacity to automatically upgrade the error correction code level in order to increase symbols strength If the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to true the highest error correction code level that can be accommodated by current symbol size will by used for creating more robust symbols Note the new level is always no lower than the level specified by the ECCLevel 125 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual prop
154. alid Note Pelase use the method between Printer BeginDoc and Printer EndDoc methods For example Printer ActivePrinter SelectDPI 600 600 Printer BeginDoc Print other content Barcode QRCodel Print Print the barcode symbol Print other content Printer EndDoc B 1 12 PrintSize Returns actual horizontal width and vertical height of a rotated barcode symbol in millimeters There are several different overloading methods Syntax 1 Syntax 2 and Syntax 3 e Syntax 1 Returns the actual print horizontal width and vertical height of the rotated barcode symbol that is specified by the properties of this barcode component Syntax 2 Returns the actual print horizontal width and vertical height of the rotated barcode symbol that is specified by the parameters of this method The barcode text is specified in the Barcode parameter It is of type string The Barcode parameter is in fact an UnicodeString By default the unicode string will be converted to an UTF 8 bytes sequence the BOM isn t included then be encoded into the barcode symbol If you want to use other encoding scheme for example the ANSI UTF 16 please convert it in theOnEncode event handle or use the PrintSize Syntax 3 overloading method and specify the converted bytes sequence in its Data parameter If you want to encode a block of binary bytes data please use the PrintSize Syntax 3 overloading method Syntax 3 Returns the actual print ho
155. alled Index Integer The index position of first invalid byte in the barcode text that is specified by the Data property the index 0 denotes that the first byte is invalid byte e DataChar Byte The first invalid byte value in the barcode data that is specified by the Data property LinearFlag Bolean The parameter is reserved for future use Note e If the Locked property is set to false the event occurs when any component property is changed to cause the barcode is redrew or when the Draw Clear Size DrawTo Syntax 1 DrawToSize Syntax 1 Print Syntax 1 or PrintSize Syntax 1 method is called Even if the Image property isn t specified e If the Locked property is set to true the event occurs when the Locked property is set to false to cause the barcode is redrew or the Draw Clear Size DrawTo Syntax 1 DrawToSize Syntax 1 Print Syntax 1 or PrintSize Syntax 1 method is called Even if the Image property isn t specified C 1 6 OnInvalidDataLength The event occurs when the length of the Data property value is invalid Syntax type Defined in the pfmxBarcode2D unit TOnInvalidDataLength procedure Sender TObject Data TBytes LinearFlag Boolean of object 263 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual property OnInvalidDataLength TOnInvalidDataLength Parameters e Sender TObject It is the object whose event handler is called Data TBytes The invalid value of the Data property
156. also the Macro PDF417 section below e lt nnn gt Insert a function codeword This lt nnn gt can be one of these values o 900 Manually places a mode latch to Text compaction mode o 901 Manually places a mode latch to Byte compaction mode It shall be used when the total number of subsequent bytes to be encoded is not a multiple of 6 otherwise it will be change to 924 automatically by the component o 902 Manually places a mode latch to Numeric compaction mode o 903 If it s placed at beginning of barcode text it represents a leading FNC1 character in First position mode and indicates that the PDF417 symbol s data output shall conform with the Code128 specification UCC EAN 128 emulation the symbology identifier prefix is set to C1 or L3 Also it implies a mode latch to Mixed sub mode of Text compaction mode If it s placed in the barcode text but not at beginning of the barcode text it represents an FNC1 character as field separator and implies a mode latch to Alpha sub mode of Text compaction mode o 904 If it s placed at beginning of barcode text it represents a leading FNC1 character in First position mode and indicates that the PDF417 symbol s data output shall conform with the Code128 specification UCC EAN 128 emulation the symbology identifier prefix is set to C1 or L3 Also it implies a mode latch to Numeric compaction mode 65 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual o o
157. alue See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones _ BarcodeWidth BarcodeWidth ee se 3 iee ec Gr A MASAN es S Bau ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Orientation boLeftRight Orientation boLeftRight Orientation boTopBottom Orientation boTopBottom o If the property value is less than zero When the Orientation property is set to boLeftRight or boRightLeft the LeftMargin property value and the absolute value of the negative width will be subtracted from the width of the Tlmage control that s specified by the Image property then the result will be used as the final barcode width the barcode symbol will be reduced stretched to fit this final width value it specifies the right margin of the barcode symbol 1 denotes the right margin is 1 2 denotes the right margin is 2 See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones Timage TQRImage Timage TQRImage LeftMargin BarcodeWidth LeftMargin BarcodeWidth EAR T ESERI TERESI ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True When the Orientation property is set to boTopBottom or boBottomTop the TopMargin property value and the absolute value of the negative width will be subtracted from the height of the Tlmage control that s specified by the Imag
158. alues these consts are defined in the pfmxSave2D unit ERROR_OK 0 The method invocation succeeded ERROR_NO_BARCODE_COMPONENT 1 The method invocation failed because the Barcode2D property is not link to a barcode component ERROR_INVALID_BARCODE 2 The method invocation failed because the length of Barcode or Data property value is invalid in the barcode component corresponding to the OnInvalidLength or OnInvalidDatalength event of barcode component will occur Or because there is any invalid character in the Barcode or Data property value corresponding to the OnlnvalidChar or OnInvalidDataChar event of barcode component will occur ERROR_WRITE_PICTURE 3 The method invocation failed because of a picture file write error Perhaps the file system fulls or the access is denied ERROR_UNKNOWN 4 The method invocation failed because of othe error B 3 TCopyFmx2D B 3 1 Assign Copies a TCopyFmx2D component from another TCopyFmx2D component Syntax procedure Assign Source TPresistent override Description If the Source parameter is an object created from a TCopyFmx2D component class Assign copies all property values and event handles from the source TCopyFmx2D component to current one IfSource is any other type of object an EColibboardBarcodeFmx2DError exception occurs Parameters e Source TPersistent Specifies the source object B 3 2 Copy Copy current barcode symbol in the barcode component to clipboard
159. ameter in order to encode it into a barcode symbol For the TBarcodeFmx2D_RSS14 and TBarcodeFmx2D_RSSLimited components if the property AutoCheckDigit is set to true the check digit doesn t need to be included in the parameter otherwise the check digit can be specified by you in the parameter See also the Barcode and Data properties e Barcode String Specifies the barcode text It is of type string and is in fact an UnicodeString By default the unicode string will be converted to an UTF 8 bytes sequence the BOM isn t included then be encoded into the barcode symbol If you want to use other encoding scheme for example the ANSI UTF 16 please convert it in theOnEncode event handle or use the PrintSize Syntax 3 overloading method and specify the converted bytes sequence in its Data parameter If you want to encode a block of binary bytes data please use the PrintSize Syntax 3 overloading method For the TBarcodeFmx2D_RSS14 and TBarcodeFmx2D_RSSLimited components if the property AutoCheckDigit is set to true the check digit doesn t need to be included in the parameter otherwise the check digit can be specified by you in the parameter See also the Barcode and Data properties e ShowQuietZone Boolean Specifies whether to include the leading quiet zone trailing quiet zone top quiet zone and bottom quiet zone in the barcode symbol If the parameter value is set to true these quiet zones are included Otherwise they
160. ameters of this method in millimeters Please use the method between the Printer BeginDoc and Printer EndDoc methods if the HDPI or VDPI parameter is set to 0 Parameters e Width Single Returns the horizontal width of the rotated barcode symbol in millimeters The value is calculated based on the module size You can use one of the Module BarcodeWidth and BarcodeHeight parameters to specify the module size If the quiet zones are printed please read the ShowQuietZone parameter section below about whether or not the quiet zones will be printed they are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the quiet zones are printed in claSilver color in order to accentuate them ES Se ESI RO Rna Zeg Rou Zare DE L width Width Width Width Width ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode component the leading quiet zone and the trailing quiet zone are included always even if the ShowQuietZone parameter is set to false See diagram the quiet zones are printed in claSilver color in order to accentuate them Width Width Width Width Width Width ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 247 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual e Height Single Returns the vertical height of the rotated barcode symbol in millimeters The value is calculated based on the module size You can use one of the Module
161. an be used as the linear component of an EAN UCC Composite symbol Syntax property Link2D Boolean Description An RSS barcode symbol including RSS 14 RSS Limited or RSS Expanded can be used together with a CC A or a CC B 2D symobl to create the EAN UCC composite symbol The property specifies whether the RSS symbol can be used as the linear component of an EAN UCC Composite symbol If the property is set to true the RSS symbol and its contiguous separator pattern shall be aligned with a 2D symbol Normally the RSS symbol its contiguous separator pattern and the 2D symbol are drawn at the same time comprising a single EAN UCC composite symbol If the property is set to false the RSS symbol will be used as a stand alone barcode symbol Note a contiguous separator pattern is required between the RSS and the 2D symbol in an EAN UCC Composite symbol In order to drawn the separator pattern on top of the RSS symbol both the Show2DSeparator and the Link2D properties must be set to true 135 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual See also the Composite symbol section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_RSS14 TBarcodeFmx2D_RSSLimited and TBarcodeFmx2D_RSSExpanded articles The following is several examples of the EAN UCC composite symbol UR D Ou i V H ii A 1 66 Locked Set the property to true to prevents updating of the barcode component until the property is reset to false Syntax property Locked Boolean
162. and BarcodeHeight properties The barcode symbol together with its quiet zones if they are displayed will be reduced stretched if the property is set to true You can use the LeadingQuietZone TrailingQuietZone TopQuietZone and BottomQuietZone properties to specify the size of these quiet zones in modules And use the ShowQuietZone property to specify whether to display these quiet zones e If the property is set to false the barcode symbol will not be reduced stretched The values of BarcodeWidth and BarcodeHeight properties will be ignored The barcode symbol width and height will be calculated based on the Module property value You can get the width and height by using the Size method e If the property is set to true the barcode symbol will be reduced stretched to fit the size specified by BarcodeWidth and BarcodeHeight properties The BarcodeWidth property specifies the width of barcode symbol If the property value is less than or equal to zero it specifies the right margin of the barcode symbol the Orientation property is set to boLeftRight or boRightLeft or the bottom margin of the barcode symbol the Orientation property is set to boTopBottom or boBottomTop See also the BarcodeWidth property See diagram Timage TQRImage Timage TQRImage BarcodeWidth gt 0 Tee uiBuewdo uSewdo ny LeftMargin BarcodeWidth 0 ES LeftMargin BarcodeWidth lt 0 E E Orientation boLeftRight Ori
163. and specify the converted bytes sequence in its Data parameter If you want to encode a block of binary bytes data please use the DrawTo Syntax 3 overloading method e Syntax 3 Draws the barcode symbol that is specified by the parameters of this method The barcode data is specified in the Data parameter It is of type TBytes it is in fact a byte array You can use the method if you want to encode a block of binary bytes data into a barcode symbol B 1 6 1 DrawTo Syntax 1 Draws a barcode symbol on the specified canvas The barcode symbol is specified by the properties of this barcode component Syntax function DrawTo Canvas TCanvas Left Top Single Module 0 Angle Single 1 Opacity Single 1 HDPI Integer 0 VDPI Integer 0 Integer overload virtual Description On the specified canvas draws current barcode symbol that is specified by the properties of this barcode component Parameters e Canvas TCanvas Specifies target canvas to draw the barcode symbol on it e Left Single Specifies the margin between the rotated barcode symbol and the left side of the canvas in dots or pixels in the horizontal direction using the horizontal resolution If the quiet zones are drawn please read the ShowQuietZone property about whether or not the quiet zones will be drawn they are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the SpaceColor property is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones
164. ap SaveToFile D 2DBarcode bmp Also You can bind multiple TSaveFmx2D components to a TBarcodeFmx2D barcode component in order to save the barcode symbol in multipe formats 3 5 How to copy a barcode symbol to the clipboard Usage 1 Put aTBarcodeFmx2D barcode component such as the TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 and TBarcodeFmx2D_RSS14 to your form 2 Put a TCopyFmx2D component to your form 3 Set the Barcode2D property of the TCopyFmx2D component to the TBarcodeFmx2D barcode component 4 Use the Copy method of the TCopyFmx2D component to copy the barcode symbol to the clipboard 3 6 How to encode the UNICODE text in a 2D barcode symbol By default the text will be encoded in UTF 8 ecnoding sheme the BOM is not placed you can use other encoding scheme such as the ANSI UTF 16LE UTF 16BE etc e Method 1 please convert the text to your encoding scheme then assign it to the Data property of the TBarcodeFmx2D barcode component such as the TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode TBarcodeFmx2D_DataMatrixECC200 and the TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 The BOM may be placed depending on your application For example The text is encoded in UTF 8 format and the BOM is placed var BarcodeText string BarcodeData TBytes Len Integer begin BarcodeText i Tse E Len Length BarcodeText SetLength BarcodeData Len 3 3 BarcodeData 0 SEF BarcodeData 1 BB BarcodeData 2 SBF Len UnicodeToUtf8 Bar
165. ar barcode symbol format used in a variety of applications primarily transport identification Events OnChange OnEncode ParseBarcodelndex OnInvalidChar OnInvalidLength OnInvalidDataChar OnInvalidDataLength OnDrawBarcode cards and inventory management PDF stands for Portable Data File It can encode all 8 bit values The PDF417 symbology was invented by Dr Ynjiun P Wang at Symbol Technologies in 1991 Symbol size Each PDF417 symbol consists of a stack of vertically aligned rows with a minimum of 3 rows maximum 90 rows Each stacked row 62 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual shall include a minimum of 1 symbol character column maximum 30 symbol character columns excluding start stop and row indicator columns They are defined in the pfmxPDF417Custom unit The RowHeight property can be used to specify the height for each stacked row in modules See diagram Start Startrow Symbol character Stoprow Stop pattern indicator columns indicator pattern column column column column I Row 1 Row 2 Row 3 You can use the MinRows and the MaxRows properties to specifiy the minimum and maximum number of stacked rows for a PDF417 symbol And use the MinColumns and the MaxColumns properties to specifiy the minimum and maximum number of symbol character columns for it In other words the MinRows and MinColumns properties specify a minimum symbol size and the MaxRows and MaxColumns properties specify a maximum symbol s
166. arcode FMX Components User Manual The parameter defaults to 1 if the Angle parameter is not provided and the barcode symbol will be rotated based on the value of the Orientation property o boLeftRight 0 degrees o boRightLeft 180 degrees o boTopBottom 270 degrees o boBottomTop 90 degrees If you want to use the 1 degrees the 359 degrees can be used instead Opacity Single Specifies the transparency level of entire barcode symbol where 1 is not transparant at all 0 5 is 50 see through and 0 is completely transparent The parameter defaults to 1 if it is not provided and the value of Opacity property will be used Note if the Inversed property is set to false you can use the alpha channel of the SpaceColor property value to specify the transparency level of bakcground color spaces or light modules and quiet zones and use the alpha channel of the BarColor property value to specify the transparency level of foreground color bars or dark modules If the Inversed property is set to true you can use the alpha channel of the BarColor property value to specify the transparency level of bakcground color spaces or light modules and quiet zones and use the alpha channel of the SpaceColor property value to specify the transparency level of foreground color bars or dark modules HDPI Integer Specifies the horizontal resolution of canvas in DPI It s the number of dots or pixels per inch It defaults to 0 if the HDPI is n
167. arcodeFmx2D_GridMatrix TBarcodeFmx2D_CompactMatrix TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode TBarcodeFmx2D_MaxiCode and TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroQRCode the property specifies the color of every dark module in matrix symbol if the Inversed property is set to false Otherwise it specifies the color of every light module background color The module is single cell in the matrix symbol used to encode one bit data nominally a suqare shape in MaxiCode symbology it s a regular hexagonal shape F o rStacked 2D barcode symbologies and Linear 1D barcode symbologies including TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16k TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroPDF417 TBarcodeFmx2D_RSS14 TBarcodeFmx2D_RSSLimited and TBarcodeFmx2D_RSSExpanded the property specifies the color for all bars in the barcode symbol if the Inversed property is set to false Otherwise it specifies the color for all spaces background color Also when the leading quiet zone trailing quiet zone top quiet zone and bottom quiet zone are drawn the ShowQuietZone property is set to true if the Inversed property is set to true the color specified by this BarColor property will be used to draw them Otherwise the color specified by the SpaceColor property will be used A 1 10 BottomQuietZone Specifies the vertical height of the bottom quiet zone in modules Syntax property BottomQuietZone Integer Description 103 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Specifies the vertical height of the bottom qu
168. are two mode FNC1 characters to identify symbols encoding messages formatted according to specific predefined industry or application specifications also the FNC1 character can be used as the data field separator o First position mode FNC in this mode indicator identifies symbols encoding data formatted according to the GS1 Application Identifiers standard For this purpose it shall only be used once in a symbol and shall be placed at beginning of the barcode text 52 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual o o If any one of escape sequences in 903 904 and 905 followed by an Application Identifier 2 or more digits is placed at beginning of barcode text it represents a leading FNC1 character in First position mode and implies a mode latch to Text compaction mode or Numeric compaction mode See also the Escape sequences section below Also you can place an escape sequence f followed by an Application Identifier 2 or more digits at beginning of barcode text instead of the 903 904 or 905 escape sequence followed by the Application Identifier to place the FNC1 character in First position mode The component will automatically select one of escape sequences from 903 904 and 905 depending on on the barcode text in order to minimize the symbol size The escape sequences 906 907 912 914 and 915 can be placed the FNC1 character in First position mode too See also the Escape
169. ase 0 and greater than 0 It indicates that an invalid character is in the barcode text the return value is the position index of the invalid charactere For 32 bit Windows 64 bit Windows and Mac OSX platform the index 1 denotes that the first character is invalid character For iOS and Android platform the index 0 denotes that the first character is invalid character e Options TPDF417_Options TheOptions parameter is an advanced feature which allows low level control over data encoding The parameter can be used to change the encoding algorithm and meanings of some fucntion codewords in order to match the reader The values that can be included in the Options parameter are defined in the pPDF417Com unit See also the Options property article Return If the method succeeds it returns the check sum value it s a 16 bit word value in decimal string UnicodeString format and the Invalidindex parameter returns Verify_OK 1 If the method fails the Invalidindex parameter returns a position index of first invalid character in the Barcode parameter See also the Invalidindex parameter section above The result string can be directly used as the check sum in the Macro PDF417 control information block For example var full barcode check sum macro block string invalid_index Integer begin full barcode Ze sh eass ta check sum GetCheckSum full barcode False invalid index if invalid index lt gt 1 then exit
170. ata field separator to the barcode text In this case it can be placed anywhere but at beginning of the barcode text For example t010001234567890521512 2018 See also the Character set section above e t Insert a FNC1 character in First position mode to barcode text or insert a GS character ASCII value 29 as the data field separator to the barcode text There are two usages o Insert a FNC1 character in First position mode to the barcode text It s completely equivalent to escape sequence f that inserts the FNC1 character in First position mode In this case it shall only be used once in a symbol and shall be placed at beginning of the barcode text and after any ECI indicator block or structured append block if exists followed by an Application Identifier 2 or more digits For example t0100012345678905 o Insert a GS character ASCII value 29 as the data field separator to the barcode text It s completely equivalent to the escape sequence f that inserts the FNC1 character as the data field separator In this case it can be placed anywhere but at beginning of the barcode text For example 010001234567890521512 t2018 See also the Character set section above e Wl Insert a FNC1 character in Second position mode to barcode text or insert a GS character ASCII value 29 as the data field separator to the barcode text There are two usages o Insert a FNC1 character in Second position mode to the barco
171. ataLength event will occur Verify_OK 1 It indicates the method succeeds Verify_Invalidindex_Base 0 and greater than 0 If you use the Barcode property to specify the barcode text it indicates that an invalid character is in the barcode text also the OnlInvalidChar event will occur The return value is the position index of the invalid charactere For 32 bit Windows 64 bit Windows and Mac OSX platform the index 1 denotes that the first character is invalid character For iOS and Android platform the index 0 denotes that the first character is invalid character If you use the Data property to specify the barcode data it indicates that an invalid byte value is in the barcode data also the OnInvalidDataChar event will occur The return value is the position index of the invalid byte value The index 0 denotes that the first byte value is invalid byte value B 1 12 2 PrintSize Syntax 2 Returns the actual horizontal width and vertical height of a rotated barcode symbol in millimeters The barcode symbol is specified by the parameters of this method Syntax function PrintSize var Width Height SymbolWidth SymbolHeight Single Barcode string ShowQuietZone Boolean Module Single Angle Single 0 BarcodeWidth Single 0 BarcodeHeight Single 0 HDPI Integer 0 VDPI Integer 0 Integer overload virtual Description The method returns the actual horizontal width and vertical height of a rotated barcode sym
172. attern is respresented its Show2DSeparator property is set to true the property specifies the height of contiguous separator pattern in modules See diagram SeparatorRowHeight I RSS Limited See also the Composite symbol section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_RSSLimited article A 1 112 Shape TBarcodeFmx2D_DataMatrixEcc200 Specifies which shape of Data Matrix ECC 200 symbol will be selected to generate the Data Matrix ECC 200 barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxDataMatrixEcc200 unit TDataMatrixEcc200 Shape dsSquare dsRectangle property Shape TDataMatrixEcc200 Shape Description There are two shapes of Data Matrix ECC 200 symbols square and rectangle The property specifies which shape of Data Matrix ECC 200 symbol will be selected to generate the barcode symbol The property can be one of these values defined in the pfmxDataMatrixEcc200 unit e dsSquare Indicates to generate the square symbols In this case if theMinSize property value isn t between E dmSize_10_10 and dmSize_144 144 then it s default to dmSize_10_10 and if the MaxSize property value isn t between dmSize_10_10 and dmSize_144 144 then it s default to dmSize_144_ 144 e dsRectangle Indicates to generate the rectangle symbols In this case if the MinSize property value isn t between dmSize_8 18 and dmSize_16_48 then it s default to dmSize_8 18 and if the MaxSize property value isn t between dmSize_8 18 and dmSize_16_48 th
173. automatically changed to equal to this property s value In other words the MinRows property s value is always less than or equal to the MaxRows property s value See also the Symbol sizes section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16k article A 1 84 MinRows TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 Specifies the minimum number of stacked rows for a PDF417 barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxPDF417Custom unit TPDF417 Rows 3 90 146 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual property MinRows TPDF417 Rows Description The property specifies the minimum number of stacked rows for a PDF417 barcode symbol It can be one of values from 3 to 90 They are defined in the pfmxPDF417Custom unit The minimum number of stacked rows together with the minimum number of columns specified by the MinColumns property indicates the minimum symbol size for a PDF417 barcode symbol And the maximum number of stacked rows specified by the MaxRows property together with the maximum number of columns specified by the MaxColumns property indicates the maximum symbol size for the PDF417 barcode symbol Based on the stretch order specified by the StretchOrder property the smallest symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between the minimum symbol size and the maximum symbol size The CurrentRows property can be used to get the factual number of stacked rows Note if the property is set to a value greater than
174. aw e OnlnvalidLength e SpaceColor e Size e OnlnvalidDataChar e Opacity e DrawTo e OnlnvalidDataLength e Orientation e DrawToSize e OnDrawBarcode e Stretch e Print e LeftMargin e PrintSize e TopMargin e BarcodeWidth e BarcodeHeight ShowQuietZone LeadingQuietZone TopQuietZone TrailingQuietZone BottomQuietZone EnableUpdateDB Locked Inversed Mirrored SymbolMode BytesAlwaysBackToUpper MinSize MaxSize ECCLevel ECCCount AllowEscape CurrentSize Read only 4 1 2 TBarcodeFmx2D_AztecRunes The component is used to create the Aztec Runes 2D Barcode symbols It s defined in the pfmxAztecRunes unit Aztec Runes are a series of small but distinct machine readable marks designed to be graphically compatible with Aztec Code They are in fact just the core symbol of a compact Aztec Code symbol with a numerically distinct mode message ier Pre which in this case conveys 8 bits of actual data Thus they comprise 256 11x11 module square marks which are conveniently found and read by an Aztec Code reader Symbol size Each Aztec Runes symbol is of a fixed size it is 11 11 modules square 21 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Quiet zones No quiet zone is required outside the bounds of the Aztec Runes symbol So the minimum values of LeadingQuietZone TrailingQuietZone TopQuietZone and BottomQuietZone properties are equal to 0 Character set All 8 bit values can be encoded every Aztec Runes symbol
175. ay as the standard RSS 14 format except its height is reduced to a 13 modules minimum It may be used for small items instead of RSS Limited It may also be used when the four column 2D component is desired in order to minimize the height of an EAN UCC Composite symbol RSS 14 Truncated is designed to be read by scanners such as wands handheld lasers and linear and 2D imagers It cannot be read efficiently by omnidirectional flat bed and presentation scanners RSS 14 Truncated rsStacked Indicates to generate the RSS 14 Stacked barcode symbol It is an RSS 14 Truncated two row format It may be used for small items instead of RSS Limited when the available space is too narrow for RSS Limited Moreover the narrower width of RSS 14 Stacked might allow for a larger module width and potentially higher print quality However RSS Limited or RSS 14 Truncated should be used in preference to the stacked format whenever space permits without reducing module width as they are easier to scan with a wand or linear scanner RSS 14 Stacked is designed to be read by scanners such as wands handheld lasers and linear and 2D imagers It cannot be read efficiently by omnidirectional flat bed and presentation scanners i l jl RSS 14 Stacked rsStackedOmnidirectional Indicates to generate the RSS 14 Stacked Omnidirectional barcode symbol It is a full height RSS 14 two row format It can be used instead of RSS 14 for omnidirectional scanning a
176. barcode symbology and Linear 1D barcode symbology the module is the thinest bar or space in the barcode symbol The parameter specifies the module width See diagram meee 0 If any one of the BarcodeWidth and BarcodeHeight parameters is provided and it isn t zero the value of Module parameter will be ignored the module size will be calculated based on the BarcodeWidth parameter value or the BarcodeHeight parmeter value If both BarcodeWidth and BarcodeHeight parameters are provided and aren t zero only the BarcodeWidth parameter value will be used to calculate the module size the BarcodeHeight parameter value will be ignored See also the Module property Angle Single Specifies an angle in degrees to rotate the barcode symbol and its quiet zones if they are printed please read the ShowQuietZone property about whether or not the quiet zones will be printed anticlockwise See diagram the SpaceColor property is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones Angle ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True The parameter defaults to 1 if the Angle parameter is not provided and the barcode symbol will be rotated based on the value of the Orientation property o boLeftRight 0 degrees o boRightLeft 180 degrees o boTopBottom 270 degrees o boBottomTop 90 degrees If you want to use the 1 degrees the 359 degrees can be used instead BarcodeWidth Single Specifies the barcode
177. barcode text will be automatically selected between the minimum number of stacked rows specified by the MinRows property and the maximum number of stacked rows specified by the MaxRows property Read the property to retrieve the factual number of stacked rows of a Code 16K barcode symbol The property can be one of values from 2 to 16 denotations the factual number of rows They are defined in the pfmxCode16K unit The property is read only See also the Symbol sizes section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16k article A 1 25 CurrentRows TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 Contains the factual number of stacked rows of a PDF417 barcode symbol Syntax type 111 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Defined in the pfmxPDF417Custom unit TPDF417_Rows 3 90 property CurrentRows TPDF417 Rows Description The minimum number of stacked rows specified by the MinRows property and the minimum number of columns specified by the MinColumns property indicate the minimum symbol size for aPDF417 barcode symbol The maximum number of stacked rows specified by the MaxRows property and the maximum number of columns specified by the MaxColumns property indicate the maximum symbol size for the PDF417 barcode symbol Based on the stretch order specified by the StretchOrder property the smallest symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between the minimum symbol size and the maximum symbol size Read t
178. ble to the version 1 elLevel_2 Indicates to use the ECC level 2 The percentage of total capacity for ECC data is 20 elLevel_3 Indicates to use the ECC level 3 The percentage of total capacity for ECC data is 30 elLevel_4 Indicates to use the ECC level 4 The percentage of total capacity for ECC data is 40 elLevel_5 Indicates to use the ECC level 5 The percentage of total capacity for ECC data is 50 elLevel_Recommend For each symbol version the denotative ECC levels are listed in the following table 121 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Version Denotative ECC level 1 ECC level 5 2 3 ECC level 4 4 13 ECC level 3 e elLevel_LowestRecommend For each symbol version the denotative lowest ECC levels are listed in the following table Version Denotative ECC level 1 ECC level 4 2 ECC level 2 3 13 ECC level 1 If the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to true the highest error correction code level that can be accommodated by current symbol size will by used for creating more robust symbols Note the new level is always no lower than the level specified by this property and the symbol size will not be increased it may be determined depending on the length of barcode text and the error correction code level specified by this property In other words only the remaining capacity in current symbol size will be used to upgrade the error correction code level The Cu
179. bol size o Numeric compaction mode Permits efficient encoding of numeric data string o Byte compaction mode Permits all 256 possible 8 bit byte values to be encoded This includes all ASCII characters value from 0 to 127 inclusive and provides for international character set support The compaction mode will be switched automatically in a PDF417 symbol in order to minimize the symbol size Also you can manually switch the code set by using escape sequences 900 901 902 and 924 See also the Escape sequences section below e The FNC1 characters can be encoded for compatibility with some existing applications There are two mode FNC1 characters to identify symbols encoding messages formatted according to specific predefined industry or application specifications also the FNC1 character can be used as the data field separator o First position mode FNC in this mode indicator identifies symbols encoding data formatted according to the GS1 Application Identifiers standard For this purpose it shall only be used once in a symbol and shall be placed at beginning of the barcode text If any one of escape sequences in 903 904 and 905 followed by an Application Identifier 2 or more digits is placed at beginning of barcode text it represents a leading FNC1 character in First position mode and implies a mode latch to Text compaction mode or Numeric compaction mode See also the Escape sequences section below Also
180. bol that is specified by parameters of this method in millimeters Please use the method between the Printer BeginDoc and Printer EndDoc methods if the HDPI or VDP parameter is set to 0 Parameters e Width Single Returns the horizontal width of the rotated barcode symbol in millimeters The value is calculated based on the module size You can use one of the Module BarcodeWidth and BarcodeHeight parameters to specify the module size If the quiet zones are printed please read the ShowQuietZone parameter section below about whether or not the quiet zones will be printed they are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the quiet zones are printed in claSilver color in order to accentuate them ES Kee Iech Se ENOS A ENEE SS VR SS mm Width Width Width Width Width ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 242 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode component the leading quiet zone and the trailing quiet zone are included always even if the ShowQuietZone parameter is set to false See diagram the quiet zones are printed in claSilver color in order to accentuate them Width Width Width Width ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 Height Single Returns the vertical height of the rotated barcode symbol in millimeters The value is calculated based on the module size You can use o
181. bout whether or not the quiet zones will be printed the leading quiet zone and the trailing quiet zone are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the quiet zones are printed in claSilver color in order to accentuate them BarcodeWidth BEE E d SH imac iai ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode component the leading quiet zone and the trailing quiet zone are included always even if the ShowQuietZone parameter section above is set to false See diagram the quiet zones are printed in claSilver color in order to accentuate them Ypmapoueg ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 Note if the parameter is provided and it isn t zero the values of Module and BarcodeHeight parameters will be ignored the 250 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual module size will be calculated based on the BarcodeWidth parameter value If both BarcodeHeight and BarcodeWidth parameters aren t provided or they are all zero the barcode symbol width will be determined by the Module parameter value If both BarcodeWidth and BarcodeHeight parameters are provided and aren t zero only the BarcodeWidth parameter value will be used to calculate the module size the BarcodeHeight parameter value will be ignored See also the BarcodeWidth property BarcodeHeight Single Specifies the barcode symbol height the distance bet
182. can still be read Data Matrix was invented by International Data Matrix Inc ID Matrix which was merged into RVSI Acuity CiMatrix who were acquired by Siemens AG in October 2005 and Microscan Systems in September 2008 There are 2 types of Data Matrix symbology namely ECC 000 140 and ECC 200 The component can be used to generate fs the ECC 000 140 symbols It is the newest version of Data Matrix andsupports advanced encoding error checking and correction algorithms It allows the routine reconstruction of the entire encoded data string when the symbol has sustained 30 damage assuming the matrix can still be accurately located So it s recommended for new application or open systems ECC 200 symbols have an even number of rows and an even number of columns Some symbols are square with sizes from 10 10 to 144 144 not including quiet zones Some symbols are rectangular with sizes from 8 18 to 16 48 not including quiet zones All ECC 200 symbols can be recognised by the upper right corner module being light If you want to generate the Data Matrix ECC 000 140 symbols please use another componentTBarcodeFmx2D_DataMatrix in this components package Shapes There are two shapes of Data Matrix ECC 200 symbols square and rectangle as described in following list e Square Indicates to generate the square symbols Co You can use the Shape property to specify which shape of symbol will be selected to generate the barcode
183. cator may take the form of any single Latin alphabetic character from the set a to z and A to Z or a two digit number There are two ways to place a FNC1 character in Second position mode The escape sequence d followed by an application indicator single Latin alphabetic character from the set a to z and A to Z or a two digit number can be used to placed the FNC1 character in Second position mode to barcode text For example dA0001234567890 d010001234567890 The escape sequence f lt Al gt can be used to placed the FNC1 character in Second position mode to barcode text a Al The application indicator single Latin alphabetic character from the set a to z and A to Z or a two digit number For example A 0001234567890 01 0001234567890 Where the application specifications call for the FNC1 character to be used as a data field separator QR Code symbols shall use the GS character byte value 29 to perform this function In this case any one of g d W and f escape sequences can be used to place the GS character to the barcode text For example dA0001234567890521512 g2018 Note the First position and Second position are not used in a literal sense but is a historical reference to the position of the FNC1 symbol character in Code 128 symbols e The ECI indicator blocks can be encoded for the standardized encoding of message interpretation information The esca
184. cc_Auto the value of this property is the recommended minimum ECC level depending on the length of barcode text The property is read only See also the Error checking and correcting ECC section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 article A 1 20 CurrentECCLevel TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode Contains the factual error correction code level of a QR Code barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxORCode unit TQRCode ECCLevel elLowest elMedium elQuality elHighest property CurrentECCLevel TQRCode_ ECCLevel Description The property always contains the factual error correction code level of aQR Code barcode symbol It can be one of these values defined in the pfmxQRCode unit e elLowest The ECC level of a QR Code barcode symbol is L The capability of recovery from the amounts of damage is 7 e elMedium The ECC level of a QR Code barcode symbol is M The capability of recovery from the amounts of damage is 15 e elQuality The ECC level of a QR Code barcode symbol is Q The capability of recovery from the amounts of damage is 25 e elHighest The ECC level of a QR Code barcode symbol is H The capability of recovery from the amounts of damage is 30 If the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to true the remaining data capacity of a QR Code barcode symbol will be used to automatically upgrade the error correction code level the highest error correction code level that can be accommodated by current symbol size will by used
185. cground color spaces or light modules and quiet zones and use the alpha channel of the BarColor parameter value to specify the transparency level of foreground color bars or dark modules If the Inversed property is set to true you can use the alpha channel of the BarColor parameter value to specify the transparency level of bakcground color spaces or light modules and quiet zones and use the alpha channel of the SpaceColor parameter value to specify the transparency level of fore ground color bars or dark modules HDPI Integer Specifies the horizontal resolution of canvas in DPI It s the number of dots or pixels per inch It defaults to 0 if the HDPI is not provided and the physical horizontal resolution obtained from the Canvas parameter will be used VDPI Integer Specifies the vertical resolution of canvas in DPI It s the number of dots or pixels per inch It defaults to 0 if the VDPI is not provided and the physical vertical resolution obtained from the Canvas parameter will be used Return This method can return one of these values these consts are defined in the pfmxCore2D unit e Verify_InvalidLength 2 It indicates that the length of Data parameter value is invalid e Verify_OK 1 It indicates the method succeeds e Verify_Invalidindex_Base 0 and greater than 0 201 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual It indicates that an invalid byte value is in the Data parameter the return value is the positi
186. ch ECC level error correction code level will be used to increase strength of aPDF417 barcode symbol It can be one of values from elECC_0 to elECC_8 corresponding to the ECC level from 0 to 8 Also it can be set toelEcc_Auto indicates the recommended minimum ECC level will be used depending on the length of barcode text These ECC levels are defined in the pfmxPDF417Custom unit they are listed in following table Number of Property value ECC Level Error correction codewrods elECC_0 ECC 0 2 elECC_1 ECC 1 4 elECC_2 ECC 2 8 elECC_3 ECC 3 16 elECC_4 ECC 4 32 elECC_5 ECC 5 64 elECC_6 ECC 6 128 elECC_7 ECC 7 256 elECC_8 ECC 8 512 If the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to true the highest error correction code level that can be accommodated by current symbol size will by used for creating more robust symbols Note the new level is always no lower than the level specified by this property and the symbol size will not be increased it may be determined depending on the length of barcode text and the error correction code level specified by this property In other words only the remaining capacity in current symbol size will be used to upgrade the error correction code level The CurrentECCLevel property can always be used to get the factual error correction code level See also the Error checking and correcting ECC section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 article A 1 47 ECCLevel TBarcodeF
187. ching between all 3 code sets o Code set A Includes characters with ASCII values from 00 to 95 i e all of the standard upper case alphanumeric characters together with the control characters inclusive and function characters o Code set B Includes characters with ASCII values from 32 to 127 i e all of the standard upper case alphanumeric characters together with the lower case alphabetic characters inclusive and function characters o Code set C includes the set of 100 digit pairs from 00 to 99 inclusive as well as seven special characters This allows numeric 23 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual data to be encoded two data digits per symbol character at effectively twice the density of standard data The code set will be switched automatically in a Code 16K symbol in order to minimize the symbol size Also you can manually switch the code set by using following escape sequences o o o a Switch to code set A b Switch to code set B c Switch to code set C The AllowEscape property should be set to true in order to place these escape sequences If the symbol mode specified by the InitialMode property is set to emCodeC_Shift1B they cannot be used as the first character in the symbol If the InitialMode property is set to emCodeC_Shift2B they cannot be used as the first two characters in the symbol In addition they can be placed anywhere within the symbol e Characters with ASCII values 128 to 25
188. ck in the barcode text are specified in the following e In the mode 2 and mode 3 of MaxiCode symbols the structured append block shall be placed at beginning or end in the barcode text or anywhere in the secondary message For example s 2 5 gt 01 r01 g99123456789 g123 g456 gABCDEF r t gt 01 r01 g99123456789 g123 g456 g s 2 5 ABCDEF r t gt 01 r01 g99123456789 g123 g456 gABC s 2 5 DEF r t gt 01 r01 g99123456789 g123 g456 gABCDEF s 2 5 r t gt 01 r01 g99123456789 g123 g456 gABCDEF r t s 2 5 e In the mode 4 5 and 6 of MaxiCode symbols the structured append block can be placed at anywhere in the barcode text For example s 2 5 ABCDEFG ABC s 2 5 DEFG ABCDEFG s 2 5 50 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Properties Methods Events e Image e Create e OnChange e Barcode e Destroy e OnEncode e Data e Assign e ParseBarcodelndex e Module e Clear e OnlnvalidChar e BarColor e Draw e OnlnvalidLength e SpaceColor e Size e OnlnvalidDataChar e Opacity e DrawTo e OnlnvalidDataLength e Orientation e DrawToSize e OnDrawBarcode e Stretch e Print e LeftMargin e PrintSize e TopMargin e BarcodeWidth e BarcodeHeight ShowQuietZone LeadingQuietZone TopQuietZone TrailingQuietZone BottomQuietZone EnableUpdateDB Locked e Mode AutoMode AllowEscape CurrentMode Read only 4 1 10 TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroPDF417 The component is used to create the MicroPDF417 Barcode symbols It is defined in the pfmxM
189. ck of binary bytes data please use the GetParity Syntax 2 overloading method e Syntax 2 Returns the parity value of a barcode text The barcode text is specified in the Data parameter It is of type TBytes it is in fact a byte array You can use the method to caculate the parity of a block of binary bytes data See also the Structured append section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode article B 1 10 1 GetParity Syntax 1 TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode Returns the parity value of a barcode text that will be encoded into a series of structured append symbols Syntax function GetParity Barcode string AllowEscape Boolean var InvalidIndex Integer Byte virtual Description The method returns the parity value of a barcode text that will be encoded into a series of structured append symbols The value will be used in the structured append block and the structured append block will be used by each symbol in the series of QRCode 221 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual structured append symbols See also the Structured append section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode article Parameters e Barcode string It s the original input text before division into the each symbol in the series of structured append symbols It is of type string and it is in fact an UnicodeString By default the unicode string will be converted to an UTF 8 bytes sequence the BOM isn t included then caculate its parity value If you want to use othe
190. code level of a Micro QR Code barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxMicroQRCode unit TMicroQRCode ECCLevel elLowest elMedium elQuality property CurrentECCLevel TMicroQRCode_ECCLevel Description The property always contains the factual error correction code level of a Micro QR Code barcode symbol It can be one of these values defined in the pfmxMicroQRCode unit e elLowest The ECC level of a Micro QR Code barcode symbol is L The capability of recovery from the amounts of damage is 7 e elMedium The ECC level of aMicro QR Code barcode symbol is M The capability of recovery from the amounts of damage is 15 e elQuality The ECC level of aMicro QR Code barcode symbol is Q The capability of recovery from the amounts of damage is 25 If the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to true the remaining data capacity of a Micro QR Code barcode symbol will be used to automatically upgrade the error correction code level the highest error correction code level that can be accommodated by current symbol size will by used for creating more robust symbols Read the property to retrieve the factual error correction code level of the Micro QR Code barcode symbol If the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to false the error correction code level specified by the ECCLevel property will be used always The value of this property is always equal to the value of the ECCLevel property The property is read only See also the Err
191. code text e File_Id The file identification It s an integer between 0 and 255 including the boundaries in string format The purpose of the file identification is to increase the probability that only logically linked symbols are processed as part of the same message e Amount The total amount of the symbol within the set of Compact Matrix symbols in the structured append format It s an integer between 1 and 16 including the boundaries in string format e Index The position index of the symbol within the set of Compact Matrix symbols in the structured append format It s an integer between 1 and 16 including the boundaries in string format The AllowEscape property should be set to true in order to place the structured append block The structured append block may only be placed once in the barcode text If the structured append block is used together with AIM FNC1 10 GS1 FNC1 1 or FNC3 3 the AIM FNC1 0 GS1 FNC1 1 or FNC3 3 shall be placed at beginning of the barcode text then the structured append block Otherwise the structured append block shall be placed at beginning of the barcode text The OnInvalidChar or OnInvalidDataChar event will occur if the structured append block be placed more than once or it isn t placed at beginning of the barcode text or behind of the AIM FNC1 0 GS1 FNC1 1 or FNC3 3 The following is examples of structured append 2 79 5 2 ABCDEFGabcdefg1234567890
192. code text will be automatically selected between the minimum symbol size and the maximum symbol size Read the property to retrieve the factual number of columns of the PDF417 barcode symbol The property can be one of values from 1 to 30 denotations the factual number of columns of a PDF417 2D barcode symbol They are defined in the pfmxPDF417Custom unit The property is read only See also the Symbol size section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 article A 1 14 CurrentECCLevel TBarcodeFmx2D_CompactMatrix Contains the factual error correction code level of a Compact Matrix barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxCompactMatrix unit TCompactMatrix_EccLevel 1 8 property CurrentECCLevel TCompactMatrix EccLevel Description The property always contains the factual error correction code level of a Compact Matrix barcode symbol It can be one of values from 1 to 8 corresponding to the ECC levels from 1 to 8 If the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to true the remaining data capacity of a Compact Matrix barcode symbol will be used to automatically upgrade the error correction code level the highest error correction code level that can be accommodated by current symbol size will by used for creating more robust symbols Read the property to retrieve the factual error correction code level of the Compact Matrix barcode symbol If the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to false the error correction code level specified by
193. codeData 3 Len 3 1 PWideChar BarcodeText Len if Len gt 0 then SetLength BarcodeData Len 2 else 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual SetLength BarcodeData 3 BarcodeFmx2D_QRCodel Data BarcodeData e Method 2 Please create theOnEncode event function for the TBarcodeFmx2D barcode component such as the TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode TBarcodeFmx2D_DataMatrixECC200 and the TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 In the event function you can encode the UNICODE text in your encoding scheme The BOM may be placed depending on your application For example var BarcodeText string BarcodsText i s s BarcodeFmx2D_QRCodel Barcode BarcodeText procedure TForml BarcodeFmx2D QRCodelEncode Sender TObject var Data TBytes Barcode string var Len Integer begin The text is encoded in UTF 8 format and the BOM is placed Len Length Barcode SetLength Data Len 3 3 Data 0 SEF Data 1 SBB Data 2 SBF Len UnicodeToUtf8 Data 3 Len 3 1 PWideChar Barcode Len if Len gt 0 then SetLength Data Len 2 else SetLength Data 3 end 15 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Chapter 4 Reference 4 1 TBarcodeFmx2D It is the base class of all barcode components And it cannot be instantiated It s defined in the pfmxBarcode2d unit Properties Methods Events e Image e Create e OnChange e Barcode e Destroy e OnEncode e Data e Assign e ParseBarcodelndex e Modul
194. condary message All 256 of the ASCII characters can be used A maximum of about 93 alphanumeric characters or about 138 digits can be encoded in the symbol You can use the Mode property to specify the factual mode for a MaxiCode symbol It can be one of values from 2 to 6 corresponding to the modes from 2 to 6 They are defined in the pfmxMaxiCode unit Also you can set the AutoMode property to true in order to automatically select the suitable mode depending on the barcode text and the value of Mode property And use the CurrentMode property to get the factual mode If the Mode property is set to mode 2 or 3 the factual mode will be selected between mode 2 and 3 depending on the postal code field in the barcode text If the Mode property is set to mode 4 the factual mode will be selected between mode 4 and 5 depending on the length of barcode text If the length of barcode text is so short that can be encoded by using mode 5 the mode 5 will be used in order to employ enhanced error correction otherwise the mode 4 will be used in order to accommodate more barcode text If the Mode property is set to mode 5 the mode 5 will be selected always in order to insure high level of enhanced error correction If the Mode property is set to mode 6 the mode 6 will be selected always in order to encodes a message used to program the reader system Symbol size 48 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Each MaxiCode symbol is of a
195. ction code level of a Han Xin Code barcode symbol It can be one of these values defined in the pfmxHanXinCode unit e elLevel_1 The ECC level of a Han Xin Code barcode symbol is L1 The recevory capacities approx is 8 e elLevel_2 The ECC level of a Han Xin Code barcode symbol is L2 The recevory capacities approx is 15 e elLevel_3 The ECC level of a Han Xin Code barcode symbol is L3 The recevory capacities approx is 23 e elLevel_4 The ECC level of a Han Xin Code barcode symbol is L4 The recevory capacities approx is 30 If the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to true the remaining data capacity of a Han Xin Code barcode symbol will be used to automatically upgrade the error correction code level the highest error correction code level that can be accommodated by current symbol size will by used for creating more robust symbols Read the property to retrieve the factual error correction code level of the Han Xin Code barcode symbol If the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to false the error correction code level specified by the ECCLevel property will be used always The value of this property is always equal to the value of the ECCLevel property The property is read only See also the Error checking and correcting ECC section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_HanXinCode article 107 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual A 1 18 CurrentECCLevel TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroQRCode Contains the factual error correction
196. ction mode the value indicates that it implies a mode latch to Alpha sub mode of Text Compaction mode po907TextAlphaLatch The function codeword 907 represents a leading FNC1 character in First position mode Also it normally implies a mode latch to Numeric Compaction mode the value indicates that it implies a mode latch to Alpha sub mode of Text Compaction mode po908TextAlphaLatch The function codeword 908 followed by an application indicator single Latin alphabetic character from the set a to z and A to Z or a two digit number represents a leading FNC1 character in Second position mode Also it normally implies a mode latch to Mixed sub mode of Text Compaction mode the value indicates that it implies a mode latch to Alpha sub mode of Text compaction mode po910TextAlphaLatch The function codeword 910 indicates that the MicroPDF417 symbol s data output shall conform with the Code128 specification Also it normally implies a mode latch to Mixed sub mode of Text compaction mode the value indicates that it implies a mode latch to Alpha sub mode of Text compaction mode po912TextAlphaLatch Normally the function codeword 912 represents a leading FNC1 character in First position mode and implies a mode latch to Numeric Compaction mode Also it encodes that the data begins with a 6 digit date field Application Identifier is 11 13 15 or 17 and this date field may be followed by an implied Application Identifier 10 or 21 as we
197. ctively referred to as structured append block to barcode text See also the Escape sequences and Structured append sections below o FNC3 The FNC3 is used to indicates that the symbol encodes a message used to program the reader system The escape sequence 3 can be used to placed the FNC3 character to barcode text See also the Escape sequences section below o ECI ECI indicator blocks is for the standardized encoding of message interpretation information The escape sequence e lt ECI_Number gt can be used to place the ECI indicator block to barcode text See also the Extended Channel Interpretation ECI section below The AllowEscape property should be set to true in order to place these non data characters Escape sequences If the AllowEscape property is set to true following escape sequences are supported by the component you can insert them to the barcode text e Insert a backslash to barcode text e 0 Insert an AIM FNC1 character to barcode text in order to encode AIM structural data similar to GS1 It shall be placed at beginning of the barcode text and it shall not be used with GS1 FNC1 1 or FNC3 3 If it is used together with the structured append block FNC2 2 it shall be placed on front of the structured append block 2 See also the Structured append section below 1 Insert a GS1 FNC1 character to barcode text in order to encode GS1 structural data It shall be placed at begin
198. ctured append symbols 6 Insert a 06 macro to barcode text It s used to abbreviate the industry specific header gt RS 06 GS and trailer RS EOT in order to reduce the size of symbol It shall only be placed once at beginning of the barcode text and it shall not be used in conjunction with a series of structured append symbols r Instructs the reader to interpret the data contained within the MicroPDF417 symbol as programming for reader initialisation It shall only be placed once at beginning of the barcode text In the case of a structured append initialisation sequence it shall appear in every symbol e lt ECI_Numnerm gt Insert an ECI indicator block to barcode text See also the Extended Channel Interpretation ECI section below 53 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual e VM Insert a FNC1 character either in First position mode or as a data field separator to the barcode text One of 1903 904 and 905 will be automatically selected instead of the f to insert to the symbol depending on the barcode text If it s placed at beginning of barcode text it represents a FNC1 character in First position mode otherwise it represents a data field separator See also the Character set section above Note when the poFirstFNC1MatchAl01 is included in the value of Options property if the f followed by a SSC 14 number including Application Identifier 01 and 13 digit data the checkdigit isn t requi
199. d block in barcode text The escape sequence s lt Index gt lt Amount gt is used to place the message append block to the barcode text e Index The position index of the symbol within the set of Code 16K symbols in the message append format It s an integer between 1 and 9 including the boundaries in string format e Amount The total amount of the symbol within the set of Code 16K symbols in the message append format It s an integer between 2 and 9 including the boundaries in string format The AllowEscape property should be set to true in order to place the message append block The message append block may be placed only once in the barcode text Also it shall be placed at beginning of the barcode text The OnlnvalidChar or OnlInvalidDataChar event will occur if the message append block be placed more than once or it isn t placed at beginning of the barcode text The following is an example of message append symbol s 2 5 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO12345 The message block shouldn t be placed together with extended data length mode block in the barcode text otherwise the OnInvalidChar or OnInvalidDataChar event will occur See also the Extended data length mode section above The message append block shouldn t be placed in the barcode text if the Initial Mode property is set to emMode_Extended otherwise the OnlnvalidChar or OnInvalidDataChar event will occur The symbols in a message append should not be arranged horizontally but only
200. d is not encoded in the symbol 79 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Styles There are four styles versions of RSS 14 symbols as described in following list e Standard The standard style RSS 14 barcode symbol encodes the full 14 digit EAN UCC item identification Global Il Trade Item Numbers GTINs in a symbol that can be omnidirectionally scanned by suitably configured point of sale ere laser scanners Truncated RSS 14 Truncated is structured and encoded in the same way as the standard RSS 14 format except its III IW D height is reduced to a 13 modules minimum It may be used for small items instead of RSS Limited It may also be used when the four column 2D component is desired in order to minimize the height of an EAN UCC Composite symbol RSS 14 Truncated is designed to be read by scanners such as wands handheld lasers and linear and 2D imagers It cannot be read efficiently by omnidirectional flat bed and presentation scanners Stacked RSS 14 Stacked is an RSS 14 Truncated two row format It may be used for small items instead ofRSS aol nt Limited when the available space is too narrow for RSS Limited Moreover the narrower width of RSS 14 Stacked might allow for a larger module width and potentially higher print quality However RSS Limited or RSS 14 Truncated should be used in preference to the stacked format whenever space permits without reducing modul
201. d maximum symbol sizes The CurrentVersion property can be used to get the factual symbol size 39 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual The symbol sizes and the maximum data capacity of each version are listed in following table Version Symbol sizes Maximum data capacities bits modules ECC Level 1 ECC Level 2 ECC Level 3 ECC Level 4 ECC Level 5 1 18 18 105 91 77 63 2 30 30 315 280 245 210 175 3 42 42 623 553 483 413 343 4 54 54 1022 910 798 686 567 5 66 66 1526 1358 1190 1022 847 6 78 78 2135 1897 1659 1421 1183 7 90 90 2835 2520 2205 1890 1575 8 102 102 3647 3241 2835 2429 2023 9 114 114 4550 4046 3542 3038 2527 10 126 126 5558 4942 4326 3710 3087 11 138 138 6671 5929 5187 4445 3703 12 150 150 7875 7000 6125 5250 4375 13 162 162 9191 8169 7147 6125 5103 If the barcode text does not fill the maximum data capacity of the Grid Matrix symbol remaining data capacity of the symbol will be filled by using pad bits the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to false or will be used to upgrade the error correction code level the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to true If the barcode text is so long that it cannot be encoded using the maximum symbol size specified by the MaxVersion property an OnInvalidLength or OnInvalidDataLength event will occur Error correction code ECC There are five user selectable levels of error correction fro
202. dDataLength the barcode text is specified in the Data property event will occur The CurrentVersion property can be used to get the factual symbol version symbol size Note if the property is set to a value less than the MinVersion property s value the MinVersion property will be automatically changed to equal to this property s value In other words the MaxVersion property s value is always greater than or equal to the MinVersion property s value See also the Symbol sizes section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode article A 1 82 MinColumns TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 Specifies the minimum number of columns for a PDF417 barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxPDF417Custom unit TPDF417_ Columns 1 30 property MinColumns TPDF417 Columns Description The property specifies the minimum number of columns for a PDF417 barcode symbol It can be one of values from 1 to 30 they are defined in the pfmxPDF417Custom unit 145 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual The minimum number of columns together with the minimum number of stacked rows specified by the MinRows property indicates the minimum symbol size for aPDF417 barcode symbol And the maximum number of columns specified by the MaxColumns property together with the maximum number of stacked rows specified by the MaxRows property indicates the maximum symbol size for the PDF417 barcode symbol Based on the stretch order specified by the StretchOrder pr
203. de FMX Components User Manual LesdingQuietZone A 1 64 LeftMargin Specifies the left margin of the barcode symbol in pixels Syntax property LeftMargin Integer Description Specifies the margin between the leftmost side of the barcode symbol and the left side of the image control that is specified by the Image property in pixels If the quiet zones are displayed please read the ShowQuietZone property about whether or not the quiet zones will be displayed they are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones Timage TQRImage Timage TQRImage LeftMargin x Ss GC ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True It is set using the following formula e The Orientation property is set to boLeftRight It is the margin between the beginning of the barcode symbol and the left side of the Timage control See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones Timage TQRImage Timage TQRImage Sg Kg EN P 4 EME aes LeftMargin 22 LeftMargin 22 ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True e The Orientation property is set to boRightLeft It is the margin between the end of the barcode symbol and the left side of the Tlmage control See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones Timage TQRImage Ti
204. de it into a barcode symbol For the TBarcodeFmx2D_RSS14 and TBarcodeFmx2D_RSSLimited components if the property AutoCheckDigit is set to true the check digit doesn t need to be included in the parameter otherwise the check digit can be specified by you in the parameter See also the Barcode and Data properties ShowQuietZone Boolean Specifies whether to include the leading quiet zone trailing quiet zone top quiet zone and bottom quiet zone in the barcode symbol If the parameter value is set to true these quiet zones are included Otherwise they don t be included You can use the LeadingQuietZone TrailingQuietZone TopQuietZone and BottomQuietZone properties to specify the size of these quiet zones in modules See diagram the quiet zones are drawn in claSilver color in order to accentuate them TopQuietZone e x t H E IRS s E O E H O 20 S 8 BottomQuietZone ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode component leading quiet zone and trailing quiet zone will be included always even if the ShowQuietZone parameter value is set to false See diagram the quiet zones are drawn inclaSilver color in order to accentuate them TopQuietZone auozn and upea auozwindBbuyiesy auoznand upea auozwinO uges BottomQuietZone ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True See also the ShowQuietZone property e Module Single Specifies the module size in
205. de symbol is 4 The percentage of total capacity for ECC data is 40 e elLevel_5 The ECC level of a Grid Matrix barcode symbol is 5 The percentage of total capacity for ECC data is 50 If the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to true the remaining data capacity of a Grid Matrix barcode symbol will be used to automatically upgrade the error correction code level the highest error correction code level that can be accommodated by current symbol size will by used for creating more robust symbols Read the property to retrieve the factual error correction code level of the Grid Matrix barcode symbol If the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to false the error correction code level specified by the ECCLevel property will be used always The value of this property is always equal to the value of the ECCLevel property The property is read only See also the Error checking and correcting ECC section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_GridMatrix article A 1 17 CurrentECCLevel TBarcodeFmx2D_HanXinCode Contains the factual error correction code level of a Han Xin Code barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxHanXinCode unit THanXinCode EccLevel elLevel 1 elLevel 2 elLevel 3 elLevel 4 property CurrentECCLevel THanXinCode_ EccLevel Description The Han Xin Code symbology offers four levels of error correction from L1 to L4 respectively in increasing order of recovery capacity The property always contains the factual error corre
206. de text It s completely equivalent to escape sequence f that inserts the FNC1 character in Second position mode In this case it shall only be used once in a symbol and shall be placed at beginning of the barcode text and after any ECI indicator block or structured append block if exists followed by an application indicator single Latin alphabetic character from the set a to z and A to Z or a two digit number For example d0100012345678905 Insert a GS character ASCII value 29 as the data field separator to the barcode text It s completely equivalent to the escape sequence f that inserts the FNC1 character as the data field separator In this case it can be placed anywhere but at o beginning of the barcode text For example 010001234567890521512 d2018 See also the Character set section above e g Insert a GS character ASCII value 29 to the barcode text When FNC1 is used as a data field separator it can be used instead of the FNC1 character For example 010001234567890521512 g2018 See also the Character set section above e e lt ECI_Number gt Insert an ECI indicator block to barcode text See also the Extended Channel Interpretation ECI section below e s lt Index gt lt Amound gt lt Parity gt Insert a structured append block to barcode text in order to create the symbol in a structured append See also the Structured append section below Encoding modes QR Code has fo
207. deFmx2D_Data MatriX 125 A 1 50 ECCLevelUpgrade TBarcodeFmx2D_GridMattrix n 126 A 1 51 ECCLevelUpgrade TBarcodeFmx2D_HanXinCode 126 A 1 52 ECCLevelUpgrade TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroQRCode nnn 127 A 1 53 ECCLevelUpgrade TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 ji 127 A 1 54 ECCLevelUpgrade TBarcodeFmMX2D_QRCOdE 128 Eelere 128 A 1 56 EncodeMode TBarcodeFmx2D_ DataMatrix nnn 129 A 1 57 EncodePolicy TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroQRCode nnn 129 A 1 58 EncodePolicy TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode n 130 A 1 59 FixedLength TBarcodeFmx2D_AztecRUnmes nnn 131 A 1 60 Image 131 A 1 61 InitialMode TBarcodeFMmx2D_Code1 6K 131 A 1 62 Inversed TBarcodeFmx2D_AztecCode TBarcodeFmx2D_ DataMatrix etc jeee 132 A 1 63 Leading QuietZone nnn 133 e ET EEN 134 TT E 135 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual IP TS UGG ees scat 136 A 1 67 MaxColumns TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF41 7 rnin 136 A 1 68 MaxRows TBarcodeFmx2D_Code1 6K penn 137 A 1 69 MaxRows TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 rmneenemnmmnmnmnnnnnnnnnmnnnnnmnnnnnnnmnnnennnnnenmnnnenenenenenmnnnnnnenennnnnnananannn 137 A 1 70 MaxSegments TBarcodeFMmx2D_Com pactMattix nnn 138 A 1 71 MaxSize TBarcodeFmx2D_AztecCode nnn 139 A 1 72 MaxSize TBarcodeFmx2D_ DataMatrix n 139 A 1 73 MaxSize TBarcodeFmx2D_DataMatrixE CC 00 hee 140 A 1 74 MaxSize TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroPDF41 ke 141 A 1 75 MaxSliceLen TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroQRCode nnn 141 A 1 76 MaxSliceLen TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode nnn 142 A 1 77 MaxVersion TBarcodeFmx2D_Com pactMatrix n 142 A 1 78 MaxVers
208. deFmx2D_RSSLimited and TBarcodeFmx2D_RSSExpanded articles A 1 114 ShowQuietZone Specifies whether to draw the leading quiet zone trailing quiet zone top quiet zone and bottom quiet zone Syntax property ShowQuietZone Boolean Description The property specifies whether to draw the leading quiet zone trailing quiet zone top quiet zone and bottom quiet zone If the property value is set to true these quiet zones are drawn Otherwise they don t be drawn And they are drawn using the color specified by the SpaceColor property if the Inversed property is set to false Otherwise they are drawn using the color specified by the BarColor property See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones TopQuietZone e EI A t z IA EA e dE y bd BottomQuietZone ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True You can use the LeadingQuietZone TrailingQuietZone TopQuietZone and BottomQuietZone properties to specify the size of these quiet zones in modules For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode components the leading and trailing quiet zones their size is specified by LeadingQuietZone and TrailingQuietZone properties will be drawn always even if the ShowQuietZone property value is set to false See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones TopQuietZone t auon and upea auozwingBGuyiesy auon and up
209. deHeight BarcodeHeight BarcodeHeight BarcodeHeight d d L t 7 q aa F ki al tak Ce NC gt gt E ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Orientation boleftRight Orientation boLeftRight Orientation boTopBottom Orientation boTopBottom o If the BarcodeHeight property value is less than zero When the Orientation property is set to boLeftRight or boRightLeft the TopMargin property value and the absolute value of the negative height will be subtracted from the height of the Timage control that s specified by the Image property then the result will be used as the final barcode height the barcode symbol will be reduced stretched to fit this final height value it specifies the bottom margin of the barcode symbol 1 denotes the bottom margin is 1 2 denotes the bottom margin is 2 See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones Timage TQRImage Timage TQRImage TopMargin TopMargin EE ANE SE HS BarcodeHeight BarcodeHeight ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True When the Orientation property is set to boTopBottom or boBottomTop the LeftMargin property value and the absolute value of the negative height will be subtracted from the width of the Tlmage control that s specified by the Image property then the result will be used as the final barcode height the barcode symbol will be r
210. ded in the Data Matrix ECC 200 symbol by the ECI indicator block The escape sequence e lt ECI_Number gt is used to place the ECI indicator block to the barcode text e ECI_Number The ECI number it s an integer between 0 and 999999 including the boundaries the leading zero is optional ECI indicator blocks may be placed anywhere in the barcode text in a single or structured append set of Data Matrix ECC 200 symbols For example ABC e 123 DEFabc e 000003 def The AllowEscape property should be set to true in order to place the ECI indicator blocks Any ECI invoked shall apply until the end of the barcode text or until another ECI indicator block is encountered Thus the interpretation of the ECI may straddle two or more symbols Structured append In order to handle larger messages than are practical in a single symbol a data message can be distributed across several Data Matrix ECC 200 symbols Up to 16 Data Matrix ECC 200 symbols may be appended in a structured format to convey more data If a symbol is part of a structured append this shall be indicated by a structured append block in barcode text The escape sequence s lt Index gt lt Amount gt lt File_ld gt is used to place the structured append block to the barcode text e Index The position index of the symbol within the set of Data Matrix ECC 200 symbols in the structured append format It s an integer between 1 and 16 including the boundaries in string
211. digits which is encoded in the Compact Matrix symbol by the ECI indicator block The escape sequence e lt ECI_Number gt is used to place the ECI indicator block to the barcode text e EC Number The ECI number it s an integer between 0 and 811799 including the boundaries the leading zero is optional In a single symbol or structured append set of Compact Matrix symbols if the AIM FNC1 OO GS1 FNC1 1 FNC2 structured append block 2 and FNC3 3 are used ECI indicator blocks may be placed anywhere behind of them otherwise they may be placed anywhere in the barcode text For example ABC e 123 DEFabc e 000003 def The AllowEscape property should be set to true in order to place the ECI indicator blocks Any ECI invoked shall apply until the end of the barcode text or until another ECI indicator block is encountered Thus the interpretation of the ECI may straddle two or more symbols Structured append 29 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual In order to handle larger messages than are practical in a single symbol a data message can be distributed across several Compact Matrix symbols Up to 16 Compact Matrix symbols may be appended in a structured format to convey more data If a symbol is part of a structured append this shall be indicated by a structured append block in barcode text The escape sequence 2 lt File_ld gt lt Amount gt lt Index gt is used to place the structured append block to the bar
212. digits which is encoded in the PDF417 by the ECI indicator block The escape sequence e lt ECI_Number gt is used to place the ECI indicator block to the barcode text e ECI_Number The ECI number it s an integer between 0 and 999999 including the boundaries the leading zero is optional ECI indicator blocks may be placed anywhere in the barcode text in a single or Macro PDF417 set of symbols For example ABC e 123 DEFabc e 000003 def Normally the sub mode invoked immediately prior to the ECI escape sequence is preserved for the encodation immediately after it Thus sub mode latches and shifts are preserved across an ECI escape sequence and thus a sub mode shift immediately before an ECI escape sequence is not ignored If the value polgnoreShiftBeforeECl is included in the Options property the sub mode shift immediately before an ECI escape sequence is ignored but a sub mode latch immediately before an ECI escape sequence is never ignored The AllowEscape property should be set to true in order to place the ECI indicator blocks Any ECI invoked shall apply until the end of the barcode text or until another ECI indicator block is encountered Thus the interpretation of the ECI may straddle two or more symbols Compact PDF417 In an environment where space considerations are a primary concern and symbol damage is unlikely e g an office DENNEN the right row indicators may be omitted and the stop pattern may be reduced to one modul
213. ding zeros are required in the barcode text If the property is set to true the length of the barcode text must be exactly equal to 3 digits adding leading zeros are required if the length is less than 3 digits such as 0 2 and 25 If the property is set to false the length of the number barcode text should be less than or equal to 3 digits the leading zeros are optional such as 0 12 012 and 255 In this case the barcode symbol isn t changed when you remove leading zeros from the barcode text or add leading zeros to the barcode text For example the barcode symbol 12 is same as barcode symbol 012 Note for the Aztec Runes barcode symbology the Barcode property cannot be set to an empty string otherwise an OnInvalidLength will occur Also the Data property cannot be set to an empty TBytes array otherwise an OnInvalidDataLength event will occur See also the Character set and the Data capacity sections in the TBarcodeFmx2D_AztecRunes article A 1 60 Image Specifies a Tlmage control to represent the barcode symbol Syntax property Image TControl Description Specifies a Tlmage control to display the barcode symbol The barcode picture will not be saved into the DFM file in design time You can link single Timage control to multiple TBarcodeFmx2D components in order to display multiple barcode symbols in the Timage control using LeftMargin and TopMargin properties to specify the position for every ba
214. don t be included You can use the LeadingQuietZone TrailingQuietZone TopQuietZone and BottomQuietZone properties to specify the size of these quiet zones in modules See diagram the quiet zones are printed in claSilver color in order to accentuate them TopQuietZone E EI A t P H f 3 y sl d 1 IS HS E 8 iy BottomQuietZone ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode component leading quiet zone and trailing quiet zone will be included always even if the ShowQuietZone parameter value is set to false See diagram the quiet zones are printed in claSilver color in order to accentuate them TopQuietZone t auozn and upea auon upes auoznand upea auon nd uges 4 BottomQuietZone ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True See also the ShowQuietZone property e Module Single Specifies the module size in millimeters 249 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual o For the Matrix 2D barcode symbology excluding the TBarcodeFmx2D_MaxiCode barcode symbology the module is single cell a suqare shape used to encode one bit data The parameter specifies the module width and height See diagram Module ag GC o For the TBarcodeFmx2D_MaxiCode barcode symbology the module is single cell a regular hexagonal shape used to encode one bit data The parameter specifies the horizonal width of a module Also it s the center to center horizontal dista
215. dule size the BarcodeHeight parameter value will be ignored See also the BarcodeWidth property BarcodeHeight Single Specifies the barcode symbol height the distance between the top and bottom of the barcode symbol in millimeters If the quiet zones are printed please read the ShowQuietZone property about whether or not the quiet zones will be printed the top quiet zone and the bottom quiet zone are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the SpaceColor property is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones 226 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual ShowQuietZone False Angle 0 30 90 BarcodeHeight BarcodeHeight BE ESSN ef ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Iesst Note if the parameter is provided and it isn t zero and the BarcodeWidth parameter isn t provided or it s zero the value of Module parameter will be ignored the module size will be calculated based on the BarcodeHeight parameter value If both BarcodeHeight and BarcodeWidth parameters aren t provided or they are all zero the barcode symbol height will be determined by the Module parameter value If both BarcodeWidth and BarcodeHeight parameters are provided and aren t zero only the BarcodeWidth parameter value will be used to calculate the module size the BarcodeHeight parameter value will be ignored See also the BarcodeHeight property Return This method can return one of these values thes
216. dules See diagram RowHeight Style rsStandard For the RSS Expanded Stacked barcode symbol the Style property is set to rsStacked the property specifies the height of each stacked row for the RSS Expanded Stacked barcode symbol in modules See diagram 161 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual D KE Style rsStacked The property should be set to an integer greater than or equal to 34 A 1 108 RowSymbols TBarcodeFmx2D_RSSExpanded Specifies the number of symbol segments in each row for an RSS Expanded Stacked symbol Syntax property RowSymbols Integer Description The property specifies the number of symbol segments in each row for an RSS Expanded Stacked symbol the Style property is set to rsStacked It s an integer between 2 and 20 including the boundaries only even values are valid the barcode symbol will be stacked in two to eleven rows based on the total numbers of symbol segments and the number of symbol segments in each row If the RSS Expanded Stacked symbol is used together with a 4 column CC A or a 4 column CC B barcode symbol to create the EAN UCC composite symbol the RSS Expanded Stacked symbol shall contain at least four symbol characters within its top row In other words the value of RowSymbols property should be greater than or equal to 4 See also the Symbol size section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_RSSExpanded article A 1 109 SeparatorBarHeight TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K S
217. e the right margin will be subtracted from the width of Timage control that s specified by the Image property then the result will be returned When the Orientation property is set to boTopBottom or boBottomTop If the BarcodeHeight property value is greater than zero it s same to the BarcodeHieght property value 252 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual If the BarcodeHeight property value is equal to zero the LeftMargin property value will be subtracted from the width of Timage control that s specified by the Image property then the result will be returned If the BarcodeHeight property value is less than zero the LeftMargin property value and the absolute value of the negative BarcodeHeight property value i e the right margin will be subtracted from the width of Timage control that s specified by the Image property then the result will be returned e Height Single Returns the vertical height of the rotated barcode symbol that s displyed in the Tlmage control specified in the Image property in pixels See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones sa sst Orientation boLeftRight Orientation boTopBottom If the quiet zones are displayed please read the ShowQuietZone property about whether or not the quiet zones will be displayed they are included See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to acce
218. e Assign e Save 4 2 8 TSaveFmx2D_Wmf The component is used to save the barcode symbol to image file in Windows Metafile Format WMF It is defined in the pfmxSave2D_Wmf unit Properties Methods Events e Barcode2D e Create e OnSave e Placeable e Destroy e OnSaved e LogicUnitsPerlnch e Assign e Save 4 3 TCopyFmx2D The component is used to copy the barcode symbol to clipboard It is defined in the pfmxCopy2D unit Properties Methods e Barcode2D e Create e Destroy e Assign e Copy 4 4 TUserWorkArea It contains fields to specify the parameters e g position size etc for the barcode symbol It is defined in the pfmxBarcode2D unit Syntax type Defined in the pfmxBarcode2D unit TUserWorkArea record WCanvas TCanvas WBarcode string WBarColor TAlphaColor WSpaceColor TAlphaColor WOpacity Single 89 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual WModule Single WLeftInPixels Single WTopInPixels Single WAngle Single WShowQuietZone Boolean WMirror Boolean WBarcodeData TBytes WBarcodeLength Integer WOQuietZoneWidthInModules Left Integer WQuietZoneWidthInModules Top Integer WQuietZoneWidthInModules Right Integer WQuietZoneWidthInModules Bottom Integer WSymbolZoneWidthInModules Integer WSymbolZoneHeightInModules Integer WTotalWidthInPixels Single WTotalHeightInPixels Single WSymbolZoneOffsetInPixels Left Single WSymbolZoneOffsetInPixels Top Single WAlpha Single
219. e Code128 specification used by AIM Global the symbology identifier prefix is set to C2 or L4 Also it implies a mode latch to Numeric compaction mode The escape sequence shall only be placed once at beginning of barcode text otherwise an OnlnvalidChar or OnInvalidDataChar event will occur 910 It indicates that the PDF417 symbol s data output shall conform with the Code128 specification standard data package the symbology identifier prefix is set to CO or L5 and implies a mode latch to Mixed sub mode of Text compaction mode The escape sequence shall only be placed once at beginning of barcode text otherwise an OnlnvalidChar or OnInvalidDataChar event will occur 911 It indicates that the PDF417 symbol s data output shall conform with the Code128 specification standard data package the symbology identifier prefix is set to CO or L5 and implies a mode latch to Numeric compaction mode The escape sequence shall only be placed once at beginning of barcode text otherwise an OninvalidChar or OnInvalidDataChar event will occur 912 AAYYMMDDBB It represents a leading FNC1 character in First position mode and implies a mode latch to Numeric compaction mode Not only does it indicate that the PDF417 symbol s data output shall conform with the Code128 specification UCC EAN 128 emulation the symbology identifier prefix is set to C1 or L3 but also it encodes that the data begins with a 6 digit date field Application Identifier
220. e accompanying printed materials and any copies of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT are owned by the Author of this Software The SOFTWARE PRODUCT is protected b copyright laws and international treaty provisions Therefore you must treat the SOFTWARE PRODUCT like any other copyrighted material except that you may install the SOFTWARE PRODUCT on a single computer provided you keep the original solely for backup or archival purposes MISCELLANEOUS Should you have any questions concerning this EULA or if you desire to contact the author of this Software for any reason please contact him at the email address mentioned at the bottom of this EULA LIMITED WARRANTY 1 NO WARRANTIES The Author of this Software expressly disclaims any warranty for the SOFTWARE PRODUCT The SOFTWARE PRODUCT an any related documentation is provided as is without warranty of any kind either express or implied including without limitation the implied warranties or merchantability fitness for a particular purpose or non infringement The entire risk arising out of use or performance of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT remains with you NOLIABILITY FOR DAMAGES In no event shall the author of this Software be liable for any damages whatsoever including without limitation damages for loss of business profits business interruption loss of business information or any other pecuniary loss arising out of the use of or inability to use this product even if the Author of this Soft
221. e alpha channel of the BarColor parameter is supported See also the BarColor property SpaceColor TAlphaColor In general the Inversed property is set to false In this case the parameters specifies the color for all spaces Stacked 2D barcode symbology and Linear 1D barcode symbology or light modules Matrix 2D barcode symbology in the barcode symbol Also if the ShowQuietZone parameter value is set to true the leading quiet zone trailing quiet zone top quiet zone and bottom quiet zone are printed using the color If the Inversed property is set to true it specifies the color for all bars Stacked 2D barcode symbology and Linear 1D barcode symbology or dark modules Matrix 2D barcode symbology in the barcode symbol The alpha channel of the SpaceColor parameter is supported See also the SpaceColor property ShowQuietZone Boolean Specifies whether to print the leading quiet zone trailing quiet zone top quiet zone and bottom quiet zone in the barcode symbol If the parameter value is set to true these quiet zones are printed Otherwise they don t be printed You can use the LeadingQuietZone TrailingQuietZone TopQuietZone and BottomQuietZone properties to specify the size of these quiet zones in modules See diagram the SpaceColor parameter is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones E ToPQuietZone 5 amp t amp e F y ei Ou Ia Ise S 4 3 BottomQuietZone
222. e bottom quiet zone are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the SpaceColor parameter is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones ShowQuietZone False Angle 0 30 90 BarcodeHeight e Te ef ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Note if the parameter is provided and it isn t zero and the BarcodeWidth parameter isn t provided or it s zero the value of Module parameter will be ignored the module size will be calculated based on the BarcodeHeight parameter value If both BarcodeHeight and BarcodeWidth parameters aren t provided or they are all zero the barcode symbol height will be determined by the Module parameter value If both BarcodeWidth and BarcodeHeight parameters are provided and aren t zero only the BarcodeWidth parameter value will be used to calculate the module size the BarcodeHeight parameter value will be ignored See also the BarcodeHeight property 236 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Return This method can return one of these values these consts are defined in the pfmxCore2D unit e Verify_InvalidLength 2 It indicates that the length of Data parameter value is invalid e Verify_OK 1 It indicates the method succeeds e Verify_Invalidindex_Base 0 and greater than 0 It indicates that an invalid byte value is in the Data parameter the return value is the position index of the invalid byte value The index 0 denotes that the first byte value is inv
223. e consts are defined in the pfmxCore2D unit Verify_Invalidindex_AfterBarcode 4 If you use the Barcode property to specify the barcode text and use the OnEncode event handle to encode the barcode text to a bytes sequence in your own encoding scheme the Verify_InvalidIndex_AfterBarcode 4 indicats that an invalid byte value is in the suffix codes of the bytes sequence Verify_Invalidindex_BeforeBarcode 3 If you use the Barcode property to specify the barcode text and use the OnEncode event handle to encode the barcode text to a bytes sequence in your own encoding scheme the Verify_InvalidIndex_BeforeBarcode 3 indicats that an invalid byte value is in the prefix codes of the bytes sequence for example the BOM Verify_InvalidLength 2 If you use the Barcode property to specify the barcode text it indicates that the length of Barcode property value is invalid also the OnInvalidLength event will occur If you use the Data property to specify the barcode text it indicates that the length of Data property value is invalid also the OnInvalidDataLength event will occur Verify_OK 1 It indicates the method succeeds Verify_Invalidindex_Base 0 and greater than 0 If you use the Barcode property to specify the barcode text it indicates that an invalid character is in the barcode text also the OnlInvalidChar event will occur The return value is the position index of the invalid charactere For 32 bit Windows 64 bit
224. e control See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones Timage TQRImage Timage TQRImage H TopMargin 22 RESI ShowQuietZone True e The Orientation property is set to boTopBottom It is the margin between the beginning of the barcode symbol and the top side of the Tlmage control See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones Timage TQRImage Timage TQRImage TopMargin 22 H TopMargin 22 ES BS a eem ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True e The Orientation property is set to boBottomTop It is the margin between the end of the barcode symbol and the top side of the Tlmage control See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones Timage TQRImage Timage TQRImage TopMargin 22 H TopMargin 22 E maa is ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True IS H CAL Note For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode components the leading quiet zone and the trailing quiet zone are included always even 176 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual if the ShowQuietZone is set to false See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones Timage TQRImage f TopMargin Orientation boTopBottom Orientati
225. e data into a QR Code symbol If the property is set to true the component will automatically select the encoding mode between Kanji mode and Byte mode when the Kanji characters are encountered in order to minimize the symbol size Otherwise all Kanji characters are always encoded in Byte mode See also the Encoding modes section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode article A 1 4 AutoCheckDigit TBarcodeFmx2D_RSS14 TBarcodeFmx2D_RSSLimited Specifies whether the check digit should be automatically appended to the barcode symbol Syntax property AutoCheckDigit Boolean Description The RSS 14 and the RSS Limited barcode symbologies encode the GS1 14 digit EAN UCC item identification number Global Trade Item Numbers GTINs in a symbol its last digit represents the check digit It is a form of redundancy check used for error detection It consists of a single numeric character computed from the other character in the EAN UCC item identification number The property specifies whether the check digit should be automatically appended to the barcode symbol If the AutoCheckDigit property is set to false the check digit shall be included in the barcode text so the length of barcode text shall is 14 numeric characters and the last numeric character in the barcode text is the check digit If the AutoCheckDigit property is set to true the check digit will be appended automatically by the component so the length of barcode text shall is 1
226. e e Clear e OnlinvalidChar e BarColor e Draw e OnlnvalidLength e SpaceColor e Size e OnlnvalidDataChar e Opacity e DrawTo e OnlnvalidDataLength e Orientation e DrawToSize e OnDrawBarcode e Stretch e Print e LeftMargin e PrintSize e TopMargin e BarcodeWidth e BarcodeHeight e ShowQuietZone LeadingQuietZone TopQuietZone TrailingQuietZone BottomQuietZone EnableUpdateDB Locked 4 1 1 TBarcodeFmx2D_AztecCode The component is used to create the Aztec Code 2D Barcodes symbols It s defined in the pfmxAztecCode unit Aztec Code is a two dimensional matrix symbology whose symbols are nominally square made up of square modules on a square grid with a square bullseye pattern at their center Aztec Code symbols can encode from small to large amounts of data with user selected percentages of error correction All 256 8 bit values can be encoded ae eee Aztec Code is invented by Andrew Longacre Jr and Robert Hussey in 1995 The code was published by AIM Inc in 1997 It is used for small item marking applications using a wide variety of printing and marking technologies 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Formats There are two basic formats of Aztec Code symbols e Compact There is a 2 ring bullseye pattern in the symbol center It s useful for encoding shorter messages efficiently nea You can use the SymbolMode property to specify which formats and Aztec Code symbol sizes see also the Symbol sizes section be
227. e elQuality Indicates to use the ECC level Q up to 25 approx damage can be corrected If the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to true the highest error correction code level that can be accommodated by current symbol size will by used for creating more robust symbols Note the new level is always no lower than the level specified by this property and the symbol size will not be increased it may be determined depending on the length of barcode text and the error correction code level specified by this property In other words only the remaining capacity in current symbol size will be used to upgrade the error correction code level The CurrentECCLevel property can always be used to get the factual error correction code level See also the Error checking and correcting ECC section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroQRCode article A 1 46 ECCLevel TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 Specifies which ECC level error correction code level will be used to increase strength of a PDF417 barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxPDF417Custom unit TPDF417_EccLevel elEcc_0 elEcc_1 elEce 2 elEcc_3 elEcc_4 elEcc_5 elEcc_6 elEcc_7 elEcc 8 elEcc Auto property ECCLevel TPDF417 EccLevel Description The PDF417 symbology offers nine levels of error correction referred to as ECC 0 to ECC 8 respectively in increasing order of recovery 123 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual capacity The property specifies whi
228. e is equal to 6 modules on all four sides So the minimum values of LeadingQuietZone TrailingQuietZone TopQuietZone and BottomQuietZone properties are equal to 6 Character set e All 7 bit ASCII values can be encoded e 8 bit binary data can be encoded GB 18030 Chinese characters can be encoded e Five non data characters can be encoded o AIM FNCt It identifies symbols formatted in accordance with specific industry or application specifications previously agreed with AIM International It is immediately followed by an application indicator assigned to identify the specification concerned by AIM International For this purpose it shall only be used once in a symbol and shall be placed at beginning of the barcode The escape sequence 0 can be used to placed the FNC1 character to barcode text o GS1 FNCt It identifies symbols encoding data formatted according to the GS1 Application Identifiers standard For this 28 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual purpose it shall only be used once in a symbol and shall be placed at beginning of the barcode text The escape sequence 1 can be used to placed the GS1 FNC1 character to barcode text o FNC2 The FNC2 is used to implement structured append function in order to handle larger messages than are practical in a single symbol The escape sequence 2 lt File_ld gt lt Amount gt lt Index gt is used to place the FNC2 character and other structured append information colle
229. e method to caculate the check sum of a block of binary bytes data See also the Data property article e AllowEscape Boolean Specifies whether to allow users to insert the escape sequences to the Data parameter value in order to place the function characters and additional control information See also the Escape sequences section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroPDF 417 article and the AllowEscape property article e Invalidindex Integer If there is any invalid byte value in the barcode text that is specified by the Data parameter the parameter returns the position index of first invalid byte value the index 0 denotes that the first byte is invalid Otherwise it returns the Verify_OK 1 This method can return one of these values these consts are defined in the pfmxCore2D unit o Verify_OK 1 It indicates the method succeeds o Verify_Invalidindex_Base 0 and greater than 0 It indicates that an invalid byte value is in the Data parameter the return value is the position index of the invalid byte value The index 0 denotes that the first byte value is invalid e Options TPDF417_Options TheOptions parameter is an advanced feature which allows low level control over data encoding The parameter can be used to change the encoding algorithm and meanings of some fucntion codewords in order to match the reader The values that can be included in the Options parameter are defined in the pPDF417Com unit See also the Options
230. e minimum symbol size specified by the MinVersion and MinSegments properties and the maximum symbol size specified by the MaxVersion and MaxSegments properties only symbol sizes that they approximately match the aspect ratio will be used According to the data capacity in increasing order of recovery capacity the smallest symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected If the barcode text cannot be accommodated by the maximum symbol size specified by the MaxVersion and MaxSegments properties an OnInvalidLength the barcode text is specified in the Barcode property or OnInvalidDataLength the barcode text is specified in the Data property event will occur See also the Symbol sizes section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_CompactMatrix article A 1 120 StretchOrder TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroPDF417 Specifies the priority order of selecing appropriate symbol size for a MicroPDF417 barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxMicroPDF417 unit TMicroPDF417 StretchOrder soRowColumn soColumnRow soRowPrior soColumnPrior soGlobal 1 soGlobal 2 soGlobal 3 soGlobal 4 property StretchOrder TMicroPDF417 StretchOrder Description The property specifies a priority order in order to automatically select the symbol size for a MicroPDF417 barcode symbol According to the priority order the first symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between the minimum symbol size spec
231. e number of rows and columns in every symbol size For example the symbol size value dmSize_45_45 denotations the Data Matrix ECC 000 140 symbol size is 45 rows by 45 columns These symbol size values are defined in the pfmxDataMatrix unit The smallest symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between the minimum symbol size specified by the MinSize property and the maximum symbol size specified by this property If the barcode text is so long that it cannot be encoded using the maximum symbol size specified by this property an OnInvalidLength the barcode text is specified in the Barcode property or an OnInvalidDataLength the barcode text is specified in the Data property event will occur The CurrentSize property can be used to get the factual symbol size Note if the property is set to a value less than the MinSize property s value the MinSize property will be automatically changed to equal to this property s value In other words the MaxSize property s value is always greater than or equal to the MinSize property s value See also the Symbol sizes section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_DataMatrix article A 1 73 MaxSize TBarcodeFmx2D_DataMatrixECC200 Specifies the maximum symbol size for a Data Matrix ECC 200 barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxDataMatrixEcc200 unit TDataMatrixEcc200 Size dmSize 10 10 dmSize 12 12 dmSize 14 14 dmSize 16 16 dmSize 18 18 dmSize 20 2
232. e parameter is set to false See diagram the SpaceColor parameter is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones See also the LeftMargin property ShowQuietZone False Angle 0 30 90 ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 e Top Single Specifies the margin between the rotated barcode symbol and the top side of the paper in millimeters in the vertical 229 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual direction If the quiet zones are printed please read the ShowQuietZone parameter about whether or not the quiet zones will be printed they are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the SpaceColor parameter is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones Te T E E ISS g ESSI ea Er SS KE En For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode component the leading quiet zone and the trailing quiet zone are included always even if the ShowQuietZone parameter is set to false See diagram the SpaceColor parameter is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones r MOT S CURT TTT TT TTN ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 See also the TopMargin property e Module Single Specifies the module size in millimeters o For the Matrix 2D barcode symbology excluding the TBarcodeFmx2D_MaxiCode barcode symbology the module is single cell a suqare shape used to encode one bit data The pa
233. e position for every barcode symbol Note If the barcode symbol isn t displayed please check whether the length of barcode text exceeds the maximum length limit or whether there is any invalid character in the barcode text If you use the Barcode property to encode the barcode text you can create the OnInvalidLength event handle to catch the invalid barcode length exception And create the OnInvalidChar event handle to catch the invalid character in the barcode text If you use the Data property to encode the barcode data you can create the OnInvalidDataLength event handle to catch the invalid barcode length exception And create the OnInvalidDataChar event handle to catch the invalid character in the barcode data Also please check whether the Tlmage control is large enough to accommodate entire barcode symbol 3 2 How to use the barcode components with a database The LiveBindings is supported by the components package You can use the LiveBindings mechanism to link aTBarcodeFmx2D barcode component to a data filed in order to encode the data in the database to barcode symbol 1 Put aTBarcodeFmx2D barcode component such as the TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 and TBarcodeFmx2D_RSS14 to your form You can set its Image property to a Tlmage control in order to display the barcode symbol 2 Open the LiveBindings Designer click on the barcode component in the form to select it change the Visible Element sub item of the Li
234. e property then the result will be used as the final barcode width the barcode symbol will be reduced stretched to fit this final width value it specifies the bottom margin of the barcode symbol 1 denotes the bottom margin is 1 2 denotes the bottom margin is 2 See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones 102 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Timage TQRImage Timage TQRImage Lea ToPMargin Bes Bes 2 eS UE Fawcett ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Note For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode component the leading quiet zone and the trailing quiet zone are included always even if the ShowQuietZone property is set to false See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones BarcodeWidth 1wspozeg tApyMePomeg Ap ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Orientation boLeftRight Orientation boLeftRight Orientation boTopBottom Orientation boTopBottom A 1 9 BarColor Specifies the color for all bars or dark modules in the barcode symbol By default it s claBlack Syntax property BarColor TAlphaColor Description For the Matrix 2D barcode symbologies including TBarcodeFmx2D_AztecCode TBarcodeFmx2D_AztecRunes TBarcodeFmx2D_DataMatrix TBarcodeFmx2D_DataMatrixECC200 TBarcodeFmx2D_HanXinCode TB
235. e property is set to false the error correction code level specified by the ECCLevel property will be used always The value of this property is always equal to the value of the ECCLevel property The property is read only See also the Error checking and correcting ECC section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_DataMatrix article A 1 16 CurrentECCLevel TBarcodeFmx2D_GridMatrix Contains the factual error correction code level of a Grid Matrix barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxGridMatrix unit TGridMatrix EccLevel elLevel Recommend elLevel 1 elLevel 2 elLevel 3 elLevel 4 elLevel_5 elLevel_LowestRecommend property CurrentECCLevel TGridMatrix EccLevel Description The Grid Matrix symbology offers five levels of error correction from 1 to 5 respectively in increasing order of recovery capacity The property always contains the factual error correction code level of a Grid Matrix barcode symbol It can be one of these values defined in the pfmxGridMatrix unit 106 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual elLevel_1 The ECC level of a Grid Matrix barcode symbol is 1 The percentage of total capacity for ECC data is 10 e elLevel_2 The ECC level of a Grid Matrix barcode symbol is 2 The percentage of total capacity for ECC data is 20 e elLevel_3 The ECC level of a Grid Matrix barcode symbol is 3 The percentage of total capacity for ECC data is 30 e elLevel_4 The ECC level of a Grid Matrix barco
236. e text will be automatically selected between the minimum symbol size specified by the MinSize property and the maximum symbol size specified by this property If the barcode text is so long that it cannot be encoded using the maximum symbol size specified by this property an OnInvalidLength the barcode text is specified in the Barcode property or an OnInvalidDataLength the barcode text is specified in the Data property event will occur The CurrentSize property can be used to get the factual symbol size Note if the property is set to a value less than the MinSize property s value the MinSize property will be automatically changed to equal to this property s value In other words the MaxSize property s value is always greater than or equal to the MinSize property s value See also the Symbol sizes section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroPDF417 article A 1 75 MaxSliceLen TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroQRCode Specifies the maximum number of bytes to slice the barcode data in order to limit the depth of recursion Syntax 141 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual property MaxSliceLen Integer Description If the property EncodePolicy is set to epMixingOptimal this property specifies the maximum number of bytes to slice the barcode data or text each piece will be encoded in optimal combination of encoding modes using the recursion algorithm It s useful to limit the depth of recursion in order to prevent the computer has no res
237. e the components package If your download link doesn t work please visit the Manage your licenses page to request a new download link Please open the page then enter your order ID license user name or license e mail address to locate your order then click on the oder ID to display it choose a license and click on the Request a new download link the new download link will be sent to this license e mail address automatically Run the installation file barcodefmx2d_ful exe and then click on the Next button in the installation dialog box 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual 5 Read the End User License Agreement You must accept the terms of this agreement before continuing with the installation And then click on the Next button 6 Type your email address and the license key that they are sent from us after you purchase the components package they are not case sensitive And then click on the Next button If you forgot the license key please visit the Manage your licenses page to retrieve it Please open the page then enter your order ID license user name or license e mail address to locate your order then click on the oder ID to display it choose a license and click on the Retrieve the license key the license key will be sent to the license e mail address automatically 7 Specify a target folder it will be created if does not exist the components package will be installed into it And then click on the Ne
238. e used as defined in the EAN UCC General Specifications in the first position The FNC1 character may also be used as a field separator in which case it will be represented in the transmitted message as GS character ASCII value 29 The escape sequence f can be used to placed the FNC1 character to barcode text o ECI The escape sequence e lt ECI_Number gt can be used to place the ECI indicator block to barcode text See also the Extended Channel Interpretation ECI section below The AllowEscape property should be set to true in order to place the FNC1 characters or the ECI indicator blocks Escape sequences If the AllowEscape property is set to true following escape sequences are supported by the component you can insert them to the barcode text e Insert a backslash to barcode text e 5 Insert a 05 macro to barcode text It s used to abbreviate the industry specific header gt RS 05 GS and trailer RS EOT in order to reduce the size of symbol It must be placed at beginning of the barcode text and it shall not be used in conjunction with structured append 6 Insert a 06 macro to barcode text It s used to abbreviate the industry specific header gt RS 06 GS and trailer RS EOT in order to reduce the size of symbol It must be placed at beginning of the barcode text and it shall not be used in conjunction with structured append f Insert a FNC1 character to barcode text See also the Character se
239. e width as they are easier to scan with a wand or linear scanner RSS 14 Stacked is designed to be read by scanners such as wands handheld lasers and linear and 2D imagers It cannot be read efficiently by omnidirectional flat bed and presentation scanners Stacked Omnidirectional RSS 14 Stacked Omnidirectional is a full height RSS 14 two row format It can be used l instead of RSS 14 for omnidirectional scanning applications where the different aspect ratio is needed You can use the Style property to specify which style will be used It can be one of these values rsStandard tacked Sendirectional rsTruncated rsStacked and rsStackedOmnidirectional corresponding to the Standard Truncated Stacked and Stacked Omnidirectional styls They are defined in the pfmxRss14 unit Symbol size e RSS 14 Standard Normally the overall size of this format is 96 modules wide by a minimum of 33 modules high You can use the TotalHeight property to specify the height for an RSS 14 Standard symbol in modules e RSS 14 Truncated Normally the overall size of this format is 96 modules wide by a minimum of 13 modules high You can use the TotalHeight property to specify the height for an RSS 14 Truncated symbol in modules RSS 14 Stacked Normally the top row is 5 modules high and the bottom row is 7 modules high with a 1 module minimum high separator pattern between the two rows So the overall size of this format is 50 modules wide by
240. e width bar This reduction GE pabati version is called Compact PDF417 which is fully decoder compatible with standard PDF417 Note the Compact PDF417 was referred as Truncated PDF417 in previous standard You can set the Compact property to true in order to generate a Compact PDF417 symbol Macro PDF417 Macro PDF417 provides a mechanism for the data in a file too large to be split into blocks and be represented in more than one PDF417 symbol This mechanism is similar to the structured append feature in other symbologies Up to 99999 individual PDF417 symbols may be used to encode data in Macro PDF417 Each Macro PDF417 symbol shall contain additional control information to enable the original data file to be properly reconstructed irrespective of the sequence in which the individual PDF417 symbols are scanned and decoded The escape sequence s lt Index gt lt File_ID gt lt File Name gt lt Amount gt lt Time_Stamp gt lt Sender gt lt Address gt lt File_Size gt lt Checksum is used to place the control information to the barcode text e Index The position index of the symbol within the set of Marco PDF417 symbols It s an integer between 1 and 999999 including the boundaries in decimal string format Note the field is required e File_ID The file ID It is a variable length numeric sequence which contains one or more triads of digits Each triad of digits is an integer between 000 to 899 the leading zero is required
241. e will be used It can be one of values rsStandard and rsStacked corresponding to the Standard and Stacked styls They are defined in the pfmxRss14Expanded unit Symbol size In both RSS Expanded Standard and RSS Expandedn Stacked symbols the barcode text will be encoded as a symbol segments sequence there are between 4 and 22 symbol segments including the boundaries in the sequence The symbol sizes are based on the number of symbol segments and are described in following list e Standard It s a variable length symbology the symbol width is based on the number of symbol segments The symbol height are specified by the RowHeight property in modules Stacked The symbol width is based on the number of symbol segments in each stacked row The symbol height is based on the number of symbol stacked rows and the height of each stacked row You can use the RowSymbols property to specify the number of symbol segments in each row for an RSS Expanded Stacked symbol between 2 and 20 including the boundaries only even values are valid the barcode symbol will be stacked in two to eleven rows based on the total numbers of symbol segments and the number of symbol segments in each row There are three separator patterns between the stacked rows Each row is minimum 34 modules high and each separator pattern is minimum 1 module high You can use the RowHeight property to specify the height for each row in modules And use the SeparatorRowHeight pro
242. ea auoz nd uges 4 BottomQuietZone ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True 165 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual A 1 115 SpaceColor Specifies the color for all spaces or light modules in the barcode symbol By default it s claWhite Syntax property SpaceColor TAlphaColor Description For the Matrix 2D barcode symbologies including TBarcodeFmx2D_AztecCode TBarcodeFmx2D_AztecRunes TBarcodeFmx2D_DataMatrix _TBarcodeFmx2D_DataMatrixECC200 TBarcodeFmx2D_HanXinCode TBarcodeFmx2D_GridMatrix TBarcodeFmx2D_CompactMatrix TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode TBarcodeFmx2D_MaxiCode and TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroQRCode the property specifies the color of every light module background color in matrix symbol if the Inversed property is set to false Otherwise it specifies the color of every dark module The module is single cell in the matrix symbol used to encode one bit data nominally a suqare shape in MaxiCode symbology it s a regular hexagonal shape F o rStacked 2D barcode symbologies and Linear 1D barcode symbologies including TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroPDF417 TBarcodeFmx2D_RSS14 TBarcodeFmx2D_RSSLimited and TBarcodeFmx2D_RSSExpanded the property specifies the color for all spaces background color in the barcode symbol if the Inversed property is set to false Otherwise it specifies the color for all bars Also when the leading quiet zone trailing quiet zone top quiet zone and bottom
243. ecCode unit ranging from 0 to 99 plus always for data security 3 or more additional error correction codewords specified by the ECCCount property This is called a minimum percentage because depending on message length the symbology will typically have to add extra error correction codewords above this minimum to fill out the symbol 119 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual It determines the error correction level together with the ECCCount property For example if the ECCLevel property is set to 23 and the ECCCount property is set to 3 a symbol azSize_37 which holds 120 codewords should include at least 31 120 23 3 error correction codewords leaving up 89 codewords for encoding the data message Depending on message length the symbology will typically have to add extra error correction codewords above this minimum to fill out the symbol The property can be one of values from 0 to 99 corresponding to the ECC level from 0 to 99 They are defined in the pfmxAztecCode unit See also the Error checking and correcting ECC section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_AztecCode article A 1 41 ECCLevel TBarcodeFmx2D_CompactMatrix Specifies which ECC level error correction code level will be used to increase strength of a Compact Matrix barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxCompactMatrix unit TCompactMatrix EccLevel 1 8 property ECCLevel TCompactMatrix EccLevel Description The Compact Mat
244. ecifies the initial compaction mode for a MicroPDF417 barcode symbol In the specification of MicroPDF 417 the initial compaction mode in effect at the start of each symbol shall always be Byte compaction mode but some readers use the Text compaction mode Alpha sub mode as the initial compaction mode The property should be set to match your reader If you don t known the initial compaction mode used by your reader please set the property value to emNull or you can change the Options property to include the poMicroPDF417Explicit901 value in order to explicitly insert a mode latch to Byte compaction mode into beginning of symbol data The property can be one of these values defined in the pfmxMicroPDF417 unit emText Indicates the initial compaction mode to Text compaction mode You can use the DefaultTextEncodeMode property to specify the Text compaction sub mode e emNumeric Indicates the initial compaction mode to Numeric compaction mode emByte Indicates the initial compaction mode to Byte compaction mode emNull The appropriate initial compaction mode will be introduced by an explicit mode latch depending on the barcode text See also the Character set section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroPDF 417 article A 1 38 DefaultTextEncodeMode TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroPDF417 Specifies the initial Text compaction sub mode for a MicroPDF417 barcode symbol if its initial compaction mode is set to Text compaction mode emText Syntax
245. ection code ECC There are four user selectable levels of error correction from L1 to L4 respectively in increasing order of recovery capacity You can use the ECCLevel property to specify the error correction code level for a Han Xin Code symbol It can be one of these values elLevel_1 elLevel_2 elLevel_3 and elLevel_4 they are defined in the pfmxHanXinCode unit corresponding to the ECC levels from L1 to L4 These ECC levels are listed in following table Value of ECCLevel property Error correction code level Recevory capacities approx elLevel_1 L1 8 elLevel_2 L2 15 elLevel_3 L3 23 elLevel_4 L4 30 If the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to true the highest error correction code level that can be accommodated by current symbol size will be used for creating more robust symbols Note the new level is always no lower than the level specified by the ECCLevel property and the symbol size will not be increased it may be determined depending on the length of barcode text and the error correction code level specified by the ECCLevel property see also the Symbol sizes section above In other words only the remaining capacity in current symbol size will be used to upgrade the error correction code level The property CurrentECCLevel can be used to get the factual error correction code level Quiet zones The minimum quiet zone is equal to 3 modules on all four sides So the minimum values of Lead
246. educed stretched to fit this final height value it specifies the right margin of the barcode symbol 1 denotes the right margin is 1 2 denotes the right margin is 2 See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones Timage TQRImage Timage TQRImage BarcodeHeight BarcodeHeight SE Ss LeftMargin LeftMargin ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True A 1 8 BarcodeWidth Specifies the distance between the beginning and end of a barcode symbol in pixels Syntax property BarcodeWidth Single Description Specifies the distance between the beginning and end of a barcode symbol in pixels If the quiet zones are drawn the ShowQuietZone property is set to true the leading quiet zone and the trailing quiet zone are included See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones Selz F fl BarcodeWidth Le BarcodeWidth Foes wea st Ma aed et ali gt ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Orientation boLeftRight Orientation boLeftRight Orientation boTopBottom Orientation boTopBottom The property is set using the following formula 101 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual e When the property Stretch is set to false The BarcodeWidth property will be ignored and the width of barcode symbol will be calculated based on the
247. el is always no lower than the level specified by the ECCLevel property and the symbol size will not be increased it may be determined based on the length of barcode text and the error correction code level specified by the ECCLevel property in other words only the remaining capacity in current symbol size will be used to upgrade the error correction code level The CurrentECCLevel property can be used to get the factual error correction code level Character set e All 8 bit values can be encoded The default interpretation shall be o For values 0 to 127 in accordance with the U S national version of ISO IEC 646 ASCII o For values 128 255 in accordance with ISO IEC 8859 1 Extended ASCII This interpretation corresponds to ECI 000003 PDF417 has three unique data compaction modes as Text compaction mode Numeric compaction mode and Byte compaction mode All 8 bit values are encoded by switching internally between all 3 compaction modes o Text compaction mode Permits all printable ASCII characters i e ASCII values from 32 to 126 inclusive accordance with ISO IEC 646 as well as selected control characters CR HT and LF The mode has four sub modes Alpha Uppercase letters and space Lower Lowercase letters and space Mixed Numeric and some punctuations 63 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Punctuation Some punctuations The sub mode will be switched automatically in order to minimize the sym
248. en it s default to dmSize_16_48 See also the Shapes section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_DataMatrixECC200 article A 1 113 Show2DSeparator Specifies whether to represent a 2D contiguous separator pattern on top of the RSS 14 RSS Limited or RSS Expanded symbols Syntax property Show2DSeparator Boolean Description 164 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual An RSS barcode symbol including RSS 14 RSS Limited and RSS Expanded can be used together with a CC A or a CC B 2D symbol to create the EAN UCC composite symbol A contiguous separator pattern is required between the RSS and the 2D symbols in an EAN UCC composite symbol The property specifies whether to draw the contiguous separator pattern on top of the RSS symbol in order to create EAN UCC composite symbol using the RSS symbol See digiam the color of separator patterns are changed to red in order to accentuate them II 7 RSS Limited RSS 14 Standard ag mmm RSS 14 Truncated eet RSS Expanded Standard RSS 14 Stacked Nl M Omnidirectional i Stacked The height of contiguous separator pattern is specified by the SeparatorRowHeight for RSS 14 and RSS Expanded components and SeparatorRowHeight for the RSS Limited component property in modules Note in order to draw the contiguous separator pattern both the Show2DSeparator and the Link2D properties must be set to true See also the Composite symbol section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_RSS14 TBarco
249. end block to the barcode text e Index The position index of the symbol within the set of Aztec Code symbols in the structured append format It s an integer between 1 and 26 including the boundaries in string format e Amount The total amount of the symbol within the set of Aztec Code symbols in the structured append format It s an integer between 2 and 26 including the boundaries in string format e Message ID An optional message ID The field is any number of data characters excluding the space character and shall be the same for all symbols which comprise the same message Though the field may be made up of any characters except additional spaces the most efficient encoding will result if it is a string of uppercase letters The AllowEscape property should be set to true in order to place the structured append block The structured append block may only be placed only once in the barcode text Also it shall be placed at beginning of the barcode text The OninvalidChar or OnlInvalidDataChar event will occur if the structured append block be placed more than once or it isn t placed at beginning of the barcode text The following is an example of structured append s 2 5 DESCRIPTION ABCDEFGabcdefg1234567890 20 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Properties Methods Events e Image e Create e OnChange e Barcode e Destroy e OnEncode e Data e Assign e ParseBarcodelndex e Module e Clear e OnlnvalidChar e BarColor e Dr
250. ent will occur if the structured append block be placed more than once or it isn t placed at beginning of the barcode text or behind of the AIM FNC1 0 GS1 FNC1 1 or FNC3 3 The following is examples of structured append 2 79 5 2 ABCDEFGabcdefg1234567890 O 2 99 6 1 ASDFGHJKLO98765 42 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Properties Methods Events e Image e Create e OnChange e Barcode e Destroy e OnEncode e Data e Assign e ParseBarcodelndex e Module e Clear e OnlnvalidChar e BarColor e Draw e OnlnvalidLength e SpaceColor e Size e OnlnvalidDataChar e Opacity e DrawTo e OnlnvalidDataLength e Orientation e DrawToSize e OnDrawBarcode e Stretch e Print e LeftMargin e PrintSize e TopMargin e BarcodeWidth e BarcodeHeight ShowQuietZone LeadingQuietZone TopQuietZone TrailingQuietZone BottomQuietZone EnableUpdateDB Locked AllowEscape MinVersion MaxVersion ECCLevel ECCLevelUpgrade CurrentVersion Read only CurrentECCLevel Read only 4 1 8 TBarcodeFmx2D_HanXinCode The component is used to create the Han Xin Code 2D barcode symbols It s defined in the pfmxHanXinCode unit Han Xin Code is also known as Chinese Sensible Code It is a unique variable size matrix symbology specifically optimized ma ta for two and four byte alphabets such as Chinese and other ideographic pictographic alphabets It is equally suitable for A d single byte ISO Code Pages such as English al Xin
251. entation boTopBottom o lt apimapoeg P Juapimapooeg Eo 0 gt apim pooueg 0 The BarcodeHeight property specifies the height of barcode symbol If the property value is less than or equal to zero it specifies the bottom margin of the barcode symbol the Orientation property is set to boLeftRight or boRightLeft or the right margin of the 167 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual barcode symbol the Orientation property is set to boTopBottom or boBottomTop See also the BarcodeHeight property See diagram Timage TQRImage TopMargin BarcodeHeight gt 0 Margin o i KEN i ee lt 0 Orientation boLeftRight Timage TQRimage Timage TQRimage Timage TQRImage BarcodeHeight gt 0 BarcodeHeight 0 BarcodeHeight lt 0 wi ISS Orientation boTopBottom A 1 119 StretchOrder TBarcodeFmx2D_CompactMatrix Specifies the priority order of selecing appropriate symbol size for a Compact Matrix barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxCompactMatrix unit TCompactMatrix StretchOrder soVersionSegment soSegmentVersion soFixAspect soFixAspectWithQuietZones property StretchOrder TCompactMatrix StretchOrder Description There are 32 vertical sizes of Compact Matrix symbol referred to as version 1 to 32 in increasing order of symbol height and data capacity In horizontal orientation each Co
252. ents User Manual B 1 7 3 DrawToSize Syntax 3 Returns the horizontal width and vertical height of a rotated barcode symbol in dots or pixels The barcode symbol is specified by the parameters of this method Syntax function DrawToSize var Width Height SymbolWidth SymbolHeight Single Data TBytes ShowQuietZone Boolean Module Single Angle Single 0 Canvas TCanvas nil HDPI Integer 0 VDPI Integer 0 Integer overload virtual Description The method returns the horizontal width and vertical height of a rotated barcode symbol that is specified by parameters of this method in dots or pixels Parameters e Width Single Returns the horizontal width of the rotated barcode symbol in dots or pixels in the horizontal direction using the horizontal resolution If the quiet zones are displayed please read the ShowQuietZone parameter section below about whether or not the quiet zones will be displayed they are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the quiet zones are drawn in claSilver color in order to accentuate them IS ISS D Desst Width Width Width Width Width Width ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode component the leading quiet zone and the trailing quiet zone are included always even if the ShowQuietZone parameter is set to false See diagram the quiet zones are drawn inclaSilver color in
253. entuate the quiet zones SE Es d Es L l ef ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 BarcodeWidth For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode component the leading quiet zone and the trailing quiet zone are included always even if the ShowQuietZone parameter is set to false See diagram the SpaceColor parameter is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones oe PF a BarcodeWidth S H Wi S CC ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 Note if the parameter is provided and it isn t zero the values of Module and BarcodeHeight parameters will be ignored the module size will be calculated based on the BarcodeWidth parameter value If both BarcodeHeight and BarcodeWidth parameters aren t provided or they are all zero the barcode symbol width will be determined by the Module parameter value If both BarcodeWidth and BarcodeHeight parameters are provided and aren t zero only the BarcodeWidth parameter value will be used to calculate the module size the BarcodeHeight parameter value will be ignored See also the BarcodeWidth property BarcodeHeight Single Specifies the barcode symbol height the distance between the top and bottom of the barcode symbol in millimeters If the quiet zones are printed please read the ShowQuietZone parameter section above about whether or not the quiet zones will be printed the top quiet zone and th
254. er data into the picture file so the value of EmbedBarcodeText property will be ignored if you use the version e gv89a Uses the version 89a the enhanced version of the Graphics Interchange Format GIF If you use the version you can set the EmbedBarcodeText property to true to embed the encoded barcode text into the Graphics Interchange Format GIF picture file A 2 19 XPPM TSaveFmx2D_Bmp Specifies the horizontal resolution of a Bitmap image BMP file for a TSaveFmx2D_Bmp component in pixels per meter Syntax property XPPM Integer Description The property specifies the horizontal resolution of the bitmap in pixels per meter The value is used to help a bitmap image BMP file reader choose a proper horizontal resolution when printing or displaying the Bitmap image BMP file 187 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual A 2 20 YPPM TSaveFmx2D_Bmp Specifies the vertical resolution of a Bitmap image BMP file for a TSaveFmx2D_Bmp component in pixels per meter Syntax property YPPM Integer Description The property specifies the vertical resolution of the bitmap in pixels per meter The value is used to help a bitmap image BMP file reader choose a proper vertical resolution when printing or displaying the Bitmap image BMP file 188 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual A 3 TCopyFmx2D A 3 1 Barcode2D TCopyFmx2D Links a TBarcodeFmx2D component to a TCopyFmx2D component in order
255. er in order to accentuate the quiet zones sl ShowQuietZone False TopQuietZone gd 4 F a u alt 1 bg BottomQuietZone ShowQuietZone True For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode component leading quiet zone and trailing quiet zone will be drawn always even if the ShowQuietZone parameter value is set to false See diagram the SpaceColor parameter is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones auoznand upea auoz nd uges ShowQuietZone False TopQuietZone 5 t x 8 H H i 3 4 3 BottomQuietZone ShowQuietZone True In general the Inversed property is set to false In this case these quiet zones are drawn using the color specified by SpaceColor parameter If the Inversed property is set to true these quiet zones are drawn using the color specified by BarColor parameter See also the ShowQuietZone property e Left Single Specifies the margin between the rotated barcode symbol and the left side of the canvas in dots or pixels in the horizontal direction using the horizontal resolution If the quiet zones are drawn please read the ShowQuietZone parameter section above about whether or not the quiet zones will be drawn they are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the SpaceColor parameter value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones TEES g9 ShowQuietZone False Angle 0 30 90 Tes a KEA e ShowQuiet
256. erence The last digit represents the Check Digit A leading Application Identifier 01 is implied and is not encoded in the symbol Image Barcode Data Module BarColor SpaceColor Opacity Orientation Stretch LeftMargin TopMargin BarcodeWidth BarcodeHeight ShowQuietZone LeadingQuietZone TopQuietZone TrailingQuietZone BottomQuietZone EnableUpdateDB Locked Style RowHeight RowSymbols SeparatorRowHeight Link2D Show2DSeparator Symbol size Normally the overall size of the RSS Limited symbol is 74 modules wide by a minimum of 10 modules high If both the Link2D and Show2DSeparator properties are set to Ture a contiguous separator pattern is represented and its minimum height is 1 module the pattern height can be specified by the SeparatorRowHeight property In this case the height of the RSS Limited symbol will be reached to increase the contiguous separator pattern height Namely If height of the contiguous separator Methods Create Destroy Assign Clear Draw Size DrawTo DrawToSize Print PrintSize Events OnChange OnEncode ParseBarcodelndex OnInvalidChar OnInvalidLength OnInvalidDataChar OnInvalidDataLength OnDrawBarcode 84 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual pattern is 1 module then the minimum height of the RSS Limited symbol is 11 modules The TotalHeight property can be used to specify the height for an RSS Limited symbol in modules If the contiguous separator pattern i
257. erty and the symbol size will not be increased The CurrentECCLevel property can be used to get the factual error correction code level If the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to false the error correction code level specified by the ECCLevel property will be used always The value of CurrentECCLevel property is always equal to the value of ECCLevel property See also the Error checking and correcting ECC section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_DataMatrix article A 1 50 ECCLevelUpgrade TBarcodeFmx2D_GridMatrix For the Grid Matrix barcode symbols the property specifies whether to use the remaining capacity to automatically upgrade the error correction code level in order to increase symbols strength Syntax property ECCLevelUpgrade Boolean Description For a Grid Matrix barcode symbol the symbol size may be determined depending on the barcode text length and the error correction code level specified by the ECCLevel property And the barcode text and the error correction code don t usually fill the maximum data capacity of the symbol the property specifies whether to use the remaining capacity to automatically upgrade the error correction code level in order to increase symbols strength If the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to true the highest error correction code level that can be accommodated by current symbol size will by used for creating more robust symbols Note the new level is always no lower than the level specified by the E
258. es ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 See also the LeftMargin property e Top Single Specifies the margin between the rotated barcode symbol and the top side of the canvas in dots ot pixels in the vertical direction using the vertical resolution If the quiet zones are drawn please read the ShowQuietZone parameter section above about whether or not the quiet zones will be drawn they are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the SpaceColor parameter value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones ee se ee ee S Iesst e ef ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 es Il For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode component leading quiet zone and trailing quiet zone are included always even if the ShowQuietZone parameter is set to false See diagram the SpaceColor parameter value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 See also the TopMargin property e Module Single Specifies the module size in dots or pixels using the horizontal resolution o For the Matrix 2D barcode symbology excluding the TBarcodeFmx2D_MaxiCode barcode symbology the module is single cell a suqare shape used to encode one bit data The parameter specifies the module width and height See diagram 200 2D Barcode FMX Co
259. es z Width Tes Orientation boLeftRight Orientation boTopBottom E If the quiet zones are displayed please read the ShowQuietZone property about whether or not the quiet zones will be displayed they are included See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones g ESSI ipai Orientation boleftRight Orientation boTopBottom For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode components the leading quiet zone and the trailing quiet zone are included always even if the ShowQuietZone property is set to false See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones The value of Width parameter is calculated using following method o The Stretch property is set to false it s calculated based on the Module property value o The Stretch property is set to true When the Orientation property is set to boLeftRight or boRightLeft If the BarcodeWidth property value is greater than zero it s same to the BarcodeWidth property value If the BarcodeWidth property value is equal to zero the LeftMargin property value will be subtracted from the width of Timage control that s specified by the Image property then the result will be returned If the BarcodeWidth property value is less than zero the LeftMargin property value and the absolute value of the negative BarcodeWidth property value i
260. es 65 to 90 and 9 symbols SP byte values 32 36 37 42 43 45 to 47 58 respectively Note alphanumeric mode is not available in version 1 Micro QR Code symbols e Byte mode All 8 bit values can be encoded Note Byte mode is not available in version 1 or 2 Micro QR Code symbols e Kanji mode The Kanji mode efficiently encodes Kanji characters in accordance with the Shift JIS system based on JIS X 0208 The Shift JIS values are shifted from the JIS X 0208 values JIS X 0208 gives details of the shift coded representation It may be possible to achieve a smaller symbol size by using the Kanji mode compaction rules when an appropriate sequence of byte values occurs in the data You can set the AllowKanjiMode property to false in order to disable the Kanji mode Note Kanji mode is not available in version 1 or 2 Micro QR Code symbols The EncodePolicy property indicates how to use these encoding mode by the component This property can be one of these values defined in the pfmxMicroQRCode unit e epMixingOptimal All 256 8 bits values are encoded by switching automatically between all 4 the AllowKanjiMode property is set to true or 3 the Kanji mode will not be used if the AllowKanjiMode property is set to false encoding modes The optimal combination of encoding modes will be used in order to minimize the symbol size epMixingQuick All 256 8 bits values are encoded by switching automatically between all 4
261. essage and a secondary message internally the symbol employs enhanced error correction for both the primary and secondary messages The mode 5 is similar to mode 4 but it employs enhanced error correction for secondary messages 6 Indicates to use the mode 6 It encodes a message used to program the reader system The barcode message is divided into a primary message and a secondary message internally the symbol employs enhanced error correction for the primary message and standard error correction for the secondary message You can set the AutoMode property to true in order to automatically select the suitable mode depending on the barcode text and the value of this property And use the CurrentMode property to get the factual mode See also the AutoMode property See also the Modes sections in the TBarcodeFmx2D_MaxiCode article A 1 97 Module Specifies the module size in pixels Syntax property Module Integer Description The property specifies the module size in pixels in the horizontal direction For the Matrix 2D barcode symbologies the module is single cell in the matrix symbol used to encode one bit data In the TBarcodeFmx2D_AztecCode TBarcodeFmx2D_AztecRunes TBarcodeFmx2D_CompactMatrix TBarcodeFmx2D_DataMatrix TBarcodeFmx2D_DataMatrixECC200 TBarcodeFmx2D_GridMatrix TBarcodeFmx2D_HanXinCode TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode and TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroQRCode barcode symbologies the module is a suqare shape the property speci
262. et zones are printed in claSilver color in order to accentuate them 245 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual ot BarcodeWidth 90 WI UNI PUT TTT CT TP UT ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 Note if the parameter is provided and it isn t zero the values of Module and BarcodeHeight parameters will be ignored the module size will be calculated based on the BarcodeWidth parameter value If both BarcodeHeight and BarcodeWidth parameters aren t provided or they are all zero the barcode symbol width will be determined by the Module parameter value If both BarcodeWidth and BarcodeHeight parameters are provided and aren t zero only the BarcodeWidth parameter value will be used to calculate the module size the BarcodeHeight parameter value will be ignored See also the BarcodeWidth property BarcodeHeight Single Specifies the barcode symbol height the distance between the top and bottom of the barcode symbol in millimeters If the quiet zones are printed please read the ShowQuietZone parameter section above about whether or not the quiet zones will be printed the top quiet zone and the bottom quiet zone are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the SpaceColor property is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones ShowQuietZone False Ange 0 30 90 BarcodeHeight TERI EN ISS amp ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Note
263. etZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode component the leading quiet zone and the trailing quiet zone are included always even if the ShowQuietZone parameter is set to false See diagram the quiet zones are printed in claSilver color in order to accentuate them 243 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 See also the BarcodeWidth property SymbolHeight Single Returns the distance between the top and bottom of the rotated barcode symbol in millimeter The value is calculated based on the module size You can use one of the Module BarcodeWidth and BarcodeHeight parameters to specify the module size If the quiet zones are printed please read the ShowQuietZone parameter section below about whether or not the quiet zones will be printed they are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the quiet zones are printed in claSilver color in order to accentuate them SymbolHeight SymbolHeight ShowQuietZone False Angle 0 30 90 SymbolHeight SymbolHeight SymbolHeight EEA we ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 el See also the BarcodeHeight property Barcode String Specifies the barcode text It is of type string and it is in fact an UnicodeString By default the unicode string will be converted to an UTF 8 bytes sequence the BOM isn t included
264. ext in order to create the symbol in a structured append See also the Structured append section below Extended Channel Interpretation ECH The Extended Channel Interpretation ECI protocol allows the output data stream to have interpretations different from that of the default character set Four broad types of interpretations are supported in MaxiCode e International character sets or code pages e General purpose interpretations such as encryption and compaction 49 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual e User defined interpretations for closed systems e Control information for structured append in unbuffered mode The ECI protocol provides a consistent method to specify particular interpretations on byte values before printing and after decoding The ECI is identified by an integer up to 6 digits which is encoded in the MaxiCode symbol by the ECI indicator block The escape sequence e ECI_Number is used to place the ECI indicator block to the barcode text e EC Number The ECI number it s an integer between 0 and 999999 including the boundaries the leading zero is optional ECI indicator blocks may be placed anywhere in the barcode text in a single or structured append set of MaxiCode symbols but cannot be within the primary message structured carrier message for modes 2 and 3 e In mode 2 and 3 the ECI blocks may only be invoked within secondary message For example gt 01 r01 g99123456789 g123 g456 g
265. f you use the OnEncode event handle to encode the barcode text to a bytes sequence in your own encoding scheme the Verify_Invalidindex_AfterBarcode 4 indicats that an invalid byte value is in the suffix codes of the bytes sequence Verify_Invalidindex_BeforeBarcode 3 If you use the OnEncode event handle to encode the barcode text to a bytes sequence in your own encoding scheme the Verify_Invalidilndex_BeforeBarcode 3 indicats that an invalid byte value is in the prefix codes of the bytes sequence for example the BOM Verify_InvalidLength 2 It indicates that the length of Barcode parameter value is invalid Verify_OK 1 It indicates the method succeeds Verify_Invalidindex_Base 0 and greater than 0 It indicates that an invalid character is in the barcode text the return value is the position index of the invalid charactere For 32 bit Windows 64 bit Windows and Mac OSX platform the index 1 denotes that the first character is invalid character For iOS and Android platform the index 0 denotes that the first character is invalid character B 1 6 3 DrawTo Syntax 3 Draws a barcode symbol on the specified canvas The barcode symbol is specified by the parameters of this method Syntax function DrawTo Canvas TCanvas Data TBytes BarColor SpaceColor TAlphaColor ShowQuietZone Boolean Left Top Module Single Angle Single 0 Opacity Single 1 HDPI Integer 0 VDPI Integer 0 Integer overl
266. false See diagram the quiet zones are drawn inclaSilver color in order to accentuate them Width Width Width Width ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 Height Single Returns the vertical height of the rotated barcode symbol in dots or pixels in the vertical direction using the vertical resolution If the quiet zones are displayed please read the ShowQuietZone property about whether or not the quiet zones will be displayed they are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the quiet zones are drawn in claSilver color in order to accentuate them E EN ge Height Height SS H pan K L Sei ShowQuietZone False Angle 0 30 90 Ze en e L t ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode component the leading quiet zone and the trailing quiet zone are included always even if the ShowQuietZone property is set to false See diagram the quiet zones are drawn in claSilver color in order to accentuate them ShowQuietZone False Angle 0 30 90 ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 e SymbolWidth Single Returns the distance between the leading and trailing of the rotated barcode symbol in dots or pixels using the horizontal resolution If the quiet zones are displayed please read the ShowQuietZone property about whether or not the quiet zones will be displayed they are included in the barcode symbol
267. fies the module width and height in pixels See diagram 154 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual SEH m i In the TBarcodeFmx2D_MaxiCode symbology the module is a regular hexagonal shape The property specifies the horizonal width of a module in pixels including spacing between modules Also it s the center to center horizontal distance between adjacent modules See diagram Module IN DPG F o rStacked 2D barcode symbology and Linear 1D barcode symbologies including TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroPDF417 TBarcodeFmx2D_RSS14 TBarcodeFmx2D_RSSLimited and TBarcodeFmx2D_RSSExpanded symbologies the module is the thinest bar or space in the barcode symbol The property specifies the module width in pixels See diagram Deman M A 1 98 Opacity Specifies the transparency level of entire barcode symbol Syntax property Opacity Single Description Specifies the transparency level of entire barcode symbol where 1 is not transparant at all 0 5 is 50 see through and 0 is completely transparent The property defaults to 1 meaning not transparant at all Note if the Inversed property is set to false you can use the alpha channel of the SpaceColor property value to specify the transparency level of bakcground color spaces or light modules and quiet zones and use the alpha channel of the BarColor property value to specify the transparency level of foreground color bars or da
268. gle WTopInPixels Single WAngle Single WShowQuietZone Boolean WMirror Boolean WBarcodeData TBytes WBarcodeLength Integer WQuietZoneWidthInModules Left Integer WQuietZoneWidthInModules Top Integer WQuietZoneWidthInModules Right Integer WQuietZoneWidthInModules Bottom Integer WSymbolZoneWidthInModules Integer WSymbolZoneHeightInModules Integer WTotalWidthInPixels Single 260 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual WTotalHeightInPixels Single WSymbolZoneOffsetInPixels Left Single WSymbolZoneOffsetInPixels Top Single WAlpha Single WOrgin TPointF WDensityRate Single end Defined in the pfmxBarcode2D unit PUserWorkArea TUserWorkArea Defined in the pfmxBarcode2D unit TOnDrawBarcode procedure Sender TObject Canvas TCanvas PWorkArea PUserWorkArea of object property OnDrawBarcode TOnDrawBarcode Parameters e Sender TObject It is the object whose event handler is called e Canvas TCanvas The target canvas the barcode symbol will be represented in it e PWorkArea PUserWorkArea It points to the TUserWorkArea record The record contains fields defining the barcode symbol See also the TUserWorkArea record C 1 3 OnEncode Occurs when the value of Barcode property is changed and the component is updating its barcode symbol or one of the following methods is called e Clear e Draw e Size DrawTo Syntax 1 DrawToSize Syntax 1 Print Syntax 1 D P
269. gned for use in the transport industry Primary use is international destinations The mode 3 is similar to mode 2 but the postal code field encodes 6 alphanumeric characters The formats of mode 3 barcode text are specified in the following list o gt RS 01 GS YYPPPPPP GS CCC GS SSS GS MESSAGE RS EOT YY Date year 2 digits PPPPPP Alphanumeric postal code up to 6 alphanumeric characters Only first 6 characters will be encoded if its length is greater than 6 characters All upper case letters all numeric characters space character and the punctuations and symbols corresponding to the ASCII values from 34 to 58 can be encoded CCC Country code 3 digits SSS Serivce class 3 digits MESSAGE Optional secondary message All 256 of the ASCII characters can be used A maximum of about 71 alphanumeric characters or about 107 digits can be encoded in the message RS ASCII character RS ASCII value 30 The RS character after the secondary message is optional If the llowEscape property is set to true you can use the r instead of the RS character GS ASCII character GS ASCII value 29 It s used to delimit each field in barcode text The GS character after the service class can be omitted if secondary message doesn t exist If the AllowEscape property is set to true you can use the g instead of the GS character EOT Optional ASCII character EOT ASCII value 4 If the llowEscape property is set to true you can u
270. h property SymbolHeight Single Returns the distance between the top and bottom of the rotated barcode symbol in millimeter The value is calculated based on the module size You can use one of the Module BarcodeWidth and BarcodeHeight parameters to specify the module size If the quiet zones are printed please read the ShowQuietZone property about whether or not the quiet zones will be printed they are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the quiet zones are printed in claSilver color in order to accentuate them SymbolHeight SymbolHeight SymbolHeight Wed deg es eres ShowQuietZone False Angle 0 30 90 SymbolHeight SymbolHeight on y ISS ef ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 See also the BarcodeHeight property e Module Double Specifies the module size in millimeters o For the Matrix 2D barcode symbology excluding the TBarcodeFmx2D_MaxiCode barcode symbology the module is single cell a suqare shape used to encode one bit data The parameter specifies the module width and height See diagram 239 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual o For the TBarcodeFmx2D_MaxiCode barcode symbology the module is single cell a regular hexagonal shape used to encode one bit data The parameter specifies the horizonal width of a module Also it s the center to center horizontal distance between adjacent modules See diagram Module 3 oe o For the Stacked 2D
271. h the distance between the beginning and end of the barcode symbol in millimeters If the quiet zones are printed please read the ShowQuietZone property about whether or not the quiet zones will be printed the leading quiet zone and the trailing quiet zone are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the SpaceColor property is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones BarcodeWidth mn AA Tl e ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode component the leading quiet zone and the trailing quiet zone are included always even if the ShowQuietZone property is set to false See diagram the SpaceColor property is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones se F ge BarcodeWidth g BarcodeWidth eZ RITOTIUDI S Tat Mu EAH gt HH aT Ti ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 Note if the parameter is provided and it isn t zero the values of Module and BarcodeHeight parameters will be ignored the module size will be calculated based on the BarcodeWidth parameter value If both BarcodeHeight and BarcodeWidth parameters aren t provided or they are all zero the barcode symbol width will be determined by the Module parameter value If both BarcodeWidth and BarcodeHeight parameters are provided and aren t zero only the BarcodeWidth parameter value will be used to calculate the mo
272. h to Numeric compaction mode o 903 If it s placed at beginning of barcode text it represents a leading FNC1 character in First position mode and indicates that the MicroPDF417 symbol s data output shall conform with the Code128 specification UCC EAN 128 emulation the symbology identifier prefix is set to C1 or L3 Also it implies a mode latch to Mixed sub mode of Text compaction mode If it s placed in the barcode text but not at beginning of the barcode text it represents an FNC1 character as field separator and implies a mode latch to Alpha sub mode of Text compaction mode o 904 If it s placed at beginning of barcode text it represents a leading FNC1 character in First position mode and indicates that the MicroPDF417 symbol s data output shall conform with the Code128 specification UCC EAN 128 emulation the symbology identifier prefix is set to C1 or L3 Also it implies a mode latch to Numeric compaction mode If it s placed in the barcode text but not at beginning of the barcode text it represents an FNC1 character as field separator and implies a mode latch to Mixed sub mode of Text compaction mode o 905 If the 905 followed by 13 required digits is placed at beginning of barcode text it represents a leading FNC1 character in First position mode and encodes a SCC 14 number together with subsequent 13 digits the Application Identifier 01 is implied and the last checkdigit isn t required It indicates that t
273. hat accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between the minimum symbol size and the maximum symbol size If the barcode text is so long that it cannot be encoded using the maximum symbol size an OnInvalidLength the barcode text is specified in the Barcode property or an OnInvalidDataLength the barcode text is specified in the Data property event will occur The CurrentRows property can be used to get the factual number of rows Note if the property is set to a value less than the MinColumns property s value the MinColumns property will be automatically changed to equal to this property s value In other words the MaxColumns property s value is always greater than or equal to the MinColumns property s value See also the Symbol size section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 article A 1 68 MaxRows TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K Specifies the maximum number of stacked rows for a Code 16K barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxCodel6K unit TCodel6K Rows 2 16 property MaxRows TCodel6K_ Rows Description The property specifies the maximum number of stacked rows for a Code 16K barcode symbol It can be one of values from 2 to 16 They are defined in the pfmxCode16K unit The smallest number of stacked rows that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between the minimum number of stacked rows specified by the MinRows property and the maximum number of stacked rows specified b
274. he Data property event will occur The CurrentVersion property can be used to get the factual symbol version symbol size Note if the property is set to a value less than the MinVersion property s value the MinVersion property will be automatically changed to equal to this property s value In other words the MaxVersion property s value is always greater than or equal to the MinVersion 144 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual property s value See also the Symbol sizes section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroQRCode article A 1 81 MaxVersion TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode Specifies the maximum symbol version symbol size for a QR Code barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxORCode unit TQRCode Version 1 40 property MaxVersion TQRCode Version Description The property specifies the maximum symbol version symbol size for a QR Code barcode symbol It can be one of values from 1 to 40 They are defined in the pfmxQRCode unit The smallest symbol version symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between the minimum symbol version symbol size specified by the MinVersion property and the maximum symbol version symbol size specified by this property If the barcode text is so long that it cannot be encoded using the maximum symbol version symbol size specified by this property an OnInvalidLength the barcode text is specified in the Barcode property or an OnInvali
275. he barcode text The following is an example of Marco PDF417 symbol Position index 2 File ID 001 287 023 File name Unused Segment count 5 Time stame 05 30 00 GMT on 3 December 2008 Sender Unused Address USA File size Unused Checksum Unused ABCDEFGHIJKLMN s 2 001287023 5 2008 12 03 05 30 00 USA Note if the segment count is unused a Marco PDF417 terminator WU escape sequence is required in last symbol within the set of Marco PDF417 symbols Otherwise it s optional The Wi escape sequence shall be placed at the end of the barcode text after the 69 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual control information For example ABCDEFGHIJKLMN s 5 001287023 t The AllowEscape property should be set to true in order to place the control information and the terminator Properties Methods e Image e Create e Barcode e Destroy e Data e Assign e Module e Clear e BarColor e Draw e SpaceColor e Size e Opacity e DrawTo e Orientation e DrawToSize e Stretch e Print e LeftMargin e PrintSize e TopMargin e GetCheckSum e BarcodeWidth e BarcodeHeight e ShowQuietZone LeadingQuietZone TopQuietZone TrailingQuietZone BottomQuietZone EnableUpdateDB Locked MinRows MaxRows MinColumn MaxColumn StretchOrder ECCLevel ECCLevelUpgrade RowHeight Compact Options AllowEscape CurrentRows Read only CurrentColumns Read only CurrentECCLevel Read only 4 1 13 TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode
276. he maximum is 70 digits for any Als and the maximum is 77 digits for 01 392x any Als Composite symbols Any style of an RSS Expanded barcode symbol can be used together with a 4 column CC A or a 4 column CC B barcode symbol to create the EAN UCC composite symbol In this case the RSS Expanded Stacked symbol shall contain at least four symbol characters within its top row in other words the value of RowSymbols property should be greater than or equal to 4 If you use it together with a CC A or a CC B component that s from another components package theLink2D property should be set to true in order to denote the RSS Expanded symbol is used as the linear component in an EAN UCC composite symbol In this case the Show2DSeparator property specifies whether to represent the contiguous separator pattern between the RSS Expanded linear and 83 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual the 2D components in the EAN UCC composite symbol Properties 4 1 16 TBarcodeFmx2D_RSSLimited The component is used to create the RSS Limited barcode symbols It s defined in the pfmxRssLimited unit RSS Limited is a continuous linear symbology capable encoding the entire GS1 14 digit EAN UCC item identification UI number Global Trade Item Numbers GTINs set with Indicator digits 1 and 0 The first digit represents the Indicator digit to indicate packaging level only 0 and 1 The following twelve digits are the GS1 Company Prefix and the Item Ref
277. he ECI indicator block The escape sequence e lt ECI _Number gt is used to place the ECI indicator block to the barcode text e EC Number The ECI number it s an integer between 0 and 999999 including the boundaries the leading zero is optional In a Han Xin Code symbol the ECI indicator blocks may be placed anywhere in the barcode text For example ABC e 123 DEFabc e 000003 def The AllowEscape property should be set to true in order to place the ECI indicator blocks Any ECI invoked shall apply until the end of the barcode text or until another ECI indicator block is encountered Thus the interpretation of the ECI may straddle two or more symbols Properties Methods Events e Image e Create e OnChange e Barcode e Destroy e OnEncode e Data e Assign e ParseBarcodelndex e Module e Clear e OnlinvalidChar e BarColor e Draw e OnlnvalidLength e SpaceColor e Size e OnlnvalidDataChar e Opacity e DrawTo e OnlnvalidDataLength e Orientation e DrawToSize e OnDrawBarcode e Stretch e Print e LeftMargin e PrintSize e TopMargin e BarcodeWidth e BarcodeHeight ShowQuietZone LeadingQuietZone TopQuietZone TrailingQuietZone BottomQuietZone EnableUpdateDB Locked AllowEscape MinVersion MaxVersion ECCLevel ECCLevelUpgrade ReviseVersion5 CurrentVersion Read only CurrentECCLevel Read only 45 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual 4 1 9 TBarcodeFmx2D_MaxiCode The component is used to create the Maxi
278. he MicroPDF417 symbol s data output shall conform with the Code128 specification UCC EAN 128 emulation the symbology identifier prefix is set to C1 or L3 Also it implies a mode latch to Numeric compaction mode If the it is placed in the barcode text but not at beginning of the barcode text it represents an FNC1 character as field separator and implies a mode latch to Numeric compaction mode o 906 It represents a leading FNC1 character in First position mode and implies a mode latch to Mixed sub mode of Text compaction mode It not only indicates that the MicroPDF417 symbol s data output shall conform with the Code128 specification UCC EAN 128 emulation the symbology identifier prefix is set to C1 or L3 but also indicates that a linear symbol printed below the symbol is linked to the data of the symbol The escape sequence shall only be placed once at beginning of barcode text otherwise an OnlnvalidChar or OnInvalidDataChar event will occur o 907 It represents a leading FNC1 character in First position mode and implies a mode latch to Numeric compaction mode it 54 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual o o o o o not only indicates that the MicroPDF417 symbol s data output shall conform with the Code128 specification UCC EAN 128 emulation the symbology identifier prefix is set to C1 or L3 but also indicates that a linear symbol printed below the symbol is linked to the data of the symbol
279. he PDF417 specification The property can be used to change the encoding algorithm and meanings of these fucntion codewords in order to match the reader The following list describes the values that can be included in the Options property defined in the pfmxPDF417Com unit polgnoreShiftBeforeECI An ECI escape sequence may be placed anywhere within Text Compaction mode Normally the sub mode invoked immediately prior to the ECI escape sequence is preserved for the encodation immediately after it Thus sub mode latches and shifts are preserved across an ECI escape sequence and thus a sub mode shift immediately before an ECI escape sequence is not ignored If the value is included in the Options property the sub mode shift immediately before an ECI escape sequence is ignored but a sub mode latch immediately before an ECI escape sequence is never ignored poFirst903TextAlphaLatch If the function codeword 903 is placed at beginning of barcode text it represents a leading FNC1 character in First position mode Also it normally implies a mode latch to Mixed sub mode of Text Compaction mode the value indicates that it implies a mode latch to Alpha sub mode of Text Compaction mode poFirst904TextMixedLatch If the function codeword 904 is placed at beginning of barcode text it represents a leading FNC1 character in First position mode Also it normally implies a mode latch to Numeric Compaction mode the value indicates that it implies a mode latch
280. he barcode text Composite symbols Any styles of an RSS 14 barcode symbol can be used together with a CC A or CC B barcode symbol to create the EAN UCC composite symbol Only a 4 column CC A or a 4 column CC B symbol can be used together with an RSS 14 Standard or an RSS 14 Truncated symbol Only a 3 column CC A or a 3 column CC B symbol can be used together with an RSS 14 Stacked or an RSS 14 Stacked Omnidirectional symbol If you use it together with a CC A or a CC B component that s from another components package theLink2D property should be set to true in order to denote the RSS 14 symbol is used as the linear component in an EAN UCC composite symbol In this case the Show2DSeparator property specifies whether to represent the contiguous separator pattern between the RSS 14 linear and the 2D components in the EAN UCC composite symbol 81 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Properties Methods Events e Image e Create e OnChange e Barcode e Destroy e OnEncode e Data e Assign e ParseBarcodelndex e Module e Clear e OnlnvalidChar e BarColor e Draw e OnlnvalidLength e SpaceColor e Size e OnlnvalidDataChar e Opacity e DrawTo e OnlnvalidDataLength e Orientation e DrawToSize e OnDrawBarcode e Stretch e Print e LeftMargin e PrintSize e TopMargin e BarcodeWidth e BarcodeHeight ShowQuietZone LeadingQuietZone TopQuietZone TrailingQuietZone BottomQuietZone EnableUpdateDB Locked TotalHeight Link2D Show2DSeparato
281. he barcode text in a single or structured append set of MicroPDF417 symbols For 56 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual example ABC e 123 DEFabc e 000003 def Normally the sub mode invoked immediately prior to the ECI escape sequence is preserved for the encodation immediately after it Thus sub mode latches and shifts are preserved across an ECI escape sequence and thus a sub mode shift immediately before an ECI escape sequence is not ignored If the value polgnoreShiftBeforeECI is included in the Options property the sub mode shift immediately before an ECI escape sequence is ignored but a sub mode latch immediately before an ECI escape sequence is never ignored The AllowEscape property should be set to true in order to place the ECI indicator blocks Any ECI invoked shall apply until the end of the barcode text or until another ECI indicator block is encountered Thus the interpretation of the ECI may straddle two or more symbols Structured append Structured append provides a mechanism for the data in a file too large to be split into blocks and be represented in more than one MicroPDF417 symbol Up to 99999 individual MicroPDF417 symbols may be used to encode data in structured append Structured append symbols differ from ordinary MicroPDF417 symbols in that they contain additional control information in a structured append control block The control block defines the file ID the concatenation sequence and optionally
282. he property to retrieve the factual number of stacked rows of the PDF417 barcode symbol The property can be one of values from 3 to 90 denotations the factual number of rows They are defined in the pfmxPDF417Custom unit The property is read only See also the Symbol size section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 article A 1 26 CurrentSegments TBarcodeFmx2D_CompactMatrix Contains the factual number of segments of a Compact Matrix barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxCompactMatrix unit TCompactMatrix Segments 1 32 property CurrentSegments TCompactMatrix Segments Description In horizontal orientation each Compact Matrix symbol consists of an array of segments with a minimum of 1 segment maximum 32 segments The minimum version specified by the MinVersion property and the minimum number of segments specified by the MinSegments property indicate the minimum symbol size for a Compact Matrix barcode symbol The maximum version specified by the MaxVersion property and the maximum number of segments specified by the MaxSegments property indicate the maximum symbol size for the Compact Matrix barcode symbol Based on the stretch order specified by the StretchOrder property the smallest symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between the minimum symbol size and the maximum symbol size Read the property to retrieve the factual number of segments of the Compact Matr
283. hich mode of MaxiCode symbol will be used to generate the MaxiCode barcode symbol It can be one of these values defined in the pfmxMaxiCode unit e 2 Indicates to use the mode 2 It encodes a structured carrier message with a numeric postal code and an optional secondary message A numeric postal code a country code and a class of service code assigned by the carrier are included in the structured carrier message The symbol employs enhanced error correction for the structured carrier message and standard error correction for the secondary message 3 Indicates to use the mode 3 It encodes a structured carrier message with an alphanumeric postal code and an optional secondary message An alphanumeric postal code a country code and a class of service code assigned by the carrier are included in the structured carrier message The symbol employs enhanced error correction for the structured carrier message and standard error correction for the secondary message The mode 3 is similar to mode 2 but the postal code field encodes 6 alphanumeric characters 4 Indicates to use the mode 4 It encodes an unformatted message The barcode message is divided into a primary message and a secondary message internally the symbol employs enhanced error correction for the primary message and standard error correction for the secondary message 5 Indicates to use the mode 5 It encodes an unformatted message The barcode message is divided into a primary m
284. his purpose it shall only be used once in a symbol and shall be placed at beginning of the barcode text and after any ECI indicator block or structured append block if exists The escape sequence t or f followed by an Application Identifier 2 or more digits can be used to placed the FNC1 character in First position mode to barcode text For example the barcode symbol 01 00012345678905 can be represented using any one of following sequences t0100012345678905 0100012345678905 Where the GS1 specifications call for the FNC1 character to be used as a data field separator i e at the end of a variable length data field QR Code symbols shall use the GS character byte value 29 to perform this function In this case any one 74 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual of g d t and f escape sequences can be used to place the GS character to the barcode text For example t010001234567890521512 2018 o Second position FNC in this mode indicator identifies symbols formatted in accordance with specific industry or application specifications previously agreed with AIM International It is immediately followed by an application indicator assigned to identify the specification concerned by AIM International For this purpose it shall only be used once in a symbol and shall be placed at beginning of the barcode and after any ECI indicator block or structured append block if exists An application indi
285. i 179 Po tiie EE 180 A 2 3 ColorDepth TSaveFmx2D_ Gif nnn 181 A 2 4 ColorDepth TSaveFMx2D_ Ping e em 181 A 2 5 CompressionLevel TSaveFmx2D_Piig nnn 182 A 2 6 DeviceHeightINMM TSaveFMmx2D_Emf errr 182 A 2 7 DeviceHeightInPixel TSaveFMmx2D_Emf yr 183 A 2 8 DeviceHeightINUM TSaveFmx2D_E mmf 183 A 2 9 DeviceWidthInMM TSaveFmx2D_E mmf 183 A 2 10 DeviceWidthInPixel TSaveFmx2D_Emf 184 Pee ee E O EA e a 184 A242 EmbedBarcodeText TSaveFmx2D_Emf TSaveFmx2D_Eps TSaveFmx2D_Gif etc D 184 A 2 13 EmbedBarcode Text TSaveFmx2D_Prig nnn 185 A 2 14 Interlaced TSaveFmx2D_Png TSaveFmx2D_Gif 185 A 2 15 LogicUnitsPerinch TSaveFmx2D_Wmf 186 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual A 2 16 Placeable TSaveFmx2D_W fmm 186 A 4 17 Quality TSaveFMX2D_J pg 186 A 2 18 Version TSaveFmx2D_Gif 187 A219 XPPM SAVERIO BP sasaaa 187 A 2 20 YPPM TSaveFmx2D_Bimp rnin 188 A3 Top 189 A 3 1 Barcode2D TCopyFmx2D 189 Annex B WCU OCS TKGGOOW OO E E 999 tn 189 B 1 TBarcodeFmx2D a ed 189 EE enn 189 B 1 2 Clear GE 189 B 1 3 Create 190 BAA DOSE nine 190 B 1 5 Draw Reegel 191 B 1 6 DrawTo AA OPIO ANEP P AA CGC aaa meme 191 B 1 6 1 DrawTo Syntax 1 192 B 1 6 2 DrawTo Syntax 2 195 B 1 6 3 DrawTo Syntax Qe 198 B 1 oy Draw ToSize RE 202 B 1 7 1 DrawToSize Syntax 1 202 B 1 7 2 DrawToSize Syntax 2 206 B 1 7 3 DrawToSize Syntax Sev 210 B 1 8 GetCheckSum TBarcodeFMmx2D_MicroPDF4 17 213 B 1 8 1 GetCheckSum Syntax 1 TBarcodeFm
286. ice in micrometres when use the TSaveFmx2D_Emf component to save a barcode symbol to an Enhanced Metafile Format EMF file The DeviceWidthInUm and the DeviceHeightinUm properties add the ability to measure device surfaces in micrometers which enhances the resolution and scalability of Enhanced Metafile Format EMF files If one of them is set to zero they will be ignored A 2 12 EmbedBarcodeText TSaveFmx2D_Emf TSaveFmx2D_Eps TSaveFmx2D_ Gif etc Specifies whether to embed the barcode text to a picture file 184 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Syntax property EmbedBarcodeText Boolean Description The property specifies whether to embed the barcode text to a picture file Only the Portable Network Graphics PNG Graphics Interchange Format GIF version 89a Scalable Vector Graphics SVG Encapsulated PostScript EPS and Enhanced Metafile EMF formats support to embed the barcode text Note the Graphics Interchange Format GIF version 87a doesn t support to embed the other data into the picture file so for the TSaveFmx2D_Gif component if the Version property is set to gv87a the value of this property will be ignored Note only the encoded barcode text will be embed to the picture file A 2 13 EmbedBarcodeText TSaveFmx2D_Png Specifies whether to embed the barcode text to a Portable Network Graphics PNG picture file for TSaveFmx2D_Png component Syntax type Defined in the pfmxSave2D
287. icroPDF417 unit MicroPDF417 is a multi row symbology derived from and closely based onPDF417 MicroPDF417 is designed for yee applications with a need for improved area efficiency but without the requirement for PDF417 s maximum data capacity A HE limited set of symbol sizes is available together with a fixed level of error correction for each symbol size Module dimensions are user specified to enable symbol production and reading by a wide variety of techniques Symbol sizes MicroPDF417 symbols shall conform with certain predefined combinations of number of stacked rows columns and number of error correction codewords referred to as symbol sizes The symbol size values from mpSize_1_11 to mpSize_4 44 corresponding to these symbol sizes and denotation the number of columns and rows in every symbol size For example the symbol size value mpSize_2 23 denotations the MicroPDF417 symbol size is 23 stacked rows by 2 columns These symbol size values are defined in the pfmxMicroPDF417 unit The RowHeight property can be used to specify the height for each row in modules You can use the MinSize property to specify a minimum symbol size and use the MaxSize property to specifiy a maximum symbol size According to the priority order specified by the StretchOrder property the first symbol size that accommodates the barcode text 51 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual will be automatically selected between the minimum symbol size and
288. iet zone in modules The quiet zone is drawn using the color specified by the SpaceColor property if the Inversed property is set to false Otherwise it s drawn using the color specified by the BarColor property See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones eee i al a ZS Sr Deeg Orientation boLeftRight Orientation boRightLeft Orientation boTopBottom Orientation boBottomTop This property is useful only when the ShowQuietZone property value is set to true A 1 11 BytesAlwaysBackToUpper TBarcodeFmx2D_AztecCode The property is an advanced feature which allows low level control over data encoding for an Aztec Code symbol Syntax property BytesAlwaysBackToUpper Boolean Description In the Aztec Code symbology specification at the end of bytes mode the encoding mode returns to the mode from which bytes mode was shifted into For some readers the encoding mode always returns to the upper mode change the property to true in order to ensure barcode symbols can be read by these readers Please use your reader to read the following symbol if the output text is a9a9a9TTT please set the property to true if the output text is a9a9aQ please set the property to false A 1 12 Compact TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 Specifies whether the PDF417 barcode symbol is generated in Compact PDF417 format Syntax property Compact Boolean De
289. if the parameter is provided and it isn t zero and the BarcodeWidth parameter isn t provided or it s zero the value of Module parameter will be ignored the module size will be calculated based on the BarcodeHeight parameter value If both BarcodeHeight and BarcodeWidth parameters aren t provided or they are all zero the barcode symbol height will be determined by the Module parameter value If both BarcodeWidth and BarcodeHeight parameters are provided and aren t zero only the BarcodeWidth parameter value will be used to calculate the module size the BarcodeHeight parameter value will be ignored See also the BarcodeHeight property HDPI Integer Specifies the horizontal resolution of printer in DPI dots per inch It defaults to 0 if the HDPI is not provided and the horizontal resolution will be obtained from your printer VDPI Integer Specifies the vertical resolution of printer in DPI dots per inch It defaults to 0 if the VDPI is not provided and the vertical resolution will be obtained from your printer Return This method can return one of these values these consts are defined in the pfmxCore2D unit Verify_Invalidindex_AfterBarcode 4 If you use the OnEncode event handle to encode the barcode text to a bytes sequence in your own encoding scheme the Verify_InvalidIndex_AfterBarcode 4 indicats that an invalid byte value is in the suffix codes of the bytes sequence Verify_Invalidindex_BeforeBarcode 3 If y
290. ified by the ECCLevel 126 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual property and the symbol size will not be increased The CurrentECCLevel property can be used to get the factual error correction code level If the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to false the error correction code level specified by the ECCLevel property will be used always The value of CurrentECCLevel property is always equal to the value of ECCLevel property See also the Error checking and correcting ECC section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_HanXinCode article A 1 52 ECCLevelUpgrade TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroQRCode For the Micro QR Code barcode symbols the property specifies whether to use the remaining capacity to automatically upgrade the error correction code level in order to increase symbols strength Syntax property ECCLevelUpgrade Boolean Description For a Micro QR Code barcode symbol the symbol size may be determined depending on the barcode text length and the error correction code level specified by the ECCLevel property And the barcode text and the error correction code don t usually fill the maximum data capacity of the symbol the property specifies whether to use the remaining capacity to automatically upgrade the error correction code level in order to increase symbols strength If the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to true the highest error correction code level that can be accommodated by current symbol size will by used for creating more
291. ified by the MinSize property and the maximum symbol size specified by the MaxSize property The property can be one of these values defined in the pfmxMicroPDF417 unit e soRowColumn If the MicroPDF417 symbol that use minimum symbol size cannot accommodate the barcode text the number of rows will be increased firstly until it reachs the maximum number of rows specified by the MaxSize property or the barcode text is accommodated by the symbol If the number of rows has reached the maximum number of rows specified by the MaxSize property but the barcode text cannot yet be accommodated the number of columns will be increased and the number of rows will be reset to minimum number of rows specified by the MinSize property Repeat these until the barcode text is accommodated by the symbol or the symbol size reachs maximum symbol size specified by the MaxSize property in this case tha barcode text cannot always be accommodated an OninvalidLength the barcode text is specified in the Barcode property or OnInvalidDataLength the barcode text is specified in the Data property event will occur See diagram 169 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual MinSize MaxSize 4 EH 6 D 10 11 mm 17 Pa 14 Rm e e eem 17 9 es es ee 20 Iesel 23 24 9 es 26 28 IR 32 E ee 38 as es 4 1 2 3 4 e soColumnRow If the MicroPDF417 symbol that use minimum symbol size cannot accommodate the barcode text the number of columns will
292. ified by this property In other words only the remaining capacity in current symbol size will be used to upgrade the error correction code level The CurrentECCLevel property can always be used to get the factual error correction code level See also the Error checking and correcting ECC section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode article A 1 48 ECCLevelUpgrade TBarcodeFmx2D_CompactMatrix For the Compact Matrix barcode symbols the property specifies whether to use the remaining capacity to automatically upgrade the error correction code level in order to increase symbols strength Syntax property ECCLevelUpgrade Boolean Description For aCompact Matrix barcode symbol the symbol size may be determined depending on the barcode text length and the error correction code level specified by the ECCLevel property And the barcode text and the error correction code don t usually fill the maximum data capacity of the symbol the property specifies whether to use the remaining capacity to automatically upgrade the error correction code level in order to increase symbols strength If the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to true the highest error correction code level that can be accommodated by current symbol size will by used for creating more robust symbols Note the new level is always no lower than the level specified by the ECCLevel property and the symbol size will not be increased The CurrentECCLevel property can be used to get the f
293. ill be automatically selected between the minimum symbol size and the maximum symbol size The property can be one of these values defined in the pfmxPDF417 unit e soRowColumn H the PDF417 symbol that use minimum symbol size specified by the MinColumns and MinRows properties cannot accommodate the barcode text the number of stacked rows will be increased firstly until it reachs the maximum number of stacked rows specified by the MaxRows property or the barcode text is accommodated by the symbol If the number of stacked rows has reached the maximum number of stacked rows specified by the MaxRows property but the barcode text cannot yet be accommodated the number of columns will be increased and the number of stacked rows will be reset to minimum number of stacked rows specified by the MinRows property Repeat these until the barcode text is accommodated by the symbol or not only does the number of rows reach maximum number of stacked rows specified by the MaxRows property but also the number of columns reachs maximum number of columns specified by the MaxColumns property in this case the barcode text cannot always be accommodated an OnlnvalidLength the barcode text is specified in the Barcode property or OnInvalidDataLength the barcode text is specified in the Data property event will occur See diagram MinColumns MaxColumns See ae mmi MaxRows soa a a a EE EE K Sal ae nn ewne fa D
294. in TPointF The coordinate of the upper left corner of the barcode symbol after the barcode symbol is rotated in pixels Draw DrawTo or dots Print The horizontal resolution is used WDensityRate Single It is the ratio of the horizontal resolution DPI and veritical resolution DPI of the canvas 91 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Chapter 5 FAQs 5 1 How to download the full version Please download the installation package using the download link that s sent from us after you purchase the components package within the validity period If the download link expired please visit the Manage your licenses page to request a new download link Please open the page then enter your order ID license user name or license e mail address to locate your order then click on the oder ID to display it choose a license and click on the Request a new download link the new download link will be sent to this license e mail address automatically Please use the new download link whthin the validity period 5 2 forgot my license key If you forgot the license key please visit the Manage your licenses page to retrieve it Please open the page then enter your order ID license user name or license e mail address to locate your order then click on the oder ID to display it choose a license and click on the Retrieve the license key the license key will be sent to the license e mail address automatically 92 2D Barcode F
295. in First position mode and implies a mode latch to Numeric Compaction mode Also it encodes that the data begins with a 6 digit date field Application Identifier is 11 13 15 or 17 and this date field may be followed by an implied Application Identifier 10 or 21 as well The value indicates that it only implies a mode latch to Alpha sub mode of Text compaction mode po914TextAlphaLatch The function codeword 914 represents a leading FNC1 character in First position mode and indicates that the data begins with an implied Application Identifier is 10 Also it normally implies a mode latch to Numeric compaction mode the value indicates that it implies a mode latch to Alpha sub mode of Text compaction mode If the value isn t included in Options property the function codeword 914 shall be followed by at least 1 numeric character po915TextAlphaLatch The function codeword 915 represents a leading FNC1 character in First position mode and indicates that the data begins with an implied Application Identifier is 21 Also it normally implies a mode latch to Numeric compaction mode the value indicates that it implies a mode latch to Alpha sub mode of Text compaction mode If the value isn t included in Options property the function codeword 915 shall be followed by at least 1 numeric character poFirstFNC1MatchAl01 When the poFirstFNC1MatchAl01 is included in the value of Options property if the f followed by a SSC 14 number including Applicati
296. inVersion property Repeat these until the barcode text is accommodated by the symbol or not only does the version reach maximum value specified by the MaxVersion property but also the number of segments reachs maximum number of segments specified by the MaxSegments property in this case the barcode text cannot always be accommodated an OnInvalidLength the barcode text is specified in the Barcode property or OnInvalidDataLength the barcode text is specified in the Data property event will occur soSegmentVersion If the Compact Matrix symbol that use minimum symbol size specified by the MinVersion and MinSegments properties cannot accommodate the barcode text the number of segments will be increased firstly until it reachs the maximum number of segments specified by the MaxSegments property or the barcode text is accommodated by the symbol If the number of segments has reached the maximum number of segments specified by the MaxSegments property but the barcode text 168 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual cannot yet be accommodated the version will be increased and the number of segments will be reset to minimum number of segments specified by the MinSegments property Repeat these until the barcode text is accommodated by the symbol or not only does the number of segments reach maximum number of segments specified by the MaxSegments property but also the version reachs maximum value specified by the MaxVersion prope
297. ined in the pfmxSave2D_Eps unit Properties Methods Events e Barcode2D e Create e OnSave e EmbedBarcodeText e Destroy e OnSaved e Assign e Save 4 2 4 TSaveFmx2D_Gif The component is used to save the barcode symbol to image file in Graphics Interchange Format GIF It is defined in the pfmxSave2D_Gif unit 87 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Properties Methods Events e Barcode2D e Create e OnSave e Version e Destroy e OnSaved e ColorDepth e Assign e Interlaced e Save e EmbedBarcodeText 4 2 5 TSaveFmx2D_Jpg The component is used to save the barcode symbol to image file in JPEG image JPG JPEG format It is defined in the pfmxSave2D_Jpg unit Properties Methods Events e Barcode2D e Create e OnSave e Quality e Destroy e OnSaved e Assign e Save 4 2 6 TSaveFmx2D_Png The component is used to save the barcode symbol to image file in Portable Network Graphics PNG format It is defined in the pfmxSave2D_Png unit Properties Methods Events e Barcode2D e Create e OnSave e ColorDepth e Destroy e OnSaved e Interlaced e Assign e CompressionLevel e Save e EmbedBarcodeText 4 2 7 TSaveFmx2D_Svg The component is used to save the barcode symbol to image file in Scalable Vector Graphics SVG format It is defined in the pfmxSave2D_Svg unit Properties e Barcode2D e EmbedBarcodeText 88 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Methods Events e Create e OnSave e Destroy e OnSaved
298. ined in the pfmxAztecCode unit 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Sizes Formats Layers Dimension modules Maxim m data capacities Digits Text Bytes azSize_15Compact Compact 1 15 15 13 12 6 azSize_19 Full range 1 19 19 18 15 8 azSize_19Compact Compact 2 19 19 40 33 19 azSize_23 Full range 2 23 23 49 40 24 azSize_23Compact Compact 3 23 23 70 57 33 azSize_27 Full range 3 27 27 84 68 40 azSize_27Compact Compact 4 27 27 110 89 53 azSize_31 4 31 31 128 104 62 azSize_37 5 37 37 178 144 87 azSize_41 6 41 41 232 187 114 azSize_45 7 45 45 294 236 145 azSize_49 8 49 49 362 291 179 azSize_53 9 53 53 433 348 214 azSize_57 10 57 57 516 414 256 azSize_61 11 61 61 601 482 298 azSize_67 12 67 67 691 554 343 azSize_71 13 71 71 793 636 394 azSize_75 14 75 75 896 718 446 azSize_79 15 79 79 1008 808 502 azSize_83 16 83 83 1123 900 559 azSize_87 17 87 87 1246 998 621 azSize_91 Full range 18 91 91 1378 1104 687 azSize_95 19 95 95 1511 1210 753 azSize_101 20 101 101 1653 1324 824 azSize_105 21 105 105 1801 1442 898 azSize_109 22 109 109 1956 1566 976 azSize_113 23 113 113 2116 1694 1056 azSize_117 24 117 117 2281 1826 1138 azSize_121 25 121 121 2452 1963 1224 azSize_125 26 125 125 2632
299. information block and the macro PDF417 control information block will be used by each symbol in the Macro PDF417 set There are two different overloading methods Syntax 1 and Syntax 2 e Syntax 1 Returns the check sum value of a barcode text The barcode text is specified in the Barcode parameter It is of type string The Barcode parameter is in fact an UnicodeString By default the unicode string will be converted to an UTF 8 bytes sequence the BOM isn t included then caculate its check sum If you want to use other encoding scheme for example the ANSI UTF 16 please convert it in the OnEncode event handle or use the GetCheckSum Syntax 2 overloading method and specify the converted bytes sequence in its Data parameter If you want to caculate the check sum of a block of binary bytes data please use the GetCheckSum Syntax 2 overloading method e Syntax 2 Returns the check sum value of a barcode text The barcode text is specified in the Data parameter It is of type TBytes it is in fact a byte array 217 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual You can use the method to caculate the check sum of a block of binary bytes data See also the Macro PDF417 section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 article B 1 9 1 GetCheckSum Syntax 1 TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 Returns the check sum of a barcode text that will be encoded into each symbol in a Macro PDF417 set Syntax type Defined in the pfmxPDF417Com unit TPD
300. ingQuietZone TrailingQuietZone TopQuietZone and BottomQuietZone properties are equal to 3 Character set e All 7 bit ASCII values can be encoded e 8 bit binary data can be encoded e GB 18030 Chinese characters can be encoded e One non data characters can be encoded o ECI ECI indicator blocks is for the standardized encoding of message interpretation information The escape sequence e lt ECI_Number gt can be used to place the ECI indicator block to barcode text See also the Extended Channel Interpretation ECI section below The AllowEscape property should be set to true in order to place non data characters Escape sequences If the AllowEscape property is set to true following escape sequences are supported by the component you can insert them to the barcode text e Insert a backslash to barcode text e e lt ECI_Number gt Insert an ECI indicator block to barcode text See also the Extended Channel Interpretation ECI section below Extended Channel Interpretation ECH The Extended Channel Interpretation ECI protocol allows the output data stream to have interpretations different from that of the 44 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual default character set The ECI protocol provides a consistent method to specify particular interpretations on byte values before printing and after decoding The ECI is identified by an integer up to 6 digits which is encoded in the Han Xin Code symbol by t
301. int e LeftMargin e PrintSize e TopMargin e BarcodeWidth e BarcodeHeight ShowQuietZone LeadingQuietZone TopQuietZone TrailingQuietZone BottomQuietZone EnableUpdateDB Locked TotalHeight Link2D SeparatorRowHeight Show2DSeparator AutoCheckDigit 4 2 TSaveFmx2D It is the base class of all image saving components these components can be used to save barcode symbol to picture file in multiple formats And it cannot be instantiated It s defined in the pfmxSave2D unit Properties Methods Events e Barcode2D e Create e OnSave e Destroy e OnSaved e Assign e Save 4 2 1 TSaveFmx2D_Bmp 86 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual The component is used to save the barcode symbol to image file in Bitmap image BMP format It is defined in thepfmxSave2D_Bmp unit Properties Methods Events e Barcode2D e Create e OnSave e ColorDepth e Destroy e OnSaved e XPPM e Assign e YPPM e Save 4 2 2 TSaveFmx2D_Emf The component is used to save the barcode symbol to image file in Enhaced Metafile Format EMF It is defined in the pfmxSave2D_Emf unit Properties Methods Events e Barcode2D e Create e OnSave e DeviceWidthInPixel e Destroy e OnSaved e DeviceHeightInPixel e Assign e DeviceWidthInMM e Save e DeviceHeightInMM DeviceWidthInUM DeviceHeightInUM e EmbedBarcodeText 4 2 3 TSaveFmx2D_Eps The component is used to save the barcode symbol to image file in Encapsulated PostScript EPS format It is def
302. ion TBarcode Fm x2D _GridMattix eeenenenenemmmmmnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannanninnannananannannnannannannanndnnanandnanananunannannannannanninni 143 A 1 79 MaxVersion TBarcodeFmx2D_HanXinCode nn 143 A 1 80 MaxVersion TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroQRCode ni 144 A 1 81 MaxVersion TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode nn 145 A 1 82 MinColumns TBarcodeFmMX2D_P DF 417 jnn 145 A 1 83 MinRows TBarcodeFmx2D_Code1 6K je 146 A 1 84 MinRows TBarcodeFmx2D_PDFA41 7 rnin 146 A 1 85 MinSegments TBarcodeFmx2D_Com pactMatrix nnn 147 A 1 86 MinSize TBarcodeFmx2D_AztecCode nnn 148 A 1 87 MinSize TBarcodeFMx2D_DataMattrix mr remememmmmnmnmnmnmnmnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannannannanannannannannannannannannannannannanni 148 A 1 88 MinSize TBarcodeFmx2D_DataMatrixE CC 20 149 A 1 89 MinSize TBarcodeFMmx2D_MicroPDF41 Th 149 A 1 90 MinVersion TBarcodeFmx2D_CompactMatrix nnn 150 A 1 91 MinVersion TBarcodeFmx2D_GridMattrix ii 151 A 1 92 MinVersion TBarcodeFmx2D_HanXiN Code 151 A 1 93 MinVersion TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroQRCode nnn 152 A 1 94 MinVersion TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode o nnn 152 A 1 95 Mirrored TBarcodeFmx2D_AztecCode TBarcodeFmx2D_ DataMatrix etc jee 153 A 1 96 Mode TBarcodeFMmx2D_MaxiCode enenenmnmmmnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnininnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnannananananananannnnnanaannn 153 A 1 97 Modula 154 A198 Opacity 155 A 1 99 Options TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroPDF4 17 155 A 1 100 Options TBarcodeFMX2D_P DF 417 j n 157 A 1 101 Orientation 158 A 1 102 Placement
303. ions property defined in the pfmxPDF417Com unit D polgnoreShiftBeforeECI An ECI escape sequence may be placed anywhere within Text Compaction mode Normally the sub mode invoked immediately prior to the ECI escape sequence is preserved for the encodation immediately after it Thus sub mode latches and shifts are preserved across an ECI escape sequence and thus a sub mode shift immediately before an ECI escape sequence is not ignored If the value is included in the Options property the sub mode shift immediately before an ECI escape sequence is ignored but a sub mode latch immediately before an ECI escape sequence is never ignored poFirst903TextAlphaLatch If the function codeword 903 is placed at beginning of barcode text it represents a leading FNC1 character in First position mode Also it normally implies a mode latch to Mixed sub mode of Text Compaction mode the value indicates that it implies a mode latch to Alpha sub mode of Text Compaction mode poFirst904TextMixedLatch If the function codeword 904 is placed at beginning of barcode text it represents a leading FNC1 character in First position mode Also it normally implies a mode latch to Numeric Compaction mode the value indicates that it implies a mode latch to Mixed sub mode of Text Compaction mode po906TextAlphaLatch The function codeword 906 represents a leading FNC1 character in First position mode Also it normally implies a mode latch to Mixed sub mode of Text Compa
304. is of type string and it is in fact an UnicodeString By default the unicode string will be converted to an UTF 8 bytes sequence the BOM isn t included then be encoded into the barcode symbol If you want to use other encoding scheme for example the ANSI UTF 16 please convert it in theOnEncode event handle or use the Print Syntax 3 overloading method and specify the converted bytes sequence in its Data parameter If you want to encode a block of binary bytes data please use the Print Syntax 3 overloading method For the TBarcodeFmx2D_RSS14 and TBarcodeFmx2D_RSSLimited components if the property AutoCheckDigit is set to true the check digit doesn t need to be included in the parameter otherwise the check digit can be specified by you in the parameter See also the Barcode and Data properties BarColor TAlphaColor In general the Inversed property is set to false In this case the parameters specifies the color for all bars Stacked 2D barcode symbology and Linear 1D barcode symbology or dark modules Matrix 2D barcode symbology in the barcode symbol If the Inversed property is set to true it specifies the color for all spaces Stacked 2D barcode symbology and Linear 1D barcode symbology or light modules Matrix 2D barcode symbology in the barcode symbol Also if the ShowQuietZone parameter value is set to true the leading quiet zone trailing quiet zone top quiet zone and bottom quiet zone are printed using the color
305. ity Q 25 elHighest H 30 You can use the ECCLevel property to specify the error correction code level for a QR Code symbol It can be one of these values elLowest elMedium elQuality and elHighest corresponding to the error checking and correcting levels L M Q and H These values are defined in the pfmxRCode unit If the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to true the highest error correction code level that can be accommodated by current symbol size will by used for creating more robust symbols Note the new level is always no lower than the level specified by the ECCLevel property and the symbol size will not be increased it may be determined depending on the length of barcode text and the error correction code level specified by the ECCLevel property see also the Symbol sizes section below In other words only the remaining capacity in current symbol size will be used to upgrade the error correction code level The property CurrentECCLevel can be used to get the factual error correction code level Symbol sizes There are forty sizes of QR Code symbol referred to as version 1 to 40 in increasing order of data capacity You can use the MinVersion and the MaxVersion properties to specifiy the minimum and maximum sizes for a QR Code symbol They can be one of values from 1 to 40 defined in the pfmxQRCode unit corresponding to the versions 1 to 40 The smallest symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatical
306. ix barcode symbol The property can be one of values from 1 to 32 denotations the factual number of segments of a Compact Matrix 2D barcode symbol They are defined in the pfmxCompactMatrix unit The property is read only See also the Symbol sizes section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_CompactMatrix article A 1 27 CurrentSize TBarcodeFmx2D_AztecCode 112 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Contains the factual symbol size of an Aztec Code barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxAztecCode unit TAztecCode Size azSize_15Compact azSize_19 azSize_19Compact azSize 23 azSize_23Compact azSize 27 azSize 27Compact azSize 31 azSize 37 azSize 41 azSize 45 azSize 49 azSize 53 azSize 57 azSize 61 azSize 67 azSize 71 azSize_75 azSize_79 azSize 83 azSize 87 azSize 91 azSize 95 azSize_ 101 azSize_105 azSize_109 azSize_113 azSize_117 azSize 121 azSize 125 azSize 131 azSize 135 azSize 139 azSize 143 azSize 147 azSize 151 property CurrentSize TAztecCode Size Description The smallest symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between the minimum symbol size specified by the MinSize property and the maximum symbol size specified by the MaxSize property Read the property to retrieve the factual symbol size of an Aztec Code barcode symbol The property can be one of values from azSize_15Compact to azSize_151 denotations the factual format number of r
307. ize According to the priority order specified by the StretchOrder property the first symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between the minimum symbol size and the maximum symbol size You can use the CurrentRows property to get the factual number of stacked rows And use the CurrentColumns property to get the factual number of columns If the barcode text is so long that it cannot be encoded using the maximum symbol size specified by the MaxRows and the MaxColumns properties an OnInvalidLength or OnInvalidDataLength event will occur Quiet zones The symbol shall include a quiet zone on all four sides The minimum quiet zone is equal to 4 modules on all four sides So the minimum values of LeadingQuietZone TrailingQuietZone TopQuietZone and BottomQuietZone properties are equal to 4 Error checking and correcting ECC PDF417 symbols offer 9 levels of error correction referred to as ECC 0 to ECC 8 respectively in increasing order of recovery capacity You can use the ECCLevel property to specify the error correction code level for a PDF417 symbol It can be one of values from elEcc_0 to elEcc_8 corresponding to error correction code level from ECC 0 to ECC 8 They are defined in thepfmxPDF417Custom unit If the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to true the highest error correction code level that can be accommodated by current symbol size will by used for creating more robust symbols Note the new lev
308. ize 52 52 dmSize 64 64 dmSize 72 72 dmSize 80 80 dmSize 88 88 dmSize 96 96 dmSize 104 104 dmSize 120 120 dmSize 132 132 dmSize 144 144 dmSize 8 18 dmSize 8 32 dmSize 12 26 dmSize 12 36 dmSize 16 36 dmSize 16 48 property MinSize TDataMatrixEcc200 Size Description The property specifies the minimum symbol size for aData Matrix ECC 200 barcode symbol It can be one of values from dmSize_10_10 to dmSize_16_48 These values denotation the number of rows and columns in every symbol size For example the symbol size value dmSize_8 18 denotations the Data Matrix ECC 200 symbol size is 8 rows by 18 columns These symbol size values are defined in the pfmxDataMatrixEcc200 unit The smallest symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between the minimum symbol size specified by this property and the maximum symbol size that s specified by the MaxSize property The CurrentSize property can be used to get the factual symbol size Note if the property is set to a value greater than the MaxSize property s value the MaxSize property will be automatically changed to equal to this property s value In other words the MinSize property s value is always less than or equal to the MaxSize property s value See also the Symbol sizes section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_DataMatrixECC200 article A 1 89 MinSize TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroPDF417 Specifies the minimum symbol size for an MicroPDF417 barcode symbol
309. ize in dots or pixels using the horizontal resolution o For the Matrix 2D barcode symbology excluding the TBarcodeFmx2D_MaxiCode barcode symbology the module is single cell a suqare shape used to encode one bit data The parameter specifies the module width and height See diagram SEH m i o For the TBarcodeFmx2D_MaxiCode barcode symbology the module is single cell a regular hexagonal shape used to encode one bit data The parameter specifies the horizonal width of a module Also it s the center to center horizontal distance between adjacent modules See diagram o For the Stacked 2D barcode symbology and Linear 1D barcode symbology the module is the thinest bar or space in the barcode symbol The parameter specifies the module width See diagram miessen M N e Angle Single Specifies an angle in degrees to rotate the barcode symbol and its quiet zones if they are drawn please read the ShowQuietZone parameter section above about whether or not the quiet zones will be drawn anticlockwise It defaults to 0 if the parameter is not provided meaning left to right horizontal direction See diagram the SpaceColor parameter value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones See also the Module property ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True e Opacity Single Specifies the transparency level of entire barcode symbol where 1 is not transparant at all 0 5 is 50 see through and 0 is complete
310. ize_2_26 mpSize_4 15 mpSize_3_26 mpSize_4 20 mpSize_3_32 mpSize_3_38 mpSize_4 26 mpSize_3_44 mpSize_4 32 mpSize_4 38 mpSize_4 44 If tha barcode text cannot be accommodated in the maximum symbol size specified by the MaxSize property an OnInvalidLength the barcode text is specified in the Barcode property or OnInvalidDataLength the barcode text is specified in the Data property event will occur See also the Symbol sizes section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroPDF417 article A 1 121 StretchOrder TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 Specifies the priority order of selecing appropriate symbol size for a PDF417 barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxPDF417 unit TPDF417_ StretchOrder property StretchOrder TPDF417 StretchOrder Description soRowColumn soColumnRow soFixAspect soFixAspectWithQuietZones The minimum number of rows specified by the MinRows property and the minimum number of columns specified by the MinColumns property indicates the minimum symbol size for a PDF417 barcode symbol The maximum number of rows specified by the MaxRows property and the maximum number of columns specified by the MaxColumns property indicates the maximum symbol size for the PDF417 barcode symbol The property specifies a priority order in order to automatically select the symbol size According to the priority order the first symbol size number of rows and columns that accommodates the barcode text w
311. l or the symbol size reachs maximum symbol size specified by the MaxSize property in this case tha barcode text cannot always be accommodated an OnlnvalidLength the barcode text is specified in the Barcode property or OnInvalidDataLength the barcode text is specified in the Data property event will occur See diagram MinSize MaxSize 4 6 Ss 8 10 Pen it 12 EH 14 15 sl 17 z 20 23 24 mm 26 28 9 32 38 a Au 1 2 3 4 soColumnPrior If the MicroPDF417 symbol that use minimum symbol size cannot accommodate the barcode text the number of columns will be increased firstly until it reachs the maximum number of columns defined by the specification or the barcode text is accommodated by the symbol If the number of columns has reached the maximum number of columns defined by the specification but the barcode text cannot yet be accommodated the number of rows will be increased and the number of columns will be reset to minimum number of columns defined by the specification Repeat these until the barcode text is accommodated by the symbol or the symbol size reachs maximum symbol size specified by the MaxSize property in this case tha barcode text cannot always be accommodated an OninvalidLength the barcode text is specified in the Barcode property or OnInvalidDataLength the barcode text is specified in the Data property event will occur See diagram 170 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual MinSize o Max
312. ld separator and implies a mode latch to Text compaction mode or Numeric compaction mode See also the Escape sequences section below Also you can use the escape sequence f instead of the 903 904 or 905 to placed the FNC1 character as the data field separator The component will automatically select one of escape sequences from 903 904 and 905 based on the barcode text in order to minimize the symbol size The appearance of an adjacent pair of repeated 903 904 or 905 escape sequences will cause the decoder to divide the transmission at that point but without transmitting the two implied GS ASCII value 29 characters themselves e The ECI indicator blocks can be encoded for the standardized encoding of message interpretation information The escape sequence e lt ECI _Numnerm gt can be used to place the ECI indicator block to barcode text See also the Extended Channel Interpretation ECI section below Escape sequences If the AllowEscape property is set to true following escape sequences are supported by the component you can insert them to the barcode text e Insert a backslash to barcode text e 5 Insert a 05 macro to barcode text It s used to abbreviate the industry specific header gt RS 05 GS and trailer RS EOT in order to reduce the size of symbol It must only be placed once at beginning of the barcode text and it shall not be used in conjunction with a series of stru
313. le By default its value is true Changing it to false will cancel the saving operation in this case the OnSaved event will not be occurred C 2 2 OnSaved Occurs after save the barcode symbol to an image file when the Save method is called Syntax type Defined in the pfmxSave2D unit TOnSaved procedure Sender TComponent FilePath string ErrorCode Integer of object property OnSaved TOnSaved Parameters e Sender TObject It is the object whose event handler is called e FilePath string The file path and name of the image file that you want to save the barcode symbol to e ErrorCode Integer Return the error status code of the saving operation The Save method will return the error code value too It can be one of these value these consts are defined in the pfmxSave2D unit ERROR_OK 0 The saving operation succeeded o o ERROR NO BARCODE COMPONENT 4 The saving operation failed because the Barcode2D property is not link to a barcode component ERROR_INVALID_BARCODE 2 The saving operation failed because the length of Barcode or Data property value is invalid in the barcode component corresponding to the OnlInvalidLength or OnlnvalidDatalength event of barcode component will occur Or because there is any invalid character in the Barcode or Data property value corresponding to the OnInvalidChar or OnInvalidDataChar event of barcode component will occur o ERROR_WRITE_PICTURE 3 The saving operatio
314. le parameter is not provided and the value of Module property will be used o For the Matrix 2D barcode symbology excluding the TBarcodeFmx2D_MaxiCode barcode symbology the module is single cell a suqare shape used to encode one bit data The parameter specifies the module width and height See diagram SEH m i o For the TBarcodeFmx2D_MaxiCode barcode symbology the module is single cell a regular hexagonal shape used to encode one bit data The parameter specifies the horizonal width of a module Also it s the center to center horizontal distance between adjacent modules See diagram o For the Stacked 2D barcode symbology and Linear 1D barcode symbology the module is the thinest bar or space in the barcode symbol The parameter specifies the module width See diagram miessen Mp N e Angle Single Specifies an angle in degrees to rotate the barcode symbol and its quiet zones if they are displayed please read the ShowQuietZone property about whether or not the quiet zones will be displayed anticlockwise See diagram the quiet zones are drawn in claSilver color in order to accentuate them See also the Module property 204 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual s gt Angle ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True The parameter defaults to 1 if the Angle parameter is not provided and the barcode symbol will be rotated based on the value of the Orientation property o boLeftRight 0 degrees
315. le is single cell a suqare shape used to encode one bit data The parameter specifies the module width and height See diagram Module ag GC o For the TBarcodeFmx2D_MaxiCode barcode symbology the module is single cell a regular hexagonal shape used to encode one bit data The parameter specifies the horizonal width of a module Also it s the center to center horizontal distance between adjacent modules See diagram o For the Stacked 2D barcode symbology and Linear 1D barcode symbology the module is the thinest bar or space in the barcode symbol The parameter specifies the module width See diagram meee II If any one of the BarcodeWidth and BarcodeHeight parameters is provided and it isn t zero the value of Module parameter will be ignored the module size will be calculated based on the BarcodeWidth parameter value or the BarcodeHeight parmeter value If both BarcodeWidth and BarcodeHeight parameters are provided and aren t zero only the BarcodeWidth parameter value will be used to calculate the module size the BarcodeHeight parameter value will be ignored See also the Module property e Angle Single Specifies an angle in degrees to rotate the barcode symbol and its quiet zones if they are printed please read the ShowQuietZone property about whether or not the quiet zones will be printed anticlockwise See diagram the SpaceColor property is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the
316. les See diagram the quiet zones are drawn in claSilver color in order to accentuate them TopQuietZone E A t P H f 3 y sl d 1 IS HS E 8 iy BottomQuietZone ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode component leading quiet zone and trailing quiet zone will be included always even if the ShowQuietZone parameter value is set to false See diagram the quiet zones are drawn inclaSilver color in order to accentuate them TopQuietZone t auozn and upea auozwindBbuyesy auonand upea auoz ind uges 4 BottomQuietZone ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True See also the ShowQuietZone property e Module Single Specifies the module size in dots or pixels using the horizontal resolution o For the Matrix 2D barcode symbology excluding the TBarcodeFmx2D_MaxiCode barcode symbology the module is single cell a suqare shape used to encode one bit data The parameter specifies the module width and height See diagram SEH m i o For the TBarcodeFmx2D_MaxiCode barcode symbology the module is single cell a regular hexagonal shape used to encode one bit data The parameter specifies the horizonal width of a module Also it s the center to center horizontal distance between adjacent modules See diagram 208 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual o For the Stacked 2D barcode symbology and Linear 1D barcode symbology the module is the thines
317. ll The value indicates that it only implies a mode latch to Alpha sub mode of Text compaction mode po914TextAlphaLatch The function codeword 914 represents a leading FNC1 character in First position mode and indicates that the data begins with an implied Application Identifier is 10 Also it normally implies a mode latch to Numeric compaction mode the value indicates that it implies a mode latch to Alpha sub mode of Text compaction mode If the value isn t included in Options property the function codeword 914 shall be followed by at least 1 numeric character po915TextAlphaLatch The function codeword 915 represents a leading FNC1 character in First position mode and indicates that the data begins with an implied Application Identifier is 21 Also it normally implies a mode latch to Numeric compaction mode the 156 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual value indicates that it implies a mode latch to Alpha sub mode of Text compaction mode If the value isn t included in Options property the function codeword 915 shall be followed by at least 1 numeric character poFirstFNC1MatchAl01 When the poFirstFNC1MatchAl01 is included in the value of Options property if the f followed by a SSC 14 number including Application Identifier 01 and 13 digit data the checkdigit isn t required is placed at beginnig of barcode the function codeword 905 will be selected to encode the FNC1 character in order to reduce the symbol size the leading
318. ll be automatically selected to generate an Azec Code symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxAztecCode unit TAztecCode SymbolMode smNormal smCompact smFullRange smProgram smA11 property SymbolMode TAztecCode_SymbolMode Description The property specifies which Aztec Code symbol formats and sizes will be automatically selected between minimum and maximum symbol sizes specified by corresponding MinSize and MaxSize properties depending on the length of barcode text The property can be one of these values defined in the pfmxAztecCode unit e smNormal Only the symbol sizes that they are useful for data encoding operation including all compact symbol sizes azSize_15Compact azSize_19Compact azSize_23Compact and azSize_27Compact and full range symbol sizes from azSize_31 to azSize_151 smCompact Only the symbol sizes in compact format including the azSize_15Compact azSize_19Compact azSize_23Compact and azSize_27Compact smFullRange Only the symbol sizes in full range format including the azSize_19 azSize_23 azSize_27 and azSize_31 to azSize_151 smProgram Only the symbol sizes that they are useful for reader initialization including azSize_15Compact azSize_19 azSize_23 azSize_27 and full range symbol sizes from azSize_31 to azSize_109 Note in order to create a reader initialization symbol a mp escape sequence shoule be placed into the barcode text and the AllowEscape property should be set to true
319. ll occur The CurrentVersion property can be used to get the factual symbol version symbol size Note if the property is set to a value less than the MinVersion property s value the MinVersion property will be automatically changed to equal to this property s value In other words the MaxVersion property s value is always greater than or equal to the MinVersion property s value See also the Symbol sizes section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_HanXinCode article A 1 80 MaxVersion TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroQRCode Specifies the maximum symbol version symbol size for a Micro QR Code barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxMicroQRCode unit TMicroQRCode Version 1 4 property MaxVersion TMicroQRCode Version Description The property specifies the maximum symbol version symbol size for a Micro QR Code barcode symbol It can be one of values from 1 to 4 they are defined in the pfmxMicroQRCode unit The smallest symbol version symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between the minimum symbol version symbol size specified by the MinVersion property and the maximum symbol version symbol size specified by this property If the barcode text is so long that it cannot be encoded using the maximum symbol version symbol size specified by this property an OnInvalidLength the barcode text is specified in the Barcode property or an OnInvalidDataLength the barcode text is specified in t
320. llowing method o The Stretch property is set to false it s calculated based on the Module property value o The Stretch property is set to true f the BarcodeHeight property value is greater than zero it s same to the BarcodeHeight property value f the BarcodeHeight property value is equal to zero When the Orientation property is set to boLeftRight or boRightLeft the TopMargin property value will be subtracted from the height of Timage control that s specified by the Image property then the result will be returned When the Orientation property is set to boTopBottom or boBottomTop the LeftMargin property value will be subtracted from the width of Timage control that s specified by the Image property then the result will be returned If the BarcodeHeight property value is less than zero When the Orientation property is set to boLeftRight or boRightLeft the TopMargin property value and the absolute value of the negative BarcodeHeight property value i e the bottom margin will be subtracted from the height of Timage control that s specified by Image property then the result will be returned When the Orientation property is set to boTopBottom or boBottomTop the LeftMargin property value and the absolute value of the negative BarcodeHeight property value i e the right margin will be subtracted from the width of Tlmage control that s specified by the Image property then the result will be returned See also the
321. low will be automatically selected between the minimum and maximum symbol sizes specified by corresponding MinSize and MaxSize properties based on the length of barcode text It can be one of these values defined in the pfmxAztecCode unit e smNormal Only the symbol sizes that they are useful for data encoding operation including all compact symbol sizes azSize_15Compact azSize_19Compact azSize_23Compact and azSize_27Compact and full range symbol sizes from azSize_31 to azSize_151 smCompact Only the symbol sizes in compact format including the azSize_15Compact azSize_19Compact azSize_23Compact and azSize_27Compact smFullRange Only the symbol sizes in full range format including the azSize_19 azSize_23 azSize_27 and azSize_31 to azSize_151 smProgram Only the symbol sizes that they are useful for reader initialization including azSize_15Compact azSize_19 azSize_23 azSize_27 and full range symbol sizes from azSize_31 to azSize_109 Note in order to create a reader initialization symbol a p escape sequence should be placed into the barcode text and the AllowEscape property should be set to true See also the Escape sequences section below smAll All symbol sizes including compact and full range formats Symbol sizes The smallest Aztec Code symbol is 15 15 modules square and the largest is 151 151 There are 36 square symbol sizes available in Aztec Code symbology These are specified in following table def
322. ls 3 3 How to print a barcode symbol to paper Please use Print method of a barcode component to print the barcode symbol to paper The Timage control isn t required For example Printer ActivePrinter SelectDPI 600 600 Printer BeginDoc Print other content BarcodeFmx2D QRCodel Print 1234567890 claBlack claWhite true 20 20 0 3 Print other content Printer EndDoc or Printer ActivePrinter SelectDPI 600 600 Printer BeginDoc Print other content with BarcodeFmx2D QRCodel do begin ShowQuietZone true BarColor claBlack SpaceColor claWhite Barcode 1234567890 Print 20 20 O 3 9 end Print other content Printer EndDoc 3 4 How to save a barcode symbol to picture file Usage 1 Put aTBarcodeFmx2D barcode component such as the TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 and TBarcodeFmx2D_RSS14 to your form 2 Put a TSaveFmx2D component such as the TSaveFmx2D_Bmp TSaveFmx2D_Png and TSaveFmx2D_Svg to your form 3 Set the Barcode2D property of the TSaveFmx2D component to the TBarcodeFmx2D barcode component 4 Use the Save method of the TSaveFmx2D component to save the barcode symbol to picture file Note 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual For the TBarcodeFmx2D_MaxiCode component please use the SaveToFile method of the image control that is linked to the barcode component to save the barcode symbol as a picture file For example Imagel Bitm
323. ly selected between minimum and maximum symbol sizes The CurrentVersion property can be used to get the factual symbol size These symbol sizes and the maximum data capacity of each version are listed in following table Dat iti Version Symbol size modules ECC level a a capaci Numeric mode Alphanumeric mode Byte mode Kanji mode L 41 25 17 10 4 24 21 M 34 20 14 8 Q 27 16 11 7 H 17 10 7 4 L 77 47 32 20 2 25 25 M 63 38 26 16 Q 48 29 20 12 H 34 20 14 8 L 127 77 53 32 3 29 29 M 101 61 42 26 Q 77 47 32 20 H 58 35 24 15 L 187 114 78 48 4 33 33 M 149 90 62 38 Q 111 67 46 28 H 82 50 34 21 71 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual L 255 154 106 65 aaay M 202 122 84 52 Q 144 87 60 37 H 106 64 44 27 L 322 195 134 82 S ee M 255 154 106 65 Q 178 108 74 45 H 139 84 58 36 L 370 224 154 95 e eu M 293 178 122 75 Q 207 125 86 53 H 154 93 64 39 L 461 279 192 118 S FE M 365 221 152 93 Q 259 157 108 66 H 202 122 84 52 L 522 335 230 141 e R M 432 262 180 111 Q 312 189 130 80 H 235 143 98 60 L 652 395 271 167 i ge M 513 311 213 131 Q 364 221 151 93 H 288 174 119 74 L 772 468 321 198 M 604 366 251 155 S ort Q 427 259 177 109 H 331 200 137 85
324. ly transparent The parameter defaults to 1 if it is not provided meaning not transparant at all 197 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Note if the Inversed property is set to false you can use the alpha channel of the SpaceColor parameter value to specify the transparency level of bakcground color spaces or light modules and quiet zones and use the alpha channel of the BarColor parameter value to specify the transparency level of foreground color bars or dark modules If the Inversed property is set to true you can use the alpha channel of the BarColor parameter value to specify the transparency level of bakcground color spaces or light modules and quiet zones and use the alpha channel of the SpaceColor parameter value to specify the transparency level of fore ground color bars or dark modules HDPI Integer Specifies the horizontal resolution of canvas in DPI It s the number of dots or pixels per inch It defaults to 0 if the HDPI is not provided and the physical horizontal resolution obtained from the Canvas parameter will be used VDPI Integer Specifies the vertical resolution of canvas in DPI It s the number of dots or pixels per inch It defaults to 0 if the VDPI is not provided and the physical vertical resolution obtained from the Canvas parameter will be used Return This method can return one of these values these consts are defined in the pfmxCore2D unit e Verify_Invalidindex_AfterBarcode 4 I
325. m 1 to 5 respectively in increasing order of recovery capacity You can use the ECCLevel property to specify the error correction code level for a Grid Matrix symbol It can be one of these values elLevel_1 elLevel_2 elLevel_3 elLevel_4 and elLevel_5 they are defined in the pfmxGridMatrix unit corresponding to the ECC levels from 1 to 5 These ECC levels are listed in following table Value of ECCLevel property Error correction code level Percentage of total capacity for ECC data elLevel_1 1 10 elLevel_2 2 20 elLevel_3 3 30 elLevel_4 4 40 elLevel_5 5 50 zZ ote the ECC level 1 is inapplicable to the version 1 Also you can set the ECCLevel property to elLevel_Recommend or elLevel_LowestRecommend For each symbol version the denotative ECC levels are listed in following table p Denotative ECC level Version ECCLevel elLevel_Recommend ECCLevel elLevel_LowestRecommend 1 5 4 2 4 2 3 4 1 4 13 3 1 If the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to true the highest error correction code level that can be accommodated by current symbol size will be used for creating more robust symbols Note the new level is always no lower than the level specified by the ECCLevel property and the symbol size will not be increased it may be determined depending on the length of barcode text and the error correction code level specified by the ECCLevel property see also the Symbol
326. mage TQRImage em Poa KA f ou LeftMargin 22 LeftMargin 22 ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True e The Orientation property is set to boTopBottom It is the margin between the bottom of the barcode symbol and the left side of the Timage control See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones 134 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Timage TQRImage Tlmage TQRImage LeftMargin 22 LeftMargin 22 ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True e The Orientation property is set to boBottomTop It is the margin between the top of the barcode symbol and the left side of the Tlmage control See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones Timage TQRImage Timage TQRImage Fo LeftMargin 22 LeftMargin 22 ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Note For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode components the leading quiet zone and the trailing quiet zone are included always even if the ShowQuietZone is set to false See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones Timage TQRImage Timage TQRImage Orientation boLeftRight Orientation boRightLeft ShowQuietZone False True ShowQuietZone False True A 1 65 Link2D Specifies whether an RSS symbol RSS 14 RSS Limited or RSS Expanded c
327. modates the barcode text will be automatically selected If the barcode text cannot be accommodated by the maximum symbol size specified by the MaxColumns and MaxRows properties an OnInvalidLength the barcode text is specified in the Barcode property or OnInvalidDataLength the barcode text is specified in the Data property event will occur See also the Symbol size section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 article A 1 122 Style TBarcodeFmx2D_RSS14 Specifies which style version of RSS 14 symbols will be used Syntax type Defined in the pfmxRss14 unit TRSS14 Style rsStandard rsTruncated rsStacked rsStackedOmnidirectional property Style TRSS14 Style Description There are four styles versions of RSS 14 symbols referred to as RSS 14 Standard RSS 14 Truncated RSS 14 Stacked and RSS 14 Stacked Omnidirectional respectively The property specifies which style version will be used The property can be one of these values defined in the pfmxRss14 unit e rsStandard Indicates to generate the standard style RSS 14 symbol It encodes the full 14 digit EAN UCC item identification Global Trade Item Numbers GTINs in a symbol that can be omnidirectionally scanned by suitably configured point of sale laser scanners 173 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual RSS 14 Standard e rsTruncated Indicates to generate the RSS 14 Truncated barcode symbol It is structured and encoded in the same w
328. mpact Matrix symbol consists of an array of segments with a minimum of 1 segment maximum 32 segments The minimum version specified by the MinVersion property and the minimum number of segments specified by the MinSegments property indicates the minimum symbol size for a Compact Matrix barcode symbol The maximum version specified by the MaxVersion property and the maximum number of segments specified by the MaxSegments property indicates the maximum symbol size for the Compact Matrix barcode symbol The property specifies a priority order in order to automatically select the symbol size According to the priority order the first symbol size version and number of segments that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between the minimum symbol size and the maximum symbol size The property can be one of these values defined in the pfmxCompactMatrix unit soVersionSegment If the Compact Matrix symbol that use minimum symbol size specified by the MinVersion and MinSegments properties cannot accommodate the barcode text the symbol version will be increased firstly until it reachs the maximum value specified by the MaxVersion property or the barcode text is accommodated by the symbol If the version has reached the maximum value specified by the MaxVersion property but the barcode text cannot yet be accommodated the number of segments will be increased and the version will be reset to minimum value specified by the M
329. mplies a mode latch to Text compaction mode or Numeric compaction mode See also the Escape sequences section below o Data field separator The FNC1 character may also be used as a data field separator i e at the end of a variable length data field in which case it will be represented in the transmitted message as GS character ASCII value 29 The data field separator shall not be placed at beginning of barcode text If any one of escape sequences in 903 904 and 905 is placed in the barcode text but not at beginning of the barcode text it represents a data field separator and implies a mode latch to Text compaction mode or Numeric compaction mode See also the Escape sequences section below Also you can use the escape sequence f instead of the 903 904 or 905 to placed the FNC1 character as the data field separator The component will automatically select one of escape sequences from 903 904 and 905 depending on the barcode text in order to minimize the symbol size The appearance of an adjacent pair of repeated 903 904 or 905 escape sequences will cause the decoder to divide the transmission at that point but without transmitting the two implied GS ASCII value 29 characters themselves e The ECI indicator blocks can be encoded for the standardized encoding of message interpretation information The escape sequence e lt ECI_Numnerm gt can be used to place the ECI indicator block t
330. mponents User Manual o For the TBarcodeFmx2D_MaxiCode barcode symbology the module is single cell a regular hexagonal shape used to encode one bit data The parameter specifies the horizonal width of a module Also it s the center to center horizontal distance between adjacent modules See diagram Module oso o For the Stacked 2D barcode symbology and Linear 1D barcode symbology the module is the thinest bar or space in the barcode symbol The parameter specifies the module width See diagram miessen LIL Angle Single Specifies an angle in degrees to rotate the barcode symbol and its quiet zones if they are drawn please read the ShowQuietZone parameter section above about whether or not the quiet zones will be drawn anticlockwise It defaults to 0 if the parameter is not provided meaning left to right horizontal direction See diagram the SpaceColor parameter value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones Angle See also the Module property ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Opacity Single Specifies the transparency level of entire barcode symbol where 1 is not transparant at all 0 5 is 50 see through and 0 is completely transparent The parameter defaults to 1 if it is not provided meaning not transparant at all Note if the Inversed property is set to false you can use the alpha channel of the SpaceColor parameter value to specify the transparency level of bak
331. mx2D_QRCode Specifies which ECC level error correction code level will be used to increase strength of a QR Code barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxORCode unit TQRCode ECCLevel elLowest elMedium elQuality elHighest property ECCLevel TQRCode_ECCLevel Description The QR Code symbology offers four levels of error correction referred to as L M Q and H respectively in increasing order of recovery capacity The property specifies which ECC level error correction code level will be used to increase strength of aQR Code barcode symbol It can be one of these values defined in the pfmxQRCode unit e elLowest Indicates to use the ECC level L up to 7 approx damage can be corrected e elMedium Indicates to use the ECC level M up to 15 approx damage can be corrected e elQuality Indicates to use the ECC level Q up to 25 approx damage can be corrected e elHighest Indicates to use the ECC level H up to 30 approx damage can be corrected If the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to true the highest error correction code level that can be accommodated by current symbol size will by used for creating more robust symbols Note the new level is always no lower than the level specified by this property and 124 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual the symbol size will not be increased it may be determined depending on the length of barcode text and the error correction code level spec
332. n 120 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual The Data Matrix ECC 000 140 symbology offers five levels of error correction referred to as ECC 000 ECC 050 ECC 080 ECC 100 and ECC 140 respectively in increasing order of recovery capacity In an application it is important to understand that these error correction levels result in the generation of a proportional increase in the number of bits in the message and hence increase in the size of the symbol and offer different levels of error recovery The property specifies which ECC level error correction code level will be used to increase strength of aData Matrix ECC 000 140 barcode symbol It can be one of these values defined in the pfmxDataMatrix unit e dmECCO000 Indicates to use the ECC 000 namely no error correction e dmECC050 Indicates to use the ECC 050 25 data capacity is used for error correction up to 2 8 damage can be corrected e dmECC080 Indicates to use the ECC 080 33 3 data capacity is used for error correction up to 5 5 damage can be corrected dmECC100 Indicates to use the ECC 100 50 data capacity is used for error correction up to 12 6 damage can be corrected e dmECC140 Indicates to use the ECC 140 75 data capacity is used for error correction up to 25 damage can be corrected If the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to true the highest error correction code level that can be accommodated by current symbol size will by used for c
333. n failed because of a picture file write error Perhaps the file system fulls or the access is denied o ERROR_UNKNOWN 4 The saving operation failed because of othe error o 266 i a a ee TIR 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual 3 1 2 713 2015 12 11 Copyright 2001 2015 Han soft Corporation All rights reserved
334. n the Data parameter the return value is the position index of the invalid byte value The index 0 denotes that the first byte value is invalid e Options TPDF417_Options TheOptions parameter is an advanced feature which allows low level control over data encoding The parameter can be used to change the encoding algorithm and meanings of some fucntion codewords in order to match the reader The values that can be included in the Options parameter are defined in the pPDF417Com unit See also the Options property article Return If the method succeeds it returns the check sum value it s a 16 bit word value in decimal format encoded as ASCII bytes sequence in the TBytes array and the Invalidindex parameter returns the Verify_OK 1 If the method fails the InvalidIndex parameter returns a position index of first invalid byte in the Data parameter it s an integer value greater than or equal to zero See also the Invalidindex parameter section above For example the check sum is 1059 the return value is the byte array TBytes SZT S301 S39E S be S39 7S 216 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual The result array can be directly used as the check sum in the structured append block var full barcode data check_sum structuredappend block TBytes invalid_index Integer structuredappend_block_len check _sum_len Integer begin full barcode data Ze eng Check eum GetCheckSum full barc
335. nce between adjacent modules See diagram o For the Stacked 2D barcode symbology and Linear 1D barcode symbology the module is the thinest bar or space in the barcode symbol The parameter specifies the module width See diagram meeen II If any one of the BarcodeWidth and BarcodeHeight parameters is provided and it isn t zero the value of Module parameter will be ignored the module size will be calculated based on the BarcodeWidth parameter value or the BarcodeHeight parmeter value If both BarcodeWidth and BarcodeHeight parameters are provided and aren t zero only the BarcodeWidth parameter value will be used to calculate the module size the BarcodeHeight parameter value will be ignored See also the Module property Angle Single Specifies an angle in degrees to rotate the barcode symbol and its quiet zones if they are printed please read the ShowQuietZone parameter section above about whether or not the quiet zones will be printed anticlockwise It defaults to 0 if the parameter is not provided meaning left to right horizontal direction See diagram the quiet zones are printed in claSilver color in order to accentuate them ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True BarcodeWidth Single Specifies the barcode symbol width the distance between the beginning and end of the barcode symbol in millimeters If the quiet zones are printed please read the ShowQuietZone parameter section above a
336. nd block if exists must be code set B character ASCII 32 ASCII 127 otherwise anOnlnvalidChar or OnInvalidDataChar event will occur The code set will be automatically switched if another code set character is encountered First two characters excepting the message append block if exists must be code Double jeet B characters ASCII 32 ASCII 127 otherwise anOnlnvalidChar or SHIFT B OnInvalidDataChar event will occur The code set will be automatically switched if another code set character is encountered Indicates to create a Code 16K barcode symbol in extended data length mode An extended data length mode block is required and it should be placed at beginning emMode_Extended B None of barcode text otherwiset the OnInvalidChar or OnlnvalidDataChar event will occur See also the Extended data length mode section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16k article 5 emCodeC_ShiftiB C SHIFT B 6 emCodeC_Shift2B C Extended data length mode The property can be one of these values emModeA emModeB emModeC emModeB_FNC1 emModeC_FNC1 emModeC_Shift1B emModeC_Shift2B and emMode_Extended corresponding to the initial modes 0 to 6 and the extended data length mode In this case it specifies the factual initial mode shown in table above Also the InitialMode property can be set toemAuto defined in the pfmxCode16K unit in this case one of values from emCodeA to emModeC_Shift2B corresponding to the ini
337. ne of the Module BarcodeWidth and BarcodeHeight parameters to specify the module size If the quiet zones are printed please read the ShowQuietZone parameter section below about whether or not the quiet zones will be printed they are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the quiet zones are printed in claSilver color in order to accentuate them Lg a ShowQuietZone False Angle 0 30 90 eS ae SA Height E Height ES ESSI S ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode component the leading quiet zone and the trailing quiet zone are included always even if the ShowQuietZone parameter is set to false See diagram the quiet zones are printed in claSilver color in order to accentuate them ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 e SymbolWidth Single Returns the distance between the leading and trailing of the rotated barcode symbol in millimeter The value is calculated based on the module size You can use one of the Module BarcodeWidth and BarcodeHeight parameters to specify the module size If the quiet zones are printed please read the ShowQuietZone parameter section below about whether or not the quiet zones will be printed they are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the quiet zones are printed in claSilver color in order to accentuate them ZA sich S SymbolWidth b ES 4 Bee ES NNER AS ShowQuietZone False ShowQui
338. nents User Manual Network Graphics PNG file the pixels can be defined by a varying number of bits The property specifies which color depth will be used to save a barcode symbol to a Portable Network Graphics PNG file It can be one of these value defined in the pfmxSave2D_Png unit pcdindex_1 Uses the 1 bit per pixel 1bpp format It supports 2 distinct colors for example black and white and stores 8 pixels per 1 byte Each pixel is an 1 bit index into a table of up to 2 colors pcdindex_2 Uses the 2 bit per pixel 2bpp format It supports 4 distinct colors and stores 4 pixels per 1 byte Each pixel value is a 2 bit index into a table of up to 4 colors pcdindex_4 Uses the 4 bit per pixel 4bpp format It supports 16 distinct colors and stores 2 pixels per 1 byte Each pixel value is a 4 bit index into a table of up to 16 colors pcdindex_8 Uses the 8 bit per pixel 8bpp format It supports 256 distinct colors and stores 1 pixel per 1 byte Each byte is an index into a table of up to 256 colors pcdRGB_8 Uses the 24 bit per pixel 24bpp format It supports 16777216 distinct colors and stores 1 pixel value per 3 bytes Each pixel value defines the red green and blue samples of the pixel pcdRGBA_8 Uses the 32 bit per pixel 32bpp format It supports 4294967296 distinct colors and stores 1 pixel per 4 byte Each pixel value define the Alpha Red Green and Blue samples of the pixel A 2 5 CompressionLevel TSaveFmx2D_P
339. ng Specifies the compression level of a Portable Network Graphics PNG file for the TSaveFmx2D_Png component Syntax type Defined in the pfmxSave2D Png unit TPngCompressionLevel pclFastest pclDefault pclMaximum property CompressionLevel TPngCompressionLevel Description The Portable Network Graphics PNG uses a non patented lossless data compression method known as DEFLATE The property specifies what level of compression should be used to save a barcode symbol to a Portable Network Graphics PNG file It can be one of these value defined in the pfmxSave2D_Png unit e pclFastest Uses the fastest compression The compression operation should complete as quickly as possible even if the resulting file is not optimally compressed e pclDefault Uses the default compression level It represents a balance between the compression ratio and compression speed e pclMaximum Uses the maximum compression The compression operation should be optimally compressed even if the operation takes a longer time to complete A 2 6 DeviceHeightInMM TSaveFmx2D_Emf Specifies the vertical height of the reference device for an Enhanced Metafile Format EMF file was generated by the TSaveFmx2D_Emf component in millimetres Syntax 182 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual property DeviceHeightInMM DWord Description The property specifies the vertical height of the reference device in millimetres when use the T
340. ng function character 22 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Each Code 16K symbol contains from 2 to 16 rows Each row is divided by a separator bar The top and bottom of the symbol also have separator bars that extend to the ends of the minimum quiet zones Symbol size Each Code 16K symbol contains from 2 to 16 stacked rows with 5 ASCII characters per stacked row TheRowHeight property can be used to specify the height for each stacked row in modules The data capacities are listed in following table Rows Maximum data capacities Numeric characters ASCII characters 2 14 7 3 24 12 4 34 17 5 44 22 6 54 27 7 64 32 8 74 37 9 84 42 10 94 47 11 104 52 12 114 57 13 124 62 14 134 67 15 144 72 16 154 77 You can use the MinRows and the MaxRows properties to specify the minimum and maximum number of stacked rows for a Code 16K symbol They can be one of values from 2 to 16 defined in the pfmxCode16K unit The smallest number of symbol stacked rows that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between minimum and maximum number of stacked rows If the barcode text does not fill the maximum data capacity of the Code 16K symbol remaining data capacity of the symbol will be filled by adding the PAD characters automatically If the barcode text is so long that it cannot be encoded using the maximum number of stacked rows specified by the MaxRows
341. ning of the barcode text and it shall not be used with AIM FNC1 OO or FNC3 3 If it is used together with the structured append block 2 it shall be placed on front of the structured append block FNC2 2 See also the Structured append section below 2 lt File_Id gt lt Amount gt lt Index gt Insert a structured append block FNC2 and other structured append information to the barcode text in order to create the symbol in a structured append See also the Structured append section below 3 Insert a FNC3 character to barcode text indicates that the symbol encodes a message used to program the reader system It shall be placed at beginning of the barcode text and it shall not be used with AIM FNC1 0 or GS1 FNC1 1 If it is used together with the structured append block FNC2 2 it shall be placed on front of the structured append block FNC2 2 See also the Structured append section below e lt ECI_Number gt Insert an ECI indicator block to barcode text See also the Extended Channel Interpretation ECI section below Extended Channel Interpretation ECH The Extended Channel Interpretation ECI protocol allows the output data stream to have interpretations different from that of the default character set The ECI protocol provides a consistent method to specify particular interpretations on byte values before printing and after decoding The ECI is identified by an integer up to 6
342. nly be placed once at beginning of barcode text otherwise an OnlinvalidChar or OnInvalidDataChar event will occur o 916 Insert a 05 macro to barcode text It shall only be placed once at beginning of the barcode text and it shall not be used in conjunction with a series of structured append symbols It s completely equivalent to escape sequence 5 o 917 Insert a 06 macro to barcode text It shall only be placed once at beginning of the barcode text and it shall not be used in conjunction with a series of structured append symbols It s completely equivalent to escape sequence 6 o 918 It shall be used as a linkage flag to signal the presence of an associated linear component in a composite symbol other than an ECC UCC composite symbol The 918 may be placed anywhere in the barcode text 919 Reserved o o 920 It shall be used as a linkage flag to signal the presence of an associated linear component in an ECC UCC composite symbol The 920 may be placed anywhere in the barcode text o 921 Instructs the reader to interpret the data contained within the MicroPDF417 symbol as programming for reader initialisation It only shall be placed once at beginning of the barcode text In the case of a structured append initialisation sequence it shall appear in every symbol It s completely equivalent to escape sequence r o 924 Manually places a mode latch to Byte compaction mode It shall be used when the total n
343. not including quiet zones These symbol sizes excluding quiet zones and their maximum data capacities are listed in following table Symbol size values Symbol sizes Maximum data capacities bits modules ECC 000 ECC 050 ECC 080 ECC 100 ECC 140 dmSize_09_09 9 9 12 z dmSize_11_11 11 11 44 6 R dmSize_13_13 13 13 84 36 18 7 dmSize_15_15 15 15 132 72 50 31 dmSize_17_17 17 17 188 114 86 59 9 dmSize_19_19 19 19 252 162 130 91 25 dmSize_21 21 21 21 324 216 178 127 43 dmSize_23 23 23 23 404 276 230 167 63 dmSize_25 25 25 25 492 342 290 211 85 dmSize_27_27 27 27 588 414 354 259 109 dmSize_29 29 29 29 692 492 422 311 135 dmSize_31_31 31 31 804 576 498 367 163 dmSize_33_33 33 33 924 666 578 427 193 dmSize_35 35 35 35 1052 762 662 491 225 dmSize_37_37 37 37 1188 864 754 559 259 dmSize_39 39 39 39 1332 972 850 631 295 dmSize_41_41 41 41 1484 1086 950 707 333 dmSize_43 43 43 43 1644 1206 1058 787 373 dmSize_45 45 45 45 1812 1332 1170 871 415 dmSize_47_47 47 47 1988 1464 1286 959 459 dmSize_49 49 49 49 2172 1602 1410 1051 505 The maximum number of characters in each encoding mode can be calculated by using the Maximum data capacities bits For example the maximum data capacities are 114 bits if the symbol size is 17 17 and the error correction code level is ECC 050 The encoding density is 4 8 bits per data character
344. not the quiet zones will be printed they are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the quiet zones are printed in claSilver color in order to accentuate them Jee SE ESSAI eier ef EARLE E V SS Width Width Width Width Width Width ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode component the leading quiet zone and the trailing quiet zone are included always even if the ShowQuietZone property is set to false See diagram the quiet zones are printed in claSilver color in order to accentuate them Width Width Width Width Width ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 e Height Single Returns the vertical height of the rotated barcode symbol in millimeters The value is calculated based on the module size You can use one of the Module BarcodeWidth and BarcodeHeight parameters to specify the module size If the quiet zones are printed please read the ShowQuietZone property about whether or not the quiet zones will be printed they are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the quiet zones are printed in claSilver color in order to accentuate them p SE A SS Height Pe 3 rece Ki Bar d 1 Seil ShowQuietZone False Angle 0 30 90 a Height Height SE enh d RERI S EES DU Sr ShowQuietZone Tue Angle 0 30 90 For the TBarcodeFmx2
345. nt maximum 32 segments The property specifies the maximum number of segments for a Compact Matrix barcode symbol It can be one of values from 1 to 32 they are defined in the pfmxCompactMatrix unit The maximum number of segments together with the maximum version specified by the MaxVersion property indicates the maximum symbol size for a Compact Matrix barcode symbol And the minimum number of segments specified by the MinSegments property together with the minimum version specified by the MinVersion property indicates the minimum symbol size for the Compact Matrix barcode symbol Based on the stretch order specified by the StretchOrder property the smallest symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between the minimum symbol size and the maximum symbol size If the barcode text is so long that it cannot be encoded using the maximum symbol size an OnInvalidLength the barcode text is specified in the Barcode property or an OnInvalidDataLength the barcode text is specified in the Data property event will occur The CurrentSegments property can be used to get the factual number of segments 138 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Note if the property is set to a value less than the MinSegments property s value the MinSegments property will be automatically changed to equal to this property s value In other words the MaxSegments property s value is always greater than or equal to the Min
346. ntax 2 DrawToSize syntax 2 Print syntax 2 PrintSize syntax 2 GetParity syntax 1 only for TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode GetCheckSum syntax 1 only for TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 or GetCheckSum syntax 1 only for TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroPDF417 method is called Note The event doesn t occur when one of the following methods is called e DrawTo syntax 3 e DrawToSize syntax 3 e Print syntax 3 e PrintSize syntax 3 e GetParity syntax 2 only for TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode e GetCheckSum syntax 2 only for TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 e GetCheckSum syntax 2 only for TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroPDF417 C 1 4 OnlnvalidChar Occurs if there is any invalid character in the Barcode property value Syntax type Defined in the pfmxBarcode2D unit TOnInvalidChar procedure Sender TObject Index Integer BarcodeChar Char LinearFlag Boolean of object property OnInvalidChar TOnInvalidChar Parameters e Sender TObject It is the object whose event handler is called e Index Integer The index position of first invalid character in the barcode text that is specified by the Barcode property For 32 bit windows 64 bit windows and Mac OSX platform the index 1 denotes that the first character is invalid character For iOS and Android platform the index 0 denotes that the first character is invalid character If you use theOnEncode event to encode the barcode text in your own encoding scheme the value Verify_Invalidindex_BeforeBarcode
347. nto a series of MicroPDF417 structured append symbols The value will be used in the structured append block and the structured append block will be used by each symbol in the series of MicroPDF417 structured append symbols See also the Structured append section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroPDF417 article Parameters e Data TBytes It s the original input text before division into the each symbol in the series of structured append symbols It is of type TBytes it is in fact a byte array You can use the method to caculate the check sum of a block of binary bytes data See also the Data property article e AllowEscape Boolean Specifies whether to allow users to insert the escape sequences to the Data parameter value in order to place the function characters and additional control information See also the Escape sequences section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroPDF417 article and the AllowEscape property article e Invalidindex Integer If there is any invalid byte value in the barcode text that is specified by the Data parameter the parameter returns the position index of first invalid byte value the index O denotes that the first byte is invalid Otherwise it returns the Verify_OK 1 This method can return one of these values these consts are defined in the pfmxCore2D unit o Verify_OK 1 It indicates the method succeeds o Verify_Invalidindex_Base 0 and greater than 0 It indicates that an invalid byte value is i
348. ntuate the quiet zones alll Im Ri L eai Orientation boLeftRight Orientation boTopBottom For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode components the leading quiet zone and the trailing quiet zone are included always even if the ShowQuietZone property is set to false See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones The value of Height is calculated using following method o The Stretch property is set to false it s calculated based on the Module property value o The Stretch property is set to true When the Orientation property is set to boLeftRight or boRightLeft If the BarcodeHeight property value is greater than zero it s same to the BarcodeHeight property value If the BarcodeHeight property value is equal to zero the TopMargin property value will be subtracted from the height of Timage control that s specified by the Image property then the result will be returned If the BarcodeHeight property value is less than zero the TopMargin property value and the absolute value of the negative BarcodeHeight property value i e the bottom margin will be subtracted from the height of Timage control that s specified by the Image property then the result will be returned When the Orientation property is set to boTopBottom or boBottomTop If the BarcodeWidth property value is greater than zero it s same to the BarcodeWidth property value If
349. nual The design of Aztec Code technically allows a symbol to include as little as none or as much as 99 in error correction codewords though both limits are unsound The recommended level of error correction for normal use is 23 of symbol capacity plus 3 codewords more They may also choose to override the default error correction level specifying either an alternate minimum error correction percentage or a fixed symbol format and ECC size Users judging their applications to be especially benign or critical may choose to specify an alternate minimum error correction percentage specified by the ECCLevel property ranging from 0 to 99 plus always for data security 3 or more additional error correction codewords specified by the ECCCount property This is called a minimum percentage because depending on message length the symbology will typically have to add extra error correction codewords above this minimum to fill out the symbol Some applications will be best served by specifying a fixed size number of codewords to be used for all Aztec Code symbols regardless of their data content In this case the ECCLevel property should be set to 0 and the ECCCount property should be set toa size which includes adequate error correction for the longest message anticipated then typically shorter messages will be encoded with excess error correction creating more robust symbols for this application Character set 1 All 8 bit values can be
350. o barcode text See also the Extended Channel Interpretation ECI section below 64 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Escape sequences If the AllowEscape property is set to true following escape sequences are supported by the component you can insert them to the barcode text e Insert a backslash to barcode text e 5 Insert a 05 macro to barcode text It s used to abbreviate the industry specific header gt RS 05 GS and trailer RS EOT in order to reduce the size of symbol It must only be placed once at beginning of the barcode text and it shall not be used in Macro PDF417 symbols 6 Insert a 06 macro to barcode text It s used to abbreviate the industry specific header gt RS 06 GS and trailer RS EOT in order to reduce the size of symbol It shall only be placed once at beginning of the barcode text and it shall not be used in Macro PDF417 symbols r Instructs the reader to interpret the data contained within the PDF417 symbol as programming for reader initialisation It shall only be placed once at beginning of the barcode text In the case of a Macro PDF417 initialisation sequence it shall appear in every symbol e lt ECI_Numnerm gt Insert an ECI indicator block to barcode text See also the Extended Channel Interpretation ECI section below V Insert a FNC1 character either in First position mode or as a data field separator to the barcode text One of 903 904 and
351. o use the remaining capacity to automatically upgrade the error correction code level in order to increase symbols strength If the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to true the highest error correction code level that can be accommodated by current symbol size will by used for creating more robust symbols Note the new level is always no lower than the level specified by the ECCLevel property and the symbol size will not be increased The CurrentECCLevel property can be used to get the factual error correction code level If the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to false the error correction code level specified by the ECCLevel property will be used always The value of CurrentECCLevel property is always equal to the value of ECCLevel property See also the Error checking and correcting ECC section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode article A 1 55 EnableUpdateDB Determines whether the user can change the value of the field Syntax property EnableUpdateDB Boolean Description If you link the Barcode or Data property to a data field using the LiveBindings the EnableUpdateDB property specify whether the TBarcodeFmx2D barcode component allows the user to change the field value by changing the value of its Barcode or Data property When the EnableUpdateDB property is set to false The TBarcodeFmx2D barcode component can only be used to draw the value of the field on the current record into a barcode symbol When the EnableUpdateDB proper
352. oad virtual Description On the specified canvas draws a barcode symbol that is specified by the parameters of this method Parameters e Canvas TCanvas Specifies target canvas to draw the barcode symbol on it e Data TBytes Specifies the barcode text It is of type TBytes it is in fact a byte array 198 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual You can specify a block of binary bytes data to the parameter in order to encode it into a barcode symbol For the TBarcodeFmx2D_RSS14 and TBarcodeFmx2D_RSSLimited components if the property AutoCheckDigit is set to true the check digit doesn t need to be included in the parameter otherwise the check digit can be specified by you in the parameter See also the Barcode and Data properties BarColor TAlphaColor In general the Inversed property is set to false In this case the parameters specifies the color for all bars Stacked 2D barcode symbology and Linear 1D barcode symbology or dark modules Matrix 2D barcode symbology in the barcode symbol If the Inversed property is set to true it specifies the color for all spaces Stacked 2D barcode symbology and Linear 1D barcode symbology or light modules Matrix 2D barcode symbology in the barcode symbol Also if the ShowQuietZone parameter value is set to true the leading quiet zone trailing quiet zone top quiet zone and bottom quiet zone are drawn using the color The alpha channel of the BarColor parameter is supp
353. ode FMX Components is a Shareware product If you find it useful please purchase the full version of this product After your purchase you will receive an e mail with a download link of full version for downloading Why should I purchase After your purchase you can continue to use the 2D Barcode FMX Components and entitles you to the following benefits e The trial version is fully functional though limited and adds a watermark that appears in the final 2D Barcode symbol So purchase will allow you to use 2D Barcode FMX Components without limitations e You are entitled to free upgrades during 1 year since the date of your purchase This includes both major and minor upgrades in appropriate time period It means that during one year you can download and install the latest versions of the software from our site e You will be entitled to a 50 discount for all future major upgrades if you purchased the software more than one year ago and allow you to have free upgrades for another year 93 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual e You will be always entitled to free minor upgrades for the version that is purchased e You will also have priority in technical support e Purchasing the product may also entitle you to discounts on new software releases from Han soft e Finally by purchasing the software you provide us with the resources and incentive to support the software with updates and to develop additional quality products in the fut
354. ode data False invalid_index if invalid index lt gt 1 then exit SetLength structuredappend block 15 structuredappend block 0 5c structuredappend block 1 ze 73 s structuredappend block 2 5b structuredappend block 3 ze 35 5 structuredappend block 4 2c Index 5 structuredappend block 5 30 0 structuredappend block 6 32 2 structuredappend block 7 ze 39 9 structuredappend_block ze Ze File_ID 029 structuredappend block 9 2c File Name structuredappend bloc 0 ze 2c Amount structuredappend_ bloc ze 2c Time_Stamp structuredappend bloc 2 ze 320 he Sender structuredappend bloc 3 ze 2c Address structuredappend bloc 4 ze S2c ky File Size structuredappend block len Length structuredappend block check_sum_len Length check_sum SetLength structuredappend block structuredappend_ block len check _sum_len 1 Move PByte check sum 0 PByte structuredappend block structuredappend block len check _sum_len structuredappend block structuredappend block len check sum len re 5d See also the Sturctured append section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroPDF417 article B 1 9 GetCheckSum TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 Returns the check sum of a barcode text that will be encoded into each symbol in a Macro PDF417 set The value will be used in the macro PDF417 control
355. ode symbologies are supported All RSS barcode symbologies are supported The LiveBindings database function is supported The RAD Studio Delphi and C Builder XE2 XE3 XE4 XE5 XE6 XE7 XE8 and 10 Seattle are supported All of 32 bit Windows 64 bit Windows Mac OSX 32 bit iOS Only for XE4 XE5 XE6 XE7 XE8 10 Seattle 64 bit iOS Only fo XE8 10 Seattle and Android Only for XE5 XE6 XE7 XE8 10 Seattle components are included Structured append ECI etc features are supported It is visible in design time Ability to scale and rotate the barcode symbols Foreground and background colors of barcode symbol can be changed freely It s easy to use and it has the excellent functionality It s a very popular 2D barcode components package 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Chapter 2 Installation 2 1 Trial user Installation step by step 1 Before installing the components package please close all RAD Studio Delphi and C Builder IDEs Note for each IDE if it s a clean installation please run it at least once before installing the components package then closes it and continues installation Run the installation file barcodefmx2d_tri exe and then click on the Next button in the installation dialog box Read the End User License Agreement You must accept the terms of this agreement before continuing with the installation And then
356. of EncodedData parameter above The index 0 denotes that the first byte value is invalid byte Return The index position of first invalid character in the value of Barcode parameter above should be returned Please calculate it according to the values of EncodedData and InvalidEncodedDatalndex parameters above and the encoding algorithm in your OnEncode event handle If the invalid byte value is in the prefix codes for example the BOM please return the value Verify_Invalidlndex_BeforeBarcode 3 If the invalid byte value is in the suffix codes please return the value Verify_InvalidIndex_AfterBarcode 4 These consts are defined in the pfmxCore2D unit Note The event handle is not required if the value of Index parameter is correct in the OnInvalidChar event handle C 2 TSaveFmx2D C 2 1 OnSave 265 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Occurs before save the barcode symbol to an image file when the Save method is called Syntax type Defined in the pfmxSave2D unit TOnSave procedure Sender TComponent var FilePath string var Continue Boolean of object property OnSave TOnSave Parameters e Sender TObject It is the object whose event handler is called e FilePath string The file path and name of the image file that you want to save the barcode symbol to You can change the parameter value in the event handle e Continue Boolean Specifies whether to save the barcode symbol to an image fi
357. olors and stores 1 pixel value per 3 bytes Each pixel value defines the red green and blue samples of the pixel bedColors_32b Uses the 32 bit per pixel 32bpp format It supports 4294967296 distinct colors and stores 1 pixel per 4 byte Each pixel value define the Alpha Red Green and Blue samples of the pixel 180 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual A 2 3 ColorDepth TSaveFmx2D_Gif Specifies the color depth of a Graphics Interchange Format GIF file for the TSaveFmx2D_Gif component Syntax type Defined in the pfmxSave2D Gif unit TGifColorDepth gcdColors 1b gcdColors 2b gcdColors 3b gcdColors 4b gcdColors 5b gcdColors 6b gcdColors 7b gcdColors 8b property ColorDepth TGifColorDepth Description Color depth also known as bit depth pixel format is either the number of bits used to indicate the color of a single pixel In a Graphics Interchange Format GIF file the pixels can be defined by a varying number of bits The property specifies which color depth will be used to save a barcode symbol to a Graphics Interchange Format GIF file It can be one of these value defined in the pfmxSave2D_Gif unit e gcdColors_1b Uses the 1 bit per pixel 1bpp format It supports 2 distinct colors for example black and white Each pixel is an 1 bit index into a table of up to 2 colors gcdColors_2b Uses the 2 bit per pixel 2bpp format It supports 4 distinct colors Each pixel value is a 2 bit index in
358. omponents added at design time are created automatically Parameters e Owner TComponent It is the component that is responsible for freeing the barcode component instance Typically this is the form It becomes the value of the Owner property B 1 4 Destroy Disposes of the instance of the barcode object 190 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Syntax destructor Destroy override Description Destroy is the destructor for a barcode object Do not call the destructor directly in an application Instead call Free The Free verifies that the barcode object is not nil before it calls Destroy B 1 5 Draw Redraws current barcode symbol in the Timage control that s specified by the Image property Syntax function Draw ReEncode Boolean False Boolean virtual Description The method redraws the barcode symbol to the Timage control that s specified by the Image property The barcode symbol is specified in the properties of this barcode component Parameter e ReEncode Boolean Normally the barcode text will not be encoded again when call the method the previous encoded data will be used to draw the barcode symbol If the parameter is set to true the barcode text will be encoded again before draw the barcode symbol It defaults to false if the parameter is not provided If you changed the OnEncode event handle please call the method and set the parameter to true please call the Clear method firstly
359. on boBottomTop ShowQuietZone False True ShowQuietZone False True A 1 126 TopQuietZone Specifies the vertical height of the top quiet zone in modules Syntax property TopQuietZone Integer Description Specifies the vertical height of the top quiet zone in modules The quiet zone is drawn using the color specified by the SpaceColor property if the Inversed property is set to false Otherwise it s drawn using the color specified by the BarColor property See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones poem E Ee x SE Sc K mk Orientation boLeftRight Orientation boRightLeft Orientation boTopBottom Orientation boBottomTop This property is useful only when the ShowQuietZone property value is set to true A 1 127 TotalHeight TBarcodeFmx2D_RSS14 TBarcodeFmx2D_RSSLimited Specifies the total height for an RSS 14 or an RSS Limited symbol in modules Syntax property TotalHeight Integer Description The property specifies the total height for an RSS 14 or an RSS Limited symbol in modules For all styles of RSS 14 symbol and RSS Limited symbol if both the Link2D and Show2DSeparator properties are set to Ture a contiguous separator pattern is drawn and its minimum height is 1 module the pattern height can be specified by the SeparatorRowHeight property The height of contiguous separator pattern is included in the value of
360. on Identifier 01 and 13 digit data the checkdigit isn t required is placed at beginnig of barcode the function codeword 905 will be selected to encode the FNC1 character in order to reduce the symbol size the leading Application Identifier 01 is not encoded in the SSC 14 number Otherwise the function codeword 905 will be selected to encode the FNC1 character poMicroPDF417Explicit901 The value isn t used in the TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 component See also the Character set Escape sequences and Extended Channel Interpretation ECI sections in the TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 article A 1 101 Orientation Controls the orientation of the barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxBarcode2D unit TBarcodeOrientation boLeftRight boRightLeft boTopBottom boBottomTop property Orientation TBarcodeOrientation Description Specifies the direction of the barcode symbol The barcode symbol and its quiet zones if they are displayed please read the 158 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual ShowQuietZone property about whether or not the quiet zones will be displayed will be rotated based on the property value You can use the LeadingQuietZone TrailingQuietZone TopQuietZone and BottomQuietZone properties to specify the size of these quiet zones in modules This property can be one of these values defined in the pfmxBarcode2D unit e boLeftRight Left to right horizontal direction rotates the barcode s
361. on index of the invalid byte value The index 0 denotes that the first byte value is invalid B 1 7 DrawToSize Returns the horizontal width and vertical height of a rotated barcode symbol in dots or pixels There are several different overloading methods Syntax 1 Syntax 2 and Syntax 3 e Syntax 1 Returns the horizontal width and vertical height of the rotated barcode symbol that is specified by the properties of this barcode component Syntax 2 Returns the horizontal width and vertical height of the rotated barcode symbol that is specified by the parameters of this method The barcode text is specified in the Barcode parameter It is of type string The Barcode parameter is in fact an UnicodeString By default the unicode string will be converted to an UTF 8 bytes sequence the BOM isn t included then be encoded into the barcode symbol If you want to use other encoding scheme for example the ANSI UTF 16 please convert it in theOnEncode event handle or use the DrawTo Syntax 3 overloading method and specify the converted bytes sequence in its Data parameter If you want to encode a block of binary bytes data please use the DrawTo Syntax 3 overloading method Syntax 3 Returns the horizontal width and vertical height of the rotated barcode symbol that is specified by the parameters of this method The barcode text is specified in the Data parameter It is of type TBytes it is in fact a byte array You can use the method if you
362. operty the smallest symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between the minimum symbol size and the maximum symbol size The CurrentColumns property can be used to get the factual number of columns Note if the property is set to a value greater than the MaxColumns property s value the MaxColumns property will be automatically changed to equal to this property s value In other words the MinColumns property s value is always less than or equal to the MaxColumns property s value See also the Symbol size section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 article A 1 83 MinRows TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K Specifies the minimum number of stacked rows for a Code 16K barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxCodel6K unit TCodel6K Rows 2 16 property MinRows TCodel6K Rows Description The property specifies the minimum number of stacked rows for a Code 16K barcode symbol It can be one of values from 2 to 16 They are defined in the pfmxCode16K unit The smallest number of stacked rows that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between the minimum number of stacked rows specified by this property and the maximum number of stacked rows that s specified by the MaxRows property The CurrentRows property can be used to get the factual number of stacked rows Note if the property is set to a value greater than the MaxRows property s value the MaxRows property will be
363. operty will be automatically changed to equal to this property s value In other words the MinVersion property s value is always less than or equal to the MaxVersion property s value See also the Symbol sizes section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_GridMatrix article A 1 92 MinVersion TBarcodeFmx2D_HanXinCode Specifies the minimum symbol version symbol size for a Han Xin Code barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxHanXinCode unit THanXinCode Version 1 84 property MinVersion THanXinCode Version Description There are eighty four sizes of Han Xin Code symbols referred to as version 1 to 84 in increasing order of size and data capacity The property specifies the minimum symbol version symbol size for a Han Xin Code barcode symbol It can be one of values from 1 to 84 They are defined in the pfmxHanXinCode unit The smallest symbol version symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between the minimum symbol version symbol size specified by this property and the maximum symbol version symbol size that s specified by the MaxVersion property The CurrentVersion property can be used to get the factual symbol version symbol size 151 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Note if the property is set to a value greater than the MaxVersion property s value the MaxVersion property will be automatically changed to equal to this property s value In other words the
364. or checking and correcting ECC section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroQRCode article A 1 19 CurrentECCLevel TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 Contains the factual error correction code level of a PDF417 barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxPDF417Custom unit TPDF417 EccLevel elEcc_0 elEcc_1 elEcc 2 elEcc_ 3 elEcc_4 elEcc_5 elEcc_6 elEcc_7 elEcc 8 elEcc Auto property CurrentECCLevel TPDF417 EccLevel Description The property always contains the factual error correction code level of a PDF 417 barcode symbol It can be one of values from elEcc_0 to elEcc_8 corresponding to error correction code level from ECC 0 to ECC 8 They are defined in the pfmxPDF417Custom unit If the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to true the remaining data capacity of a PDF417 barcode symbol will be used to automatically upgrade the error correction code level The highest error correction code level that can be accommodated by current symbol size will by used for creating more robust symbols Read the property to retrieve the factual error correction code level 108 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual If the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to false the error correction code level specified by the ECCLevel property will be used always If the ECCLevel property is set to one of values from elECC_0 to elECC_8 the value of this property is always equal to the value of the ECCLevel property If the ECCLevel property is set to elE
365. order to accentuate them Width Width Width Width ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 Height Single Returns the vertical height of the rotated barcode symbol in dots or pixels in the vertical direction using the vertical resolution If the quiet zones are displayed please read the ShowQuietZone parameter section below about whether or not the quiet zones will be displayed they are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the quiet zones are drawn in claSilver color in order to accentuate them 210 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual p TE NI Ela Height Bas a wr ShowQuietZone False Angle 0 30 90 ae ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode component the leading quiet zone and the trailing quiet zone are included always even if the ShowQuietZone parameter is set to false See diagram the quiet zones are drawn inclaSilver color in order to accentuate them ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 e SymbolWidth Single Returns the distance between the leading and trailing of the rotated barcode symbol in dots or pixels using the horizontal resolution If the quiet zones are displayed please read the ShowQuietZone parameter section below about whether or not the quiet zones will be displayed they are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the quiet zones
366. orresponding to the initial modes 0 to 6 shown in table above will be selected automatically depending on the barcode text in order to minimize the symbol size You can always use the CurrentMode property to get the factual initial mode Escape sequences If the AllowEscape property is set to true following escape sequences are supported by the component you can insert them to the barcode text e Insert a backslash to barcode text e Vi Insert a FNC1 character to barcode text See also the Character set section above e 2 Insert a FNC2 character to barcode text See also the Character set section above e 3 Insert a FNC3 character to barcode text See also the Character set section above e a Manually switch code set to code set A See also the Character set section above e b Manually switch code set to code set B See also the Character set section above e c Manually switch code set to code set C See also the Character set section above e p Insert a PAD character to barcode text See also the Character set section above e m lt Index gt lt Amount gt Insert a extended data length mode block to barcode text in order to create the symbol in extended data length mode See also the Extended data length mode section below e s lt Index gt lt Amount gt Insert a message append block to barcode text in order to create the symbol in a message append See also the Message append section below
367. orted See also the BarColor property SpaceColor TAlphaColor In general the Inversed property is set to false In this case the parameters specifies the color for all spaces Stacked 2D barcode symbology and Linear 1D barcode symbology or light modules Matrix 2D barcode symbology in the barcode symbol Also if the ShowQuietZone parameter value is set to true the leading quiet zone trailing quiet zone top quiet zone and bottom quiet zone are drawn using the color If the Inversed property is set to true it specifies the color for all bars Stacked 2D barcode symbology and Linear 1D barcode symbology or dark modules Matrix 2D barcode symbology in the barcode symbol The alpha channel of the SpaceColor parameter is supported See also the SpaceColor property ShowQuietZone Boolean Specifies whether to draw the leading quiet zone trailing quiet zone top quiet zone and bottom quiet zone If the parameter value is set to true these quiet zones are drawn Otherwise they don t be drawn You can use the LeadingQuietZone TrailingQuietZone TopQuietZone and BottomQuietZone properties to specify the size of these quiet zones in modules See diagram the SpaceColor parameter is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones TopQuietZone ag a A t I eA Re H EWEA a iy ZS BottomQuietZone ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode component leading quiet
368. ot capable of storing much data However because it can store data for each symbol size more efficiently than QR Code the size of Micro QR Code symbols does not significantly increase even though the amount of data is increased The Micro QR Code was created by Toyota subsidiary Denso Wave in 1994 59 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Error checking and correcting ECC There are three user selectable levels of error correction as shown in following table offering the capability of recovery from the amounts of damage in the table Values of ECCLevel property ECC levels Recevory capacities approx elLowest L 7 elMedium M 15 elQuality Q 25 You can use the ECCLevel property to specify the error correction code level for a Micro QR Code symbol It can be one of these values elLowest elMedium and elQuality corresponding to the error checking and correcting levels L M and Q These values are defined in the pfmxMicroQRCode unit If the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to true the highest error correction code level that can be accommodated by current symbol size will by used for creating more robust symbols Note the new level is always no lower than the level specified by the ECCLevel property and the symbol size will not be increased it may be determined depending on the length of barcode text and the error correction code level specified by the ECCLevel property see also the Symbol size
369. ot provided and the physical horizontal resolution obtained from the Canvas parameter will be used VDPI Integer Specifies the vertical resolution of canvas in DPI It s the number of dots or pixels per inch It defaults to 0 if the VDPI is not provided and the physical vertical resolution obtained from the Canvas parameter will be used Return This method can return one of these values these consts are defined in the pfmxCore2D unit Verify_Invalidindex_AfterBarcode 4 If you use the Barcode property to specify the barcode text and use the OnEncode event handle to encode the barcode text to a bytes sequence in your own encoding scheme the Verify_InvalidiIndex_AfterBarcode 4 indicats that an invalid byte value is in the suffix codes of the bytes sequence Verify_Invalidindex_BeforeBarcode 3 If you use the Barcode property to specify the barcode text and use the OnEncode event handle to encode the barcode text to a bytes sequence in your own encoding scheme the Verify_InvalidIndex_BeforeBarcode 3 indicats that an invalid byte value is in the prefix codes of the bytes sequence for example the BOM Verify_InvalidLength 2 If you use the Barcode property to specify the barcode text it indicates that the length of Barcode property value is invalid also the OnInvalidLength event will occur If you use the Data property to specify the barcode text it indicates that the length of Data property value is invalid also
370. other information about the file structured append decoder uses the control block s information to reconstruct the file correctly independently of symbol scanning order The escape sequence s lt Index gt lt File_ID gt lt File Name gt lt Amount gt lt Time_Stamp gt lt Sender gt lt Address gt lt File_Size gt lt Checksum gt is used to place the structured append control block to the barcode text e Index The position index of the symbol within the set set of MicroPDF417 symbols in the structured append format It s an integer between 1 and 999999 including the boundaries in decimal string format Note the field is required File_ID The file ID It is a variable length numeric sequence which contains one or more triads of digits Each triad of digits is an integer between 000 to 899 the leading zero is required in decimal string format For each related structured append symbol the file ID should be specified using the same numeric sequence This ensures that all reassembled symbol data belongs to the same distributed file representation Note the field is required File Name The file name It s a text string with an implied reset to ECI 000002 The ECI escape sequences may be used in order to set a different ECI within the field Note the field is optional Amount The segment count identifying the total number of structured append symbols in the distributed file It s an integer between 2 and 99999 including the b
371. ou use the OnEncode event handle to encode the barcode text to a bytes sequence in your own encoding scheme the Verify_Invalidilndex_BeforeBarcode 3 indicats that an invalid byte value is in the prefix codes of the bytes sequence for example 246 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual the BOM e Verify_InvalidLength 2 It indicates that the length of Barcode parameter value is invalid e Verify_OK 1 It indicates the method succeeds e Verify_Invalidindex_Base 0 and greater than 0 It indicates that an invalid character is in the barcode text the return value is the position index of the invalid charactere For 32 bit Windows 64 bit Windows and Mac OSX platform the index 1 denotes that the first character is invalid character For iOS and Android platform the index 0 denotes that the first character is invalid character B 1 12 3 PrintSize Syntax 3 Returns the actual horizontal width and vertical height of a rotated barcode symbol in millimeters The barcode symbol is specified by the parameters of this method Syntax function PrintSize var Width Height SymbolWidth SymbolHeight Single Data TBytes ShowQuietZone Boolean Module Single Angle Single 0 BarcodeWidth Single 0 BarcodeHeight Single 0 HDPI Integer 0 VDPI Integer 0 Integer overload virtual Description The method returns the actual horizontal width and vertical height of a rotated barcode symbol that is specified by par
372. oundaries in decimal string format Note the field is optional if it s used that field shall appear in every segment Time_Stamp The time stamp It indicates the time stamp on the source file It s a GMT time in yyyy mm dd hh nn ss format o yyyy 4 digit year o mm 2 digit month the leading zero is optional o dd 2 digit day the leading zero is optional o hh 2 digit hour in 24 hours format the leading zero is optional o nn 2 digit minute the leading zero is optional o ss 2 digit second the leading zero is optional Note entire time portion or the minute and second portion are optional i e the yyyy mm dd yyyy mm dd hh and yyyy mm dd hh nn formats are valid If the hour minute or second portion is not included they defaults to 00 Sender The sender It s a text string with an implied reset to ECI 000002 The ECI escape sequences may be used in order to set a different ECI within the field Note the field is optional Address The address It s a text string with an implied reset to ECI 000002 The ECI escape sequences may be used in order to set a different ECI within the field Note the field is optional File_Size The file size It s an integer in decimal string format and indicates the size in bytes of the entire source file Note the field is optional 57 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual e Checksum The checksum It s an integer value of the 16 bit 2 bytes CRC checksum using the C
373. ows and columns in current symbol For example the symbol size value azSize_19Compact denotations the Aztec Code symbol size is 19 rows by 19 columns in compact format These symbol size values are defined in the pfmxAztecCode unit The property is read only See also the Symbol sizes section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_AztecCode article A 1 28 CurrentSize TBarcodeFmx2D_DataMatrix Contains the factual symbol size of a Data Matrix ECC 000 140 barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxDataMatrix unit TDataMatrix Size dmSize 09 09 dmSize 11 11 dmSize 13 13 dmSize 15 15 dmSize 17 17 dmSize 19 19 dmSize 21 21 dmSize 23 23 dmSize 25 25 dmSize 27 27 dmSize 29 29 dmSize 31 31 dmSize 33 33 dmSize 35 35 dmSize 37 37 dmSize 39 39 dmSize 41 41 dmSize 43 43 dmSize 45 45 dmSize 47 47 dmSize 49 49 property CurrentSize TDataMatrix Size Description The smallest symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between the minimum symbol size specified by the MinSize property and the maximum symbol size specified by the MaxSize property Read the property to retrieve the factual symbol size of a Data Matrix ECC 000 140 barcode symbol The property can be one of values from dmSize_09 09 to dmSize_49 49 denotations the factual number of rows and columns in current symbol For example the symbol size value dmSize_29_29 denotations the Data Matrix ECC 000 140 symbol size is 29
374. pages e General purpose interpretations such as encryption and compaction e User defined interpretations for closed systems e Control information for structured append in unbuffered mode The ECI protocol provides a consistent method to specify particular interpretations on byte values before printing and after decoding The ECI is identified by an integer up to 6 digits which is encoded in the QR Code symbol by the ECI indicator block The escape sequence e lt ECI _Number gt is used to place the ECI indicator block to the barcode text e EC Number The ECI number it s an integer between 0 and 999999 including the boundaries the leading zero is optional ECI indicator blocks may be placed anywhere in the barcode text in a single or structured append set of QR Code symbols For example ABC e 123 DEFabc e 000003 def The default interpretation for QR Code is ECI 000003 representing the ISO IEC 8859 1 character set The AllowEscape property should be set to true in order to place the ECI indicator blocks Any ECI invoked shall apply until the end of the barcode text or until another ECI indicator block is encountered Thus the interpretation of the ECI may straddle two or more symbols Structured append In order to handle larger messages than are practical in a single symbol a data message can be distributed across several QR Code symbols Up to 16 QR Code symbols may be appended in a structured format to convey more data If
375. parameter is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 See also the LeftMargin property e Top Single Specifies the margin between the rotated barcode symbol and the top side of the paper in millimeters in the vertical direction If the quiet zones are printed please read the ShowQuietZone parameter about whether or not the quiet zones will be printed they are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the SpaceColor parameter is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones E CS SERA DE Yr es ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 234 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode component the leading quiet zone and the trailing quiet zone are included always even if the ShowQuietZone parameter is set to false See diagram the SpaceColor parameter is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones ShowQuietZone False 7 ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 See also the TopMargin property e Module Single Specifies the module size in millimeters o For the Matrix 2D barcode symbology excluding the TBarcodeFmx2D_MaxiCode barcode symbology the module is single cell a suqare shape used to encode one bit data The parameter specifies the module width and height See diagram
376. pe sequence e lt ECIl_Number gt can be used to place the ECI indicator block to barcode text See also the Extended Channel Interpretation ECI section below The AllowEscape property should be set to true in order to place the FNC1 characters or the ECI indicator blocks Escape sequences If the AllowEscape property is set to true following escape sequences are supported by the component you can insert them to the barcode text e Insert a backslash to barcode text e f Insert a FNC1 character to barcode text There are three usages o Insert a FNC1 character in First position mode to the barcode text In this case it shall only be used once in a symbol and shall be placed at beginning of the barcode text and after any ECI indicator block or structured append block if exists followed by an Application Identifier 2 or more digits For example 0100012345678905 o Insert a FNC1 character in Second position mode to the barcode text In this case it shall only be used once in a symbol and shall be placed at beginning of the barcode text and after any ECI indicator block or structured append block if exists followed by an application indicator single Latin alphabetic character from the set a to z and A to Z or a two digit number which is enclosed in square brackets For example 75 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual 01 00012345678905 o Insert a GS character ASCII value 29 as the d
377. pecifies the height of separator bar for Code 16K barcode symbology in modules Syntax property SeparatorRowHeight Integer Description The property specifies the height of separator bar for Code 16K barcode symbology in modules It s an integer between 1 and 4 including the boundaries The separator bar is horizontal bar separating two rows of a Code 16K barcode symbol or abutting the top or bottom of first or last row respectively See diagram 162 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual A 1 110 SeparatorRowHeight TBarcodeFmx2D_RSS14 TBarcodeFmx2D_RSSExpanded Specifies the height of separator pattern row between symbol rows for RSS 14 Stacked and Stacked Omnidirectional and RSS Expanded Stacked symbols in modules Also it sepecifies the height of contiguous separator pattern row between the linear and 2D symbols of an EAN UCC Composite symbol which use the RSS symbol including any style of RSS 14 RSS Limited or any style of RSS Expanded symbol as its linear symbol in modules Syntax property SeparatorRowHeight Integer Description For the RSS 14 barcode symbols if the Style property is set to the rsStacked Stacked style or rsStackedOmnidirectional Stacked Omnidirectional style the property specifies the height of separator pattern row between top row and bottom row in modules See diagram SeparatorRowHeight SeparatorRowHeight RSS 14 Stacked RSS 14 Stacked Omnidirectional Fo
378. perty to specify the height of each separator pattern in modules If both the Link2D and Show2DSeparator properties are set to Ture a contiguous separator pattern is represented and its minimum height is 1 module the height can be specified by the SeparatorRowHeight property too Quiet zones No quiet zones is required outside the bounds of the RSS Expanded symbol The first and last elements may appear wider than one module without affecting the symbol if the adjacent background area is the same color So the minimum values of LeadingQuietZone TrailingQuietZone TopQuietZone and BottomQuietZone properties are equal to 0 Character set A subset of ISO IEC 646 consisting of the upper and lower case letters A Z a z digits 0 9 space and 19 selected punctuation characters amp lt gt _ in addition to the special function character FNC1 If you want insert the FNC1 please insert the character instead Note in the barcode text all Application Identifiers should be enclosed in parentheses and the parentheses are only for identifying Application Identifiers and they are not encoded into the barcode symbol If you want encode the parentheses and in an Application Identifier element string please use the and instead Data capactiy 74 numeric or 41 alphabetic characters Note the RSS Expanded data capacity depends on the encodation method The maximum is 74 digits for 01 other Als t
379. ponse If the property is set to 0 the barcode data or text will not be sliced and it will be encoded in optimal combination of encoding modes at a time using the recursion algorithm If the property EncodePolicy isn t set to epMixingOptimal the property value will be ignored A 1 76 MaxSliceLen TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode Specifies the maximum number of bytes to slice the barcode data in order to limit the depth of recursion Syntax property MaxSliceLen Integer Description If the property EncodePolicy is set to epMixingOptimal this property specifies the maximum number of bytes to slice the barcode data or text each piece will be encoded in optimal combination of encoding modes using the recursion algorithm It s useful to limit the depth of recursion in order to prevent the computer has no response If the property is set to 0 the barcode data or text will not be sliced and it will be encoded in optimal combination of encoding modes at a time using the recursion algorithm If the property EncodePolicy isn t set to epMixingOptimal the property value will be ignored A 1 77 MaxVersion TBarcodeFmx2D_CompactMatrix Specifies the maximum version for a Compact Matrix barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxCompactMatrix unit TCompactMatrix Version 1 32 property MaxVersion TCompactMatrix Version Description There are 32 vertical sizes of Compact Matrix symbol referred to as version 1 to 32 in
380. pplications where the different aspect ratio is needed Wu BI 4 RSS 1 Stacked Omnidirectional See also the Styles section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_RSS14 article A 1 123 Style TBarcodeFmx2D_RSSExpanded Specifies which style version of RSS Expanded symbols will be used Syntax type Defined in the pfmxRssExpanded unit TRSSExpanded Style rsStandard rsStacked property Style TRSSExpanded Style Description There are two styles versions of RSS Expanded symbols referred to as RSS Expanded Standard and RSS Expanded Stacked respectively The property specifies which style version of RSS Expanded symbol will be used The property can be one of these values defined in the pfmxRssExpanded unit e rsStandard Indicates to generate the standard style RSS Expanded symbol It is a single row variable length linear symbology It can identify small items and carry more information than the current EAN UPC barcode RSS Expanded Standard 174 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual e rsStacked Indicates to generate the RSS Expanded Stacked symbol It is an RSS Expanded multi row format It may be used when the symbol area or print mechanism is not wide enough to accommodate the full single row symbol Vue RSS Expanded Stacked See also the Styles section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_RSSExpanded article A 1 124 SymbolMode TBarcodeFmx2D_AztecCode Specifies which symbol format and size wi
381. presents a leading FNC1 character in First position mode and implies a mode latch to Numeric compaction mode it not only indicates that the PDF417 symbol s data output shall conform with the Code128 specification UCC EAN 128 emulation the symbology identifier prefix is set to C1 or L3 but also indicates that the data begins with an implied Application Identifier is 21 The escape sequence shall only be placed once at beginning of barcode text otherwise an OninvalidChar or OnInvalidDataChar event will occur o 916 Insert a 05 macro to barcode text It shall only be placed once at beginning of the barcode text and it shall not be used in Macro PDF417 symbols It s completely equivalent to escape sequence 5 o 917 Insert a 06 macro to barcode text It shall only be placed once at beginning of the barcode text and it shall not be used in Macro PDF417 symbols It s completely equivalent to escape sequence 6 o 918 It shall be used as a linkage flag to signal the presence of an associated linear component in a composite symbol other than an ECC UCC composite symbol The 918 may be placed anywhere in the barcode text 919 Reserved o o 920 It shall be used as a linkage flag to signal the presence of an associated linear component in an ECC UCC composite symbol The 920 may be placed anywhere in the barcode text o 921 Instructs the reader to interpret the data contained within the PDF417 symbol as programming for
382. property an OnlnvalidLength or OnInvalidDataLength event will occur You can use the CurrentRows property to get the factual number of stacked rows The Code 16K symbol width is 81 modules inclusive of minimum leading quiet zone and trailing quiet zone The minimum row height value is 8 times the module width So the smallest Code 16K symbol is 81 19 modules square and the largest is 81 145 modules square inclusive of minimum quiet zones the row height is set to 8 modules and the separator bar height is set to 1 module The minimum value of the module width is 7 5 mils 0 19 mm So the minimum physical size is 15 4mm 3 6mm The maximum data density is 208 alphanumeric characters per square inch or 417 numeric digits per square inch when the symbol is printed at 7 5 mils Quiet zones The leading quiet zone shall be a minimum of 10 modules the trailing quiet zone shall be a minimum of 1 modules No top quiet zone and bottom quiet zone are required outside the bounds of the symbol So the minimum value of LeadingQuietZone property is equal to 10 the minimum value of TrailingQuietZone property is equal to 1 and the minimum value of TopQuietZone and BottomQuietZone properties are equal to 0 Character set e All 128 ASCII characters i e ASCII characters 0 to 127 inclusive in accordance with ISO IEC 646 1991 Code 16K has three unique data character sets as code sets A B and C all 128 ASCII characters are encoded by internally swit
383. quiet zones Angle ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True 225 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual The parameter defaults to 1 if the Angle parameter is not provided and the barcode symbol will be rotated based on the value of the Orientation property o boLeftRight 0 degrees o boRightLeft 180 degrees o boTopBottom 270 degrees o boBottomTop 90 degrees If you want to use the 1 degrees the 359 degrees can be used instead Opacity Single Specifies the transparency level of entire barcode symbol where 1 is not transparant at all 0 5 is 50 see through and 0 is completely transparent The parameter defaults to 1 if it is not provided and the value of Opacity property will be used Note if the Inversed property is set to false you can use the alpha channel of the SpaceColor property value to specify the transparency level of bakcground color spaces or light modules and quiet zones and use the alpha channel of the BarColor property value to specify the transparency level of foreground color bars or dark modules If the Inversed property is set to true you can use the alpha channel of the BarColor property value to specify the transparency level of bakcground color spaces or light modules and quiet zones and use the alpha channel of the SpaceColor property value to specify the transparency level of foreground color bars or dark modules BarcodeWidth Single Specifies the barcode symbol widt
384. r Style SeparatorRowHeight AutoCheckDigit 4 1 15 TBarcodeFmx2D_RSSExpanded The component is used to create the RSS Expanded barcode symbols including RSS Expanded Standard and RSS Expanded Stacked It s defined in the pfmxRssExpanded unit RSS Expanded is a variable length linear symbology capable of encoding up to 74 numeric or 41 alphabetic HI II characters of Al element string data internally represented as a binary number RSS Expanded can be used to UE encode primary and supplementary data intended for use in retail point of sale and other applications where the scanners and application software have been appropriately programmed RSS Expanded can be scanned and decoded in up to 22 segments and then reconstructed This facilitates omnidirectional scanning Styles There are two styles versions of RSS Expanded symbols as described in following list e Standard RSS Expanded Standard is a single row variable length linear symbology It can identify small UI WU items and carry more information than the current EAN UPC barcode RSS Expanded Standard 82 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual e Stacked RSS Expanded Stacked is an RSS Expanded multi row format It may be stacked in two to eleven rows ll RSS Expanded Stacked is used when the symbol area or print mechanism is not wide enough to accommodate the full single row symbol RSS Expanded Stacked You can use the Style property to specify which styl
385. r code set character is 1 emCodeB B None encountered 2 emCodeC C None 3 emCodeB_FNC1 B FNC1 4 emCodeC_FNC1 C FNC1 First character excepting the message append block if exists must be code set B character ASCII 32 ASCII 127 otherwise anOnInvalidChar or OnInvalidDataChar event will occur The code set will be automatically switched if another code set character is encountered First two characters excepting the message append block if exists must be code Double jeet B characters ASCII 32 ASCII 127 otherwise anOninvalidChar or SHIFT B OnInvalidDataChar event will occur The code set will be automatically switched if another code set character is encountered Extended Indicates to create a Code 16K barcode symbol in extended data length mode An 5 emCodeC_Shift1B C SHIFT B 6 emCodeC_Shift2B C data amilode Extended 8 None extended data length mode block is required and it should be placed at beginning length E of barcode text otherwiset the OnlnvalidChar or OnlInvalidDataChar event will mode occur See also the Extended data length mode section below The InitialMode property can be used to specify the initial mode for a Code 16K symbol It can be one of values shown in table above corresponding to the initial modes 0 to 6 and the extended data length mode Also it can be set to emAuto defined in the pfmxCode16K unit in this case one of values from emCodeA to emModeC_Shift2B c
386. r encoding scheme for example the ANSI UTF 16 please convert it in the OnEncode event handle or use the GetParity Syntax 2 overloading method and specify the converted bytes sequence in its Data parameter If you want to caculate the parity value of a block of binary bytes data please use the GetParity Syntax 2 overloading method See also the Barcode property article AllowEscape Boolean Specifies whether to allow users to insert the escape sequences to the Barcode parameter value in order to place the function characters and additional control information See also the Escape sequences section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode article and the AllowEscape property article Invalidindex Integer If there is any invalid character in the barcode text that is specified by the Barcode parameter the parameter returns the position index of first invalid character Otherwise it returns the Verify_OK 1 This method can return one of these values these consts are defined in the pfmxCore2D unit o Verify_Invalidindex_AfterBarcode 4 If you use the OnEncode event handle to encode the barcode text to a bytes sequence in your own encoding scheme the Verify_Invalidindex_AfterBarcode 4 indicats that an invalid byte value is in the suffix codes of the bytes sequence o Verify_Invalidindex_BeforeBarcode 3 If you use the OnEncode event handle to encode the barcode text to a bytes sequence in your own encoding scheme the Ve
387. r example the symbol size value azSize_19Compact denotations the Aztec Code symbol size is 19 rows by 19 columns in compact format These symbol size values are defined in the pfmxAztecCode unit The smallest symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between the minimum symbol size specified by this property and the maximum symbol size that s specified by the MaxSize property The CurrentSize property can be used to get the factual symbol size Note if the property is set to a value greater than the MaxSize property s value the MaxSize property will be automatically changed to equal to this property s value In other words the MinSize property s value is always less than or equal to the MaxSize property s value See also the Symbol sizes section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_AztecCode article A 1 87 MinSize TBarcodeFmx2D_DataMatrix Specifies the minimum symbol size for a Data Matrix ECC 000 140 barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxDataMatrix unit TDataMatrix Size dmSize 09 09 dmSize 11 11 dmSize 13 13 dmSize 15 15 dmSize 17 17 dmSize_ 19 19 dmSize 21 21 dmSize 23 23 dmSize_25 25 dmSize 27 27 dmSize_ 29 29 dmSize 31 31 dmSize 33 33 dmSize 35 35 dmSize 37 37 dmSize 39 39 dmSize 41 41 dmSize 43 43 dmSize 45 45 dmSize 47 47 dmSize 49 49 property MinSize TDataMatrix Size Description The property specifies the minimum symbol size for a Data Matrix ECC 0
388. r the RSS Expanded barcode symbols if the Style property is set to rsStacked Stacked style the property specifies the height of separator pattern row between symbol rows in modules See diagram ve RSS Expanded Stacked If an RSS barcode symbol including any style of RSS 14 RSS Limited or any style of RSS Expanded symbol is used together with an adjacent 2D symbol to create the EAN UCC Composite symbol itsLink2D property is set to true and the contiguous separator pattern is displayed its Show2DSeparator property is set to true the property specifies the height of contiguous separator pattern too in modules See diagram RSS 14 Standard RSS 14 Truncated RSS 14 Stacked RSS 14 Stacked Omnidirectional RSS Limited RSS Expanded RSS Expanded Stacked See also the Composite symbol section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_RSS14 TBarcodeFmx2D_RSSLimited and TBarcodeFmx2D_RSSExpanded articles A 1 111 SeparatorRowHeight TBarcodeFmx2D_RSSLimited Specify the height of contiguous separator pattern row between the linear and 2D symbols of an EAN UCC Composite symbol which use the RSS Limited symbol as its linear symbol in modules 163 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Syntax property SeparatorRowHeight Integer Description If an RSS Limited barcode symbol is used together with an adjacent 2D symbol to create the EAN UCC Composite symbol itsLink2D property is set to true and the contiguous separator p
389. r the TBarcodeFmx2D_RSS14 and the TBarcodeFmx2D_RSSLimited components if the property AutoCheckDigit is set to true the check digit doesn t need to be entered in the here otherwise the check digit can be specified by you in here 99 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual A 1 7 BarcodeHeight Specifies the distance between the top and bottom of a barcode symbol in pixels Syntax property BarcodeHeight Single Description Specifies the distance between the top and bottom of a barcode symbol in pixels If the quiet zones are drawn the ShowQuietZone property is set to true the top quiet zone and the bottom quiet zone are included See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones BarcodeHeight BarcodeHeight at BarcodeHeight BarcodeHeight 7 r y 1 ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Orientation boLeftRight Orientation boLeftRight Orientation boTopBottom Orientation boTopBottom The property is set using the following formula e When the property Stretch is set to false The BarcodeHeight property will be ignored and the height of barcode symbol will be calculated based on the Module property value You can get the height value by using the Size method e When the property Stretch is set to true o If the BarcodeHeight property value is equal to zero When the Orientation property is
390. r with the structured append block FNC2 2 it shall be placed on front of the structured append block 2 See also the Structured append section below 1 Insert a GS1 FNC1 character to barcode text in order to encode GS1 structural data It shall be placed at beginning of the barcode text and it shall not be used with AIM FNC1 OO or FNC3 3 If it is used together with the structured append block 2 it shall be placed on front of the structured append block FNC2 2 See also the Structured append section below 2 lt File_Id gt lt Amount gt lt Index gt Insert a structured append block FNC2 and other structured append information to the barcode text in order to create the symbol in a structured append See also the Structured append section below 3 Insert a FNC3 character to barcode text indicates that the symbol encodes a message used to program the reader system It shall be placed at beginning of the barcode text and it shall not be used with AIM FNC1 0 or GS1 FNC1 1 If it is used together with the structured append block FNC2 2 it shall be placed on front of the structured append block FNC2 2 See also the Structured append section below e lt ECI_Number gt Insert an ECI indicator block to barcode text See also the Extended Channel Interpretation ECI section below Extended Channel Interpretation ECH The Extended Channel Interpretation ECI protocol allows
391. rameter specifies the module width and height See diagram am m i o For the TBarcodeFmx2D_MaxiCode barcode symbology the module is single cell a regular hexagonal shape used to encode one bit data The parameter specifies the horizonal width of a module Also it s the center to center horizontal distance between adjacent modules See diagram o For the Stacked 2D barcode symbology and Linear 1D barcode symbology the module is the thinest bar or space in the barcode symbol The parameter specifies the module width See diagram ss pN Il If any one of the BarcodeWidth and BarcodeHeight parameters is provided and it isn t zero the value of Module parameter will be ignored the module size will be calculated based on the BarcodeWidth parameter value or the BarcodeHeight parmeter value If both BarcodeWidth and BarcodeHeight parameters are provided and aren t zero only the BarcodeWidth parameter value will be used to calculate the module size the BarcodeHeight parameter value will be ignored See also the Module property e Angle Single Specifies an angle in degrees to rotate the barcode symbol and its quiet zones if they are printed please read the ShowQuietZone parameter section above about whether or not the quiet zones will be printed anticlockwise It defaults to 0 if the parameter is not provided meaning left to right horizontal direction See diagram the SpaceColor parameter value is set
392. rcode FMX Components User Manual Properties Methods Events e Image e Create e OnChange e Barcode e Destroy e OnEncode e Data e Assign e ParseBarcodelndex e Module e Clear e OnlnvalidChar e BarColor e Draw e OnlnvalidLength e SpaceColor e Size e OnlnvalidDataChar e Opacity e DrawTo e OnlnvalidDataLength e Orientation e DrawToSize e OnDrawBarcode e Stretch e Print e LeftMargin e PrintSize e TopMargin e GetParity e BarcodeWidth e BarcodeHeight ShowQuietZone LeadingQuietZone TopQuietZone TrailingQuietZone BottomQuietZone EnableUpdateDB Locked Inversed Mirrored EncodePolicy MaxSliceLen MinVersion MaxVersion ECCLevel ECCLevelUpgrade AllowKanjiMode AllowEscape CurrentVersion Read only CurrentECCLevel Read only 4 1 14 TBarcodeFmx2D_RSS14 The component is used to create the RSS 14 Reduce Space Symbology barcode symbols including RSS 14 Standard RSS 14 Truncated RSS 14 Stacked and RSS 14 Stacked Omnidirectional It s defined in the pfmxRss14 unit RSS 14 is a continuous linear symbology capable encoding the full GS1 14 digit EAN UCC item identification number ll ll Global Trade Item Numbers GTINs The first digit represents the Indicator digit to indicate packaging level The 0120012345678909 RSS 14 Standard following twelve digits are the GS1 Company Prefix and the Item Reference The last digit represents the Check Digit A leading Application Identifier 01 is implied an
393. rcode symbol A 1 61 InitialMode 131 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K Specifies the initial mode for Code 16K barcode symbology Syntax type Defined in the pfmxCodel6K unit TCodel6K_ EncodeMode emAuto emModeA emModeB emModeC emModeB FNC1 emModeC_FNC1 emModeC_ Shift1B emModeC_ Shift2B emMode Extended property InitialMode TCodel6K_ EncodeMode Description The property specifies the initial mode for Code 16K barcode symbology The initial mode indicates the initial code set and may also represent an implied leading FNC1 character or implied leading SHIFT B character as shown in following table The code set will be automatically switched if a character is encountered that cannot be encoded by current code set And Implied characters function as if they were actual symbol characters but don not occupy any space There are seven kinds of initial mode from 0 to 6 and a kind of extended data length mode The initial mode values from emCodeA to emExtended corresponding to these modes are defined in the pfmxCode16K unit These modes and their values are listed in following table Initial deeg Value rore B i E Description 0 emCodeA A None The code set will be automatically switched if another code set character is 1 emCodeB B None encountered 2 emCodeC C None 3 emCodeB_FNC1 B FNC1 4 emCodeC_FNC1 C FNC1 First character excepting the message appe
394. re provided and aren t zero only the BarcodeWidth parameter value will be used to calculate the module size the BarcodeHeight parameter value will be ignored See also the Module property Angle Single Specifies an angle in degrees to rotate the barcode symbol and its quiet zones if they are printed please read the ShowQuietZone parameter section above about whether or not the quiet zones will be printed anticlockwise It defaults to 0 if the parameter is not provided meaning left to right horizontal direction See diagram the quiet zones are printed in claSilver color in order to accentuate them ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True BarcodeWidth Single Specifies the barcode symbol width the distance between the beginning and end of the barcode symbol in millimeters If the quiet zones are printed please read the ShowQuietZone parameter section above about whether or not the quiet zones will be printed the leading quiet zone and the trailing quiet zone are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the quiet zones are printed in claSilver color in order to accentuate them mn AA Eent amp ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 BarcodeWidth For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode component the leading quiet zone and the trailing quiet zone are included always even if the ShowQuietZone parameter section above is set to false See diagram the qui
395. reating more robust symbols Note the new level is always no lower than the level specified by this property and the symbol size will not be increased it may be determined depending on the length of barcode text and the error correction code level specified by this property In other words only the remaining capacity in current symbol size will be used to upgrade the error correction code level The CurrentECCLevel property can always be used to get the factual error correction code level See also the Error checking and correcting ECC section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_DataMatrix article A 1 43 ECCLevel TBarcodeFmx2D_GridMatrix Specifies which ECC level error correction code level will be used to increase strength of a Grid Matrix barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxGridMatrix unit TGridMatrix EccLevel elLevel Recommend elLevel 1 elLevel 2 elLevel 3 elLevel 4 elLevel_ 5 elLevel_ LowestRecommend property ECCLevel TGridMatrix EccLevel Description The Grid Matrix symbology offers five levels of error correction from 1 to 5 respectively in increasing order of recovery capacity The property specifies which ECC level error correction code level will be used to increase strength of aGrid Matrix barcode symbol It can be one of these values defined in the pfmxGridMatrix unit e elLevel_1 Indicates to use the ECC level 1 The percentage of total capacity for ECC data is 10 Note it is inapplica
396. red is placed at beginnig of barcode text the 905 will be selected to encode the FNC1 character in order to reduce the symbol size the leading Application Identifier 01 is not encoded in the SSC 14 number s lt Index gt lt File_ID gt lt File_Name gt lt Amount gt lt Time_Stamp gt lt Sender gt lt Address gt lt File_Size gt lt Checksum gt Insert structured append control block to barcode text in order to create the structured append symbol See also the Structured append section below Insert a comma to File name Sender or Address field in the structured append control block It shall only be placed in these fields of structured append control See also the Structured append section below t Structured append terminator If the segment count is unused in the structured append control block of a structured append symbols set this terminator is required in last symbol within the set of the structured append symbols Otherwise it s optional See also the Structured append section below e lt nnn gt Insert a function codeword This lt nnn gt can be one of these values o 900 Manually places a mode latch to Text compaction mode o 901 Manually places a mode latch to Byte compaction mode It shall be used when the total number of subsequent bytes to be encoded is not a multiple of 6 otherwise it will be changed to 924 automatically by the component o 902 Manually places a mode latc
397. remaining data capacity of the symbol will be filled by using PAD characters If the barcode text is so long that it cannot be encoded using the maximum symbol size specified by the MaxVersion property an OnInvalidLength or OnInvalidDataLength event will occur Quiet zones The minimum quiet zone is equal to 2 modules on all four sides So the minimum values of LeadingQuietZone TrailingQuietZone TopQuietZone and BottomQuietZone properties are equal to 2 Character set All 8 bit values can be encoded The default interpretation shall be e For values 0 to 127 in accordance with the U S national version of ISO IEC 646 ASCII e For values 128 255 in accordance with ISO IEC 8859 1 Extended ASCII Encoding modes 60 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Micro QR Code has four encoding modes as Numeric mode Alphanumeric mode Kanji mode and Byte mode respectively in decreasing order of encoding density All 256 8 bits value are encoded by switching automatically between all 4 the AllowKanjiMode property is set to true or 3 the Kanji mode will not be used if the AllowKanjiMode property is set to false encoding modes The character sets in each mode are listed in the following e Numeric mode Encodes data from the decimal digit set 0 to 9 byte values 48 to 57 e Alphanumeric mode Encodes data from a set of 45 characters i e 10 numeric digits 0 to 9 byte values 48 to 57 26 alphabetic characters A Z byte valu
398. resolution if one of HDPI and VDPI parameters is set to 0 If both HDPI and VDP parameters are set to 0 or both HDPI and VDP parameters are not set to 0 the parameter will be ignored in this case you can set it to nil HDPI Integer Specifies the horizontal resolution of canvas in DPI It s the number of dots or pixels per inch It defaults to 0 if the HDPI is not provided and the physical horizontal resolution obtained from the Canvas parameter will be used If both HDPI and VDPI are set to 0 it indicates the horizontal resolution is equal to the vertical resolution VDPI Integer Specifies the vertical resolution of canvas in DPI It s the number of dots or pixels per inch It defaults to 0 if the VDPI is not provided and the physical vertical resolution obtained from the Canvas parameter will be used If both VDPI and HDPI are set to 0 it indicates the vertical resolution is equal to the horizontal resolution Return This method can return one of these values these consts are defined in the pfmxCore2D unit e Verify_InvalidLength 2 It indicates that the length of Data parameter value is invalid e Verify_OK 1 It indicates the method succeeds e Verify_Invalidindex_Base 0 and greater than 0 It indicates that an invalid byte value is in the Data parameter the return value is the position index of the invalid byte value The index 0 denotes that the first byte value is invalid B 1 8 GetCheckSum TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroPDF
399. rify_InvalidiIndex_BeforeBarcode 3 indicats that an invalid byte value is in the prefix codes of the bytes sequence for example the BOM o Verify_OK 1 It indicates the method succeeds o Verify_Invalidindex_Base 0 and greater than 0 It indicates that an invalid character is in the barcode text the return value is the position index of the invalid charactere For 32 bit Windows 64 bit Windows and Mac OSX platform the index 1 denotes that the first character is invalid character For iOS and Android platform the index 0 denotes that the first character is invalid character Return If the method succeeds it returns the parity value it s an 8 bit byte value and the Invalidindex parameter returns Verify_OK 1 If the method fails the Invalidindex parameter returns a position index of first invalid character in the Barcode parameter See also the Invalidindex parameter section above See also the Structured append section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode article B 1 10 2 GetParity Syntax 2 TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode Returns the parity value of a barcode text that will be encoded into a series of structured append symbols Syntax function GetParity Data TBytes AllowEscape Boolean var InvalidIndex Integer Byte virtual 222 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Description The method returns the parity value of a barcode text that will be encoded into a series of structured append symbols
400. rintSize Syntax 1 DrawTo Syntax 2 DrawToSize Syntax 2 Print Syntax 2 PrintSize Syntax 2 GetParity Syntax 1 only for TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode GetCheckSum Syntax 1 only for TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 GetCheckSum Syntax 1 only for TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroPDF417 By default the barcode text in string will be encoded in the UTF 8 encoding scheme before generate the barcode symbol the BOM isn t included The method is useful if you want to encode the barcode text in your own encoding scheme See also the How to encode the UNICODE text in a 2D barcode symbol article Syntax type Defined in the pfmxCore2D unit TOnEncode procedure Sender TObject var Data TBytes Barcode string of object 261 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual property OnEncode TOnEncode Parameters e Sender TObject It is the object whose event handler is called e Data TBytes The barcode text that s encoded by your own encoding scheme should be returned in this parameter The initial value is the UTF 8 bytes sequence converted from the Barcode parameter below e Barcode String It is the barcode text in string type it s an UnicodeString Its value is equal to the Barcode property if the Clear Draw Size DrawTo syntax 1 DrawToSize syntax 1 Print syntax 1 or PrintSize syntax 1 method is called or a component is updating its barcode symbol And the value of the parameter is equal to the Barcode parameter if the DrawTo sy
401. rix symbology offers eight levels of error correction from 1 to 8 respectively in increasing order of recovery capacity The property specifies which ECC level error correction code level will be used to increase strength of aCompact Matrix barcode symbol It can be one of values from 1 to 8 corresponding to the ECC levels from 1 to 8 If the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to true the highest error correction code level that can be accommodated by current symbol size will by used for creating more robust symbols Note the new level is always no lower than the level specified by this property and the symbol size will not be increased it may be determined depending on the length of barcode text and the error correction code level specified by this property In other words only the remaining capacity in current symbol size will be used to upgrade the error correction code level The CurrentECCLevel property can always be used to get the factual error correction code level See also the Error checking and correcting ECC section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_CompactMatrix article A 1 42 ECCLevel TBarcodeFmx2D_DataMatrix Specifies which ECC level error correction code level will be used to increase strength of aData Matrix ECC 000 140 barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxDataMatrix unit TDataMatrix ECCLevel dmECCO00 dmECCO50 dmECCO80 dmECC100 dmECC140 property ECCLevel TDataMatrix ECCLevel Descriptio
402. rizontal width and vertical height of the rotated barcode symbol that is specified by the parameters of this method The barcode text is specified in the Data parameter It is of type TBytes it is in fact a byte array You can use the method if you want to encode a block of binary bytes data into a barcode symbol B 1 12 1 PrintSize Syntax 1 Returns actual horizontal width and vertical height of a rotated barcode symbol in millimeters The barcode symbol is specified by the 237 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual properties of this barcode component Syntax function PrintSize var Width Height SymbolWidth SymbolHeight Single Module Single Angle Single 1 BarcodeWidth Single 0 BarcodeHeight Single 0 HDPI Integer 0 VDPI Integer 0 Integer overload virtual Description The method returns the actual horizontal width and vertical height of a rotated barcode symbol that is specified by properties of this barcode component in millimeters Please use the method between the Printer BeginDoc and Printer EndDoc methods if the HDPI or VDP parameter is set to 0 Parameters e Width Single Returns the horizontal width of the rotated barcode symbol in millimeters The value is calculated based on the module size You can use one of the Module BarcodeWidth and BarcodeHeight parameters to specify the module size If the quiet zones are printed please read the ShowQuietZone property about whether or
403. rk modules If the Inversed property is set to true you can use the alpha channel of the BarColor property value to specify the transparency level of bakcground color spaces or light modules and quiet zones and use the alphachannel of the SpaceColor property value to specify the transparency level of fore ground color bars or dark modules A 1 99 Options TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroPDF417 The Options property is an advanced feature which allows low level control over data encoding for a MicroPDF417 symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxPDF417Com unit TPDF417 Option poIgnoreShiftBeforeECI poFirst903TextAlphaLatch poFirst904TextMixedLatch 155 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual po906TextAlphaLatch po907TextAlphaLatch po908TextAlphaLatch po910TextAlphaLatch po912TextAlphaLatch po914TextAlphaLatch po915TextAlphaLatch poFirstFNC1MatchAI01 poMicroPDF417Explicit901 Defined in the pfmxPDF417Com unit TPDF417 Options set of TPDF417 Option Defined in the pfmxMicroPDF417 unit TMicroPDF417 Options TPDF417 Options property Options TMicroPDF417 Options Description For some reader the encoding algorithm and meanings of some function codewords don t conform with the MicroPDF417 specification The property can be used to change the encoding algorithm and meanings of these fucntion codewords in order to match the reader The following list describes the values that can be included in the Opt
404. robust symbols Note the new level is always no lower than the level specified by the ECCLevel property and the symbol size will not be increased The CurrentECCLevel property can be used to get the factual error correction code level If the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to false the error correction code level specified by the ECCLevel property will be used always The value of CurrentECCLevel property is always equal to the value of ECCLevel property See also the Error checking and correcting ECC section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroQRCode article A 1 53 ECCLevelUpgrade TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 For aPDF417 barcode symbol the property specifies whether to use the remaining capacity to automatically upgrade the error correction code level in order to increase symbols strength Syntax property ECCLevelUpgrade Boolean Description For aPDF417 barcode symbol the symbol size may be determined depending on the barcode text length and the error correction code level specified by the ECCLevel property And the barcode text and the error correction code don t usually fill the maximum data capacity of the symbol the property specifies whether to use the remaining capacity to automatically upgrade the error correction code level in order to increase symbols strength If the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to true the highest error correction code level that can be accommodated by current symbol size will by used for creating more robus
405. roperty If the quiet zones are displayed the ShowQuietZone property is set to true they are included in the barcode symbol and will be erased too For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode components the leading quiet zone and trailing quiet zone are included always even if the ShowQuietZone property is set to false Parameters e UseSpaceColor Boolean Specifies whether the space color that s specified by the SpaceColor property is used to erase the barcode symbol If it s set to false the current brush color of the Tlmage control will be used If the parameter isn t provided it s default to false Return e f the method succeeds the return value is true e If you use the Barcode property to specify the barcode text when the length of Barcode property value is invalid or there is any invalid character in the Barcode property value the return value is false Corresponding to the OninvalidLength event or the OnInvalidChar event will occur If you use the Data property to specify the barcode text when the length of Data property value is invalid or there is any invalid byte value in the Data property value the return value is false Corresponding to the OnInvalidDataLength event or the OnInvalidDataChar event will occur B 1 3 Create Creates and initializes a barcode component Syntax constructor Create Owner TComponent override Description Call the Create method to instantiate a barcode object at runtime Barcode c
406. rrentECCLevel property can always be used to get the factual error correction code level See also the Error checking and correcting ECC section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_GridMatrix article A 1 44 ECCLevel TBarcodeFmx2D_HanXinCode Specifies which ECC level error correction code level will be used to increase strength of a Han Xin Code barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxHanXinCode unit THanXinCode EccLevel elLevel 1 elLevel 2 elLevel 3 elLevel 4 property ECCLevel THanXinCode_ EccLevel Description The Han Xin Code symbology offers four levels of error correction from L1 to L4 respectively in increasing order of recovery capacity The property specifies which ECC level error correction code level will be used to increase strength of aHan Xin Code barcode symbol It can be one of these values defined in the pfmxHanXinCode unit e elLevel_1 Indicates to use the ECC level L1 The recevory capacities approx is 8 elLevel_2 Indicates to use the ECC level L2 The recevory capacities approx is 15 e elLevel_3 Indicates to use the ECC level L3 The recevory capacities approx is 23 elLevel_4 Indicates to use the ECC level L4 The recevory capacities approx is 30 If the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to true the highest error correction code level that can be accommodated by current symbol size will by used for creating more robust symbols Note the new level is always no lower than
407. rs e Canvas TCanvas Specifies target canvas to draw the barcode symbol on it e Barcode String Specifies the barcode text It is of type string and it is in fact an UnicodeString By default the unicode string will be converted to an UTF 8 bytes sequence the BOM isn t included then be encoded into the barcode symbol If you want to use other encoding scheme for example the ANSI UTF 16 please convert it in theOnEncode event handle or use the DrawTo Syntax 3 overloading method and specify the converted bytes sequence in its Data parameter If you want to encode a block of binary bytes data please use the DrawTo Syntax 3 overloading method For the TBarcodeFmx2D_RSS14 and TBarcodeFmx2D_RSSLimited components if the property AutoCheckDigit is set to true the check digit doesn t need to be included in the parameter otherwise the check digit can be specified by you in the parameter See also the Barcode and Data properties BarColor TAlphaColor In general the Inversed property is set to false In this case the parameters specifies the color for all bars Stacked 2D barcode symbology and Linear 1D barcode symbology or dark modules Matrix 2D barcode symbology in the barcode symbol If the Inversed property is set to true it specifies the color for all spaces Stacked 2D barcode symbology and Linear 1D barcode symbology or light modules Matrix 2D barcode symbology in the barcode symbol Also if the ShowQuietZone parame
408. rty in this case the barcode text cannot always be accommodated an OnlInvalidLength the barcode text is specified in the Barcode property or OnInvalidDataLength the barcode text is specified in the Data property event will occur soFixAspect An overall aspect ratio is specified by the minimum version specified by the MinVersion property and minumum number of segments specified by the MinSegments property the ratio is height to width of the symbol excluding quiet zones Between the minimum symbol size specified by the MinVersion and MinSegments properties and the maximum symbol size specified by the MaxVersion and MaxSegments properties only symbol sizes that they approximately match the aspect ratio will be used According to the data capacity in increasing order of recovery capacity the smallest symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected If the barcode text cannot be accommodated by the maximum symbol size specified by the MaxVersion and MaxSegments properties an OnlInvalidLength the barcode text is specified in the Barcode property or OnInvalidDataLength the barcode text is specified in the Data property event will occur e soFixAspectWithQuietZones An overall aspect ratio is specified by the minimum version specified by the MinVersion property and minumum number of segments specified by the MinSegments property the ratio is height to width of the symbol including quiet zones Between th
409. ructured append in unbuffered mode The ECI protocol provides a consistent method to specify particular interpretations on byte values before printing and after decoding The ECI is identified by an integer up to 6 digits which is encoded in the Aztec Code symbol by the ECI indicator block The escape sequence e lt ECI_Number gt is used to place the ECI indicator block to the barcode text e EC Number The ECI number it s an integer between 0 and 999999 including the boundaries the leading zero is optional ECI indicator blocks may be placed anywhere in the barcode text in a single or structured append set of Aztec Code symbols For example ABC e 123 DEFabc e 000003 def The AllowEscape property should be set to true in order to place the ECI indicator blocks Any ECI invoked shall apply until the end of the barcode text or until another ECI indicator block is encountered Thus the interpretation of the ECI may straddle two or more symbols Structured append In order to fit a non square area or to handle larger messages than are practical in a single symbol a data message can be distributed across several Aztec Code symbols Up to 26 Aztec Code symbols may be appended in a structured format to convey more data If a symbol is part of a structured append this shall be indicated by a structured append block in barcode text The escape sequence s lt Index gt lt Amount gt lt Message_ ID gt is used to place the structured app
410. rue following escape sequences are supported by the component you can insert them to the barcode text e Insert a backslash to barcode text e f Insert a FNC1 character to barcode text See also the Character set section above e e lt ECI_Number gt Insert an ECI indicator block to barcode text See also the Extended Channel Interpretation ECI section below s lt Index gt lt Amount gt lt Message_ID gt Insert a structured append block to barcode text in order to create the symbol in a structured append See also the Structured append section below e p Indicates to create a reader initialization symbol It can be placed anywhere in the barcode text Only the azSize_15Compact azSize_19 azSize_23 azSize_27 and full range symbol sizes from azSize_31 to azSize_109 are useful for reader initialization symbol so the SymbolMode property should be set to smProgram in order to create the reader initialization symbol Extended Channel Interpretation ECH The Extended Channel Interpretation ECI protocol allows the output data stream to have interpretations different from that of the default character set Four broad types of interpretations are supported in Aztec Code e International character sets or code pages e General purpose interpretations such as encryption and compaction 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual e User defined interpretations for closed systems e Control information for st
411. s There are 32 vertical sizes of Compact Matrix symbol referred to as version 1 to 32 in increasing order of symbol height and data 27 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual capacity In horizontal orientation each Compact Matrix symbol consists of an array of segments with a minimum of 1 segment maximum 32 segments You can use the MinVersion and the MaxVersion properties to specifiy the minimum and maximum version for a Compact Matrix symbol And use the MinSegments and the MaxSegments properties to specifiy the minimum and maximum number of segments for it In other words the MinVersion and MinSegments properties specify a minimum symbol size and the MaxVersion and MaxSegments properties specify a maximum symbol size According to the priority order specified by the StretchOrder property the first symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between the minimum symbol size and the maximum symbol size You can use the CurrentVersion property to get the factual version And use the CurrentSegments property to get the factual number of segments If the barcode text does not fill the maximum data capacity of the Compact Matrix symbol remaining data capacity of the symbol will be filled by using pad bits the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to false or will be used to upgrade the error correction code level the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to true If the barcode text is so long that it cannot be
412. s data please use the GetCheckSum Syntax 2 overloading method See also the Barcode property article AllowEscape Boolean Specifies whether to allow users to insert the escape sequences to the Barcode parameter value in order to place the function characters and additional control information See also the Escape sequences section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroPDF 417 article and the AllowEscape property article Invalidindex Integer If there is any invalid character in the barcode text that is specified by the Barcode parameter the parameter returns the position index of first invalid character Otherwise it returns the Verify_OK 1 This method can return one of these values these consts are defined in the pfmxCore2D unit o Verify_Invalidindex_AfterBarcode 4 If you use the OnEncode event handle to encode the barcode text to a bytes sequence in your own encoding scheme the Verify_Invalidindex_AfterBarcode 4 indicats that an invalid byte value is in the suffix codes of the bytes sequence o Verify_Invalidindex_BeforeBarcode 3 If you use the OnEncode event handle to encode the barcode text to a bytes sequence in your own encoding scheme the Verify_InvalidiIndex_BeforeBarcode 3 indicats that an invalid byte value is in the prefix codes of the bytes sequence for example the BOM 218 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual o Verify_OK 1 It indicates the method succeeds o Verify_Invalidindex_B
413. s section below In other words only the remaining capacity in current symbol size will be used to upgrade the error correction code level The property CurrentECCLevel can be used to get the factual error correction code level Note for version 1 Micro QR Code symbols the error checking and correcting capacity is limited to error detection only See also the Symbol sizes section below Symbol sizes There are four sizes of Micro QR Code symbol referred to as version 1 to 4 in increasing order of data capacity You can use the MinVersion and the MaxVersion properties to specifiy the minimum and maximum sizes for a Micro QR Code symbol They can be one of values from 1 to 4 defined in the pfmxMicroQRCode unit corresponding to the versions 1 to 4 The smallest symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between minimum and maximum symbol sizes The CurrentVersion property can be used to get the factual symbol size The symbol sizes and the maximum data capacity of each version are listed in following table Data capacities Version Symbol size modules ECC level p Numeric mode Alphanumeric mode Byte mode Kanji mode 1 11 11 L 5 S z 2 13 13 L 1 S M 8 5 S z S L 23 14 9 6 3 15519 M 18 11 7 4 L 35 21 15 9 4 17 17 M 30 18 13 8 Q 21 13 9 5 If the barcode text does not fill the maximum data capacity of the Micro QR Code symbol
414. s are obtained using a reflected optical path a reversed scan direction or from behind through a clear substrate you can set the Mirror property to true so that the barcode symbols are easily autodiscriminated and decode with a standard reader See diagram EYE Ge Mirrored False Mirrored True If the leading trailing top and bottom quiet zones are displayed the ShowQuietZone property is set to true they will not be included in the barcode symbol and will not be reversed See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones og Erop Mirrored False Mirrored True LeadingQuietZone 8 TrailingQuietZone 4 If the barcode symbol is drawn using non left to right orientation the Orienation property isn t equal to boLeftRight or the angle parameter isn t equal to zero degree in the DrawTo or the Print methods the left to right reversal operation will be performed firstly then the rotation operation See diagram D m mum g KE Mirrored False Mirrored True Mirrored False Mirrored True Orientation boBottomToTop AAngle 30 A 1 96 Mode TBarcodeFmx2D_MaxiCode Specifies which mode of MaxiCode symbol will be used to generate the MaxiCode barcode symbol Syntax 153 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual type Defined in the pfmxMaxiCode unit TMaxiCode Mode 2 6 property Mode TMaxiCode Mode Description The property specifies w
415. s not provided and the horizontal resolution will be obtained from your printer VDPI Integer Specifies the vertical resolution of printer in DPI dots per inch It defaults to 0 if the VDPI is not provided and the vertical resolution will be obtained from your printer Return This method can return one of these values these consts are defined in the pfmxCore2D unit e Verify_Invalidindex_AfterBarcode 4 If you use the Barcode property to specify the barcode text and use the OnEncode event handle to encode the barcode text to a bytes sequence in your own encoding scheme the Verify_InvalidIndex_AfterBarcode 4 indicats that an invalid byte value is in the suffix codes of the bytes sequence e Verify_Invalidindex_BeforeBarcode 3 If you use the Barcode property to specify the barcode text and use the OnEncode event handle to encode the barcode text to a 241 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual bytes sequence in your own encoding scheme the Verify_InvalidIndex_BeforeBarcode 3 indicats that an invalid byte value is in the prefix codes of the bytes sequence for example the BOM Verify_InvalidLength 2 If you use the Barcode property to specify the barcode text it indicates that the length of Barcode property value is invalid also the OnInvalidLength event will occur If you use the Data property to specify the barcode text it indicates that the length of Data property value is invalid also the OnInvalidD
416. s or in any way compete with our software products o Limitations on Reverse Engineering Decompilation and Disassembly You may not reverse engineer decompile or disassemble the SOFTWARE PRODUCT except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation o Separation of Components The SOFTWARE PRODUCT is licensed as a single product Its components parts may not be separated for use on more than one computer Software Transfer o You may permanently transfer all of your rights under this EULA provided the recipient agrees to the terms of this EULA Termination o Without prejudice to any other rights the Author of this Software may terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with the terms and conditions of this EULA In such event you must destroy all copies of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT and all of its components parts 95 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual o Distribution The SOFTWARE PRODUCT may not be sold or be included in a product or package which intends to receive benefits through the inclusion of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT The registered SOFTWARE PRODUCT may not be included in any frer or non profit packages or products 3 COPYRIGHT All title and copyrights in and to the SOFTWARE PRODUCT including but not limited to any images photographs animations video audio music text and applets incorporated into the SOFTWARE PRODUCT th
417. s represented its height is included in the property value Quiet zones No quiet zones is required outside the bounds of the RSS Limited symbol The first and last elements may appear wider than one module without affecting the symbol if the adjacent background area is the same color So the minimum values of LeadingQuietZone TrailingQuietZone TopQuietZone and BottomQuietZone properties are equal to 0 Character set e All 10 numeric characters i e 0 through 9 Check digit The RSS Limited symbols have a check digit it is a form of redundancy check used for error detection It consists of a single numeric character computed from the other character in the EAN UCC item identification number If the AutoCheckDigit property is set to false the check digit shall be included in the barcode text Otherwise It wii be appended automatically by the component so the check digit isn t required in the barcode text Data capactiy The RSS Limited symbology encodes the entire GS1 14 digit EAN UCC item identification number Global Trade Item Numbers GTINs set with Indicator digits 1 and O in a symbol including a leading indicator digit only O and 1 12 data characters GS1 Company Prefix and the Item Reference and a Check digit Note A leading Application Identifier 01 is implied and is not encoded in the symbol so it isn t required in the barcode text Note First numeric character is the Indicator digit in the barcode text only 1 and 0
418. scription In an environment where space considerations are a primary concern and symbol damage is unlikely e g an office the right row indicators of a PDF417 symbol may be omitted and the stop pattern may be reduced to one module width bar This reduction version is called Compact PDF417 which is fully decoder compatible with standard PDF417 The property specifiies whether the PDF417 barcode symbol is generated in Compact PDF417 format See diagram se cl Compact PDF4 Note the Compact PDF 417 was referred as Truncated PDF417 in previous standard See also the Compact PDF417 section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 article 104 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual A 1 13 CurrentColumns TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 Contains the factual number of columns of a PDF417 barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxPDF417Custom unit TPDF417_Columns 1 30 property CurrentColumns TPDF417 Columns Description The minimum number of columns specified by the MinColumns property and the minimum number of rows specified by the MinRows property indicate the minimum symbol size for a PDF417 barcode symbol The maximum number of columns specified by the MaxColumns property and the maximum number of rows specified by the MaxRows property indicate the maximum symbol size for the PDF417 barcode symbol Based on the stretch order specified by the StretchOrder property the smallest symbol size that accommodates the bar
419. se the t instead of the EOT character For example Date 96 Postal code ABC12 Country code 840 Service class 001 Secondary message PA USA Chr 29 UPS 123 gt Chr 30 01 Chr 29 96ABC12 Chr 29 840 Chr 29 001 Chr 29 PA USA Chr 29 UPS 123 Chr 30 Chr 4 m gt xr01 g96ABC12 g840 g001 gPA USA gUPS 123 r t o PPPPPP GS CCC GS SSS GS MESSAGE EOT PPPPPP Alphanumeric postal code up to 6 alphanumeric characters Only first 6 characters will be encoded if its length is greater than 6 characters All upper case letters all numeric characters space character and the punctuations and symbols corresponding to the ASCII values from 34 to 58 can be encoded CCC Country code 3 digits SSS Serivce class 3 digits 47 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual MESSAGE Optional secondary message All 256 of the ASCII characters can be used A maximum of about 82 alphanumeric characters or about 121 digits can be encoded in the message GS ASCII character GS ASCII value 29 It s used to delimit each field in barcode text The GS character after the service class can be omitted if secondary message doesn t exist If the AllowEscape property is set to true you can use the g instead of the GS character EOT Optional ASCII character EOT ASCII value 4 If the llowEscape property is set to true you can use the t instead of the EOT character
420. sequence Verify_Invalidindex_BeforeBarcode 3 If you use the OnEncode event handle to encode the barcode text to a bytes sequence in your own encoding scheme the Verify_InvalidIndex_BeforeBarcode 3 indicats that an invalid byte value is in the prefix codes of the bytes sequence for example the BOM Verify_InvalidLength 2 It indicates that the length of Barcode parameter value is invalid e Verify_OK 1 It indicates the method succeeds Verify_Invalidindex_Base 0 and greater than 0 It indicates that an invalid character is in the barcode text the return value is the position index of the invalid charactere For 32 bit Windows 64 bit Windows and Mac OSX platform the index 1 denotes that the first character is invalid character For iOS and Android platform the index 0 denotes that the first character is invalid character Note Pelase use the method between Printer BeginDoc and Printer EndDoc methods For example Printer ActivePrinter SelectDPI 600 600 Printer BeginDoc Print other content 3 Barcode QRCodel Print Print the barcode symbol Print other content Printer EndDoc 232 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual B 1 11 3 Print Syntax 3 Prints a barcode symbol to printer The barcode symbol is specified by the parameters of this method Please use the method between the Printer BeginDoc and Printer EndDoc methods Syntax function Print Data TBytes Bar
421. set to boLeftRight or boRightLeft the TopMargin property value will be subtracted from the height of the Tlmage control that s specified by the Image property then the result will be used as the final barcode height the barcode symbol will be reduced stretched to fit this final height value See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones Timage TQRImage Timage TQRImage TopMargin BarcodeHteight 0 BarcodeHeight 0 CET Hei ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True TopMargin When the Orientation property is set to boTopBottom or boBottomTop the LeftMargin property value will be subtracted from the width of the Tilmage control that s specified by the Image property then the result will be used as the final barcode height the barcode symbol will be reduced stretched to fit this final height value See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones Timage TQRImage Timage TQRImage BarcodeHeight 0 BarcodeHeight 0 Reel ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True o If the BarcodeHeight property value is greater than zero The barcode symbol will be reduced stretched to fit this height value See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to 100 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones Barco
422. sizes section above In other words only the remaining capacity in current symbol size will be used to upgrade the error correction code level The property CurrentECCLevel can be used to get the factual error correction code level Quiet zones The minimum quiet zone is equal to 6 modules on all four sides So the minimum values of LeadingQuietZone TrailingQuietZone 40 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual TopQuietZone and BottomQuietZone properties are equal to 6 Character set e All 7 bit ASCII values can be encoded e 8 bit binary data can be encoded e GB 18030 Chinese characters can be encoded e Five non data characters can be encoded AIM FNCt It identifies symbols formatted in accordance with specific industry or application specifications previously agreed with AIM International It is immediately followed by an application indicator assigned to identify the specification concerned by AIM International For this purpose it shall only be used once in a symbol and shall be placed at beginning of the barcode The escape sequence 0 can be used to placed the FNC1 character to barcode text o o GS1 FNCt It identifies symbols encoding data formatted according to the GS1 Application Identifiers standard For this purpose it shall only be used once in a symbol and shall be placed at beginning of the barcode text The escape sequence i can be used to placed the GS1 FNC1 character to barcode text o FNC2 The
423. so the Symbol size and Composite symbol sections in the TBarcodeFmx2D_RSS14 and TBarcodeFmx2D_RSSLimited articles A 1 1 Specifie Syntax 28 TrailingQuietZone e the horizontal width of the trailing quiet zone in modules property TrailingQuietZone Integer Description Specifies the horizontal width of the trailing quiet zone in modules The quiet zone is drawn using the color specified by the Space olor property if the Inversed property is set to false Otherwise it s drawn using the color specified by the BarColor property 178 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones i auon ndbures bi met en Orientation boLeftRight Orientation boRightLeft Orientation boTopBottom Orientation boBottomTop suo TainOBuyjpesy This property is useful only when the ShowQuietZone property value is set to true or the barcode symbology is a TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K symbol For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode component the trailing quiet zone is drawn always even if the ShowQuietZone property value is set to false See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones TrailingQuietZone A 1 129 UseECIDescriptor TBarcodeFmx2D_MicorPDF417 Specifies whether to use the optional ECI Descriptor in aMicroPDF41
424. ss fields all upper case letters all numeric characters space character and punctuations and symbols corresponding to the ASCII values from 34 to 58 can be encoded in the postal code field All 256 of the ASCII characters can be encoded in the secondary message In mode 4 5 and 6 All 256 of the ASCII characters can be encoded in the entire message The default interpretation of these characters shall be e Values 0 127 in accordance with ANSI X3 4 i e all 128 ASCII characters e values 128 255 in accordance with ISO 8859 1 Latin Alphabet No 1 i e extended ASCII characters This default interpretation corresponds to ECI 000003 Escape sequences If the AllowEscape property is set to true following escape sequences are supported by the component you can insert them to the barcode text e Insert a backslash to barcode text e f Insert a FS character ASCII value 28 to barcode text See also the Modes section above e g Insert a GS character ASCII value 29 to barcode text See also the Modes section above e r Insert a RS character ASCII value 30 to barcode text See also the Modes section above e t Insert a EOT character ASCII value 4 to barcode text See also the Modes section above e e lt ECI_Number gt Insert an ECI indicator block to barcode text See also the Extended Channel Interpretation ECI section below e s lt Index gt lt Amount gt Insert a structured append block to barcode t
425. stores 8 pixels per 1 byte Each pixel is an 1 bit index into a table of up to 2 colors bcdColors_02b Uses the 2 bit per pixel 2bpp format It supports 4 distinct colors and stores 4 pixels per 1 byte Each pixel value is a 2 bit index into a table of up to 4 colors bcdColors_04b Uses the 4 bit per pixel 4bpp format It supports 16 distinct colors and stores 2 pixels per 1 byte Each pixel value is a 4 bit index into a table of up to 16 colors bcdColors_08b Uses the 8 bit per pixel 8bpp format It supports 256 distinct colors and stores 1 pixel per 1 byte Each byte is an index into a table of up to 256 colors bcdColors_12b Uses the 12 bit per pixel 12bpp format It supports 4096 distinct colors and stores 1 pixel per 2 byte Each pixel value define the red green and blue samples of the pixel uses 4 bits for each color primary with 4 bits left over bedColors_15b Uses the 15 bit per pixel 15bpp format It supports 32768 distinct colors and stores 1 pixel per 2 byte Each pixel value define the red green and blue samples of the pixel uses 5 bits for each color primary with one bit left over bedColors_16b Uses the 16 bit per pixel 16bpp format It supports 65536 distinct colors and stores 1 pixel per 2 byte Each pixel value define the red green and blue samples of the pixel uses 5 bits for red and blue colors 6 bits for green color bedColors_24b Uses the 24 bit per pixel 24bpp format It supports 16777216 distinct c
426. structured format to convey more data If a symbol is part of a structured append this shall be indicated by a structured append block in barcode text The escape sequence 2 lt File_Id gt lt Amount gt lt Index gt is used to place the structured append block to the barcode text e File_Id The file identification It s an integer between 0 and 255 including the boundaries in string format The purpose of the file identification is to increase the probability that only logically linked symbols are processed as part of the same message e Amount The total amount of the symbol within the set of Grid Matrix symbols in the structured append format It s an integer between 1 and 16 including the boundaries in string format e Index The position index of the symbol within the set of Grid Matrix symbols in the structured append format It s an integer between 1 and 16 including the boundaries in string format The AllowEscape property should be set to true in order to place the structured append block The structured append block may only be placed once in the barcode text If the structured append block is used together with AIM FNC1 10 GS1 FNC1 1 or FNC3 3 the AIM FNC1 0 GS1 FNC1 1 or FNC3 3 shall be placed at beginning of the barcode text then the structured append block Otherwise the structured append block shall be placed at beginning of the barcode text The OnlInvalidChar or OnlInvalidDataChar ev
427. symbol It can be one of values dsSquare anddsRectangle corresponding to the shapes square and rectangle These values are defined in the pfmxDataMatrixEcc200 unit e Rectangle Indicates to generate the rectangle symbols Symbol sizes Data Matrix ECC 200 symbols have an even number of rows and an even number of columns The sizes of the square symbols are from 10 10 to 144 144 modules not including quiet zones The sizes of the rectangle symbols are from 8 18 to 16 48 modules not including quiet zone e The sizes of square symbols excluding quiet zones and their maximum data capacities are listed in following table 35 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual e Symbol sizes Maximum data capacities Symbol size values modules Numeric Alphanumeric Byte dmSize_10_10 10 10 6 3 1 dmSize_12_12 12 12 10 6 3 dmSize_14_14 14 14 16 10 dmSize_16_16 16 16 24 16 10 dmSize_18_18 18 18 36 25 16 dmSize_20_20 20 20 44 31 20 dmSize_22 22 22 22 60 43 28 dmSize_24 24 24 24 72 52 34 dmSize_26_26 26 26 88 64 42 dmSize_32_32 32 32 124 91 60 dmSize_36_36 36 36 172 127 84 dmSize_40_40 40 40 228 169 112 dmSize_44 44 44 44 288 214 142 dmSize_48_48 48 48 348 259 172 dmSize_52_52 52 52 408 304 202 dmSize_64_64 64 64 560 418 277 dmSize_72_72 72 72 736 550 365 dmSize_80_80
428. symbol See diagram the SpaceColor parameter is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones BarcodeWidth 7 CS WW SCH ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode component the leading quiet zone and the trailing quiet zone are included always even if the ShowQuietZone parameter is set to false See diagram the SpaceColor parameter is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones yo ee a BarcodeWidth_ e TT UDO ID II RN RUN 11 A TINN ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 Note if the parameter is provided and it isn t zero the values of Module and BarcodeHeight parameters will be ignored the module size will be calculated based on the BarcodeWidth parameter value If both BarcodeHeight and BarcodeWidth parameters aren t provided or they are all zero the barcode symbol width will be determined by the Module parameter value If both BarcodeWidth and BarcodeHeight parameters are provided and aren t zero only the BarcodeWidth parameter value will be used to calculate the module size the BarcodeHeight parameter value will be ignored See also the BarcodeWidth property BarcodeHeight Single Specifies the barcode symbol height the distance between the top and bottom of the barcode symbol in millimeters If the quiet zones are printed please read the ShowQuietZone parameter section above about
429. symbol before the barcode symbol is rotated in modules The quiet zones aren t included even if they are represented WTotalWidthinPixels Single It s the height of entire barcode symbol before the barcode symbol is rotated in pixels Draw DrawTo or dots Print The horizontal resolution is used The quiet zones are included if they are represented WTotalHeightinPixels Single It s the width of entire barcode symbol before the barcode symbol is rotated in pixels Draw DrawTo or dots Print The horizontal resolution is used The quiet zones are included if they are represented WSymbolZoneOffsetInPixels_Left Single It s the horizontal offset from the upper left corner of entire barcode symbol the quiet zones are included if they are represented to the upper left of the barcode symbol the quiet zones aren t included even if they are represented before the barcode symbol is rotated in in pixels Draw DrawTo or dots Print The horizontal resolution is used WSymbolZoneOffsetInPixels_Top Single It s the vertical offset from the upper left corner of entire barcode symbol the quiet zones are included if they are represented to the upper left of the barcode symbol the quiet zones aren t included even if they are represented before the barcode symbol is rotated in in pixels Draw DrawTo or dots Print The horizontal resolution is used WaAlpha Single It s the angle that the barcode symbol will be rotated in radian WOrig
430. symbology identifier prefix is set to CO or JL5 and implies a mode latch to Mixed sub mode of Text compaction mode The escape sequence shall only be placed once at beginning of barcode text otherwise an OnlinvalidChar or OnInvalidDataChar event will occur 911 It indicates that the MicroPDF417 symbol s data output shall conform with the Code128 specification standard data package the symbology identifier prefix is set to CO or JL5 and implies a mode latch to Numeric compaction mode The escape sequence shall only be placed once at beginning of barcode text otherwise an OnlnvalidChar or OnInvalidDataChar event will occur 912 AAYYMMDDBB It represents a leading FNC1 character in First position mode and implies a mode latch to Numeric compaction mode Not only does it indicate that the MicroPDF417 symbol s data output shall conform with the Code128 specification UCC EAN 128 emulation the symbology identifier prefix is set to C1 or L3 but also it encodes that the data begins with a 6 digit date field Application Identifier is 11 13 15 or 17 and this date field may be followed by an implied Application Identifier 10 or 21 as well AA Application Identifier of the 6 digit data field It can be one of 11 13 15 or 17 YY Year of the 6 digit data field MM Month of the 6 digit data field DD Day of the 6 digit data field BB An optional Application Identifier that follows the 6 digit data field It can be one
431. t section above e lt ECI_Number gt Insert an ECI indicator block to barcode text See also the Extended Channel Interpretation ECI section below s lt Index gt lt Amount gt lt File_Id gt Insert a structured append block to the barcode text in order to create the symbol in a structured append See also the Structured append section below r Indicates that the symbol encodes a message used to program the reader system It shall be placed at beginning of the barcode text and it shall not be used with structured append Note the RS is ASCII character RS ASCII value 30 the GS is ASCII character GS ASCII value 29 and the EOT is ASCII character EOT ASCII value 4 Extended Channel Interpretation ECH The Extended Channel Interpretation ECI protocol allows the output data stream to have interpretations different from that of the default character set Four broad types of interpretations are supported in Data Matrix ECC 200 e International character sets or code pages e General purpose interpretations such as encryption and compaction e User defined interpretations for closed systems 37 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual e Control information for structured append in unbuffered mode The ECI protocol provides a consistent method to specify particular interpretations on byte values before printing and after decoding The ECI is identified by an integer up to 6 digits which is enco
432. t bar or space in the barcode symbol The parameter specifies the module width See diagram Deman IT Angle Single Specifies an angle in degrees to rotate the barcode symbol and its quiet zones if they are drawn please read the ShowQuietZone parameter section above about whether or not the quiet zones will be drawn anticlockwise It defaults to 0 if the parameter is not provided meaning left to right horizontal direction See diagram the quiet zones are drawn in claSilver color in order to accentuate them See also the Module property ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Canvas TCanvas Specifies target canvas to drawn the barcode symbol on it The parameter is useful for obtaining the physical resolution if one of HDPI and VDPI parameters is set to 0 If both HDPI and VDP parameters are set to 0 or both HDPI and VDP parameters are not set to 0 the parameter will be ignored in this case you can set it to nil HDPI Integer Specifies the horizontal resolution of canvas in DPI It s the number of dots or pixels per inch It defaults to 0 if the HDPI is not provided and the physical horizontal resolution obtained from the Canvas parameter will be used If both HDPI and VDPI are set to 0 it indicates the horizontal resolution is equal to the vertical resolution VDPI Integer Specifies the vertical resolution of canvas in DPI It s the number of dots or pixels per inch It defaults to 0 if the VDPI is not provided
433. t symbols Note the new level is always no lower than the level specified by the ECCLevel 127 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual property and the symbol size will not be increased If the ECCLevelUpgrade property is set to false the error correction code level specified by the ECCLevel property will be used always If the ECCLevel property is set to one of values from elECC_0 to elECC_8 the factual error correction code level is always equal to the value of the ECCLevel property If the ECCLevel property is set to elEcc_Auto the factual error correction code level is the recommended minimum ECC level depending on the length of barcode text The CurrentECCLevel property can be used to get the factual error correction code level See also the Error checking and correcting ECC section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 article A 1 54 ECCLevelUpgrade TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode For the QR Code barcode symbols the property specifies whether to use the remaining capacity to automatically upgrade the error correction code level in order to increase symbols strength Syntax property ECCLevelUpgrade Boolean Description For a QR Code barcode symbol the symbol size may be determined depending on the barcode text length and the error correction code level specified by the ECCLevel property And the barcode text and the error correction code don t usually fill the maximum data capacity of the symbol the property specifies whether t
434. tamp macro_block 12 2c 7 Sender macro block 13 ze 2c Address macro_block 14 2c File Size macro block len Length macro_ block check _sum_len Length check_sum SetLength macro_block macro_block_len check_sum_len 1 Move PByte check sum 0 PByte macro block macro block Leni check _sum_ len macro block macro block len check sum len ze 5d See also the Macro PDF417 section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 article B 1 10 GetParity TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode Returns the parity value of a barcode text that will be encoded into a series of structured append symbols The value will be used in the structured append block and the structured append block will be used by each symbol in the series of QRCode structured append symbols There are two different overloading methods Syntax 1 and Syntax 2 e Syntax 1 Returns the parity value of a barcode text The barcode text is specified in the Barcode parameter It is of type string The Barcode parameter is in fact an UnicodeString By default the unicode string will be converted to an UTF 8 bytes sequence the BOM isn t included then caculate its parity If you want to use other encoding scheme for example the ANSI UTF 16 please convert it in the OnEncode event handle or use the GetParity Syntax 2 overloading method and specify the converted bytes sequence in its Data parameter If you want to caculate the parity of a blo
435. tax constructor Create Owner TComponent override Description Call Create to instantiate a TCopyFmx2D object at runtime TCopyFmx2D component added at design time are created automatically Parameters e Owner TComponent It is the component that is responsible for freeing the TCopyFmx2D component instance Typically this is the form It becomes the value of the Owner property B 3 4 Destroy Disposes of the instance of the TCopyFmx2D object Syntax destructor Destroy override Description 258 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Destroy is the destructor for a TCopyFmx2D object Do not call the destructor directly in an application instead call Free The Free verifies that the TCopyFmx2D object is not nil before it calls Destroy 259 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Annex C Events C 1 TBarcodeFmx2D C 1 1 OnChange Occurs when the value of Barcode or Data property is changed Syntax property OnChange TNotifyEvent Parameters e Sender TObject It is the object whose event handler is called C 1 2 OnDrawBarcode Occurs after representing the barcode symbol Write an OnDrawBarcode event handler to modify the barcode symbol after it was represented Syntax type Defined in the pfmxBarcode2D unit TUserWorkArea record WCanvas TCanvas WBarcode string WBarColor TAlphaColor WSpaceColor TAlphaColor WOpacity Single WModule Single WLeftInPixels Sin
436. te license as indicated on the invoice or sales receipt If the SOFTWARE PRODUCT is installed on a network server or other storage device you must purchase a license for each separate computer on which the SOFTWARE PRODUCT is used A license for the SOFTWARE PRODUCT may not be shared by alternating use of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT betwee different computers The primary user of a computer for which a license has been purchased may make and use one copy of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT on his or her portable computer You may also make one copy of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT fo back up or archival purposes Otherwise you may not copy the SOFTWARE PRODUCT in whole or in part You may not transfer your rights under this license 2 DESCRIPTION OF OTHER RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS o Limitations on Components and Source Code You may distribute the runtime packages with your end user applications You must not distribute the library in such a way that it allows direct programmatic access to the SOFTWARE PRODUCT or such that it competes with the SOFTWARE PRODUCT in any way this library is intended for inclusion in end user products You may not publish or otherwise expose the licensed source code outside of your organization whatsoever You may modify the source code as required for your own software products but the code may only be used to produce compiled software Software built incorporating our licensed source code must not allow programmatic access to the software component
437. ter value is set to true the leading quiet zone trailing quiet zone top quiet zone and bottom quiet zone are drawn using the color The alpha channel of the BarColor parameter is supported See also the BarColor property SpaceColor TAlphaColor In general the Inversed property is set to false In this case the parameters specifies the color for all spaces Stacked 2D barcode symbology and Linear 1D barcode symbology or light modules Matrix 2D barcode symbology in the barcode symbol Also if the ShowQuietZone parameter value is set to true the leading quiet zone trailing quiet zone top quiet zone and bottom quiet zone are drawn using the color If the Inversed property is set to true it specifies the color for all bars Stacked 2D barcode symbology and Linear 1D barcode symbology or dark modules Matrix 2D barcode symbology in the barcode symbol The alpha channel of the SpaceColor parameter is supported See also the SpaceColor property ShowQuietZone Boolean Specifies whether to draw the leading quiet zone trailing quiet zone top quiet zone and bottom quiet zone If the parameter value is set to true these quiet zones are drawn Otherwise they don t be drawn You can use the LeadingQuietZone TrailingQuietZone TopQuietZone and BottomQuietZone properties to specify the size of these quiet zones in 195 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual modules See diagram the SpaceColor parameter is set to claSilv
438. that it cannot be encoded using the maximum symbol size specified by this property an OnInvalidLength the barcode text is specified in the Barcode property or an OnInvalidDataLength the barcode text is specified in the Data property event will occur The CurrentSize property can be used to get the factual symbol size Note if the property is set to a value less than the MinSize property s value the MinSize property will be automatically changed to equal to this property s value In other words the MaxSize property s value is always greater than or equal to the MinSize property s value See also the Symbol sizes section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_AztecCode article A 1 72 MaxSize TBarcodeFmx2D_DataMatrix Specifies the maximum symbol size for a Data Matrix ECC 000 140 barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxDataMatrix unit 139 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual TDataMatrix Size dmSize 09 09 dmSize 11 11 dmSize 13 13 dmSize 15 15 dmSize 17 17 dmSize 19 19 dmSize 21 21 dmSize 23 23 dmSize 25 25 dmSize 27 27 dmSize 29 29 dmSize 31 31 dmSize 33 33 dmSize 35 35 dmSize 37 37 dmSize 39 39 dmSize 41 41 dmSize 43 43 dmSize 45 45 dmSize 47 47 dmSize 49 49 property MaxSize TDataMatrix Size Description The property specifies the maximum symbol size for a Data Matrix ECC 000 140 barcode symbol It can be one of values from dmSize_09 09 to dmSize_49 49 These values denotation th
439. the OnInvalidDataLength event will occur Verify_OK 1 It indicates the method succeeds Verify_Invalidindex_Base 0 and greater than 0 If you use the Barcode property to specify the barcode text it indicates that an invalid character is in the barcode text also the OnlInvalidChar event will occur The return value is the position index of the invalid charactere For 32 bit Windows 64 bit Windows and Mac OSX platform the index 1 denotes that the first character is invalid character For iOS and Android platform the index 0 denotes that the first character is invalid character 194 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual If you use the Data property to specify the barcode data it indicates that an invalid byte value is in the barcode data also the OnInvalidDataChar event will occur The return value is the position index of the invalid byte value The index 0 denotes that the first byte value is invalid byte value B 1 6 2 DrawTo Syntax 2 Draws a barcode symbol on the specified canvas The barcode symbol is specified by the parameters of this method Syntax function DrawTo Canvas TCanvas Barcode string BarColor SpaceColor TAlphaColor ShowQuietZone Boolean Left Top Module Single Angle Single 0 Opacity Single 1 HDPI Integer 0 VDPI Integer 0 Integer overload virtual Description On the specified canvas draws a barcode symbol that is specified by the parameters of this method Paramete
440. the AllowKanjiMode property is set to true or 3 the Kanji mode will not be used if the AllowKanjiMode property is set to false encoding modes The combination of encoding modes may not be the optimal one in order to optimize encoding speed epSingleMode The encoding mode will be selected automatically and applied to entire symbol based on the barcode text in other words the barcode text to be encoded will be analysed and an appropriates lowest level highest encoding density encoding mode will be selected in order to minimize the symbol size and the encoding mode will not be switched in the sybmol Note the Kanji mode will not be used if the AllowKanjiMode property is set to false 61 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Properties Methods e Image e Create e Barcode e Destroy e Data e Assign e Module e Clear e BarColor e Draw e SpaceColor e Size e Opacity e DrawTo e Orientation e DrawToSize e Stretch e Print e LeftMargin e PrintSize e TopMargin e BarcodeWidth e BarcodeHeight ShowQuietZone LeadingQuietZone TopQuietZone TrailingQuietZone BottomQuietZone EnableUpdateDB Locked Inversed Mirrored EncodePolicy MaxSliceLen MinVersion MaxVersion ECCLevel ECCLevelUpgrade AllowKanjiMode CurrentVersion Read only CurrentECCLevel Read only 4 1 12 TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 The component is used to create the PDF417 Barcode symbols It is defined in the pfmxPDF417 unit PDF417 is a continuous stacked 2D line
441. the BarcodeWidth property value is equal to zero the TopMargin property value will be subtracted from the height of Timage control that s specified by the Image property then the result will be returned If the BarcodeWidth property value is less than zero the TopMargin property value and the absolute value of the negative BarcodeWidth property value i e the bottom margin will be subtracted from the height of Tlmage control that s specified by the Image property then the result will be returned e SymbolWidth Single Returns the distance between the leading and trailing of the rotated barcode symbol that s displyed in the Tlmage control specified in the Image property in pixels See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones 253 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual SymbolWidth D l Orientation boleftRight Orientation boTopBottom Fa VppAMegue If the quiet zones are displayed please read the ShowQuietZone property about whether or not the quiet zones will be displayed the leading quiet zone and the trailing quiet zone are included See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones Si ny SymbolWidth IREA Orientation boLeftRight Orientation boTopBottom PPIMIOqWAS ag E For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode components the leading quiet zone and the
442. the Data Matrix ECC 200 symbol size is 8 rows by 18 columns These symbol size values are defined in the pfmxDataMatrixEcc200 unit The property is read only See also the Symbol sizes section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_DataMatrixECC200 article A 1 30 CurrentSize TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroPDF417 Contains the factual symbol size of an MicroPDF417 barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxMicroPDF417 unit TMicroPDF417 Size mpSize 1 11 mpSize 1 14 mpSize 1 17 mpSize 1 20 mpSize 1 24 mpSize 1 28 mpSize 2 8 mpSize 2 11 mpSize 2 14 mpSize 2 17 mpSize 2 20 mpSize 2 23 mpSize 2 26 mpSize 3 6 mpSize 3 8 mpSize 3 10 mpSize 3 12 mpSize 3 15 mpSize 3 20 mpSize 3 26 mpSize 3 32 mpSize 3 38 mpSize 3 44 mpSize 4 4 mpSize 4 6 mpSize 4 8 mpSize 4 10 mpSize 4 12 mpSize 4 15 mpSize 4 20 mpSize 4 26 mpSize 4 32 mpSize 4 38 mpSize 4 44 property CurrentSize TMicroPDF417 Size Description The smallest symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between the minimum symbol size specified by the MinSize property and the maximum symbol size specified by the MaxSize property Read the property to retrieve the factual symbol size of an MicroPDF417 barcode symbol The property can be one of values from mpSize_1_11 to mpSize_4 44 denotations the factual number of columns and rows in current symbol For example the symbol size value mpSize_3_12 denotations the MicroPDF417 symbol size is
443. the level specified by this property and the symbol size will not be increased it may be determined depending on the length of barcode text and the error correction code level specified by this property In other words only the remaining capacity in current symbol size will be used to upgrade the error correction code level The CurrentECCLevel property can always be used to get the factual error correction code level 122 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual See also the Error checking and correcting ECC section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_HanXinCode article A 1 45 ECCLevel TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroQRCode Specifies which ECC level error correction code level will be used to increase strength of a Micro QR Code barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxMicroQRCode unit TMicroQRCode EccLevel elLowest elMedium elQuality property ECCLevel TMicroQRCode EccLevel Description The Micro QR Code symbology offers three levels of error correction referred to as L M and Q respectively in increasing order of recovery capacity The property specifies which ECC level error correction code level will be used to increase strength of aMicro QR Code barcode symbol It can be one of these values defined in the pfmxMicroQRCode unit e elLowest Indicates to use the ECC level L up to 7 approx damage can be corrected e elMedium Indicates to use the ECC level M up to 15 approx damage can be corrected
444. the output data stream to have interpretations different from that of the default character set The ECI protocol provides a consistent method to specify particular interpretations on byte values before printing and after decoding 41 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual The ECI is identified by an integer up to 6 digits which is encoded in the Grid Matrix symbol by the ECI indicator block The escape sequence e lt ECI _Number gt is used to place the ECI indicator block to the barcode text e ECI_Number The ECI number it s an integer between 0 and 811799 including the boundaries the leading zero is optional In a single symbol or structured append set of Grid Matrix symbols if the AIM FNC1 OO GS1 FNC 1 FNC2 structured append block 2 and FNC3 3 are used ECI indicator blocks may be placed anywhere behind of them otherwise they may be placed anywhere in the barcode text For example ABC e 123 DEFabc e 000003 def The AllowEscape property should be set to true in order to place the ECI indicator blocks Any ECI invoked shall apply until the end of the barcode text or until another ECI indicator block is encountered Thus the interpretation of the ECI may straddle two or more symbols Structured append In order to handle larger messages than are practical in a single symbol a data message can be distributed across several Grid Matrix symbols Up to 16 Grid Matrix symbols may be appended in a
445. the pfmxHanXinCode unit THanXinCode Version 1 84 property CurrentVersion THanXinCode Version Description There are eighty four sizes of Han Xin Code symbols referred to as version 1 to 84 in increasing order of size and data capacity The smallest symbol version symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between the minimum symbol version symbol size specified by the MinVersion property and the maximum symbol version symbol size specified by the MaxVersion property Read the property to retrieve the factual symbol version symbol size of a Han Xin Code barcode symbol The property can be one of values from 1 to 84 denotations the factual version of aHan Xin Code 2D barcode symbol They are defined in the pfmxHanXinCode unit The property is read only See also the Symbol sizes section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_HanXinCode article A 1 34 CurrentVersion TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroQRCode Contains the factual symbol version symbol size of a Micro QR Code barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxMicroQRCode unit TMicroQRCode Version 1 4 property CurrentVersion TMicroQRCode Version Description The smallest symbol version symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between the minimum symbol version symbol size specified by the MinVersion property and the maximum symbol version symbol size specified by the MaxVersion property Read
446. tial modes 0 to 6 shown in table above will be selected automatically depending on the barcode text in order to minimize the symbol size You can always use the CurrentMode property to get the factual initial mode See also the Initial modes section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16k article A 1 62 Inversed TBarcodeFmx2D_AztecCode TBarcodeFmx2D_DataMatrix etc 132 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Specifies whether to represent a barcode symbol in inversed color reflectance reversal Syntax property Inversed Boolean Description Specifies whether to draw a barcode symbol in inversed color reflectance reversal In general the barcode symbol is dark foreground on light background In this case the Inversed property should be set to false and all light modules in the barcode symbol are drawn using the color specified by the SpaceColor property all dark modules are drawn using the color specified by the BarColor property If the barcode symbol is light foreground on dark background the Inversed property should be set to true and all light modules in the barcode symbol are drawn using the color specified by the BarColor property all dark modules are drawn using the color specified by the SpaceColor property See diagram Eli Dark on Light Inversed False When the leading quiet zone trailing quiet zone top quiet zone and bottom quiet zone are displayed the ShowQuietZone property value is set
447. to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones 230 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual s gt Angle ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True e Opacity Single Specifies the transparency level of entire barcode symbol where 1 is not transparant at all 0 5 is 50 see through and 0 is completely transparent The parameter defaults to 1 if it is not provided meaning not transparant at all Note if the Inversed property is set to false you can use the alpha channel of the SpaceColor parameter value to specify the transparency level of bakcground color spaces or light modules and quiet zones and use the alpha channel of the BarColor parameter value to specify the transparency level of foreground color bars or dark modules If the Inversed property is set to true you can use the alpha channel of the BarColor parameter value to specify the transparency level of bakcground color spaces or light modules and quiet zones and use the alpha channel of the SpaceColor parameter value to specify the transparency level of fore ground color bars or dark modules BarcodeWidth Single Specifies the barcode symbol width the distance between the beginning and end of the barcode symbol in millimeters If the quiet zones are printed please read the ShowQuietZone parameter section above about whether or not the quiet zones will be printed the leading quiet zone and the trailing quiet zone are included in the barcode
448. to a table of up to 4 colors gcdColors_3b Uses the 3 bit per pixel 3bpp format It supports 8 distinct colors Each pixel value is a 3 bit index into a table of up to 8 colors gcdColors_4b Uses the 4 bit per pixel 4bpp format It supports 16 distinct colors Each pixel value is a 4 bit index into a table of up to 16 colors gcdColors_5b Uses the 5 bit per pixel Sbpp format It supports 32 distinct colors Each pixel value is a 5 bit index into a table of up to 32 colors gcdColors_6b Uses the 6 bit per pixel 6bpp format It supports 64 distinct colors Each pixel value is a 6 bit index into a table of up to 64 colors gcdColors_7b Uses the 7 bit per pixel 7bpp format It supports 128 distinct colors Each pixel value is a 7 bit index into a table of up to 128 colors gcdColors_8b Uses the 8 bit per pixel 8bpp format It supports 256 distinct colors Each pixel value is a 8 bit index into a table of up to 256 colors A 2 4 ColorDepth TSaveFmx2D_Png Specifies the color depth of a Portable Network Graphics PNG format file for TSaveFmx2D_Png component Syntax type Defined in the pfmxSave2D Png unit TPngColorDepth pcdIndex_1 pcdIndex_2 pcdIndex_4 pcdIndex_ 8 pcdRGB_ 8 pcdRGBA 8 property ColorType TPngColorType Description Color depth also known as bit depth pixel format is either the number of bits used to indicate the color of a single pixel In a Portable 181 2D Barcode FMX Compo
449. to true if the Inversed property is set to false the color specified by the SpaceColor property will be used to draw the quiet zones otherwise the color specified by the BarColor property will be used See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones Ra Inversed False Inversed True A 1 63 LeadingQuietZone Specifies the horizontal width of the leading quiet zone in modules Syntax property LeadingQuietZone Integer Description Specifies the horizontal width of the leading quiet zone in modules The quiet zone is drawn using thecolor specified by the SpaceColor property if the Inversed property is set to false Otherwise it s drawn using the color specified by the BarColor property See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones a Geck RI 5 5 ems 2 gent ST d Per Orientation boLeftRight Orientation boRightLeft Orientation boTopBottom Orientation boBottomTop This property is useful only when the ShowQuietZone property value is set to true or the barcode symbology is a Code 16K symbol For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode component the leading quiet zone is drawn always even if the ShowQuietZone property value is set to false See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones 133 2D Barco
450. trailing quiet zone are included always even if the ShowQuietZone property is set to false See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones SymbolWidth SymbolWidth tL DEN UI AAM LOL LO LUM MON I uAPIMIOquAS uIPIMIOqWAS ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Orientation boLeftRight Orientation boLeftRight Orientation boTopBottom Orientation boTopBottom The value of SymbolWidth is calculated using following method o The Stretch property is set to false it s calculated based on the Module property value o The Stretch property is set to true If the BarcodeWidth property value is greater than zero it s same to the BarcodeWidth property value f the BarcodeWidth property value is equal to zero When the Orientation property is set to boLeftRight or boRightLeft the LeftMargin property value will be subtracted from the width of Timage control that s specified by the Image property then the result will be returned When the Orientation property is set to boTopBottom or boBottomTop the TopMargin property value will be subtracted from the height of Timage control that s specified by the Image property then the result will be returned If the BarcodeWidth property value is less than zero When the Orientation property is set to boLeftRight or boRightLeft the LeftMargin property value and the absolute
451. tween you either an individual or a single entity and the Han soft which includes computer software and may include associated media printed materials and online or electronic documentation SOFTWARE PRODUCT By installing copying or otherwise using the SOFTWARE PRODUCT you agree to be bound by the terms of this EULA If you do not agree to the terms of this EULA do not install or use the SOFTWARE PRODUCT you may however return it to your place of 94 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual purchase for a full refund SOFTWARE PRODUCT LICENSE The SOFTWARE PRODUCT is protected by copyright laws and international copyright treaties as well as other intellectual property laws and treaties The SOFTWARE PRODUCT is licensed not sold 1 GRANT OF LICENSE This EULA grants you the following rights o Installation and Use You may install and use an unlimited number of copies of the TRIAL SOFTWARE PRODUCT o Reproduction and Distribution You may reproduce and distribute an unlimited number of copies of the TRIAL SOFTWARE PRODUCT provided that each copy shall be a true and complete copy including all copyright and trademark notices and shall be accompanied by a copy of this EULA Copies of the TRIAL SOFTWARE PRODUCT may be distributed as a standalone product or included with you own product Purchase o You may use the registered SOFTWARE PRODUCT on that number of computers for which you have purchased a separa
452. ty is set to true If the Barcode property is linked to a data field the user can change the field value 128 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual by changing the Barcode property value of the TBarcodeFmx2D barcode component If the Data property is linked to a data field the user can change the field value by changing the Data property value of the TBarcodeFmx2D barcode component A 1 56 EncodeMode TBarcodeFmx2D_DataMatrix Specifies the data encoding mode for a Data Matrix ECC 000 140 barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxDataMatrix unit TDataMatrix EncodeMode emAuto emNumeric emAlpha emPunctuation emAlphanumeric emASCII emBinary property EncodeMode TDataMatrix EncodeMode Description The Data Matrix ECC 000 140 symbology offers six kinds of encoding mode referred to as Numeric Base 11 Alpha Base 27 Alphanumeric Base 37 Punctuation Base 41 ASCII and Binary respectively in decreasing order of encoding density The property specifies which data encoding mode will be used The property can be one of these values defined in the pfmxDataMatrix unit emAuto The encoding mode will be selected automatically depending on the barcode text in other words the barcode text to be encoded will be analysed and an appropriates lowest level highest encoding density encoding mode will be selected in order to minimize the symbol size The property CurrentEncodeMode can be used to get
453. ty specifies which placement method will be used to generate the Compact Matrix symbol It can be one of values pmSequence and pmlinterlacement corresponding to the symbol charcacters placement methods sequence and interlacement 159 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual A 1 103 ReviseVersion5 TBarcodeFmx2D_HanXinCode Specifies whether to revise the position of alignment pattern for a Han Xin Code version 5 symbol Syntax property ReviseVersion5 Boolean Description The property specifies whether to revise the position of alignment pattern for a Han Xin Code version 5 symbol By default it s set to false if the symbol can be read by your reader please don t change it See also the Symbol sizes section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_HanXinCode article A 1 104 RowHeight TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K Specifies the height of each stacked row for a Code 16K stacked barcode symbol in modules Syntax property RowHeight Integer Description The property specifies the height of each stacked row for a Code 16K barcode symbol in modules It should be set to an integer greater than or equal to 8 and the height of separator bar isn t included If the property is set to a value less than 8 the operation will be ignored See diagram RowHeight WM ID i Hin A 1 105 RowHeight TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroPDF417 Specifies the height of each stacked row for a MicroPDF417 stacked barcode symbol in modules Syntax
454. type Defined in the pfmxMicroPDF417 unit TMicroPDF417 RowHeight 1 99 property RowHeight TMicroPDF417 RowHeight Description The property specifies the height of each stacked row for a MicroPDF417 barcode symbol in modules It should be set to an integer between 1 and 99 including the boundaries defined in the pfmxMicroPDF417 unit In general it shall be a minimum of 2 modules 160 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual See diagram RowHeight WER MicroPDF417 A 1 106 RowHeight TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 Specifies the height of each stacked row for a PDF417 stacked barcode symbol in modules Syntax type Defined in the pfmxPDF417Custom unit TPDF417 RowHeight 1 99 property RowHeight TPDF417 RowHeight Description The property specifies the height of each stacked row for a PDF417 barcode symbol in modules The property should be set to an integer between 1 and 99 including the boundaries defined in the pfmxPDF417Custom unit In general it shall be a minimum of 3 modules See diagram RowHeight Ch PDF417 A 1 107 RowHeight TBarcodeFmx2D_RSSExpanded Specifies the height of each stacked row for an RSS Expanded barcode symbol in modules Syntax property RowHeight Integer Description For the RSS Expanded Standard barcode symbol the Style property is set to rsStandard the property specifies the height of the RSS Expanded Standard barcode symbol in mo
455. type Defined in the pfmxMicroPDF417 unit TMicroPDF417 TextEncodeMode tmAlpha tmLower tmMixed tmPunct property DefaultTextEncodeMode TMicroPDF417_ TextEncodeMode Description In the specification of MicroPDF417 the initial compaction mode in effect at the start of each symbol shall always be Byte compaction mode but some readers use the Text compaction mode Alpha sub mode as the initial compaction mode The property specifies the initial Text compaction sub mode for a MicroPDF417 barcode symbol if its initial compaction mode is set to Text compaction mode the DefaultEncodeMode property is set to emText It should be set to match your reader The property can be one of these values defined in the pfmxMicroPDF417 unit 118 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual e tmAlpha Indicates the initial Text compaction sub mode to Alpha sub mode e Im ower Indicates the initial Text compaction sub mode to Lower sub mode e tmMixed Indicates the initial Text compaction sub mode to Mixed sub mode tmPunct Indicates the initial Text compaction sub mode to Punctuation sub mode Note the property is available only when the DefaultEncodeMode property is set to emText See also the Character set section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroPDF417 and the DefaultEncodeMode articles A 1 39 ECCCount TBarcodeFmx2D_AztecCode Specifies the additional error correction size number of codewords for an Aztec Code symbol Syntax
456. u use the OnEncode event handle to encode the barcode text to a bytes sequence in your own encoding scheme the Verify_InvalidiIndex_BeforeBarcode 3 indicats that an invalid byte value is in the prefix codes of the bytes sequence for example the BOM o Verify_OK 1 It indicates the method succeeds o Verify_Invalidindex_Base 0 and greater than 0 It indicates that an invalid character is in the barcode text the return value is the position index of the invalid charactere For 32 bit Windows 64 bit Windows and Mac OSX platform the index 1 denotes that the first character is invalid character For iOS and Android platform the index 0 denotes that the first character is invalid character e Options TPDF417_Options TheOptions parameter is an advanced feature which allows low level control over data encoding The parameter can be used to change the encoding algorithm and meanings of some fucntion codewords in order to match the reader The values that can be included in the Options parameter are defined in the pPDF417Com unit See also the Options property article Return If the method succeeds it returns the check sum value it s a 16 bit word value in decimal string UnicodeString format and the Invalidindex parameter returns Verify_OK 1 If the method fails the Invalidindex parameter returns a position index of first invalid character in the Barcode parameter See also the InvalidiIndex parameter section above
457. uality TSaveFmx2D_Jpg Indicates the trade off ratio between the image quality and the file size when use the TSaveFmx2D_Jpg component to save a barcode symbol Syntax 186 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual type Defined in the pfmxSave2DJpg unit TIPEGQuality 0 100 property Quality TJPEGQuality default 100 Description Use the Quality property to set the compression quality of the JPEG image when saving barcode symbol to a jpeg image Higher compression results in a poorer picture quality but a smaller file size The higher the property value up to a maximum of 100 the better the image quality but the larger the file size The lower the property value to a minimum of 1 the smaller the resulting file size but at the expense of picture quality A 2 18 Version TSaveFmx2D_Gif Specifies the version of a Graphics Interchange Format GIF file for the TSaveFmx2D_Gif component Syntax type Defined in the pfmxSave2D Gif unit TGifVersion gv87a gv89a property Version TGifVersion Description There are two versions of the Graphics Interchange Format GIF versions 87a and 89a The property specifies which version will be used to save a barcode symbol to a Graphics Interchange Format GIF file It can be one of these values defined in the pfmxSave2D_Gif unit e gv87a Uses the version 87a the original version of the Graphics Interchange Format GIF It doesn t support to embed the oth
458. uctured append control block For example ABCDEFGHIJKLMN s 5 001287023 t The AllowEscape property should be set to true in order to place the structured append control block and the terminator 58 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Properties Methods Events e Image e Create e OnChange e Barcode e Destroy e OnEncode e Data e Assign e ParseBarcodelndex e Module e Clear e OnlnvalidChar e BarColor e Draw e OnlnvalidLength e SpaceColor e Size e OnlnvalidDataChar e Opacity e DrawTo e OnlnvalidDataLength e Orientation e DrawToSize e OnDrawBarcode e Stretch e Print e LeftMargin e PrintSize e TopMargin e GetCheckSum e BarcodeWidth e BarcodeHeight ShowQuietZone LeadingQuietZone TopQuietZone TrailingQuietZone BottomQuietZone EnableUpdateDB Locked MinSize MaxSize StretchOrder RowHeight DefauldEncodeMode DefauldTextEncodeMode UseECIDescriptor Options AllowEscape CurrentSize Read only 4 1 11 TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroQRCode The component is used to create the Micro QR Code barcode symbols It s defined in the pfmxMicroQRCode unit Micro QR Code is a very small QR Code that fits applications that require a smaller space and use smaller amounts of data p such as ID of printed circuit boards and electronics parts etc The efficiency of data encoding has been increased with the sera gR Code use of only one position detection pattern Micro QR Code is a two dimensional matrix symbology It is n
459. uietZone False Angle 0 30 90 SymbolHeight SymbolHeight Wi d ISS amp ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 See also the BarcodeHeight property Barcode String Specifies the barcode text It is of type string and it is in it fact an UnicodeString By default the unicode string will be converted to an UTF 8 bytes sequence the BOM isn t included then be encoded into the barcode symbol If you want to use other encoding scheme for example the ANSI UTF 16 please convert it in theOnEncode event handle or use the DrawToSize Syntax 3 overloading method and specify the converted bytes sequence in its Data parameter If you want to encode a block of binary bytes data please use the DrawToSize Syntax 3 overloading method For the TBarcodeFmx2D_RSS14 and TBarcodeFmx2D_RSSLimited components if the property AutoCheckDigit is set to true the check digit doesn t need to be included in the parameter otherwise the check digit can be specified by you in the parameter See also the Barcode and Data properties ShowQuietZone Boolean Specifies whether to include the leading quiet zone trailing quiet zone top quiet zone and bottom quiet zone in the barcode symbol If the parameter value is set to true these quiet zones are included Otherwise they don t be included You can use the LeadingQuietZone TrailingQuietZone TopQuietZone and BottomQuietZone properties to specify the size of these quiet zones in modu
460. uietZone parameter value is set to false See diagram the quiet zones are printed in claSilver color in order to accentuate them TopQuietZone t auozn and upea auop nd fuges auonand upea auoz ano uges 4 BottomQuietZone ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True 244 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual See also the ShowQuietZone property e Module Single Specifies the module size in millimeters o For the Matrix 2D barcode symbology excluding the TBarcodeFmx2D_MaxiCode barcode symbology the module is single cell a suqare shape used to encode one bit data The parameter specifies the module width and height See diagram SH Bi o For the TBarcodeFmx2D_MaxiCode barcode symbology the module is single cell a regular hexagonal shape used to encode one bit data The parameter specifies the horizonal width of a module Also it s the center to center horizontal distance between adjacent modules See diagram o For the Stacked 2D barcode symbology and Linear 1D barcode symbology the module is the thinest bar or space in the barcode symbol The parameter specifies the module width See diagram eel LL If any one of the BarcodeWidth and BarcodeHeight parameters is provided and it isn t zero the value of Module parameter will be ignored the module size will be calculated based on the BarcodeWidth parameter value or the BarcodeHeight parmeter value If both BarcodeWidth and BarcodeHeight parameters a
461. um symbol size and the maximum symbol size The CurrentSegments property can be used to get the factual number of segments Note if the property is set to a value greater than the MaxSegments property s value the MaxSegments property will be automatically changed to equal to this property s value In other words the MinSegments property s value is always less than or equal to the MaxSegments property s value See also the Symbol sizes section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_CompactMatrix article 147 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual A 1 86 MinSize TBarcodeFmx2D_AztecCode Specifies the minimum symbol size for an Aztec Code barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxAztecCode unit TAztecCode Size azSize_15Compact azSize_19 azSize_19Compact azSize 23 azSize_23Compact azSize 27 azSize 27Compact azSize 31 azSize 37 azSize 41 azSize 45 azSize 49 azSize 53 azSize 57 azSize 61 azSize 67 azSize 71 azSize_75 azSize_79 azSize 83 azSize 87 azSize 91 azSize 95 azSize_ 101 azSize_ 105 azSize_ 109 azSize_113 azSize_117 azSize 121 azSize 125 azSize 131 azSize 135 azSize 139 azSize 143 azSize 147 azSize 151 property MinSize TAztecCode Size Description The property specifies the minimum symbol size for an Aztec Code barcode symbol It can be one of values from azSize_15Compact to azSize_151 These values denotation the symbol format number of rows and columns in every symbol size Fo
462. umber of subsequent bytes to be encoded is an integer multiple of 6 otherwise it will be changed to 901 automatically by the component For some reader the meanings of some function codewords don t conform with the MicroPDF417 specification You can use the Options property to change the meanings of these fucntion codewords in order to match the reader Note the RS is ASCII character RS ASCII value 30 the GS is ASCII character GS ASCII value 29 and the EOT is ASCII character EOT ASCII value 4 Extended Channel Interpretation ECH The Extended Channel Interpretation ECI protocol allows the output data stream to have interpretations different from that of the default character set Five broad types of interpretations are supported in MicroPDF417 e International character sets or code pages e General purpose interpretations such as encryption and compaction e User defined interpretations for closed systems e Transmission of control information for structured append e Transmission of uninterpreted MicroPDF417 codewords The ECI is identified by an integer up to 6 digits which is encoded in the MicroPDF417 by the ECI indicator block The escape sequence e lt ECI_Number gt is used to place the ECI indicator block to the barcode text e ECI_Number The ECI number it s an integer between 0 and 999999 including the boundaries the leading zero is optional ECI indicator blocks may be placed anywhere in t
463. ur encoding modes as Numeric mode Alphanumeric mode Kanji mode and Byte mode respectively in decreasing order of encoding density All 256 8 bits value are encoded by switching automatically between all 4 the AllowKanjiMode property is set to true or 3 the Kanji mode will not be used if the AllowKanjiMode property is set to false encoding modes The character sets in each mode are listed in the following 76 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Numeric mode Encodes data from the decimal digit set 0 to 9 byte values 48 to 57 Alphanumeric mode Encodes data from a set of 45 characters i e 10 numeric digits 0 to 9 byte values 48 to 57 26 alphabetic characters A Z byte values 65 to 90 and 9 symbols SP byte values 32 36 37 42 43 45 to 47 58 respectively Byte mode All 8 bit values can be encoded Kanji mode The Kanji mode efficiently encodes Kanji characters in accordance with the Shift JIS system based on JIS X 0208 The Shift JIS values are shifted from the JIS X 0208 values JIS X 0208 gives details of the shift coded representation It may be possible to achieve a smaller symbol size by using the Kanji mode compaction rules when an appropriate sequence of byte values occurs in the data You can set the AllowKanjiMode property to false in order to disable the Kanji mode The EncodePolicy property indicates how to use these encoding mode by the component This property can be one
464. ure How to purchase You can purchase the 2D Barcode FMX Components by using following steps 1 Please open the Purchase web page of our web site http www han soft com 2 In the Purchase web page choose the license type and open the order form web page Fill in the information on the web page and choose from the available ordering options that best suits your needs We accept credit card orders PayPal orders orders by phone and fax checks purchase orders and wire transfers 3 Once the purchase is completed the download link of full version and the license key will be sent instantaneously to your email address If you do not receive your download link and license key within a few minutes please check your SPAM filter inbox Important When completing the order form please double check that your email address is correct If it is not you will be unable to receive the download link and the license key 6 3 Contact us Contact us if you have any questions comments or suggestions Web site e Main site http www han soft com e Mirror http www han soft biz E mail e General information information han soft com e Technical support support han soft com e Sales sales han soft com e Service service han soft com e Feedback feedback han soft com e Web information webmaster han soft com 6 4 End User License Agreement This End User License Agreement EULA is a legal agreement be
465. valid byte value The index 0 denotes that the first byte value is invalid Return If the method succeeds it returns the parity value it s an 8 bit byte value and the Invalidindex parameter returns Verify_OK 1 If the method fails the Invalidindex parameter returns a position index of first invalid byte in the Data parameter it s an integer value greater than or equal to zero See also the Invalidindex parameter section above See also the Structured append section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode article B 1 11 Print Prints specified barcode symbol to printer There are several different overloading methods Syntax 1 Syntax 2 and Syntax 3 e Syntax 1 Prints the barcode symbol that is specified by the properties of this barcode component e Syntax 2 Prints the barcode symbol that is specified by the parameters of this method The barcode text is specified in the Barcode parameter It is of type string The Barcode parameter is in fact an UnicodeString By default the unicode string will be converted to an UTF 8 bytes sequence the BOM isn t included then be encoded into the barcode symbol If you want to use other encoding scheme for example the ANSI UTF 16 please convert it in theOnEncode event handle or use the Print Syntax 3 overloading method and specify the converted bytes sequence in its Data parameter If you want to encode a block of binary bytes data please use the Print Syntax 3 overloading method e Synta
466. vanced 2D barcode generation and printing features to your application 2D Barcode FMX Components supports most popular Matrix and Stacked 2D Barcode Symbologies Standards including Aztec Code Aztec Runes Code 16K Data Matrix ECC 000 140 ECC 200 MaxiCode PDF417 QR Code 2005 Micro QR Code MicroPDF417 All RSS barcode symbologies are supported including RSS 14 RSS 14 Truncated RSS 14 Stacked RSS 14 Stacked Omnidirectional RSS Limited RSS Expanded and RSS Expanded Stacked Delphi and C Builder XE2 XE3 XE4 XE5 XE6 XE7 XE8 and 10 Seattle are supported For Delphi and C Builder XE2 XE3 XE4 XE5 XE6 XE7 XE8 and 10 Seattle all of 32 bit Windows 64 bit Windows and Mac OSX platform are support For Delphi and C Builder XE4 XE5 XE6 XE7 XE8 and 10 Seattle the 32 bit iOS platform is supportec too For Delphi and C Builder XE8 and 10 Seattle the 64 bit iOS platform is supported too For Delphi and C Builder XE5 XE6 XE7 XE8 and 10 Seattle the Android platform is supported too 2D Barcode FMX Components are easy to use Developers use them like any other FMX component 1 2 Main features Allows to draw the barcode symbol to canvas with scaling and rotating Allows to print the barcode symbol to paper with scaling and rotating Ability to save barcode symbol in a variety of picture formats Ability to encode the data block into a barcode symbol Most popular matrix and stacked 2 dimensional barc
467. veBindings Designer item to true in the Object Inspector in order to display it in the LiveBindings Designer 3 Right click on the barcode component in the LiveBindings Designer execute the Bindable Members menu item check the Barcode property or the Data property in the Bindable Members dialog click on the OK button to close it 4 If you want to encode values in a string field to barcode symbol please link the Barcode property of the TBarcodeFmx2D barcode component to your data field in the TBindSourceDB component If you want to encode values in a binary field to barcode symbol please link the Data property of the TBarcodeFmx2D barcode component to your data field in the TBindSourceDB component 5 If you want to save the barcode symbol to a picture put a TSaveFmx2D component such as the TSaveFmx2D_Bmp TSaveFmx2D_Png and TSaveFmx2D_Svg to your form Set the Barcode2D property of the TSaveFmx2D component to your 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual barcode component Then you can use the Save method of the TSaveFmx2D component to save the barcode symbol to a picture file 6 Also you can use the Print method of the TBarcodeFmx2D component to print the barcode symbol to paper or use the DrawTo method of the TBarcodeFmx2D component to draw the barcode symbol to any TCanvas Note You can link multiple TBarcodeFmx2D components to a data field in order to represent the data field with multiple barcode symbo
468. ware has been advised of the possibility of such damages Because some states jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of liability for consequential or incidental damages the above limitation may not apply to you CONTACT US Please sent email to the sales han soft com email address 96 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Annex A Properties A 1 TBarcodeFmx2D A 1 1 AllowEscape Specifies whether to allow users to insert the escape sequences to barcode text in order to place the function characters and additional control information Syntax property AllowEscape Boolean Description The property specifies whether to allow users to insert the escape sequences to barcode text in order to place the function characters and additional control information An escape sequence is a series of characters used to place the function character and special character or the control information Escape sequences use an escape character to change the meaning of the characters which follow it For example ABCDEFG pHIJKLMN Some escape sequences may be followed by a parameters list all parameters are comma delimited and must be enclosed by square brackets For example s 1 2 ABCDEFGHIJKLMN The escape sequences definition is different for every barcode symbology component please read the Escape sequences section in the article of every barcode symbology component A 1 2 AllowKanjiMode TBarcodeFmx2D_
469. ween the top and bottom of the barcode symbol in millimeters If the quiet zones are printed please read the ShowQuietZone parameter section above about whether or not the quiet zones will be printed the top quiet zone and the bottom quiet zone are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the SpaceColor property is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones ShowQuietZone False Angle 0 30 90 Bares we EO ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Note if the parameter is provided and it isn t zero and the BarcodeWidth parameter isn t provided or it s zero the value of Module parameter will be ignored the module size will be calculated based on the BarcodeHeight parameter value If both BarcodeHeight and BarcodeWidth parameters aren t provided or they are all zero the barcode symbol height will be determined by the Module parameter value If both BarcodeWidth and BarcodeHeight parameters are provided and aren t zero only the BarcodeWidth parameter value will be used to calculate the module size the BarcodeHeight parameter value will be ignored See also the BarcodeHeight property HDPI Integer Specifies the horizontal resolution of printer in DPI dots per inch It defaults to 0 if the HDPI is not provided and the horizontal resolution will be obtained from your printer VDPI Integer Specifies the vertical resolution of printer in DPI dots per inch It defaults to 0 if the VDPI is not
470. whether or not the quiet zones will be printed the top quiet zone and the bottom quiet zone are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the SpaceColor parameter is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones 231 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual BarcodeHeight ShowQuietZone False Angle 0 30 90 BarcodeHeight BarcodeHeight Leal e ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Iesst Note if the parameter is provided and it isn t zero and the BarcodeWidth parameter isn t provided or it s zero the value of Module parameter will be ignored the module size will be calculated based on the BarcodeHeight parameter value If both BarcodeHeight and BarcodeWidth parameters aren t provided or they are all zero the barcode symbol height will be determined by the Module parameter value If both BarcodeWidth and BarcodeHeight parameters are provided and aren t zero only the BarcodeWidth parameter value will be used to calculate the module size the BarcodeHeight parameter value will be ignored See also the BarcodeHeight property Return This method can return one of these values these consts are defined in the pfmxCore2D unit e Verify_Invalidindex_AfterBarcode 4 If you use the OnEncode event handle to encode the barcode text to a bytes sequence in your own encoding scheme the Verify_InvalidIndex_AfterBarcode 4 indicats that an invalid byte value is in the suffix codes of the bytes
471. will be automatically changed to equal to this property s value In other words the MaxVersion property s value is always greater than or equal to the MinVersion property s value See also the Symbol sizes section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_GridMatrix article A 1 79 MaxVersion TBarcodeFmx2D_HanXinCode Specifies the maximum symbol version symbol size for a Han Xin Code barcode symbol 143 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Syntax type Defined in the pfmxHanXinCode unit THanXinCode Version 1 84 property MaxVersion THanXinCode Version Description There are eighty four sizes of Han Xin Code symbols referred to as version 1 to 84 in increasing order of size and data capacity The property specifies the maximum symbol version symbol size for a Han Xin Code barcode symbol It can be one of values from 1 to 84 They are defined in the pfmxHanXinCode unit The smallest symbol version symbol size that accommodates the barcode text will be automatically selected between the minimum symbol version symbol size specified by the MinVersion property and the maximum symbol version symbol size specified by this property If the barcode text is so long that it cannot be encoded using the maximum symbol version symbol size specified by this property an OnlInvalidLength the barcode text is specified in the Barcode property or an OnInvalidDataLength the barcode text is specified in the Data property event wi
472. with ISO IEC 646 as well as selected control characters CR HT and LF The mode has four sub modes Alpha Uppercase letters and space Lower Lowercase letters and space Mixed Numeric and some punctuations Punctuation Some punctuations The sub mode will be switched automatically in order to minimize the symbol size o Numeric compaction mode Permits efficient encoding of numeric data string o Byte compaction mode Permits all 256 possible 8 bit byte values to be encoded This includes all ASCII characters value from 0 to 127 inclusive and provides for international character set support In the specification of MicroPDF417 the initial compaction mode in effect at the start of each symbol shall always be Byte compaction mode You can change the initial compaction mode by using the DefaultEncodeMode and DefaultTextEncodeMode properties in order to macth the reader If the poMicroPDF417Explicit901 value is included in the Options property a mode latch to Byte compaction mode 901 will be explicitly inserted into beginning of barcode text in order to work with any reader The compaction mode will be switched automatically in a MicroPDF417 symbol in order to minimize the symbol size Also you can manually switch the code set by using escape sequences 900 901 902 and 924 See also the Escape sequences section below The FNC1 characters can be encoded for compatibility with some existing applications There
473. x 1 only for TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode GetCheckSum syntax 1 only for TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 or GetCheckSum syntax 1 only for TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroPDF417 method is called the event occurs if there is any invalid character in the value of their Barcode parameter Syntax type Defined in the pfmxCore2D unit TParseBarcodeIndex function Sender TObject Barcode string EncodedData TBytes InvalidEncodedDataIndex Integer Integer of object property ParseBarcodeIndex TParseBarcodeIndex Parameters e Sender TObject It is the object whose event handler is called e Barcode String It is the barcode text in string type it s an UnicodeString Its value is equal to the Barcode property if the Clear Draw Size DrawTo syntax 1 DrawToSize syntax 1 Print syntax 1 or PrintSize syntax 1 method is called or a component is updating its barcode symbol And the value of the parameter is equal to the Barcode parameter if the DrawTo syntax 2 DrawToSize syntax 2 Print syntax 2 PrintSize syntax 2 GetParity syntax 1 only for TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode GetCheckSum syntax 1 only for TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 or GetCheckSum syntax 1 only for TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroPDF417 method is called e EncodedData TBytes The barcode text that s encoded by your own encoding scheme It s equla the Data parameter value of the OnEncode event handle e InvalidEncodedDatalndex Integer The index position of first invalid byte in the value
474. x 3 Prints the barcode symbol that is specified by the parameters of this method The barcode text is specified in the Data parameter It is of type TBytes it is in fact a byte array You can use the method if you want to encode a block of binary bytes data into a barcode symbol 223 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual B 1 11 1 Print Syntax 1 Prints a barcode symbol to printer The barcode symbol is specified by the properties of this barcode component Please use the method between Printer BeginDoc and Printer EndDoc methods Syntax function Print Left Top Module Single Angle Single 1 BarcodeWidth Single 0 BarcodeHeight Single 0 Integer overload virtual Description Prints current barcode symbol that is specified by the properties of this barcode component to the printer Parameters Left Single Specifies the margin between the rotated barcode symbol and the left side of the paper in millimeters in the horizontal direction If the quiet zones are printed please read the ShowQuietZone property about whether or not the quiet zones will be printed they are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the SpaceColor property is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones fe tes g gt a ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True Angle 0 30 90 Angle 0 30 90 For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode component the leading quiet zone and the trailing
475. x2D_MicroPDF417 iii 214 B 1 8 2 GetCheckSum Syntax 2 TBarcodeFmx2D_MicroPDF417 ini 215 B 1 9 GetCheckSum TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 217 B 1 9 1 GetCheckSum Syntax 1 TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 nin 218 B 1 9 2 GetCheckSum Syntax 2 TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 nnn 219 B 1 40 GetParity TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode be 221 B 1 10 1 GetParity Syntax 1 TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode 221 B 1 10 2 GetParity Syntax 2 TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode iii 222 E EE 223 B 1 44 1 Print Syntax eee 224 B 1 11 2 Print Syntax Qe 228 B 1 11 3 Print Syntax 3 233 Pe E E E E 237 B 1 12 1 PrintSize Syntax eecsessssrenee 237 B 1 12 2 PrintSize Syntax EE 242 B 1 12 3 PrintSize Syntax 3 247 B 1 13 Size 252 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual B 2 TSaveFmx2D beem 255 B 2 1 ASSI gM ern 255 B 2 2 Create 256 B 2 3 Destroyer 256 B 2 4 Save Pd 256 B 3 TCopyFmx2D Liese 257 B 3 1 Assign 257 GET 257 PCCM Ch e E 258 B 3 4 Destroy GE 258 OO 260 C 1 TBarcodeFmx2D 260 IS RT Enea eee 260 Ga 2 OnDrawBarcode Sa acnaRSNe 260 CA 3 OnEncode tcc 261 C 1 4 OnlInvalidChar 262 C 1 5 OnInvalidDataChar 263 C 1 6 OnInvalidDataLength e em 263 Cal T OnlnvalidLength SE 264 C2 8 ParseBarcodelndex Ses eS 265 C 2 TSaveFmx2D 265 CO ICO On ee 265 C22 OnSaved isaac E E a 266 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1 Overview 2D Barcode FMX Components is the most flexible and powerful FMX components package which lets you to easily add ad
476. xt button 8 All supported RAD Studio Delphi and C Builder IDEs will be listed automatically Please select the IDEs you want to install to them And then click on the Next button 9 Specify a shortcuts folder in Start Menu for the components package And then click on the Next button Later you can open the manual or remove the components package in the shortcuts folder 10 Click on the Install button to complete the components package installation 11 Click on the Finish button to close the installation dialog box 12 You can start your IDE to use the components package now Note e If multi user accounts want to use the components package please install it into the same folder in each user session e After installation please delete all dcu files in your projects that they are built using the trial release of the components package then re build these projects 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Chapter 3 Quick start 3 1 How to use the barcode components Usage 1 Put a barcode component such as the TBarcodeFmx2D_QRCode TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 and TBarcodeFmx2D_RSS14 to your form 2 Put a Tlmage control to your form 3 Set the Image property of the barcode component to the Timage control You can link single Timage control to multiple TBarcodeFmx2D components in order to display multiple barcode symbols in the Timage control using the LeftMargin and TopMargin properties to specify th
477. y this property If the barcode text is so long that it cannot be encoded using the maximum number of stacked rows specified by this property an OnInvalidLength the barcode text is specified in the Barcode property or an OnInvalidDataLength the barcode text is specified in the Data property event will occur The CurrentRows property can be used to get the factual number of stacked rows Note if the property is set to a value less than the MinRows property s value the MinRows property will be automatically changed to equal to this property s value In other words the MaxRows property s value is always greater than or equal to the MinRows property s value See also the Symbol sizes section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16k article A 1 69 MaxRows TBarcodeFmx2D_PDF417 Specifies the maximum number of stacked rows for a PDF417 barcode symbol 137 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual Syntax type Defined in the pfmxPDF417Custom unit TPDF417_ Rows 3 90 property MaxRows TPDF417_ Rows Description The property specifies the maximum number of stacked rows for a PDF417 barcode symbol It can be one of values from 3 to 90 They are defined in the pfmxPDF417Custom unit The maximum number of stacked rows together with the maximum number of columns specified by the MaxColumns property indicates the maximum symbol size for a PDF417 barcode symbol And the minimum number of stacked rows specified by the MinRows
478. ymbol 0 degrees counter clockwise See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones TARREI ShwoQuietZone False DRESSER ShowQuietZone True e boRightLeft Right to left horizontal direction rotates the barcode symbol 180 degrees counter clockwise See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones all ShwoQuietZone False RGR ShowQuietZone True e boTopBottom Top to bottom vertical direction rotates the barcode symbol 270 degrees counter clockwise See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones WS 5 ZS S L ShwoQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True e boBottomTop Bottom to top vertical direction rotates the barcode symbol 90 degrees counter clockwise See diagram the SpaceColor property value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones ShwoQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True HFSS ER ISS A 1 102 Placement TBarcodeFmx2D_CompactMatrix Specifies how to place symbol characters when encoding the barcode text into a Compact Matrix symbol Syntax type TCompactMatrix Placement pmSequence pmInterlacement property Placement TCompactMatrix Placement Description Compact Matrix symbology has two symbol charcacters placement methods as sequence and interlacement The proper
479. ymbol size It can be one of these value emNumeric emAlpha emPunctuation emAlphanumeric emASCIl and emBinary You can read this property to get the factual data encoding mode If the EncodeMode property isn t set to emAuto the value of this property is equal to the value of EncodeMode property The property is read only See also the Encoding modes section in the TBarcodeFmx2D_DataMatrix article A 1 22 CurrentMode TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K Contains the factual initial mode of a Code 16K barcode symbol Syntax type Defined in the pfmxCodel6K unit TCodel6K EncodeMode emAuto emModeA emModeB emModeC emModeB FNC1 emModeC_FNC1 emModeC_ Shift1B emModeC_Shift2B emMode Extended property CurrentMode TCodel6K_ EncodeMode Description Read the property to retrieve the factual initial mode of a Code 16K barcode symbol It can be one of these values emModeA emModeB emModeC emModeB_FNC1 emModeC_FNC1 emModeC_Shift1B emModeC_Shift2B and emMode_Extended corresponding to the initial modes 0 to 6 and extended data length mode They are defined in the pfmxCode16K unit If the InitialMode property is set to emAuto the initial mode will be selected automatically depending on the barcode text in order to minimize the symbol size It can be one of these value emModeA emModeB emModeC emModeB_FNC1 emModeC_FNC1 emModeC_Shift1B or emModeC_Shift2B You can read this property to get the factual initial mode If the
480. you can place an escape sequence f followed by an Application Identifier 2 or more digits at beginning of barcode text instead of the 903 904 or 905 escape sequence followed by the Application Identifier to place the FNC1 character in First position mode The component will automatically select one of escape sequences from 903 904 and 905 depending on the barcode text in order to minimize the symbol size The escape sequences 906 907 912 914 and 915 can be placed the FNC1 character in First position mode too See also the Escape sequences section below o Second position mode FNC1 in this mode indicator identifies symbols formatted in accordance with specific industry or application specifications previously agreed with AIM International It is immediately followed by an application indicator assigned to identify the specification concerned by AIM International For this purpose it shall only be used once in a symbol and shall be placed at beginning of the barcode An application indicator may take the form of any single Latin alphabetic character from the set a to z and A to Z or a two digit number If any one of escape sequences in 908 and 909 followed by an application indicator single Latin alphabetic character from the set a to z and A to Z or a two digit number is placed at beginning of barcode text it represents a leading FNC1 character in Second position mode and i
481. ys in order to insure high level of enhanced error correction If the Mode property is set to mode 6 the mode 6 will be selected always in order to encodes a message used to program the reader system In this case you can use the CurrentMode property to get the factual mode If the property is set to false the mode will be specified by the Mode property The value of CurrentMode property is always equal to the Mode property value See also the Modes sections in the TBarcodeFmx2D_MaxiCode article A 1 6 Barcode Specifies the barcode text in string format Syntax property Barcode string Description Specifies the barcode text to encode it into the barcode symbol The OnChange event will occur when the property value is changed The OnlnvalidChar event will occur if there is any invalid character in the Barcode property value and the OnInvalidLength event will occur if the length of the Barcode property value is invalid The property is of type string It is in fact a UnicodeString By default the unicode string will be converted to an UTF 8 bytes sequence the BOM isn t included then be encoded into the barcode symbol If you want to use other encoding scheme for example the ANSI UTF 16 please convert it in the OnEncode event handle or specify the converted bytes sequence in the Data property If you want to encode a block of binary bytes data please use the Data property it is of type TBytes array of bytes Fo
482. zone and trailing quiet zone will be drawn always even if the ShowQuietZone parameter value is set to false See diagram the SpaceColor parameter is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones TopQuietZone t auoz and upea auozwingBuyiesy auoznand upe auozn nd uges 4 BottomQuietZone ShowQuietZone False ShowQuietZone True In general the Inversed property is set to false In this case these quiet zones are drawn using the color specified by SpaceColor parameter If the Inversed property is set to true these quiet zones are drawn using the color specified by BarColor parameter See also the ShowQuietZone property Left Single Specifies the margin between the rotated barcode symbol and the left side of the canvas in dots or pixels in the horizontal direction using the horizontal resolution If the quiet zones are drawn please read the ShowQuietZone parameter section above about whether or not the quiet zones will be drawn they are included in the barcode symbol See diagram the SpaceColor parameter value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zones 199 2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual EENI Tes g9 ES For the TBarcodeFmx2D_Code16K barcode component leading quiet zone and trailing quiet zone are included always even if the ShowQuietZone parameter is set to false See diagram the SpaceColor parameter value is set to claSilver in order to accentuate the quiet zon

2D Barcode FMX Components User Manual - Han-soft

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents